'l^#r 


,f,  r^4igd 


Vltabglor  Family  Library  of  Veterinary  MecNdne 

Cummings  School  of  Veterinary  Medicine  at 

Tufts  University 

200  Westboro  Road 

North  Grsfton.  MA  01536 


THE  AMERICAN  SPORTSMAN'S  LIBRARY 

EDITED  BY 

Caspar  whitney 


RIDING  AND   DRIVING 


Of  ibis  book  Ont  Hundred  {_IOO)  Cofies  have  Seen  printed  i 
large  faper,  of  ivbicb  (bis  is 

r  o 


No. 


RIDING  AND  DRiViA^x 

RIDING 

BY 

EDWARD    L.    ANDERSON 

Ai  THOR  OF  "MODERN   HORSEMANSHIP,"  "CURB,  SNAFIM.E,  ANT) 


The  Gallop-change  from  Right  to  Left.  The  horse,  having 
been  in  gallop  right,  has  just  gone  into  air  from  the  right 
fore  leg.  The  right  hind  leg  was  then  planted,  which  will 
be  followed  in  turn  by  the  left  hind  leg,'  then  the  right  fore 
leg.  and  lastly  the  left  fore  leg,  from  which  the  horse  will 
go  into  air ;  the  change  from  gallop  right  to  gallop  left 
having  been  made  without  disorder  or  a  false  step. 


THE   MACMILLAN    C03U^^  A  Y 

LONDON:  MACMILLAN  &  CO.,  Ltp. 

1905 

yiiJ  rights  rtserved 


5i  moi]  ligni^r: 

-M0ii£0  sriT 

.^^,1   .id^n 

qr  i.'y^  ni  ■  nssd 

ii-f   idgi-:   ' 

M.T    V^al  910^ 

-oilol  sci 

o^'P   .gal 

■  n    sv^rrtn: 

3 

;r.   iuo^rir-A- 

r.fi 

■&.>K-«>J  i.;. 


RIDING  AND  DRIVING 


RIDING 

BY 

EDWARD    L.   ANDERSON 

AUTHOR   OF  "  MODERN    HORSEMANSHIP,"   "  CURB,   SNAFFLE,  AND 
SPUR,"    ETC.,    ETC. 

DRIVING 

HINTS   ON  THE   HISTORY,    HOUSING,   HARNESSING 
AND   HANDLING   OF  THE   HORSE 

BY 

PRICE   COLLIER 


THE   MACMILLAN    COMPANY 

LONDON:  MACMILLAN  &  CO.,  Ltd. 
1905 

yin  rigkli  reserved 


S  I   I. 


Copyright,  1905. 
By  the  MACxMILLAN   COMPANY. 

Set  up  and  electrotyped.     Published  April,  1905. 


Norwood  Press 

J.  S.   Gushing  &  Co.  —  Berwick  &  Smith  Co. 

Norwood,  Ma,i.,   U.S.A. 


CONTENTS 

RIDING 

By  EDWARD   L.  ANDERSON 
:hapter  page 

I.    Breeding  the  Saddle-horse         ....        3 
II.     Handling  the  Young  Horse         ....      20 

III.  The    Purchase,  the    Care,  and    the   Sale    of 

THE  Saddle-horse 30 

IV.  Some  Saddle-horse  Stock  Farms        ...      47 
V.    The  Saddle  —  The  Bridle — How  to  Mount     .      54 

VI.    The  Seat  —  General  Horsemanship    ...      64 
VII.     American  Horsemanship  —  Our  Cavalry    .        .      78 
VIII.     How    to     Ride  —  The     Snaffle-bridle  —  The 
Walk  and  the  Trot  —  Shying  —  The  Cun- 
ning  of   the   Horse  —  Sulking  —  Rearing  — 

Defeating  the  Horse 85 

IX.    What  Training   will  do  for   a   Horse  —  The 

Forms  of  Collection 103 

X.    The  Spur 109 

XI.  Some  Work  on  Foot  — The  Suppling  .  .  112 
XII.  The  Curb-and-Snaffle  Bridle  —  Guiding  by 
THE  Rein  against  the  Neck  —  Croup  about 
Forehand— Upon  Two  Paths.  .  .  .121 
XIII.  The  Gallop,  and  the  Gallop  Change — Wheel 
IN  the  Gallop  —  Pirouette  Turn  —  Halt  in 
the  Gallop         .......     127 


vi  Contents 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

XIV.    Backing 135 

XV.    Jumping 138 

XVI.    General  Remarks 147 


DRIVING 
By  PRICE  COLLIER 


Introduction i 

I.  Economic  Value  of  the  Horse  .        ,        .        .159 

II.  The  Natural  History  of  the  Horse        .        .169 

III.  The  Early  Days  of  the  Horse  in  America    .  179 

IV.  Points  of  the  Horse 195 

V.     The  Stable 211 

VI.  Feeding  and  Stable  Management     .        .        .  225 

VII.     First  Aid  to  the  Injured 239 

VIII.    Shoeing 251 

IX.    Harness 259 

X.    The  American  Horse 284 

XI.  A  Chapter  of  Little  Things     ....  300 

XII.    Driving  One  Horse 315 

XIII.  Driving  a  Pair 333 

XIV.  Driving  Four 353 

XV.    The  Tandem 392 

XVI.  Driving  Tandem.     By  T.  Suffern  Tailer      .        .  401 

Bibliography 427 

Index 429 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

RIDING 
By  EDWARD   L.   ANDERSON 

The  Gallop-change  from  Right  to  Left.  The  horse,  having 
been  in  gallop  right,  has  just  gone  into  air  from  the 
right  fore  leg.  The  right  hind  leg  was  then  planted, 
which  will  be  followed  in  turn  by  the  left  hind  leg,  then 
the  right  fore  leg,  and  lastly  the  left  fore  leg,  from 
which  the  horse  will  go  into  air;  the  change  from 
gallop  right  to  gallop  left  having  been  made  without 
disorder  or  a  false  step        ....        Frontispiece 

FIGURE  FACING  PAGE 

1.  Race-horse  in  Training.     Photograph  by  R.  H.  Cox        .         5 

2.  Dick  Wells.     Holder  of  the  world's  record  for  one  mile. 

Photograph  by  R.  H.  Cox 5 

3.  Thoroughbred    Mare,    L'Indienne.       Property   of   Major 

David  Castleman.     Photograph  by  the  author     .         .         7 

4.  Cayuse.     Photograph  by  W.  G.  Walker  ....         7 

5.  Abayan  Koheilan.     Arab  stallion,  bred  by  Amasi  Ham- 

dani,  Smyri,  Sheik  of  the  District  of  Nagd.     Property 

of  Sutherland  Stock  Farm,  Cobourg,  Canada       .         .         7 

6.  Norwegian  Fiord  Stallion.     Imported  by  the  author  .         9 

7.  Mafeking,  16.2,  by  Temple  out  of  a  Mare  by  Judge  Curtis. 

The  property  of  Colin  Campbell,  Esq.,  Manor  House, 
St.  Hilaire,  Quebec,  Canada.  This  splendid  animal 
has  been  hunted  for  three  seasons  with  the  Montreal 
Fox  Hounds.  He  shows  great  power  and  quality,  and 
is  master  of  any  riding  weight     .....         9 

8.  Prize-winning  Charger.      Property  of  Major  Castleman. 

Photograph  by  the  author  ......         9 


viii  Illustrations 

FIGURE  FACING   PAGE 

9.    Morgan  Stallion,  Meteor.     Property  of  Mr.  H.  P.  Crane. 

Photograph  by  Schreiber  &  Sons         ....         9 

10.  Mademoiselle  Guerra  on  Rubis,  a  Trakhene  Stallion  .       10 

1 1 .  Highland  Denmark.     Property  of  Gay  Brothers,  Pisgah, 

Kentucky.  The  sire  of  more  prize  winners  in  saddle 
classes  than  any  other  stallion  in  America.  Photo- 
graph by  the  author    .         .         .         .         .         .         .10 

12.  Brood  Mare,  Dorothy.      Owned  by  General  Castleman. 

This  mare  has  a  record  of  first  prize  in  nearly  seventy 
show  rings  .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .12 

13.  Cecil  Palmer,  American  Saddle-horse,  Racking.     Owned 

and  ridden  by  Major  David  Castleman.     Photograph 

by  the  author 12 

14.  The  Cavesson.     Photograph  by  the  author       .         .         .23 

15.  The  Horse  goes  about  the  Man  at  the  Full  Length  of  the 

Cavesson  Rein.     Photograph  by  the  author         .         .       23 

16.  Elevating  the   Head  of  the  Horse  with  the  Snaffle-bit. 

Photograph  by  M.  F.  A 26 

17.  Dropping  the  Head  and  Suppling  the  Jaw.     Photograph 

by  M.  F.  A 26 

18.  Bending  Head  with  Snaffle.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.     .  28 

19.  A  Leg  Up.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A 28 

20.  Silvana.     An  English   half-bred  mare,  imported  by  the 

author.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A 37 

21.  Montgomery  Chief,  Champion  Saddle  Stallion  of  Amer- 

ica. Property  of  Ball  Brothers,  Versailles,  Kentucky. 
Photograph  by  the  author 37 

22.  Riding-house  of  the  Author 44 

23.  Garrard.     Two  years  old.     Owned  and  ridden  by  Major 

David  Castleman.     Photograph  by  the  author     .         .       51 

24.  Carbonel.     Four  years  old.     Owned  and  ridden  by  Major 

David  Castleman.     Photograph  by  the  author     .         .       51 

25.  High  Lassie.     Two  years  old.     Owned  by  Gay  Brothers, 

Pisgah,  Kentucky.     Photograph  by  the  author    .         .       53 

26.  Mares  and  Foals.      Gay  Brothers.      Photograph  by  the 

author         .........       53 

27.  Stirling  Chief.     Property  of  Colonel  J.  T.  Woodford,  Mt. 

Stirling,  Kentucky.     Photograph  by  the  author  .         .       55 


Illustrations  ix 


FIGURK                                                                                                                                                              FACING  PAGE 

28.  Stirling  Chief  in  the  Trot.     Photograph  by  the  author     .  55 

29.  Double  Bridle  Fitted.     Photograph  by  the  author    .         .  58 

30.  Mounting  with  Stirrups.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.  .         .  58 

31.  Mounting  without  Stirrups.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.      .  60 

32.  Mounting  without  Stirrups.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.      .  60 

33.  Dismounting  without  Stirrups.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.  60 

34.  Jockey  Seat.     Photograph  by  R.  H.  Cox          ...  62 

35.  Pointing  the  Knees  above  the  Crest  of  the  Horse.     Photo- 

graph by  M.  F.  A 62 

36.  Dropping  the  Knees  to  take  the  Seat  without  Stirrups. 

Photograph  by  M.  F.  A 65 

37.  The  Seat.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A 65 

38.  Leaning  Back.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.         .         .         .  65 

39.  German  Cavalry.     Photograph  by  O.  Anschutz        .         .  67 

40.  Monsieur  Leon  de  Gisbert.     Photograph  by  the  author    .  69 

41.  Monsieur  H.  L.  de  Bussigny.     Formerly  an  officer  of  the 

French  Army 69 

42.  Chasseurs  d'Afrique 71 

43.  Spahis.     Arabs  in  the  Algerian  army  of  France       .         .  71 

44.  A  French  Officer.     Good  man  and  good  horse          .         .  73 

45.  French  Officers 73 

46.  Italian  Officers.      The  horsemanship   here   exhibited  is 

above  criticism.     Courtesy  of  the  Goerz  Co.        .         .  73 

47.  Italian  Officers 73 

48.  An  Italian  Officer.      The  pose  of  the  horse  proves  the 

truth  of  the  photograph 73 

49.  Trooper  Royal  Horse  Guards.     Photograph  by  F.  G.  O. 

Stuart 76 

50.  Scots  Grays.     Tent  Pegging.     Photograph  by  F.  G.  O. 

Stuart          .........  76 

5 1 .  General  Castleman 78 

52.  Mr.  C.  Elmer  Railey 80 

53.  A  Rider  of  the  Plains.     Photograph  by  W.  G.  Walker    ,  80 

54.  Colonel  W.  F.  Cody,  "Buffalo  Bill."      Photograph  by 

Stacy 83 

55.  An  American  Horseman 83 

56.  Troopers  of  the  Fourth  and  the  Eighth  Cavalry.  United 

States  Army.     Photograph  by  the  author    ...  85 


X  Illustrations 

FIGURE  FACING   PAGB 

57.  Captain  W.  C.  Short.     Instructor  of  Riding  at  Fort  Riley. 

Photograph  by  the  author 85 

58.  Three  Officers  at  Fort  Riley.     Photograph  by  the  author       87 

59.  The  Small  Pony  is  but  a  Toy.     Photograph  by  Mary 

Woods 90 

60.  Up  to  Ten  or  Twelve  Years  of  Age  Girls  should  ride  in 

the  Cross  Saddle  to  learn  the  Effects  of  the  Aids. 
Photograph  by  the  author 90 

61.  The  Alertness  of  In  Hand.     Photograph  by  R.  H.  Cox    .       92 

62.  In  Hand  in  Walk.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.  .         .         .92 

63.  United  Halt,  between  Heels  and  Hand.     Photograph  by 

M.  F.  A 94 

64.  In  Hand  in  Trot.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.     .         .         .       94 

65.  Preventing  the  Horse  rearing  by  bending  the  Croup  to 

One  Side.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.  .         .         .       97 

66.  Rearing    with    Extended    Fore    Legs.      Photograph    by 

Walker 97 

67.  Major  H.  L.  Ripley,  Eighth  Cavalry,  United  States  Army. 

Horse  rearing  with  bent  fore  legs         .         .         .         .101 

68.  Rolling  up  a  Restive  Horse loi 

69.  Closely  United.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.        .         .         .102 

70.  Half-halt.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A 102 

71.  The  Scratch  of  the  Spur.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.         .     108 

72.  Halt  with  the  Spurs.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.        .         .     108 

73.  Direct  Flexion  of  the  Jaw.    The  snaffle  holds  the  head  up. 

The  curb-bit,  with  the  reins  drawn  toward  the  chest 
of  the  horse,  induces  the  animal  to  yield  the  jaw.  when 
the  tension  upon  the  reins  is  released  and  the  ani- 
mal so  rewarded  for  its  obedience.  Photograph  by 
M.F.A 112 

74.  The  Result  of  the  Direct  Flexion  of  the  Jaw.     Photograph 

by  M.  F.  A 112 

75.  Bending  Head  and  Neck  with  the  Curb-bit.     Photograph 

by  M.  F.  A 115 

76.  Bending  Head  and  Neck  with  the  Curb-bit.     Photograph 

by  M.  F.  A 115 

"jj.   Carrying  the  Hind  Legs  under  the  Body.   Photograph  by 

M.F.A 117 


Ilhstrations  xi 

FIGURE  FACING  PAGE 

78.  Croup  about  Forehand,  to  the  Right.     Photograph  by 

M.  F.  A 117 

79.  Croup  about  Forehand,  to  the  Right.     The  left  fore  leg 

the  pivot.  The  head  bent  toward  the  advancing 
croup.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A 119 

80.  In  Hand  in  Place.     Photograph  by  H.  S.         .         .         .119 

81.  The  Indirect  Indication  of  the  Curb-bit.      To  turn  the 

horse  to  the  right  by  bringing  the  left  rein  against  the 
neck  of  the  horse.  The  rider's  hand  carried  over  to 
the  right,  the  thumb  pointing  to  the  right  shoulder      .     122 

82.  The  Indirect  Indication  of  the  Curb-bit.     To  turn  the 

horse  to  the  left.  The  rider's  hand  is  carried  over  to 
the  left,  the  thumb  pointing  to  the  ground  over  the 
left  shoulder  of  the  horse 122 

83.  Reversed  Pirouette,  to  the  Left.     The  hind  quarters  are 

carried  to  the  left,  about  the  right  fore  leg  as  pivot,  the 
head  bent  to  the  left 124 

84.  Passing  on   Two   Paths   to  the  Right,      The  forehand 

slightly  in  advance  of  the  croup.  The  head  of  the 
horse  slightly  bent  in  the  direction  of  progress    .         .     124 

85.  The  Gallop.     The  horse  in  air 126 

86.  The  Hind  Legs  are  committed  to  a  Certain  Stride  in  the 

Gallop  before  the  Horse  goes  into  Air  .         .         .126 

87.  Gallop  Right.     The  change  must  be  begun  by  the  hind 

legs  as  soon  as  they  are  free  from  the  ground.     The 

last  seven  photographs  by  M.  F.  A 126 

88.  The  Wheel  in  the  Gallop.     In  two  paths,  the  hind  feet 

on  a  small  inner  circle         .         .         .         .         .         •     131 

89.  The  Pirouette  Wheel.     The  inner  hind  leg  remains  in 

place  as  a  pivot 131 

90.  Backing.     Taking  advantage  of  the  impulse  produced  by 

the  whip  tap  to  carry  the  mass  to  the  rear.  Photo- 
graph by  M.  F.  A 135 

91.  Backing.      The  same  principles  are  observed.     Photo- 

graph by  M.  F.  A 135 

92.  Jumping  In  Hand.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.  .         .         .  138 

93.  Jumping  In  Hand.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.  .         .         .  138 

94.  Jumping  In  Hand.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.  .         .         .  138 

95.  Jumping  a  Narrow  Hurdle.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.      .  142 


Illustrations 


FIGURE  FACING  PAGB 

96.  Jumping  a  Nan-ow  Hurdle.     Photograph  by  M.  F.  A.    .     142 

97.  Hurdle-racing.     Photograph  by  R.  H.  Cox     .         .         -151 

98.  Thistledown.     Four  years  old.     Property  of  Mr.  A.  E. 

Ashbrook.     Record  of  seven  feet  one  and  three-quar- 
ters inches.     Photograph  by  E.  N.  Williams       .         •     151 

99.  Denny  Racking.    Property  of  Mr.  J.  S.  Neane.    Photo- 

graph by  the  author    .         .         .         .         .         .         -154 

100.  Denny  at  the  Running  Walk.  Photograph  by  the  author  154 
loi.    Casting  a  Horse  without  Apparatus.      Photograph  by 

M.  F.  A 154 


DRIVING 
By   price   collier 


PLATE 

I.  Protorohippus 167 

II.  Development  of  Horse's  Foot  from  Five  Toes  to  One  167 

III.  Neohipparion 170 

IV.  Skull  of  Horse  Eight  Years  Old        .         .         .         .170 
V.  Teeth  of  Horse 195 

VI.  Teeth  of  Horse 197 

VII.  Polo  Pony 199 

VIII.  Light-harness  Horse 199 

IX.  Harness  Type 202 

X.  Flying  Cloud,  Harness  Type 202 

XL  Children's  Pony 204 

XII.  Children's  Pony 204 

XIII.  Good  Shoulders,  Legs,  and  Feet       ....  206 

XIV.  Heavy-harness  Types 206 

XV.  Stable  Plan 219 

XVI.  Skeleton  of  the  Horse 245 

XVII.  Internal  Parts  of  the  Horse 245 

XVIII.  External  Parts  of  the  Horse 252 

XIX.  Foot  of  the  Horse 252 

XX.  Bridoon   Bit;    Double-ring   Snaffle-bit;    Half-cheek 

Jointed  Snaffle-bit 261 


Illustrations 


Xlll 


PLATE  FACING   PAGE 

XXI.  Bit  found  on  Acropolis ;  date,  500  B.C.         .         .     261 

XXII.     Single  Harness 263 

XXIII.  Elbow-bit ;  Liverpool  Bit ;  Buxton  Bit ;  Gig-bit  .     266 

XXIV.  Swale's  Patent  Bit 268 

XXV.     Brush  Burr 268 

XXVI.     Plain  Burr 268 

XXVII.     Hambletonian 293 

XXVIII.     George  Wilkes 293 

XXIX.     Driving  a  Pair 341 

XXX.     Driving  a  Pair 348 

XXXI.     Positions  of  Whip 357 

XXXII.     Driving  Four 364 

XXXIII.  Pony  Tandem 391 

XXXIV.  Tandem  Dog-cart 394 

XXXV.  High  and  Dangerous  Cocking-cart       .         .         .     394 

XXXVI.  Tandem  of  Mr.  McCandless        .         .         .         .404 

XXXVII.  Tandem  of  Mr.  T.  Suffern  Tailer        .        .        .404 


RIDING 

By  EDWARD   L.   ANDERSON 


RIDING 


CHAPTER   I 

BREEDING   THE   SADDLE-HORSE 

The  thoroughbred  is  universally  recognized  as 
the  finest  type  of  the  horse,  excelling  all  other 
races  in  beauty,  in  stamina,  in  courage,  and  in 
speed;  and,  further,  it  is  capable  in  the  highest 
degree  of  transmitting  to  its  posterity  these  valu- 
able qualities.  Indeed,  the  greatest  virtue  pos- 
sessed by  this  noble  animal  lies  in  its  power  of 
producing,  upon  inferior  breeds,  horses  admirably 
adapted  to  many  useful  purposes  for  which  the 
blooded  animal  itself  is  not  fitted. 

In  England  and  upon  the  continent  the  thor- 
oughbred is  held  in  high  esteem  for  the  saddle; 
but,  as  General  Basil  Duke  justly  remarks,  it  has 
not  that  agility  so  desirable  in  a  riding-horse,  and 
because  of  its  low  action  and  extended  stride  it  is 
often  wanting  in  sureness  of  foot,  and  in  America 
we  prefer  to  ride  the  half-breed  with  better  action. 
Occasionally  the  thoroughbred  is  found  that  fills 
the  requirements  of  the  most  exacting  rider,  and 
the  author  has  had  at  least  six  blood-horses  that 


4  Riding 

were  excellent  under  the  saddle.  One  of  these, 
represented  by  a  photograph  in  a  previous  work, 
in  a  gallop  about  a  lance  held  in  the  rider's  hand, 
gave  sufficient  proof  of  quickness  and  suppleness. 
However,  it  is  admitted  on  all  hands  that  the 
horse  which  most  nearly  approaches  the  thor- 
oughbred, and  yet  possesses  the  necessary  quali- 
ties which  the  superior  animal  lacks,  will  be  the 
best  for  riding  purposes. 

Although  every  thoroughbred  traces  its  ances- 
try in  the  direct  male  line  to  the  Byerly  Turk, 
1690,  the  Darley  Arabian,  circa  1700,  or  the 
Godolphin  Barb,  circa  1725,  and  "it  is  impossible 
to  find  an  English  race-horse  which  does  not 
combine  the  blood  of  all  three,"  the  experience 
of  modern  horsemen  points  to  the  fact  that  the 
blood-horse  is  as  near  to  the  Eastern  horse  as  we 
should  go  with  the  stallion  in  breeding  for  the 
race-course  or  for  ennoblinor  baser  strains. 

In  view  of  the  great  influence  that  these  three 
horses  had  almost  immediately  upon  English 
breeds,  this  present  exclusion  of  the  Eastern 
stallion  is  striking ;  but  it  means  simply  that  the 
race-horse  of  our  day  has  more  admirable  qualities 
to  transmit  than  the  sire  of  any  other  blood. 

The  Bedouin  Arabian  of  the  Nejd  district,  sup- 
posed to  be  the  purest  strain  of  the  race  and  the 
fountainhead  of  all  the  Eastern  breeds,  has  become 
degenerate  during  the  past  two  hundred  years; 


FIG.    1.  — RACE-HORSE    IN   TRAINING 


FIG.  2. —  DICK   WELLS.       HOLDER    OF   THE   RECORD   FOR 
ONE    MILE 


Breeding  the  Saddle- borse  5 

too  often  horses  of  this  royal  blood  are  found 
undersized,  calf-kneed,  and  deficient  in  many 
points.  Notwithstanding  the  virtues  that  such 
animals  may  yet  be  able  to  transmit,  I  venture  to 
say  that  the  disdained  "  Arab  "  of  Turkey,  Persia, 
Egypt,  and  even  that  of  Europe,  as  well  as  the 
so-called  Barb,  are  better  and  more  useful  horses, 
and  it  is  from  these  impure  races  that  nearly  all 
of  the  Eastern  blood  has  come  that  has  found  its 
way  into  the  crosses  of  European  horses  during 
the  past  hundred  years  or  more.  Indeed,  if  we 
may  believe  the  statements  of  the  partisans  of  the 
Eastern  horse,  but  very  little  of  the  best  Arab 
blood  has  been  introduced  into  Europe. 

The  Darley  Arabian,  the  ancestor  of  the  best 
strains  in  the  world,  was  doubtless  of  pure  desert 
blood.  His  color,  form,  and  other  characteristics 
have  always  satisfied  horsemen  that  his  lineage 
could  not  be  questioned. 

In  crosses  of  thoroughbred  strains  and  desert 
blood  the  stallion  should  be  of  the  former  race ; 
but  in  bringing  Eastern  blood  into  inferior  breeds 
the  blood  of  the  latter  should  be  represented  by 
the  mare.  All  good  crosses  are  apt  to  produce 
better  riding-horses  than  those  of  a  direct  race. 

From  the  fossil  remains  found  in  various  parts 
of  the  world  it  is  certain  that  the  horse  appeared 
in  many  places  during  a  certain  geological  period, 
and  survived  where  the  conditions  w^ere  favorable. 


6  Riding 

But  whether  Western  Asia  is  or  is  not  the 
home  of  the  horse,  he  was  doubtless  domesti- 
cated there  in  very  early  times,  and  it  was  from 
Syria  that  the  Egyptians  received  their  horses 
through  their  Bedouin  conquerors.  The  horses 
of  the  Babylonians  probably  came  from  Persia, 
and  the  original  source  of  all  these  may  have 
been  Central  Asia,  from  which  last-named  region 
the  animal  also  passed  into  Europe,  if  the  horse 
were  not  indigenous  to  some  of  the  countries  in 
which  history  finds  it.  We  learn  that  Sargon  I. 
(3800  B.C.)  rode  in  his  chariot  more  than  two 
thousand  years  before  there  is  an  exhibition  of 
the  horse  in  the  Egyptian  sculptures  or  proof  of 
its  existence  in  Syria,  and  his  kingdom  of  Akkad 
bordered  upon  Persia,  giving  a  strong  presump- 
tion that  the  desert  horse  came  from  the  last- 
named  region,  through  Babylonian  hands.  It 
seems,  after  an  examination  of  the  representa- 
tions upon  the  monuments,  that  the  Eastern 
horse  has  changed  but  little  during  thousands 
of  years.  Taking  a  copy  of  one  of  the  sculptures 
of  the  palace  of  Ashur-bani-pal,  supposed  to  have 
been  executed  about  the  middle  of  the  seventh 
century  before  our  era,  and  assuming  that  the 
bare-headed  men  were  5  feet  8  inches  in  height, 
I  found  that  the  horses  would  stand  about  14J 
hands  —  very  near  the  normal  size  of  the  desert 
horse  of  our  day.     The  horses  of  ancient  Greece 


FIG.  3. —THOROUGHBRED    BROOD-MARE 


.A 

j^*_^ 

>        :      _lf  fl 

*^\ 

9HHI  #>>~ 

1               - 

FIG.  4.  —  CAYUSE 


FIG.   5.  —  DESERT-BRED   ARAB   STALLION 


Breeding  the  Saddle-horse  7 

must  have  been  starvelings  from  some  Northern 
clime,  for  the  animals  on  the  Parthenon  frieze  are 
but  a  trifle  over  12  hands  in  height,  and  are  the 
prototypes  of  the  Norwegian  Fiord  pony  —  a 
fixed  type  of  a  very  valuable  small  horse. 

The  horse  was  found  in  Britain  from  the 
earliest  historical  times,  and  new  blood  was  in- 
troduced by  the  Romans,  by  the  Normans,  and 
under  many  of  the  successors  of  William  the 
Conqueror.  The  Turkish  horse  and  the  barb, 
it  is  understood,  were  imported  long  before  the 
reign  of  James  I.,  when  Markham's  Arabian,  said 
to  be  the  first  of  pure  desert  blood,  was  brought 
into  the  country;  but  from  that  time  many 
horses  were  introduced  from  the  East,  of  strains 
more  or  less  pure.  The  Eastern  horse  was  the 
foundation  upon  which  the  Englishman  reared 
the  thoroughbred,  but  we  must  not  lose  sight  of 
the  skill  of  the  builder  nor  of  the  material 
furnished  by  native  stock.  The  desert  strains 
furnished  beauty,  courage,  and  stamina;  the  na- 
tive blood  gave  size,  stride,  and  many  other  good 
qualities ;  the  English  breeder  combined  all  these 
and  produced  what  no  other  nation  has  ap- 
proached, the  incomparable  thoroughbred. 

We  accept  the  thoroughbred  as  we  find  him. 
No  man  can  say  exactly  how  he  was  produced. 
The  great  Eclipse  (1764)  has  upward  of  a 
dozen  mares  in  his  short  pedigree  (he  was  fourth 


8  Riding 

in  descent  from  the  Darley  Arabian)  whose 
breeding  is  unknown  and  which  were  doubtless 
native  mares,  for  already  the  descendants  of 
Eastern  horses  were  known  and  noted.  What 
is  true  of  the  breeding  of  Eclipse  is  true  of  many 
of  his  contemporaries  who  played  prominent  parts 
in  the  studs  of  their  day. 

For  more  than  one  hundred  years  no  desert- 
bred  stallion  has  had  any  marked  influence  upon 
the  race-horse  directly  through  a  thoroughbred 
mare.  In  the  first  decade  of  the  last  century  a 
barb  stallion  bred  to  a  barb  mare  produced 
Sultana,  who  brought  forth  the  granddam  of 
Berthune  to  Sir  Archy.  Berthune  was  much 
sought  after  as  a  sire  for  riding-horses;  besides 
this  barb  blood  he  had  strains  of  Diomed  and  of 
Saltram  in  his  veins,  all  of  which  were  desirable 
for  saddle-horses. 

Breeds  of  animak  deteriorate  rapidly  through 
lack  of  nourishment  and  from  in-and-in  breeding. 
It  is  questionable  whether  a  degenerate  race  may 
be  restored,  within  measurable  time,  by  the  use 
of  any  appreciable  amount  of  its  own  blood ; 
it  is  certainly  bad  policy  to  found  a  breed  upon 
poor  stock.  The  better  plan  would  be  to  form 
the  desired  type  from  new  strains.  One  hundred 
years  ago  Lewis  and  Clark  found  upon  the  plains 
of  the  Northwest  "  horses  of  an  excellent  race, 
lofty,   elegantly    formed,   and    durable,"    but    one 


FIG.  6. —  NORWEGIAN    FIORD   STALLION 


i 

,^-' 

..'^ 

««' 

U| 

ifi^^^^il^  '''\^ 

%-§, 

p^l 

¥ 

'^1 

\pm^i 

<i  ''^^ta9B 

FIG.  7. —  HEAVY-WEIGHT   HUNTER 


FIG.  8. —CHARGER 


FIG.   9. —  MORGAN    STALLION 


Breeding  the  Saddle- borse  9 

could  hardly  hope  to  replace  such  animals  from 
the  cayuse  ponies,  their  descendants,  without  the 
introduction  of  superior  blood  in  such  quantities 
as  practically  to  obliterate  the  inferior. 

Some  of  the  range  horses  of  Washington  and 
of  Oregon  are  fairly  good  animals,  and  these 
have  more  or  less  of  the  bronco  blood,  but  all 
that  can  be  said  of  the  influence  of  the  wild  horse 
is  that  its  descendants  can  "  rustle  "  for  a  living 
where  an  Eastern  horse  would  starve,  and  the 
same  thing  can  be  said  of  the  donkey.  Admit- 
ting that  for  certain  purposes  inferior  blood  must 
sometimes  be  introduced  for  domestic  purposes, 
the  better  the  breeding  the  better  the  horse  will 
be.     Bon  sang  don  chie7i. 

The  mustang  of  the  southern  central  plains 
maintains  many  of  the  good  qualities  of  its 
Spanish  ancestors,  and  is  a  valuable  horse  for 
certain  purposes,  but  we  need  not  consider  this 
animal  in  breeding  for  the  saddle  when  we  have 
so  many  other  strains  infinitely  superior.  Polo 
and  cow  ponies  are  not  within  our  intent. 

Types  and  families  of  horses  are  produced  either 
by  careful  "  selection  and  exclusion,"  or  by  the 
chances  of  environment.  In  the  first  manner 
was  brought  about  the  thoroughbred,  the  Per- 
cheron,  the  Orloff,  the  Trakhene,  the  Denmark, 
and  every  other  race  or  family  of  real  value. 

All  over  the  world  isolated  groups  of   horses 


lo  Riding 

may  be  found  which  have  become  types  by  an 
accidental  seclusion,  and  these  from  various 
causes  are  usually  undersized  and  often  ill-formed. 
Such  are  the  mustang  and  its  cousins  on  the 
plains,  many  breeds  in  Eastern  Asia,  the  Nor- 
wegian Fiord  pony,  the  Icelander,  the  Shetlander, 
etc.,  the  last-named  three  being,  it  is  supposed, 
degenerates  of  pure  desert  descent  from  animals 
taken  north  from  Constantinople  by  the  returned 
Varangians  in  the  eleventh  century. 

In  breeding  for  the  saddle,  or  for  any  other 
purpose,  the  mare  should  be  nearly  of  the  type 
the  breeder  desires  to  obtain,  and  she  should  be  of 
strong  frame,  perfectly  sound,  of  healthy  stock, 
and  with  a  good  disposition.  If  her  pedigree  be 
known,  the  stallion,  well-bred  or  thoroughbred, 
should  be  selected  from  a  strain  which  has  been 
proved  to  have  an  afifinity  with  that  of  the  mare. 
The  mingling  of  certain  strains  is  almost  as  cer- 
tain to  produce  certain  results  —  not,  be  it  under- 
stood, everything  that  may  be  desired  —  as  does 
the  mixing  of  chosen  colors  on  the  palette.  That 
is  to  say,  size,  form,  action,  and  disposition  may 
ordinarily  be  foretold  by  the  mating  between 
families  that  are  known  to  nick.  The  stallion 
should  be  no  larger  than  the  mare,  of  a  family  in 
which  there  is  no  suspicion  of  transmissible  dis- 
ease, and  of  good  temper,  and  it  certainly  should 
not  be  lacking  in  the  slightest  degree  in  any  point 


FIG.    10.  — TRAKHENE   STALLION 


FIG.    11.  — TYPICAL   DENMARK   STALLION 


Breeding  the  Saddle- borse  ii 

where  the  mare  is  not  fully  developed.  The  mare 
might  be  the  stronger  animal,  the  stallion  the 
more  highly  finished. 

Where  the  mare's  pedigree  is  unknown,  and 
the  matter  is  purely  an  experiment,  or  where  she 
is  undoubtedly  of  base  breeding,  the  stallion, 
while  of  superior  blood,  should  not  vary  greatly 
from  her  type.  Peculiarities  in  either  parent  are 
almost  certain  to  be  found  in  an  exaggerated  form 
in  the  foal. 

It  would  be  difficult  to  imagine  a  better  horse, 
for  any  conceivable  purpose  except  racing,  than  a 
first-rate  heavy-weight  hunter ;  yet  he  may  be  called 
an  accident,  as  there  is  no  such  breed,  and  his 
full  brother  may  be  relegated  to  the  coach  or  even 
to  the  plough.  The  large  head  and  convex  face 
almost  invariably  found  in  the  weight  carrier,  and 
in  the  "high-jumper,"  are  derived  from  the  coarse 
blood  which  gives  them  size  and  power;  but  these 
features  are  indications  of  that  courage  and  reso- 
lution which  give  them  value  —  characteristics 
which  in  animals  of  wholly  cold  blood  are  usually 
exhibited  in  obstinacy.  Indeed,  while  the  English 
horse,  each  in  its  class,  has  no  superior,  Great 
Britain  has  no  type  or  family  of  saddle  animals 
such  as  our  Denmark,  unless  one  except  cobs  and 
ponies. 

Of  course,  where  two  animals  of  the  same  or  of 
similar  strains,  and  bearing  a  close  resemblance  to 


12  Riding 

each  other,  are  mated,  the  type  will  be  reproduced 
with  much  greater  certainty  than  where  various 
strains  are  for  the  first  time  brought  together; 
but  even  in  good  matches  a  foal  may  show  some 
undesirable  feature  derived  from  a  remote  an- 
cestor. Some  marks  or  characteristics  of  a  pro- 
genitor reappear  at  almost  incredible  distances 
from  their  sources.  That  Boston's  progeny 
should  be  subject  to  blindness,  or  that  Cruiser's 
descendants  should  be  vicious,  or  that  the  off- 
spring of  whistlers  should  prove  defective  in  their 
wind,  are  reasonable  expectations;  but  that  the 
black  spots  on  the  haunches  of  Eclipse  should  be 
repeated  upon  his  descendants  of  our  day,  as  is 
doubtless  the  case,  exhibits  an  influence  that  is 
marvellous.  Stockwell  (1849)  and  many  others 
of  Eclipse's  descendants  had  those  ancestral 
marks,  but  Stockwell  had  many  strains  of  Eclipse 
blood  through  Waxy,  Gohanna,  and  other  pro- 
genitors. When  a  chestnut  thoroughbred  shows 
white  hairs  through  its  coat,  that  peculiarity 
is  ascribed  to  Venison  (1833)  blood,  if  by 
chance  that  staUion's  name  may  be  found  in  its 
pedigree. 

Where  undesirable  qualities  appear  in  the 
products  of  crosses  in  breeding  for  a  type,  they 
are  bred  out  in  breeding  up,  or  the  failures  are 
permitted  to  die  out.  It  is  not  probable  that  any 
one  who  was  desirous  of  breeding  a  horse  suitable 


FIG.   12. —  BROOD-MARE   OF   SADDLE   STRAINS 


FIG.    13. —CECIL    PALMER    RACKING 


Breeding  the  Saddle-horse  13 

for  the  saddle  would  select  a  very  inferior  mare, 
for,  even  though  her  pedigree  were  unknown, 
the  qualities  which  suggested  her  selection  would 
prove  her  something  better.  It  cannot  be  denied 
that  occasionally  a  literal  half-breed,  by  a  thorough- 
bred on  common  stock,  turns  out  a  good  animal, 
and  such  a  cross  is  often  the  foundation  of  valu- 
able types;  but  the  chances  are  too  remote  to 
induce  one  to  try  the  experiment  solely  for 
the  produce  of  the  first  cross.  It  is  rarely  the 
case  that  a  horse  may  be  found  in  a  gentleman's 
stable  that  has  not  either  a  liberal,  direct  infusion 
of  thoroughbred  strains,  or  is  not  itself  a  repre- 
sentative of  some  family  which  owes  its  distinc- 
tion to  the  blood-horse. 

I  am  schooling  a  pretty  little  mare,  picked  up 
by  chance,  for  the  illustrations  of  the  chapters 
on  riding  and  training.  I  believe  that  Daphne 
is  out  of  a  Morgan  mare  by  a  Hambletonian 
stallion,  and  that  her  symmetry  comes  from  the 
dam.  It  is  greatly  to  be  regretted  that  the  so- 
called  Morgans  have  been  so  neglected  that  it  is 
not  easy  to  find  horses  with  enough  of  the  blood 
to  entitle  them  to  bear  the  family  name.  The 
Morgan,  although  rather  a  small  horse,  was  an 
admirable  animal,  good  in  build,  in  constitution, 
in  action,  and  in  temperament,  and  its  blood  com- 
bined well  with  that  of  the  old  Canadian  pacing 
stock  (of  which  the  original  Copperbottom  was 


14  Riding 

an  example),  with  Messenger  strains,  and  with 
those  of  some  other  trotting  famihes. 

At  the  Trakhene  stud  in  Germany  a  distinct 
breed  has  been  obtained  by  the  admixture  of 
thoroughbred  and  Eastern  blood.  How  long  it 
took  and  how  many  crosses  were  made  to  estab- 
Hsh  the  type  I  cannot  say,  but  it  is  understood 
that  in  the  first  crosses  the  stallions  were  of 
English  blood,  the  mares  of  desert  strains.  These 
Trakhene  horses,  usually  black  or  chestnut,  are 
very  beautiful  animals  —  large,  symmetrical,  and 
of  proud  bearing.  They  are  sometimes  used  as 
chargers  by  the  German  emperor  and  his  officers, 
and  in  this  country  they  are  somewhat  familiar  as 
liberty  horses  in  the  circus  ring.  It  is  said  that 
the  Trakhene  is  not  clever  upon  his  feet  and  that 
he  is  not  safe  in  easy  paces,  which  is  likely 
enough,  for  both  the  blood-horse  and  the  Arab 
are  stumblers  in  the  walk  and  in  the  trot. 

In  the  province  of  Ontario,  Canada,  and  in  the 
states  of  Maine  and  New  York,  very  fine  horses 
are  bred  for  various  purposes;  and  from  among 
these  are  found  good  hacks  and  the  animals  best 
suited  to  the  hunting-field  that  America  affords. 
These  Northern  horses  have  good  constitutions 
and,  it  is  thought,  better  feet  than  those  found 
beyond  the  Alleghanies,  and  the  best  examples 
fill  the  demands  of  the  most  critical  horseman; 
but  in  none  of  the  Northern  states  can  it  be  said 


Breeding  the  Saddle-horse  15 

that  a  breed  or  family  exists  that  produces  a  type 
of  hack  or  hunter,  while  in  the  Blue  Grass  region 
south  of  the  Ohio  we  find  the  Denmarks  splen- 
didly developed  in  every  point  and  with  a  natural 
grace  and  elasticity  that  make  them  most  desir- 
able for  the  saddle. 

For  quite  a  century  the  riding-horses  of  Ken- 
tucky have  been  celebrated  in  song  and  story. 
In  the  days  when  bridle-paths  were  the  chief 
means  of  intercommunication  throughout  this 
state,  the  pioneer  made  his  journeys  as  easy  as 
possible  by  selecting  and  by  breeding  saddle- 
horses  with  smooth  gaits,  the  rack  and  the  run- 
ning walk.  These  movements  had  been  known 
in  the  far  East  and  in  Latin  countries  from  time 
immemorial,  but  it  remained  for  the  Kentuckian 
to  perfect  them. 

Some  fifty  odd  years  since  a  stallion  called 
Denmark  was  introduced  into  Kentucky,  and 
from  him  there  has  descended  a  type  of  saddle- 
horse  which  is  everywhere  held  in  esteem,  for  the 
Denmark  horse  of  to-day  has  no  superior  for 
beauty  of  form,  for  docility,  for  graceful  move- 
ments and,  indeed,  for  every  good  quality  which 
should  be  found  in  a  riding  animal.  Denmark 
had  been  successful  on  the  race-course ;  he  was  by 
imported  Hedgeford,  and  if  it  be  true  that  there 
was  a  stain  upon  the  lineage  of  his  dam,  there 
had  been  a  very  successful  cross,  for  the   great 


1 6  Riding 

majority  of  the  saddle-horses  of  Kentucky  boast 
Denmark  as  an  ancestor.  More  than  nine-tenths 
of  this  family  trace  to  the  founder's  son,  Gaines's 
Denmark,  whose  dam  was  by  Cockspur,  and, 
probably,  out  of  a  pacing  mare. 

The  American  Saddle-horse  Breeders'  Associa- 
tion has  undertaken  to  improve  the  riding-horses 
of  this  country  by  the  formation  of  a  register  and 
by  the  selection  of  foundation  stallions  whose 
progeny  under  certain  conditions  shall  be  eligible 
for  registry.  Their  primary  object  is  to  encour- 
age the  breeding  of  the  gaited  saddle-horse,  that 
is,  the  animal  which,  from  inherited  instincts  or 
natural  adaptability,  may  readily  be  taught  to 
rack,  to  pace,  to  go  in  the  running  walk  and  in 
the  fox-trot ;  but  at  the  same  time  General  Castle- 
man,  Colonel  Nail,  and  the  other  gentlemen 
engaged  with  them,  are  exercising  great  influence 
for  good  upon  the  horse  of  the  three  simpler 
gaits. 

The  pedigrees  of  the  foundation  sires  of  this 
register  show  many  strains  of  the  blood  of  Sal- 
tram  and  of  Diomed,  a  fair  share  of  that  of  the 
Canadian  pacer,  and  enough,  doubtless,  of  that  of 
the  Morgan.  A  fabric  woven  of  such  threads 
must  prove  of  national  importance ;  for,  although 
the  registry  is  open  to  all  horses  which  can  show 
five  saddle-gaits,  it  should  be  remembered  that 
such  an  exhibition  is  almost  a  certain  proof  of  the 


Breeding  the  Saddle-horse  17 

desired  breeding  and  is  a  certain  proof  of  quality. 
We  may,  then,  hope  for  a  typical  American  saddle- 
horse,  —  a  race  that  shall  have  no  superior,  repre- 
sentatives of  which  shall  be  found  wherever  the 
horse  flourishes. 

I  am  no  advocate  for  any  paces  other  than  the 
walk,  the  trot,  and  the  gallop,  these  being  the  only 
movements  in  which  the  rider  can  obtain  imme- 
diate and  precise  control  over  the  actions  of  the 
horse.  The  riding-horse  must  be  managed  by 
reins  and  heels ;  no  motions  or  signs  are  so  exact- 
ing, so  unmistakable  in  their  demands,  and  it  is 
impossible  readily  to  obtain  movements  from  a 
horse  that  is  confused  by  eight  or  even  five  gaits, 
particularly  when  some  of  these  gaits  require  an 
extension  of  the  animal's  forces  incompatible  with 
the  union  required  in  quick  turns  and  in  imme- 
diate obedience.  It  must,  however,  be  acknowl- 
edged that  the  rack,  the  running  walk,  and  the 
fox-trot  have  had  a  beneficial  influence  upon  the 
Kentucky  saddle-horse.  In  the  first  place,  these 
paces  required  selection  in  the  breeding,  and, 
secondly,  the  discipline  implied  by  the  training, 
through  many  generations,  has  had  its  effect  upon 
the  tempers  and  dispositions  of  these  splendid 
animals. 

A  brood  mare  should  always  be  well  nourished, 
but  not  over  fed,  and,  from  the  time  it  is  able  to 
eat,  the  foal  should  have  its  share  of  oats  as  well 


1 8  Riding 

as  of  succulent,  nutritious  grasses,  and  of  sound 
hay  when  grazing  is  impracticable.  Our  cavalry 
officers,  and  horsemen  in  general,  bear  testimony 
to  the  endurance  of  animals  bred  in  Kentucky. 
This  vigor  is  due  to  the  rich  blue-grass  pastures 
and  to  the  liberal  feeding  of  the  mare  and  her 
offspring. 

It  would  appear,  upon  first  viewing  the  subject, 
that  a  horse  bred  upon  rough  pasture-land  would 
be  more  sure  of  foot  than  one  bred  on  smooth 
plains ;  but  that  is  not  always  the  case.  It  is  true 
that  the  animal  bred  on  uneven  ground  learns  to 
look  after  itself,  and  becomes  very  clever  on  its 
feet  when  obstacles  exist,  but  mountain-bred 
horses  are  often  stumblers  on  level  roads,  in  the 
walk  and  in  the  trot.  The  fact  is,  that  sureness 
of  foot  depends  upon  the  manner  in  which  the 
horse  extends  and  plants  its  feet,  moderate  action 
being  the  safest,  either  extremes  of  high  or  low 
action,  of  short  or  long  strides,  militating  against 
the  animal's  agility.  The  reason  that  horses 
stumble  ten  times  in  the  walk  to  once  in  the 
trot  is  because  in  the  first-named  pace  the  pointed 
toe  is  usually  carried  along  close  to  the  ground 
before  the  fore  foot  is  planted.  When  the  rider 
unites  the  horse,  this  defective  action  is  obviated. 
During  the  past  twenty  years  I  have  taken  thou- 
sands of  photographs  of  the  moving  horse  in 
studying  the  question  of  action,  and  I  am  satisfied 


Breeding  the  Saddle-horse  19 

that  the  horse  which  plants  its  fore  foot  with  the 
front  of  the  hoof  vertical  will  stumble;  that  the 
horse  which  straightens  its  joints  and  brings 
the  heel  to  the  ground  first  will  travel  insecurely 
and  slip  on  greasy  surfaces.  I  had  an  example  of 
the  last-named  in  my  stable,  and  the  animal  sev- 
eral times  "  turned  turtle,"  as  I  might  have  antici- 
pated. Fair  action,  with  fairly  bent  joints  which 
bring  the  feet  about  flat  to  the  ground,  the  hind 
legs  well  under  the  mass,  is  the  safest  form  in 
which  the  horse  moves. 


CHAPTER  II 

HANDLING  THE  YOUNG  HORSE 

Before  the  horse  can  be  tauo^ht  obedience  to 
the  bit  and  spur  it  must  go  through  a  preliminary 
course  of  handling,  by  which  the  man  obtains 
mastery  over  the  animal.  This  work  is  usually 
called  "  breaking-in,"  and  it  is  a  matter  of  regret 
that  it  is  almost  always  conducted  in  an  unneces- 
sarily harsh  and  rough  manner,  with  the  result 
that  many  horses  are  made  vicious,  or  are  in 
other  ways  spoiled,  through  the  ignorance  and 
cruelty  of  those  who  have  charge  of  their  early 
education. 

A  lively  colt  is  shy,  suspicious,  and  curious, 
easily  amused,  and  as  easily  bored ;  by  recogniz- 
ing these  characteristics  and  conducting  his  work 
with  reference  to  them,  the  trainer  will  find  suc- 
cess easy  and  agreeable.  After  the  man  has 
gained  the  confidence  of  the  animal,  he  will  find 
that  the  young  horse  takes  great  interest  in  les- 
sons that  are  varied  and  not  too  long  continued, 
and  there  need  be  no  resistances  aroused  on  the 
part  of  the  pupil.  Except  in  the  very  rare  cases 
of   animals   that  are  naturally  vicious,  and  such 


Handling  the  Young  Horse  21 

are  insane,  the  training  of  a  horse  may  be  carried 
on  without  friction.  The  faults  and  vices  in  a 
horse  usually  arise  from  the  efforts  of  the  ner- 
vous animal  to  avoid  injudicious  restraints  before 
it  has  been  taught  by  easy  steps  to  yield  instinc- 
tively to  the  demands  of  its  trainer.  Later  mis- 
conduct is  almost  always  due  to  want  of  firmness 
and  decisive  action  on  the  part  of  the  rider.  The 
horse  is  incapable  of  that  real  affection  for  man 
such  as  the  dog  evinces  toward  the  worst  of  mas- 
ters; it  is  of  low  intelligence,  the  boldest  of  them 
being  subject  to  panics,  but  there  are  few  which 
lack  a  low  craft  that  enables  them  to  take  advan- 
tage of  every  slip  or  mistake  the  man  may  make. 
A  sufficient  amount  of  work  and  careful  treatment 
will  keep  a  sane  horse  steady,  but  when  at  all 
fresh  most  horses  are  untrustworthy  if  the  man's 
control  be  lost.  I  do  not  find  it  necessary  to 
punish  my  horses ;  the  whip,  spur,  and  reins  are 
employed  to  convey  demands ;  a  harsh  word  an- 
swers every  requirement  for  correction,  and  the 
animal  cannot  resent  it  as  it  may  the  blows  of 
the  whip  or  the  stroke  of  the  spur.  The  photo- 
graphs of  a  number  of  these  animals  in  my  vari- 
ous works  in  almost  every  possible  movement 
prove  how  exact  is  the  obedience  they  render 
under  this  course  of  treatment.  When  some  old 
favorite  refuses  to  walk  into  a  coal-pit,  or  volun- 
tarily turns  up  some  well-known  road,  the  fond 


22  Riding 

owner  is  too  apt  to  confuse  instinct  or  habit  with 
brilliant  mental  operations,  and  place  too  much 
faith  in  its  good  inclinations ;  but  the  fact  is  that 
in  handling  this  animal  we  must  neglect  its  will 
and  obtain  control  over  its  movement  by  cultivat- 
ing the  instinctive  muscular  actions  which  follow 
the  application  of  the  hand  and  heel.  I  have  a 
great  admiration  for  the  horse,  for  its  beauty,  for 
its  usefulness,  for  its  many  excellent  qualities,  but 
I  do  not  permit  this  sentiment  to  blind  me  to  its 
shortcomings.  Some  horses  are  so  good  that 
they  inspire  an  affection  which  they  cannot  re- 
ciprocate. Since  I  began  this  book  I  lost  Silvana, 
a  well-bred  English  mare  which  I  had  owned  for 
eighteen  years.  She  was  a  very  beautiful  animal, 
of  high  spirit,  exact  in  all  the  movements  of  the 
manege,  and  of  so  kind  a  disposition  that  she  was 
never  guilty  of  mutinous  or  disorderly  conduct. 

Regardless  of  the  treatment  it  has  received 
previously,  the  young  horse  should  be  "broken 
to  ride,"  when  strong  enough  to  bear  the  weight 
of  a  rider,  by  some  method  similar  to  that  which 
follows. 

But  first  I  wish  to  say  a  word  about  casting 
the  horse,  by  what  is  usually  called  "  The  Rarey 
System."  Many  people  believe  that  to  throw  the 
horse  is  a  sure  cure  for  every  vice  and  spirit  of 
resistance.  The  fact  is  that  a  horse  is  confused, 
surprised,  and  humiliated  at  finding  itself  helpless, 


FIG.    14, —THE   CAVESSON 


FIG.    15.  —  LONGEING  ON   THE   CAVESSON 


Handling  the  Young  Horse  23 

and  casting  does  give  the  man  temporary  control 
which  is  often  a  most  important  matter,  and  may 
be  the  beginning  of  the  establishment  of  disci- 
pline ;  but  mastering  the  horse  permanently  can- 
not be  accomplished  in  a  moment,  and  unless  it 
be  necessary  to  employ  the  straps  in  the  handling 
of  a  violent  animal  I  should  advise  against  it. 
Vices,  faults,  and  tricks  may  be  remedied  only 
by  careful  training.  I  teach  many  of  my  horses 
to  lie  down,  but,  as  I  shall  explain  later,  I  do  not 
employ  any  straps  or  apparatus. 

The  first  step  in  breaking-in  is  to  give  some 
lessons  on  the  cavesson.  This  is  a  head-collar 
with  a  metal  nose-band,  upon  the  front  and  each 
side  of  which  are  stout  rings.  To  the  front  ring  a 
leather  longe  line  fifteen  feet  long  will  be  fastened, 
and  from  the  side  rings  straps  will  be  buckled  to 
the  girth  or  surcingle  at  such  lengths  as  will  pre- 
vent the  horse  extending  its  nose  so  that  the  face 
is  much  beyond  the  perpendicular.  The  horse 
thus  fitted  should  be  led  to  some  retired  spot 
where  there  is  level  ground  enough  for  a  circle 
of  about  forty  feet.  At  first  the  man,  walking  at 
the  shoulder  of  the  horse,  should  lead  it  on  the 
circumference  of  the  circle,  to  the  right  and  to 
the  left,  taking  a  short  hold  of  the  longe  line  and 
being  careful  that  the  animal  does  not  get  so  far 
ahead  of  him  as  to  have  a  straight  pull  forward 
which  may  drag  him  from  his  feet     From  time 


24  Riding 

to  time  the  man  will  bring  the  horse  to  a  halt, 
and  require  it  to  stand  quite  still,  making  much 
of  it  by  caresses  and  kind  words,  picking  up  the 
feet  and  stroking  it  gently  with  the  whiphandle 
all  over  its  body  and  legs,  so  that  it  will  not  be 
alarmed  at  his  future  motions,  and  then  continu- 
ing the  progress  on  the  circle.  Gradually  the 
length  of  the  hold  on  the  longe  line  will  be 
increased,  until  the  horse  goes  about  the  man 
at  the  full  length  of  the  strap.  In  these  exercises, 
also,  the  horse  should  frequently  be  brought  to  a 
stop,  always  on  the  circumference  of  the  circle, 
and  it  should  be  worked  equally  to  either  hand. 
The  lessons  should  be  given  twice  every  day,  at 
first  for  about  fifteen  minutes  each,  and  increasing 
the  time  until  a  lesson  shall  be  of  three-quarters 
of  an  hour's  duration.  Colored  rugs,  wheelbar- 
rows, open  umbrellas,  paper,  and  other  similar 
objects  at  which  a  horse  might  shy  should  be 
placed  near  the  path  until  the  horse  is  so  accus- 
tomed to  them  that  it  will  take  no  notice.  Under 
no  circumstances  should  the  horse  be  punished, 
and  the  man  should  exercise  great  care  that  he 
does  nothing  to  make  the  animal  fear  him.  When 
the  horse  will  go  quietly  about  the  man  in  the 
walk  and  in  the  very  slow  trot  (it  should  never  be 
permitted  to  go  rapidly),  the  surcingle  may  be  re- 
placed by  the  saddle,  lightly  girthed  and  the  stir- 
rups looped  up,  the  side-lines  of  the  cavesson  being 


Handling  the  Young  Horse  25 

removed.  Then,  at  the  end  of  each  lesson  on  the 
cavesson,  that  instrument  should  be  replaced  by  a 
light  snaffle-bridle.  The  man,  facing  the  head  of 
the  horse,  should  take  a  snaffle-rein  in  each  hand 
and  make  gentle  vibrations  toward  its  chest,  so  that 
he  will  give  the  bit  a  light  feeling  on  the  bars  of 
the  mouth.  Occasionally  he  will  elevate  the  head 
of  the  horse  by  extending  his  arms  upward  to 
their  full  length,  then  gently  bring  the  head  of 
the  horse  to  a  natural  height,  or  to  that  height 
which  he  judges  will  be  the  best  in  which  the 
trained  horse  should  cany  it,  drawing  the  reins 
toward  the  animal's  chest  until  its  face  is  per- 
pendicular, and  no  farther,  and  playing  with  the 
bit  in  light  vibrations  until  the  horse  takes  up 
the  play  and  gives  a  supple  jaw.  He  will  also 
bend  the  head  of  the  horse  to  the  right  and  to 
the  left,  the  face  vertical,  and  bring  it  back  to  the 
proper  position  by  the  reins,  not  accepting  any 
voluntary  movement  from  the  horse,  and  endeavor- 
ing to  obtain  always  an  elastic  resistance  from  its 
mouth.  The  head  of  the  horse  will  also  be  de- 
pressed by  the  snaffle-reins,  until  it  nearly  touches 
the  ground,  and  then  be  lifted  to  the  natural  height. 
All  of  these  movements  are  of  high  importance, 
and  all  of  them  tend  to  develop  the  muscles  of 
the  neck  and  chest ;  but  the  elevation  of  the  head 
and  its  return  to  the  right  height,  face  vertical, 
jaw   supple,  but   not   flaccid,  produces   the   best 


26  Riding 

results  in  bitting  and  should  be  more  frequently 
practised  than  the  others.  If,  in  these  lessons, 
the  horse  draws  back,  it  must  be  made  to  come 
to  the  man ;  no  good  results  can  be  obtained  from 
a  retreating  animal. 

Upon  some  occasion,  after  the  longeing  and  bit- 
ting lesson  has  been  given,  when  there  is  no  high 
wind  to  irritate  the  horse  and  the  animal  seems 
to  be  composed,  the  man  should  have  "a  leg  up" 
and  quietly  drop  into  the  saddle,  having  first 
taken  a  lock  of  mane  in  his  left  hand  and  with 
the  right,  in  which  the  reins  should  be,  grasping 
the  pommel,  thumb  under  the  throat  of  the  pom- 
mel. He  should  then  let  the  horse  walk  off  for  a 
few  steps,  having  a  very  slight  tension  upon  the 
reins,  and  quietly  dismount.  If,  as  is  very  un- 
likely, for  the  horse  will  be  taken  by  surprise, 
though  not  frightened,  the  animal  makes  a  jump 
or  a  plunge,  the  rider  must  maintain  his  seat, 
keep  up  the  head  of  the  horse,  and  dismount 
when  the  animal  has  become  quiet.  The  horse 
will  not  rear  at  this  stage ;  that  is  an  accomplish- 
ment it  learns  from  bad  hands,  and  it  is  probable 
that  it  will  be  perfectly  quiet.  Each  day  the  rid- 
ing lesson  will  be  lengthened,  and  the  rider  will 
gradually  obtain  some  control  over  its  movements 
by  the  reins  and  accustom  it  to  bear  the  pressure 
of  his  legs  against  its  sides.  The  longeing  will 
now   be   employed    to   give  such    exercise  as  is 


FIG.    16. —ELEVATION   OF   THE   HEAD   WITH    SNAFFLE 


FIG.    17.  — DROPPING   HEAD   AND  SUPPLING  JAW 


Handling  the  Young  Horse  27 

needed  to  keep  the  animal  from  being  too  fresh ; 
and  when  the  riding  lessons  give  sufficient  work, 
the  longe  may  be  dispensed  with,  to  be  resumed 
if  the  horse  falls  into  bad  habits.  But  the  bitting 
exercises,  previously  described,  should  be  occa- 
sionally reverted  to  as  long  as  the  horse  is  used 
under  the  saddle. 

But  one  more  thing  is  necessary  before  the 
horse  is  ready  for  the  higher  training  which  will 
be  described  later,  and  this  desideratum  is  to  con- 
firm the  horse  in  the  habit  of  facing  the  bit,  that 
is,  to  go  forward  against  a  light  tension  upon  the 
reins ;  for  without  this  the  rider  will  have  little  or 
no  government  over  its  movements,  as  the  bit  must 
have  some  resistance,  slight  though  it  should  be, 
upon  which  to  enforce  his  demands.  Whenever 
a  rider  finds  that  his  hand  has  nothing  to  work 
against,  that  the  horse  has  loosened  its  hold  on 
the  bit  and  refuses  to  face  it,  he  may  be  almost 
certain  that  he  has  an  old  offender  to  manage 
and  that  mischief  is  meant,  and  will  follow  unless 
he  can  force  the  horse  up  into  the  bridle. 

The  horse  may  best  be  taught  to  face  the  bit 
in  a  slow  but  brisk  trot.  The  animal  must  not 
be  started  off  too  abruptly,  but  the  forward  move- 
ment should  begin  in  a  walk ;  and  this  is  a  rule 
that  should  always  be  followed,  even  though  it  be 
for  a  few  steps,  unless  some  good  reason  for  doing 
otherwise  exists.     The  impulse  for  the  trot  and 


28  Riding 

its  continuance  may  be  induced  by  a  pressure  of 
the  rider's  legs  against  the  sides  of  the  horse, 
or  by  hght  taps  of  the  whip  deHvered  just  back 
of  the  girths. 

In  a  measured,  regular  trot  the  horse  should  be 
ridden  in  straight  Hues,  and  in  circles,  first  of 
large,  and  afterward  of  decreased,  diameters,  the 
pace  being  maintained  by  demanding  impulses 
from  the  hind  quarters,  the  hand  taking  a  light 
but  steady  tension  upon  the  reins.  No  effort 
will  be  made  to  induce  the  horse  to  pull  against 
the  hand,  but  the  man  should  endeavor  to  get 
just  that  resistance  by  which  he  may  direct  the 
animal.  It  does  not  really  matter  if  the  jaw 
of  the  horse  does  get  a  little  rigid;  that  can  be 
softened  by  the  bitting  exercises  and  by  future 
lessons,  but  the  horse  must  go  into  the  bridle. 
In  turning  to  either  hand  the  inside  rein  will 
direct  the  movement,  the  outer  rein  measuring 
and  controlling  the  effect  of  the  other;  the  out- 
side leg  of  the  rider  will  make  an  increased  press- 
ure as  the  turn  is  being  made  to  keep  the  croup 
of  the  horse  on  the  path  taken  by  the  forehand. 
On  approaching  the  turn  the  horse  will  be  slightly 
collected  between  hand  and  heel,  and  as  soon  as 
the  horse  enters  upon  the  new  direction  it  will  be 
put  straight  and  the  aids  will  act  as  before.  To 
bring  it  to  a  halt,  the  legs  of  the  rider  will  close 
against  the  sides  of  the  horse ;  he  will  then  lean 


FIG.    18.  — BENDING   HEAD   WITH    SNAFFLE 


-<■•'..-:,■%. 

J 

1 

r.-riA-— ^ 

PH^^^^^i 

P^^'^r^ 

W 

Hki                    ^H    ^BL                          mi 

^ 

FIG.    19.  — A  LEG   UP 


Handling  the  Young  Horse  29 

back  slightly  and  raise  his  hand  until  the  horse 
comes  to  a  walk,  and  in  the  same  manner  he  will 
bring  it  to  a  stop.  The  hand  will  then  release 
the  tension  upon  the  reins  and  the  legs  be  with- 
drawn from  the  sides  of  the  horse.  To  go  for- 
ward, the  rider  will  first  close  his  legs  against 
the  sides  of  the  horse  and  meet  the  impulses  so 
procured  by  such  a  tension  upon  the  reins  as  will 
induce  the  horse  to  go  forward  in  a  walk.  So,  to 
demand  the  trot,  the  increased  impulses  will  first 
be  demanded  from  the  croup,  to  be  met  and  meas- 
ured by  the  hand.  It  is  an  invariable  rule,  at  this 
stage  and  in  every  stage,  that  in  going  forward, 
backward,  or  to  either  side,  the  rider's  legs  will 
act  before  the  hand  to  procure  the  desired  im- 
pulses. 


CHAPTER   III 

THE  PURCHASE,  THE  CARE,  AND  THE   SALE  OF  THE 

SADDLE-HORSE 

Whether  it  has  been  procured  by  rapine,  pur- 
chase, gift,  or  devise,  the  owner  of  a  really  good 
saddle-horse  has  something  from  which  he  may 
derive  much  pleasure  and  satisfaction.  Nor  is 
such  an  animal  so  rare  as  the  late  Edmund  Tat- 
tersall  suggested,  when  he  gave  it  as  his  opinion 
that  a  man  might  have  one  good  horse  in  his  life- 
time, but  certainly  no  more.  Almost  any  horse 
of  good  temper,  safe  action,  and  sufficient  strength 
may  be  made  pleasant  to  ride.  Alidor  was  a 
small  cart-horse,  low  at  the  shoulder,  with  a  rigid 
jaw  and  a  coarse  head,  but  he  became  a  charming 
hack,  and  I  employed  him  for  the  photographs  of 
the  first  edition  of  "  Modern  Horsemanship."  I 
bought  him  as  a  three-year-old,  as  an  experiment ; 
and  when  he  was  four  the  breeder  came  to  see  him 
and  gave  me  a  written  statement  that,  so  great 
were  the  changes  made  in  appearance  and  action 
by  the  calisthenics  of  his  education,  the  animal 
could  hardly  be  recognized. 

Of  course  a  man  on  the  lookout  for  a  horse 
30 


Purchase,  Care,  and  Sale  31 

will  make  an  offer  for  a  desirable  animal  wherever 
it  may  be  found,  but  the  most  satisfactory  mode 
of  procedure  is  to  go  to  some  reputable  dealer. 
I  have  bought  horses  from  dealers  in  many  parts 
of  this  country  and  in  England,  France,  Germany, 
and  other  parts  of  Europe,  and  I  have  found  them 
desirous  of  pleasing  and  as  honest  as  their  neigh- 
bors. I  once  bought  a  little  horse  from  a  trader 
in  Frankfort-on-the-Main,  who  told  me  that  I  was 
getting  a  good  bargain,  and  that  in  case  I  ever 
wished  to  dispose  of  it  he  would  like  to  have  a 
refusal.  When  I  was  ready  to  sell,  I  sent  word  to 
the  dealer  that  a  friend  had  offered  me  a  fair  ad- 
vance over  the  price  I  had  paid,  and  to  my  sur- 
prise he  appeared  and  without  remonstrance  gave 
me  the  amount  my  friend  had  named.  I  need 
hardly  say  the  horse  was  a  good  one,  so  I  had 
been  well  treated  all  round. 

Much  of  the  friction  between  purchaser  and 
dealer  is  usually  due  to  the  manner  in  which  the 
former  conducts  his  part  of  the  bargain.  It  is 
not  agreeable  to  a  fair-minded  man  to  be  ap- 
proached as  though  he  were  a  swindler,  to  be 
offered  one-half  of  the  price  he  has  set  on  his 
property,  and  then  perhaps  to  have  a  sound  horse 
returned  because  the  buyer  did  not  know  what  he 
wanted.  I  do  not  wish  to  be  understood  as  say- 
ing that  all  dealers  are  honest ;  I  have  seen  too 
many  who  would  not  go  straight ;  but  it  is  reason- 


32  Riding 

able  to  suppose  that  most  men  in  a  large  way  of 
business,  who  have  reputations  for  honest  dealings 
to  maintain,  will  "  do  right "  by  a  customer. 

It  is  a  mistake  for  an  ignorant  purchaser  to 
take  a  knowing  friend  with  him  for  protection ; 
this  will,  in  the  eyes  of  the  dealer,  relieve  him  in 
a  great  measure  of  responsibility.  If  the  friend 
is  really  a  good  judge,  it  is  far  better  to  let  him 
act  alone,  when  he  will  be  considered  a  client  and 
not  an  interloper  trying  to  "  crab  "  a  sale,  and  there- 
fore free  to  deceive  himself  and  his  companion. 

Some  dealers  will  not  give  a  warranty  of 
soundness,  and  a  warranty  is  too  often  the  cause 
of  disputes  and  of  actions  at  law  to  make  it 
advisable  either  to  give  or  to  demand  one.  A 
veterinary  examination  and  a  short  trial  must 
suffice.  Sometimes  the  seller  requires  that  the 
trial  shall  take  place  from  his  yards,  to  avoid  the 
risk  of  injury  to  valuable  animals  and  that  black- 
mail so  commonly  levied  by  head  grooms  and 
stable-men.  In  cases  where  the  dealer  objected 
to  sending  his  horse  to  another's  stables,  the 
author  has  been  in  the  habit  of  offering  a  fair 
sum  of  money  for  the  privilege,  the  amount  to  go 
on  the  price  of  the  horse  should  the  sale  be 
effected ;  and  this  proposal  has  usually  been 
acceptable. 

Where  a  trial  has  been  allowed,  or  even  where 
the  purchase  has  been    made,  if   an    indifferent 


Purchase,  Care,  and  Sale  33 

horseman,  recognizing  his  deficiencies,  wishes  to 
assure  himself  of  the  wisdom  of  the  step  he  is  tak- 
ing, let  him  place  a  cold  saddle  upon  the  horse 
when  it  is  fresh,  and  immediately  mount  and  go 
upon  the  road. 

If  the  animal  does  not  buck  or  shy,  and  goes 
fairly  well,  albeit  a  little  gay,  it  is  a  prize  not  to 
be  disdained.  Many  horses,  even  with  stall  cour- 
age, will  go  quietly  if  the  saddle  be  warmed  by 
half  an  hour's  contact  with  their  backs,  but  will 
plunge  or  buck  if  the  rider  mounts  a  saddle 
freshly  girthed.  If  a  fresh  horse  will  stand  the 
ordeal  of  a  cold  panel,  it  will  not  be  apt  to  mis- 
behave under  other  trials. 

Of  course  the  confident  rider  will  make  his 
essay  as  soon  as  the  horse  comes  into  his  posses- 
sion, and  if  the  new  purchase  does  not  come  up 
to  his  expectations,  he  will  hope  that  his  skill 
may  remedy  the  faults  he  discovers. 

To  go  to  the  breeder  implies  a  journey,  to  find 
often  only  young  horses  that  are  not  thoroughly 
trained  and  almost  always  unused  to  the  sights 
and  sounds  of  traffic,  many  of  which  are  fearsome 
to  a  country-bred  horse.  On  the  other  hand,  on 
such  a  visit,  the  prospective  purchaser  has  a  bet- 
ter opportunity  of  examining  the  animals  offered 
for  sale,  and  from  a  knowledge  of  the  pedigrees 
and  an  examination  of  the  progenitors  he  will  be 
able  to  form  some  idea  of  what  may  be  expected 


34  Riding 

in  the  way  of  temperament  and  development ;  and 
it  will  be  a  satisfaction  to  have  a  fixed  price,  al- 
though it  may  not  be  a  low  one.  Some  of  the 
breeders  in  Kentucky,  Illinois,  and  Missouri,  and 
perhaps  in  other  parts  of  the  country,  do  not 
send  their  stock  to  market  until  the  animals  are 
thoroughly  and  admirably  trained ;  and  for  a  man 
who  purposes  "  making "  his  own  horse,  nothing 
better  could  be  found  than  one  of  the  highly  bred 
youngsters  from  the  Blue  Grass  region.  In  the 
following  chapter  a  few  of  the  stock  farms  de- 
voted to  the  breeding  of  high-class  saddle-horses 
are  described. 

There  remains,  as  sources  of  supply,  the  auc- 
tion, the  friend  who  has  a  good  horse  which  he 
is  willing  to  dispose  of,  and  "  the  stable  of  the 
gentleman  who  is  breaking  up  his  establishment 
previously  to  a  European  trip." 

It  has  now  become  a  custom  to  send  very  valu- 
able high-class  horses  to  the  auction  block,  and 
if  a  man  is  looking  for  something  that  has  al- 
ready proved  its  superiority  in  the  show-ring, 
he  may  often  find  it  his  property  by  nodding  to 
the  auctioneer.  But,  aside  from  the  fact  that 
such  an  animal  has  probably  reached  its  climax, 
and  that  the  same  experienced  care  is  demanded 
to  maintain  its  condition,  it  is  not  advisable  for  a 
man  to  purchase  such  a  horse  except  for  exhibi- 
tion purposes.     In  the  hands  of  a  poor  or  even 


Purchase,  Care,  and  Sale  35 

of  a  moderately  good  horseman,  the  animal  will 
rapidly  deteriorate,  for  it  will  be  trained  beyond 
his  skill ;  and  no  rider  who  wishes  to  have  a 
comfortable  mount  should  acquire  a  horse  that 
has  had  an  education  beyond  the  stage  of  being 
really  "  quiet  to  ride,"  for  he  may  then  bring  the 
animal  up  to  his  requirements,  whatever  may  be 
the  measure  of  his  dexterity.  As  for  the  inferior 
grades  of  horses  offered  under  the  hammer,  it  is 
better  to  leave  them  to  experts.  Neither  the 
horse  of  a  friend,  nor  that  offered  by  the  coper 
who  hires  a  private  stable  from  which  to  entrap 
the  unwary,  is  to  be  recommended.  Such  deal- 
ings bring  sorrow. 

The  Ideal  Saddle-horse !  Any  man  with  a 
trained  eye  and  ear  should  be  able  to  recognize 
it  among  a  herd  of  others.  Its  satin  robe  should 
be  of  a  chestnut,  bay,  or  brown  color,  with  a  silver 
star  on  the  forehead.  It  should  have  a  fine,  thin 
mane,  and  a  tail  just  heavy  enough  to  set  off 
the  haunches.  It  should  be  of  a  stature  of  no 
more  than  1 5^  hands  at  the  withers,  never  more 
than  an  inch  less  than  that  height ;  of  symmet- 
rical form,  —  if  anything  appears  to  be  wrong,  it 
is  wrong,  —  with  a  broad,  flat  forehead,  a  face 
neither  concave  nor  convex,  a  small  muzzle  with 
nostrils  that  can  dilate  until  they  show  the  fire 
within,  while  soft  hazel  eyes  beam  forth  brightly 
and   kindly.     Its  pointed  ears,  beautiful  in   form, 


36  Riding 

are  set  far  apart,  and  by  their  motions  express 
the  moods  of  the  vivacious  animal.  The  legs, 
well  muscled  above,  clean  and  hard  below  the 
knees,  are  truly  placed  under  the  mass,  the 
drivers  capable  of  propelling  the  weight  of  horse 
and  man  with  vigor,  —  the  fore  legs  giving  no 
suggestion  that  the  body  is  leaning  forward,  the 
hind  legs  having  no  appearance  of  buttressing  up 
the  body.  The  crest  is  marked,  but  not  too 
strongly,  and  the  muscles  below  it  play  like 
shadows  as  the  animal  proudly  arches  its  taper- 
ing neck,  which  buries  itself  in  broadly  divergent 
jaws.  The  shoulder  slopes  rearward  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  make  the  back  seem  shorter  than 
it  really  is,  while  the  gentle  dip  of  the  saddle- 
place  invites  one  to  mount.  Its  abihty  to  speed 
under  weight  is  evidenced  by  a  deep,  broad  chest, 
its  muscular  thighs,  its  well-covered  limbs,  and 
the  strong  spine  which  ends  in  a  dock  fairly 
carried  from  a  nearly  level  croup.  The  hoofs 
are  of  exactly  the  right  size,  the  slope  conforming 
to  that  of  the  springy  pasterns,  pointing  straight 
forward,  and  with  level  bearings.  Its  paces  should 
be  smooth,  even,  and  regular,  four  rhythmic  beats 
in  the  walk,  three  in  the  controlled  gallop,  two 
in  the  trot,  while  the  action  should  only  be 
high  enough  for  safe  and  graceful  movements, 
the  stride  not  long  enough  to  affect  the  animal's 
agility.      The  temper  should  "  be  bold,  be  bold 


Purchase,  Care,  and  Sale  37 

but  not  too  bold,"  unaccustomed  objects  arousing 
the  horse's  curiosity  rather  than  its  fears,  while 
this  mettle  is  dominated  by  the  rider's  hand  as 
it  ever  finds  just  that  tension  upon  the  reins  that 
it  would  meet  in  bending  the  end  of  a  willow 
branch. 

While  skill  in  horsemanship  and  the  posses- 
sion of  a  good  horse  are  to  be  highly  considered, 
all  the  pleasures  of  riding  are  not  confined  to 
the  expert  with  his  splendid  mount.  Many  men 
who  are  never  able  to  attain  even  tolerable  pro- 
ficiency in  the  art  get  a  great  amount  of  recreation 
and  satisfaction  in  the  exercise.  The  author  has 
a  friend  who,  late  in  life,  and  when  his  figure  had 
developed  beyond  the  stage  where  a  secure  seat 
might  be  practicable,  was  accustomed  to  place 
himself  on  the  back  of  a  quiet  pacing-mare,  in 
one  of  those  saddles  with  a  towering  horn  on  the 
pommel  and  a  fair-sized  parapet  on  the  cantle. 
Thus  equipped,  he  passed  many  happy  hours  in 
going  wherever  the  steady  but  headstrong  Belle 
was  inclined.  When  the  mare  brought  forth 
some  three-cornered  progeny  from  registered 
sires,  her  owner's  delight  was  unbounded,  for 
he  was  then  a  breeder  as  well  as  a  horseman. 

No  estimate  can  be  made  of  the  real  value  of 
a  riding-horse,  or  what  a  horse  for  a  specific  pur- 
pose should  cost ;  these  depend  on  the  man  and 
the    horse.       A    really   satisfactory,    confidential 


38  Riding 

animal  is  worth  whatever  the  man  feels  that  he 
is  able  to  pay,  "  even  to  half  his  realm."  A  horse 
that  costs  no  more  than  a  hundred  dollars  at  four 
or  five  years  old  may  be  made  by  care  and  train- 
ing of  great  intrinsic  value  ;  while  other  animals, 
whose  beauty  and  striking  action  have  sold  them 
for  thousands  of  dollars,  may  be  dear  at  any 
price.  A  good  horse  should  bring  a  fair  price, 
but  the  purchaser  should  be  certain  that  he  is 
paying  for  the  horse,  and  not  for  the  privilege  of 
seeing  it  well  ridden  by  an  expert.  Except  where 
horses  are  bred  in  such  numbers  that  the  cost  of 
the  keep  of  each  is  much  reduced,  there  will  be 
very  little  change  coming  to  the  breeder  out  of 
the  few  hundred  dollars  that  he  gets  for  a  four- 
year-old  of  some  quality.  The  exceptional  colt 
which  brings  an  exceptional  price  puts  up  the 
average  of  profit,  but  it  is  to  the  dealer  that  the 
long  price  usually  goes. 

When  one  sees  the  wretched  cabins,  called 
boxes,  hot  in  summer,  draughty  in  winter,  in 
which  horses  are  kept  on  many  of  the  breeding 
farms,  and  even  on  some  of  the  race-courses,  it 
is  a  matter  of  wonder  that  health  and  condition 
of  the  stock  can  be  maintained  under  such  cir- 
cumstances. Exposure  to  the  inclemency  of  the 
weather,  however,  is  better  than  the  pampering 
which  city  horses  usually  find  in  close  and  over- 
heated stables. 


Purchase,  Care,  and  Sale  39 

The  stable  should  be  reasonably  warm  in  win- 
ter and  as  cool  in  summer  as  may  be,  thoroughly 
ventilated,  without  draughts,  and  with  good  drain- 
age. The  light  should  be  admitted  from  the  rear 
of  the  stalls ;  certainly  a  horse  should  not  stand 
facing  a  near  window  on  a  level  with  its  head. 
A  gangway  should  be  in  the  front  of  the  stalls  as 
well  as  in  the  rear,  and  the  horse  should  be  fed 
through  an  opening  about  sixteen  inches  wide  in 
the  front  of  the  stall.  This  narrow  opening  will 
be  beneficial  to  the  sio-ht  of  the  horse,  and  the 
animal  cannot  fight  its  neighbors.  For  more 
than  half  a  century  the  home  stable  of  the  author 
has  had  such  an  arrangement,  which  proved  per- 
fectly satisfactory.  In  that  stable  there  were  two 
rows  of  stalls  facing  a  middle  gangway. 

Except  for  sick  or  weary  horses,  the  stall  is 
better  than  the  loose  box  ;  in  the  former,  stable  dis- 
cipline is  better  kept  up.  In  a  loose  box  an  idle 
horse  is  apt  to  become  too  playful,  and  horse-play 
too  often  degenerates  into  something  worse,  such 
as  biting  and  kicking. 

The  floor  of  the  stable  should  be  of  hard  bricks, 
or  of  some  combination  of  asphalt.  The  drainage 
should  be  to  the  rear  of  the  stalls,  with  a  very 
slight  slope.  If  the  drains  are  made  under  the 
horse,  the  slopes  are  multiplied  and  the  inclines 
are  greater  than  in  the  length  of  the  stalls.  Al- 
ways the  horse  should  have  an  abundance  of  dry 


40  Riding 

straw,  and  for  the  night  this  should  be  renewed 
or  rearranged,  so  that  the  animal  shall  have  a  soft, 
dry  bed.  The  food  should  be  varied,  the  quan- 
tity depending  upon  the  size  of  the  horse,  the 
work  demanded  of  it,  and  its  appetite  and  diges- 
tion. For  a  horse  15^  hands  high,  the  size  in 
which  agility  and  sufficient  strength  are  usually 
found,  ten  to  twelve  pounds  of  oats  and  the 
same  quantity  of  hay  should  be  given  daily 
in  three  portions,  when  in  hard  work.  When 
the  horse  is  merely  exercised,  four  or  five 
pounds  of  oats  and  six  pounds  of  hay  will  be 
sufficient.  When  it  is  found  that  a  horse  does 
not  clean  out  its  manger,  the  feed  should  be  re- 
duced. In  addition  to  the  oats  and  hay,  the 
horse  should  have  a  few  carrots  two  or  three 
times  a  week,  occasionally  an  apple,  and  a  steamed 
mash  of  bran  and  crushed  oats  about  once  a  week, 
as  an  aperient,  given  preferably  on  the  eve  of 
some  day  of  rest.  During  the  spring  and  sum- 
mer the  animal  should  have  a  handful  of  fresh 
grass,  not  clover,  every  day ;  but  not  more  than 
a  good  handful,  for  a  larger  quantity  might  bring 
on  some  intestinal  trouble,  whereas  the  titbit 
is  greatly  appreciated  and  is  highly  beneficial. 
These  dainties  will  be  received  with  a  ^ood  erace 
from  the  master  and  will  encourage  friendly  re- 
lations between  horse  and  man.  Salt  should  be 
given  in  very  small  quantities  two  or  three  times 


Purchase,  Care,  and  Sale  41 

a  week,  and  the  horse  should  have  a  frequent 
supply  of  pure,  unchilled  water,  given  some  time 
before  meals;  if  it  is  offered  four  or  five  times  a 
day,  it  will  not  be  too  often. 

The  horse  should  be  out  of  the  stable,  except 
in  very  inclement  weather,  for  at  least  two  hours 
every  day ;  eight  hours  of  slow  work,  with  a  halt 
for  rest  and  refreshment  after  the  first  three  hours, 
is  not  too  much  for  a  horse  in  good  condition. 

During  the  Civil  War,  General  John  Morgan, 
after  two  weeks  of  severe  campaigning,  marched 
his  cavalry  command,  without  dismounting,  a 
distance  of  ninety-four  miles  in  about  thirty-five 
hours.  Many  of  the  horses  of  Kentucky  breeding 
performed  this  work  without  flinching,  and  were 
called  upon  to  do  further  duty  without  respite. 
Notwithstanding  the  vigor  with  which  General 
Morgan  conducted  this  raid  into  Ohio,  he  was 
overtaken  by  General  Hobson  after  twenty-one 
days  of  hard  marching,  in  which  a  distance  of 
about  seven  hundred  and  fifty  miles  was  covered. 
On  a  previous  occasion  General  Morgan  marched 
his  cavalry  ninety  miles  in  about  twenty-five 
hours.  Under  somewhat  similar  circumstances 
the  "  exigencies  of  the  service  "  have  on  occasion 
required  the  author  to  remain  in  the  saddle,  with 
but  momentary  dismounting,  if  any,  for  from  six- 
teen to  eighteen  hours,  sometimes  riding  at  the 
gallop,  and  the  horse,  a  thoroughbred  by  Albion, 


42  Riding 

never  exhibited  distress.  Nor  will  he  ever  forget 
that,  on  the  first  day  of  Januar)',  1S63,  he  rode  a 
little  mustang  from  daylight  until  midnight,  with- 
out leaving  the  saddle,  except  when  the  horse  fell, 
twice  upon  a  frosty  hillside  and  once  on  a  bit 
of  corduroy  road.  But  such  demands  upon  the 
endurance  of  a  horse,  and,  if  I  may  say  it,  of  the 
man,  are  not  unusual  in  active  military  service. 

A  horse  should  never  be  struck  or  otherwise 
punished  in  the  stable,  and  the  first  exhibition  of 
cruelty  on  the  part  of  the  groom  should  be  the 
cause  of  his  dismissal. 

The  currycomb  should  be  used  only  for  clean- 
ing the  brush,  and  never  should  be  applied  to  the 
skin  of  the  horse ;  but  so  great  is  the  temptation 
to  use  it  on  a  mud-covered  animal  that  it  is 
better  to  abolish  the  instrument.  A  whalebone 
mud  brush,  a  strong  straw  brush,  a  smoothing 
brush,  a  soft  cotton  cloth,  and  several  good 
sponges,  together  with  some  wisps  of  clean  straw, 
should  be  the  only  articles  of  the  toilet. 

The  face  and  nostrils,  the  dock,  and  other  hair- 
less parts  of  the  horse  should  be  washed  daily ; 
but,  except  to  cleanse  sores  or  for  w^et  bandages, 
water  should  never  be  put  upon  the  legs  of  the 
horse.  Tight  bandages  are  permissible  only 
when  applied  by  a  skilled  groom,  or  under 
the  orders  of  a  veterinary  surgeon.  Massage, 
rubbing    the    legs    of   the    horse    with    the   hand 


Purchase,  Care,  and  Sale  43 

downward,  should  take  the  place  of  bandages 
except  when  support  is  really  needed,  and  then 
the  advice  of  the  professional  should  be  called. 

When  a  horse  comes  in  from  a  hard  day's 
work,  covered  with  mud,  dry  serge  bandages  may 
be  loosely  put  on  the  legs  while  the  other  parts 
of  the  body  are  receiving  the  services  of  the 
rubber.  By  the  time  that  the  body  of  the  horse 
is  clean  the  mud  upon  the  legs  will  have  dried, 
and,  the  bandages  being  removed,  the  dirt  may 
easily  be  brushed  out,  a  good  hand-rubbing 
following.  The  hoofs  should  then  be  cleaned 
out  and  washed,  and  the  horse  be  placed  in  its 
stall  knee-deep  in  straw.  Should  a  horse  be 
brought  in  late  and  really  "  done  up "  by  its 
work,  it  will  be  better  to  give  it  a  pail  of  warm 
gruel,  rub  dry  the  saddle-place,  and  turn  it  into 
a  warm  box-stall  at  once,  without  annoying  it 
with  the  brushing  and  handling  that  would  be 
necessary  to  clean  it  thoroughly.  No  weary 
horse,  no  matter  how  dirty  it  may  be,  has  ever 
been  the  worse  for  a  few  hours  of  complete  rest 
under  such  circumstances,  for  the  quiet  will  be 
of  far  more  importance  than  the  dressing.  But 
this  course  should  be  followed  only  under  the 
directions  of  the  master,  who  should  always  see 
that  his  overworked  horses  get  the  attention  they 
require,  if  he  does  not  superintend  the  'general 
stable  work  from  time  to  time  as  he  should. 


44  Riding 

When  the  hairs  of  the  tail  require  cleaning,  it 
is  well  to  use  plenty  of  unchilled  water,  pretty 
well  saturated  with  salt,  washing  the  dock  also 
with  the  solution;  and  this  should  be  used  when- 
ever the  horse  shows  a  disposition  to  rub  its  tail 
against  the  side  of  the  stall.  The  horse  should 
be  dressed  in  some  covered  place  that  is  shut  off 
from  the  stalls ;  and  the  owner  should,  occasion- 
ally at  least,  look  in  on  his  horses  when  they  are 
being  dressed  and  at  feeding  time  ;  and  should 
he  find  that  he  is  not  master  of  his  own  stables,  he 
should  change  his  groom  or  give  over  keeping 
horses. 

This  page  is  being  written  while  the  thermom- 
eter is  playing  about  zero  and  a  cold  north  wind 
is  blustering  round  the  corners  of  the  house, 
which  state  of  affairs  suggests  that,  when  it  can 
be  afforded,  it  is  expedient  to  have  a  covered  ride 
in  which  horses  may  be  exercised  and  trained  in 
stormy  weather.  An  area  35  feet  by  70  feet  is 
quite  large  enough  for  twelve  or  more  horses, 
and  the  many  turns  and  bends  required  by  the 
limited  space  will  improve  the  horses  therein 
exercised  in  every  particular.  Then  the  other- 
wise weary  days  of  winter  may  be  made  enjoyable 
to  the  horseman  by  musical  rides,  for  many  pretty 
and  intricate  figures  may  be  formed  by  ten  or 
twelve  riders.  My  riding-house  is  28  feet  by  60, 
and  it  is  quite  large  enough  for  my  purposes,  as  I 


Purchase,  Care,  and  Sale  45 

always  work  my  horses  singly  and  without  an 
attendant.  In  London  I  saw  Corradini  training 
a  manege  horse  in  the  gangway  of  a  stable,  behind 
a  row  of  stalls ;  he  had  a  space  of  about  8  feet 
by  30.  I  believe  that  the  horse  was  never 
galloped  until  it  was  ridden  in  public  in  the  circus 
ring,  but  the  schooling  it  had  received  made  it 
fit  for  any  movement. 

A  little  study  and  a  little  experience  should 
teach  a  man  much  regarding  the  shoeing  of  his 
horse.  If  the  animal  has  true  and  level  action,  it 
should  have  light  irons  all  round.  If  it  shambles, 
or  if  the  stride  is  too  confined,  the  weight  of  the 
shoes  should  be  increased.  The  upper  surface  of 
the  iron,  which  comes  next  to  the  hoof,  should  be 
flat ;  the  lower  surface  may  be  bevelled  from  the 
outside,  or  have  a  groove  in  which  the  holes  for 
the  nails  are  punched.  The  hind  shoes  should 
have  very  small  calks,  the  toes  being  correspond- 
ingly thickened  to  give  a  level  bearing.  Only  so 
much  of  the  crust  or  wall  of  the  hoof  should  be 
removed  as  will  give  the  foot  a  level  bearing, 
keeping  the  toe  straight  and  the  face  of  the  hoof 
with  the  slope  which  conforms  to  that  of  the 
pastern.  The  bars  at  the  heels  should  not  be 
cut  away,  except  upon  the  recommendation  of  a 
veterinary,  and  the  frog  and  sole  should  have 
nothing  removed  from  them  beyond  the  loose 
flakes  that  show  themselves  as  those  parts  are 


46  Riding 

renewed.  The  shoe  should  then  be  made  to  fit 
the  prepared  hoof,  and  fastened  by  no  more  than 
five  nails,  three  on  the  outside  quarter,  two  on  the 
inside,  the  protruding  ends  of  the  nails  being  cut 
off  and  the  exposed  points  clinched.  The  outer 
wall  of  the  hoof  must  not  be  rasped  or  scraped. 

Turned-in  toes  or  toes  turned  out  may  be  pro- 
duced by  bad  shoeing,  or,  when  natural  malforma- 
tions, be  mitigated  more  or  less  by  good  work,  a 
glance  at  the  foot  showing  what  is  required  in 
each  case.  So  brushing,  interfering,  overreach- 
ing, forging,  bowed  tendons,  and  many  other 
disorders  may  be  produced  or  prevented.  No 
horse  should  be  sent  to  the  forge  unattended 
unless  the  smith  is  a  master  of  his  craft,  a  white 
blackbird.  For  ice-covered  roads  and  for  slip- 
pery asphalt  streets,  I  have  fo'und  no  shoes  equal 
to  Dryden's  rubber  pads. 

^Vhen  it  is  no  longer  advisable  to  retain  a 
horse,  it  will  usually  be  found  that  a  satisfac- 
toiy  sale  is  even  more  difficult  than  a  satisfac- 
tory purchase.  The  saying  "  first  loss  is  best " 
applies  in  this  case  with  force.  If  a  dealer  will 
not  take  the  animal,  it  is  better  to  send  it  to 
the  auction  block  than  to  hold  on  indefinitely 
for  a  chance  buyer.  If  the  seller  desires  to  keep 
in  touch  with  the  horse  and  to  be  kept  informed 
of  its  future,  he  will  give  a  warranty. 


CHAPTER    IV 

SOME   SADDLE-HORSE   STOCK    FARMS 

With  Lexington,  Kentucky,  as  a  centre  one 
may,  with  a  radius  of  thirty  miles,  describe  a  cir- 
cumference which  will  embrace  more  fine  horses 
than  any  area  of  like  extent  upon  the  globe. 
Here  is  the  home  of  the  American  saddle-horse, 
a  well-bred  animal  that  has  no  superior  for  pleas- 
ure riding.  There  were  good  saddle-horses  in 
Kentucky  before  Denmark,  Hedgeford's  cele- 
brated son,  made  his  appearance ;  but  it  was 
largely  to  the  influence  of  this  stallion  upon 
suitable  stocks  that  the  superb  animals  now 
under  consideration  owe  their  existence,  for  ^w, 
if  any,  of  these  horses  are  without  some  strains 
of  Denmark  blood,  even  a  slight  infusion  seem- 
ing to  have  great  effect.  From  Kentucky  these 
saddle-horses  have  found  their  way  into  Illinois, 
Missouri,  Tennessee,  and  other  states,  and  have 
always  met  with  appreciation  for  their  excellent 
qualities. 

The  grazing  region  of  central  Kentucky  has 
a  gently  undulating  surface,  watered  with  pretty 
streams  and  artificial  lakes ;    on  every  hand   are 


48  Riding 

groves  of  noble  trees  in  sufficient  number  to 
diversify  the  landscape;  and  a  carpet  of  rich 
green  turf  is  spread  over  the  ground,  even  where 
the  shade  is  most  dense.  The  climate,  the  nutri- 
tious food,  and  the  intelligent  care  of  man  have 
made  these  pastures  celebrated  the  world  over 
for  the  character  of  the  domestic  animals  they 
produce. 

Within  short  railway  journeys  of  Lexington, 
through  a  lovely,  smiling  country,  are  a  number 
of  stock  farms  devoted  to  the  breeding  of  rid- 
ing-horses; for,  although  the  stupidity  of  "the 
market"  demands  that  these  animals  shall  be 
quiet  to  drive,  they  are  bred  on  purely  saddle- 
horse  lines,  and  the  breeder  hopes  that  no  animal 
leaving  his  hands  will  ever  be  called  upon  to  look 
through  a  collar.  I  have  known  of  one  case 
where  a  farmer  asked  the  privilege  of  taking  back 
a  very  fine  animal  at  the  purchase  price  rather 
than  see  it  put  to  harness  work. 

A  soldier  throughout  two  wars,  an  active  and 
efficient  park  commissioner  in  Louisville,  the 
city  of  his  adoption,  a  man  of  extensive  travel 
and  one  prominent  in  many  affairs,  General  John 
B.  Castleman  has  felt  it  his  duty,  as  well  as  his 
pleasure,  to  give  much  time  and  attention  to  the 
improvement  of  the  saddle-horse.  Emily,  winner 
of  the  first  premium  over  mares  of  any  age  at  the 
Columbian    Exposition,    Dorothy,    with   a    clear 


Some  Saddle-horse  Stock  Farms         49 

record  in  seventy  show  rings,  Matilda,  who  met 
defeat  but  once  in  fifty  competitions,  and  many 
other  fine  animals  were  reared  by  this  gentleman. 
Some  years  since  General  Castleman  removed  his 
breeding  establishment  to  Clifton  Farm,  Mercer 
County,  and  he  has  recently  placed  it  in  the 
hands  of  his  son.  Major  David  Castleman.  Here, 
upon  a  range  of  eight  hundred  acres,  may  be 
found  horses  of  only  the  most  select  strains,  bred 
upon  lines  v^^hich  have  been  proved  true  after 
years  of  study  and  experiment.  At  the  head  of 
the  stud  is  Cecil  Palmer,  a  splendid  animal, 
of  perfect  paces,  and  in  whose  pedigree  may 
be  found  the  names  of  Denmark,  Cockspur, 
Whip,  Gray  Eagle,  Vermont  Black  Hawk,  and 
other  horses  whose  blood  is  in  the  best  represen- 
tatives of  the  saddle-animal. 

The  horses  of  Clifton  Farm  are  broken  to  ride 
at  two  years  of  age,  and  their  education  is  carried 
on  very  slowly  and  most  carefully.  The  foal 
almost  invariably  takes  naturally  to  "the  five 
gaits,"  but  no  effort  is  made  to  force  the  animal 
into  any  particular  pace ;  and  if  the  influence  of 
some  remote  trotting  ancestor  exhibits  itself  in 
an  indisposition  to  take  the  rack  or  the  running 
walk,  the  animal  is  not  required  to  accept  such 
accomplishments.  The  writer  saw  Major  Castle- 
man ride  Garrard,  a  two-year-old,  in  the  slow 
gallop  (or  canter),  the  complacency,  tempo,  and 


50  Riding 

action  of  which  would  have  been  creditable  to  a 
park  hack  of  mature  years  and  careful  training. 
Indeed,  the  docility  of  these  riding-horses,  ob- 
served everywhere  in  a  rather  thorough  tour,  was 
remarkable. 

A  ride  of  fifteen  or  twenty  minutes  from  Lex- 
ington, upon  the  Southern  railway,  will  bring 
the  visitor  to  Pisgah,  where  he  will  find  the  estab- 
lishment of  the  Gay  Brothers,  the  largest  farm 
devoted  to  the  rearing  of  saddle-horses  in  this 
country.  Here  about  three  hundred  choice  ani- 
mals have  the  freedom  of  nearly  one  thousand 
acres  of  blue-grass  pasture.  At  the  head  of  the 
stud  is  Highland  Denmark,  a  true  type  of  his 
family,  the  sire  of  more  prize  winners  and  fine 
foals  than  any  stallion  in  the  state.  At  the  Louis- 
ville Horse  Show,  in  1903,  the  descendants  of 
this  horse  gained  first  honors  in  the  classes  for 
two-year-olds,  for  three-year-olds,  for  four-year- 
olds,  for  the  best  registered  saddle-horse,  and  for 
the  championship  ($1000  value).  He  is  the  sire 
of  Motto  and  of  Elsa,  well  known  throughout 
the  country.  Highland  Denmark  is  a  magnifi- 
cent animal,  16  hands  in  height,  of  splendid 
form  and  graceful  movements,  docile  in  temper, 
and,  although  he  runs  loose  and  "  has  not  had  a 
stable  door  shut  in  his  face  "  for  five  years,  his 
beautiful  dark  bay  coat  shines  like  satin.  No 
stock   that   the  writer   saw  in  Kentucky  was  in 


FIG.  23.  — GARRARD.    TWO   YEARS  OLD 


FIG.   24.  — CARBONEL,    FOUR  YEARS   OLD 


Some  Saddle-horse  Stock  Farms  51 

better  condition  than  that  of  the  Gay  Brothers, 
the  foals  of  the  present  year  being  particularly 
strong  and  active. 

The  Gay  Brothers  break  their  horses  to  saddle 
at  two  years  of  age ;  at  three  years  of  age  their 
education  is  enlarged ;  and  at  four  they  are  ready 
for  purchasers,  and  none  of  them  remain  on  hand 
unless  retained  for  some  specific  purpose.  So 
great  is  the  demand  for  horses  of  this  class,  that 
breeders  could  readily  dispose  of  more  than  double 
the  numbers  they  can  furnish,  and  dealers  and 
other  purchasers  find  it  difficult  to  obtain  very 
desirable  horses  of  four  years  and  upward.  Some 
dealers  buy  weanlings  and  yearlings  to  make 
sure  of  the  produce  of  certain  well-known  mares, 
and  it  is  by  no  means  a  rare  case  that  a  foal  makes 
its  appearance  in  the  world,  the  property  of  some 
one  other  than  the  breeder  who  has  anticipated 
its  birth. 

The  saddle-horse  farm  next  in  size  to  that  of 
Gay  Brothers  is  that  of  Colonel  John  T.  Wood- 
ford, near  Mount  Sterling,  about  thirty  miles  from 
Lexington.  Colonel  Woodford  is  well  and  favor- 
ably known,  not  only  throughout  his  native  state, 
but  wherever  the  Kentucky  saddle-horse  finds 
admirers;  and  many  of  his  horses  are  sold  to 
clients  who  have  never  seen  his  animals,  but  who 
rely  upon  Colonel  Woodford  to  carry  out  their 
wishes.       Indeed,    more    than    one    disinterested 


52  Riding 

admirer  volunteered  the  information  to  the  writer 
that  the  purchaser  who  trusted  to  Colonel  Wood- 
ford's choice  was  apt  to  fare  better  than  he  who 
made  his  own  selection  with  less  knowledge  of 
the  animal.  At  the  head  of  this  stud  is  Forest 
Denmark,  a  famous  sire.  Then  comes  Stirling 
Chief,  a  fine  chestnut  stallion,  well  bred  and  truly 
made,  of  vigorous  but  graceful  action,  exact  paces, 
and  a  kind  disposition,  half-brother  to  Montgom- 
ery Chief  and  to  Bourbon  King,  the  two  most 
highly  admired  stallions  of  their  class.  Here,  too, 
are  Dickens,  a  beautiful  horse  of  a  rich  brown  coat, 
and  Lexington,  both  Denmarks  on  the  side  of  sire 
and  of  dam.  This  breeding  is  not  so  usual  as 
might  be  supposed,  although  one  of  the  best 
judges  of  saddle-horses  in  the  state  of  Kentucky 
spoke  the  general  sentiment  when  he  said  that  a 
saddle-horse  could  not  have  too  much  Denmark 
blood.  About  one  hundred  animals  of  various 
ages,  all  of  the  best  strains,  fill  up  the  tale. 
Colonel  Woodford  does  not  break  his  horses  to 
saddle  until  they  are  in  their  fourth  year,  as  he 
desires  that  they  should  have  strength  and  devel- 
opment before  they  undergo  training;  but  their 
excellent  dispositions  and  the  handling  incident 
to  their  care  make  them  quiet  and  easy  to  manage 
and  quick  to  learn. 

Five  miles  from  Versailles,  a  short  journey  from 
Lexington,  one  finds  the  farm  of  the  Ball  Brothers. 


FIG.  25.  — HIGH    LASSIE.     TWO    YEARS   OLD 


FIG.    26. —  MARES   AND    FOALS.     GAY    BROTHERS 


Some  Saddle-horse  Stock  Farms         53 

This  is  the  home  of  Montgomery  Chief,  the  grand 
horse  that  has  fairly  carried  off  the  honors  wher- 
ever he  has  been  shown.  In  1902  he  won  the 
championship  at  Louisville,  Nashville,  Indianap- 
olis, Kansas  City,  St.  Louis,  and  Chicago.  In 
1903,  barred  at  Louisville,  he  was  champion  at 
Kansas  City  ($1000  prize),  Chicago,  St.  Louis, 
and  Atlanta.  In  1904  he  was  first  in  his  class  at 
the  St.  Louis  Exposition.  Of  imposing  size,  great 
substance,  faultless  form,  golden  coat,  proud  car- 
riage, and  brilliant  action,  Montgomery  Chief  is  an 
admirable  animal.  His  qualities  seem  too  great 
for  everyday  use,  and  he  is  worthy  of  bearing  an 
emperor  at  the  head  of  a  victorious  army.  If  dur- 
ing his  career  the  country  had  a  more  beautiful 
saddle  stallion,  it  is  to  be  regretted  that  no  such 
appearance  was  made,  and  this  horse  must  be  con- 
sidered the  greatest  of  his  class  and  day  until  his 
colors  are  taken  from  him  in  public  competition. 

It  must  not  be  understood  that  excellent  saddle- 
horses  may  be  found  only  on  the  large  stock  farms, 
where  the  selection  is  greater  and  the  chances 
are  greater.  There  is  a  good  horse  for  nearly 
every  holding  in  the  Blue  Grass  region,  and  the 
man  who  breeds  his  only  mare  may  through  good 
luck,  aiding  good  judgment,  rear  a  Montgomery 
Chief  or  a  Bourbon  King,  the  last-named,  I  may 
say,  being  a  young  horse  selected  by  many  of  the 
best  judges  to  bear  away  the  bell  in  future  contests. 


CHAPTER   V 

THE   SADDLE  — THE   BRIDLE  — HOW   TO   MOUNT 

The  English  or  flat  saddle,  is  the  only  one  fit 
for  sport  or  pleasure.  It  gives  no  trouble  in 
mounting  or  dismounting,  it  is  the  only  form 
which  permits  every  man  to  obtain  the  true  seat, 
and  it  is  far  and  away  the  most  comfortable  tree 
when  a  horse  falls  with  its  rider.  It  is  used  by 
civilians  throughout  the  civilized  world,  and  by 
military  men  in  their  sports  and  whenever  its  use 
by  them  is  permissible.  Indeed,  the  nearer  the 
requirements  of  the  military  saddle  allow  it  to  ap- 
proach the  English  saddle,  the  better. 

The  tree  of  the  saddle  should  have  a  cut-back 
pommel  to  prevent  the  withers  of  the  horse  from 
being  chafed.  The  side-bars  should  take  an  even 
bearing  upon  each  side  of  the  horse's  back,  a 
channel  in  the  panel  being  made  to  keep  the 
saddle  clear  of  the  spine.  The  throat  of  the  tree 
should  not  be  narrow  enough  to  pinch  the  horse; 
if  too  broad,  it  will  not  be  stable.  The  tree  being 
suitable  in  other  respects,  it  will  be  very  easy  to 
bend  the  lower  points  until  they  embrace  the 
shoulders  snugly,  and  to  have  a  well-fitted  saddle. 

54 


FIG.  27.  — STIRLING   CHIEF 


FIG.   28.— STIRLING   CHIEF    IN    TROT 


The  Saddle  55 

The  stirrups  should  be  of  tempered  steel,  of 
large  size  and  not  too  light,  with  the  tread  at 
least  an  inch  in  breadth.  When  the  panel,  or 
under  stuffing  of  the  saddle,  has  been  found  to  be 
right,  care  should  be  taken  to  preserve  it,  as  it  is 
very  difficult  to  find  a  saddler  who  will  replace  it 
exactly.  A  cloth  of  felt  or  a  piece  of  thin  leather 
under  the  saddle  will  preserve  the  panel  for 
many  years.  In  places  where  I  have  found  it 
impossible  to  have  the  panel  satisfactorily  fitted, 
I  have  removed  it  altogether,  and  girthed  the 
saddle  over  thick  felt  numnah,  a  proceeding  which 
answered  perfectly.  Saddle-galls  are  always  due 
either  to  an  ill-fitting  tree  or  an  ill-fitting  rider ; 
they  are  preventable,  they  should  not  exist. 

The  saddle  having  been  found  to  suit  the  horse, 
the  rider  may  consider  his  own  comfort  and  con- 
venience. It  is  always  better,  where  skilful  work- 
men can  be  found,  to  buy  the  tree  of  the  right 
length  and  have  the  saddle  finished  to  suit  horse 
and  rider.  The  web  foundation  of  the  seat  can 
readily  be  arranged,  before  the  pigskin  is  put  on, 
so  that  the  dip  will  suit  the  conformation  of  the 
man.  The  dip,  or  lowest  point  of  the  seat,  should 
be  slight.  If  too  far  to  the  rear,  it  will  give  the 
man  a  sensation  of  fallingr  back ;  if  too  far  to  the 
front,  it  will  throw  his  body  forward.  When,  sit- 
ting upon  his  buttocks,  he  finds  that  he  maintains 
a  perfectly  erect  seat  without  restraint,  it  is  just 


5  6  Riding 

right.  Where  saddlers  do  not  know  their  trade, 
it  only  remains  to  try  finished  saddles  until  the 
horse  and  the  man  are  suited. 

The  whip  should  be  a  light,  straight,  flexible 
contrivance,  with  no  more  of  a  lash  than  a  silken 
tip.  The  use  of  the  crop,  except  in  the  hunting- 
field,  is  an  absurdity.  Fashion  dictates  that  the 
whip  should  be  held  nearly  straight  in  the  right 
hand  and  pointing  across  the  withers  of  the  horse ; 
but  Fashion  is  not  a  horseman.  As  the  whip 
should  give  strokes  upon  the  forehand  of  the 
horse  only  under  exceptional  circumstances, 
common  sense  dictates  that  the  instrument  should 
be  held  point  down,  so  that  it  may  be  applied 
with  facility  against  the  side  of  the  horse  just  back 
of  the  girths  —  the  proper  place  for  its  effects  to 
produce  increased  impulses  from  the  croup.  With 
a  woman  the  riding  rod  takes  the  place  of  the 
right  leg  of  the  horseman,  and  it  is  impossible  to 
use  it  in  that  manner  if  it  is  held  across  the 
shoulders  of  the  horse. 

There  are  but  two  bridle  bits  for  riding  purposes. 
The  first  and  most  useful  is  the  snaffle,  a  smooth, 
round  mouthpiece,  jointed  in  the  middle,  with 
rings,  and,  where  it  is  employed  alone,  with  cheek- 
pieces  also  on  the  ends.  The  snafiie  is  the  bit  for 
the  beginner,  because  he  can  do  little  harm  with  it ; 
and  it  is  the  bit  for  the  accomplished  horseman, 
because  in  his  hands  it  has  a  orreat  ran^e  of  effects. 


The  Bridle  57 

The  curb-bit  should  never  be  used  without  the 
snaffle,  as  there  are  often  occasions  when  the 
powers  of  the  curb-bit  alone  are  ineffectual,  and 
the  snaffle  must  go  to  its  assistance.  The  mouth- 
piece of  the  curb-bit  is  rigid,  with  a  raised  middle, 
or  "  port,"  to  give  ease  to  the  tongue  of  the  horse 
and  to  let  the  mouthpiece  come  down  upon  the 
bars  of  the  animal's  lower  jaw.  Upon  each  end  of 
the  mouthpiece  is  an  arm,  the  upper  branch  of 
which  has  a  fixed  ring  for  the  cheek-piece  of  the 
bridle,  the  lower  branch  having  a  loose  ring  to 
receive  the  rein.  The  lower  branch  of  this  arm, 
measuring  from  the  middle  of  the  mouthpiece 
to  the  middle  of  the  lower  ring,  should  be 
3^  inches  in  length.  The  upper  branch,  measur- 
ing from  the  middle  of  the  mouthpiece  to  the 
highest  part  of  the  ring,  into  which  the  head-stall 
is  buckled,  should  be  if  inches  in  length,  the 
assumed  depth  of  the  lower  jaw  of  the  horse. 
These  measurements  are  as  nearly  exact  as  may 
be,  to  get  the  effects  of  a  lever  of  the  second  class 
upon  such  a  yielding  and  changeable  thing  as  the 
head  of  the  horse,  the  animal  being,  say,  1 5^  hands 
high,  of  normal  form.  Upon  the  ring  of  the 
upper  branches  metal  hooks  are  fastened,  and  to 
these  the  curb-chain  is  attached.  When  the  curb- 
chain,  its  links  twisted  until  the  chain  is  flat,  fits 
properly  in  the  chin  groove  of  the  horse,  directly 
opposite  to   the  cannons  of  the    bit,  that    point 


58  Riding 

becomes  the  fulcrum  of  the  lever,  and  the  power 
being  applied  through  the  reins  to  the  long 
branches,  the  effects  are  applied  to  the  bars  of 
the  lower  jaw.  The  width  of  the  mouthpiece  will 
depend  upon  that  of  the  animal's  jaw ;  it  should 
not  be  so  narrow  as  to  pinch  the  muzzle  beween 
the  branches,  nor  so  wide  as  to  have  an  annoy- 
ing play. 

To  place  the  double  bridle  upon  the  horse,  the 
groom  should  approach  the  animal  on  the  near 
side,  his  left  arm  carrying  the  bridle  by  the  head- 
piece and  reins.  Then,  the  stall  halter  having 
been  removed,  he  will  pass  the  reins  over  the 
head  of  the  horse  until  they  rest  upon  the  neck 
near  the  withers;  taking  the  bridle  in  the  right 
hand  by  the  head-piece,  so  that  the  nose  of  the 
horse  goes  between  the  cheek-pieces,  he  will  raise 
the  bridle  until  the  bits  are  about  to  touch  the 
animal's  lips ;  then,  opening  its  mouth  with  the 
thumb  of  the  left  hand,  he  will  gently  insert 
the  bits  and  slip  the  head-piece  over  the  poll  of 
the  horse  and  see  that  the  ears  are  free,  finally 
fastening  the  throat-lash  loosely. 

The  bridle  should  be  so  fitted  that  the  snaffle 
lies  snugly  up  in  the  corners  of  the  horse's  mouth 
without  pressing  against  the  lips.  The  curb-bit, 
lower  in  the  mouth,  should  rest  upon  the  bare 
bars  just  above  the  tusks  of  the  horse  or  the  place 
where  they  are  usually  found  in  the  male.     The 


FIG.   29.  — DOUBLE   BRIDLE   FITTED 


FIG.    30.  — MOUNTING   WITH    STIRRUPS 


The  Bridle  59 

curb-chain  should  not  be  fastened  until  the  rider 
is  about  to  mount,  and  a  horse  should  never  be  led 
while  the  curb-chain  is  hooked  on  both  sides. 

In  hooking  up  the  curb-chain  it  should  first  be 
seen  that  on  the  far  side  it  is  outside  of  the 
snafifle ;  then  it  should  be  twisted  until  it  is  quite 
flat  and  hooked  up  on  the  near  side  outside  of  the 
snaffle,  at  just  such  a  length  as  to  lie  smoothly  in 
the  chin  groove.  To  test  the  accuracy  of  this  the 
curb-reins  should  be  seized  under  the  jaw  of  the 
horse  and  drawn  toward  its  chest.  If  the  bit 
stands  stiffly,  the  chain  is  too  tight.  If  the 
branches  of  the  curb-bit  come  back  in  a  line  with 
the  reins  or  anywhere  near  it,  the  chain  is  too 
loose.  The  chain  will  be  found  to  be  of  the  right 
length  when,  maintaining  its  place  in  the  chin 
groove,  a  slight  tension  upon  the  reins  gives  such 
a  pressure  upon  the  jaw  of  the  horse.  If  the 
curb-chain  be  not  brought  from  one  hook  to  the 
other  on  the  outside  of  the  snaffle,  it  will  interfere 
with  the  action  of  both  bits  and  will  pinch  the 
lips  of  the  horse.  On  more  than  half  of  the 
saddle-horses  I  look  at,  this  important  rule  is  not 
observed. 

It  is  the  usual  and  better  custom  to  have  the 
horse  turn  in  its  stall  when  the  halter  is  taken  off, 
and  to  bridle  it  as  it  stands  with  tail  to  the 
manger.  Then  the  horse  is  led  to  the  gangway 
and  the  saddle  put  on  ;   if  the  saddling  has  not 


6o  Riding 

been  done  some  half-hour  previously,  as  is  to  be 
recommended. 

In  saddling  the  horse  the  first  care  is  to  see 
that  the  panel  is  perfectly  clean  and  dry,  then  that 
the  hairs  on  the  back  of  the  horse  lie  smoothly ; 
the  saddle,  with  the  girths  and  stirrup  leathers 
crossed  over  the  seat,  should  be  lifted  gently  on 
to  the  back  of  the  horse,  and  put  exactly  in  the 
saddle-place,  which  is  as  far  forward  as  it  will 
remain  fixed  and  yet  clear  the  withers  and  give 
the  shoulders  free  play. 

Unless  a  rider  is  accustomed  to  mounting,  and 
that  in  some  settled  manner,  it  is  often  a  very 
awkward  performance.  Provided  he  does  not 
pull  at  the  cantle  and  so  bring  the  saddle  awry  to 
gall  the  horse,  it  does  not  matter  greatly  how  he 
gets  safely  on  the  back  of  the  horse.  He  may, 
standing  on  the  near  side  of  the  horse,  either  take 
the  reins  in  his  right  hand  and  with  it  clasp  the 
pommel  of  the  saddle,  insert  his  left  foot  in  the 
stirrup,  spring  from  the  ball  of  the  right  foot,  and, 
seizing  a  lock  of  the  mane,  steady  himself  until  he 
carries  his  right  leg  over  the  croup  and  so  sink  into 
the  saddle ;  or,  facing  to  the  rear,  he  may  take  the 
reins  in  his  left  hand  and  with  it  seize  a  lock  of 
the  mane,  then,  inserting  his  left  foot  in  the  stirrup, 
spring  from  the  right  foot,  and  as  he  rises  take 
hold  of  the  pommel  of  the  saddle,  carry  his  right 
leg  over  the  back  of  the  horse,  and  when  he  has 


FIG.   31.  — MOUNTING   WITHOUT  STIRRUPS 


FIG.    32.  — MOUNTING   WITHOUT   STIRRUPS 


FIG,  33,  — DISMOUNTING  WITHOUT  STIRRUPS 


How  to  Mount  6i 

found  his  seat  transfer  the  reins  to  his  right  hand. 
By  the  former  manner  he  will  have  the  advantage 
of  being  able  to  control  the  horse,  in  case  it  goes 
forward,  as  the  right  hand,  holding  the  reins,  may 
readily  be  freed  from  the  pommel.  The  latter 
mode  is,  perhaps,  less  difficult,  especially  with  a 
tall  horse.  If  the  animal  is  restless,  the  rider  may 
have  "a  leg  up,"  as  the  jockeys  do,  by  taking 
grasps  of  the  mane  and  pommel  and  having  an 
attendant  seize  his  left  leg  above  the  ankle  and 
aid  him  in  rising  to  the  position  from  which 
he  may  carry  his  right  leg  over. 

In  dismounting  with  the  stirrup,  the  rider 
should  first  release  his  right  foot ;  then,  transfer- 
ring the  reins  to  his  right  hand,  he  should  with  it 
seize  the  pommel  and  with  his  left  hand  take  a 
lock  of  the  mane ;  then,  taking  his  weight  upon 
his  left  foot,  supported  by  his  hands,  he  should 
carry  his  right  leg  over  the  croup,  face  the  horse, 
and  come  gently  to  the  ground  on  his  right  foot, 
finally  releasing  his  left  foot  and  his  holds  upon 
mane  and  pommel,  the  reins  being  retained,  to 
control  the  horse. 

Any  man  of  ordinary  activity  should  be  able  to 
vault  into  the  saddle  without  the  aid  of  the  stirrup 
or  the  assistance  of  a  groom,  whether  the  horse 
be  standing  or  moving,  even  in  the  gallop.  In- 
deed, by  taking  advantage  of  the  movements  of 
the  animal,  a  man  may  more  readily  vault  into  the 


62  Riding 

saddle  of  a  horse  that  is  not  at  rest  than  when  it 
is  standing  quietly,  provided  that  he  can  get  at 
the  near  shoulder  of  the  horse  and  secure  his 
clasps  upon  the  mane  and  the  pommel.  That  is,  if 
he  can  get  the  proper  holds,  from  the  right  posi- 
tion, no  horse  can  prevent  his  gaining  his  seat. 

To  vault  into  the  saddle,  the  man  should  stand 
facing  the  near  shoulder  of  the  horse.  In  the  left 
hand  he  should  take  a  lock  of  the  mane,  halfway 
between  the  ears  and  the  withers,  and,  with  the 
right  hand  resting  on  the  front  of  the  saddle,  he 
should  grasp  the  throat  of  the  pommel,  thumb 
under,  fingers  pointing  to  the  ground  over  the 
right  side  of  the  horse.  Then,  springing  from 
the  balls  of  both  feet,  he  should  take  his  weight 
upon  his  extended  arms  and,  carrying  his  right 
leg  over  the  croup  of  the  horse,  sink  into  his  seat. 
Should  the  horse  be  plunging  or  moving,  the  man 
will  mark  the  time  of  some  forward  impulse,  and 
springing  with  it  reach  the  saddle  without  mak- 
ing the  exact  position  on  the  extended  arms ;  in 
other  words,  he  will  throw  himself  upon  the  horse 
as  it  pulls  him  forward.  Always  in  mounting,  by 
this  or  by  any  other  method,  except  that  secondly 
described,  the  reins  should  be  taken  in  the  right 
hand  and  held  by  pressure  against  the  pommel, 
so  that  in  case  of  failure  the  rider  will  be  able  to 
control  his  horse  ;  when  his  seat  is  secured,  the 
rider  will  pass  the  reins  into  the  bridle-hand. 


FIG.    34.— THE   JOCKEY   SEAT 


FIG.    35.  — POINTING    KNEES   ABOVE   THE   CREST 
OF   THE   HORSE 


How  to  Dismount  63 

To  dismount  without  stirrups,  the  rider  should 
transfer  the  reins  to  his  right  hand,  take  the  holds 
on  mane  and  pommel  as  in  mounting,  lean  far  for- 
ward, and,  taking  his  weight  upon  his  flexed  arms, 
carry  his  right  leg  back  over  the  croup  to  the  near 
side,  and  drop  gently  to  the  ground. 

In  dismounting  from  a  moving  horse  —  and 
this  can  readily  be  done  even  at  a  moderate  gal- 
lop—  the  rider  should  be  ready  to  take  a  few 
steps  in  the  direction  of  progress  as  he  reaches 
the  ground,  in  order  that  he  may  maintain  his 
equilibrium. 


CHAPTER   VI 

THE   SEAT  — GENERAL   HORSEMANSHIP 

The  most  important  thing  in  horsemanship  is 
the  acquirement  of  a  stable  seat,  for  without  it 
not  only  is  the  rider  insecure,  but  it  is  impossible 
that  the  hand  should  act  with  lightness  and  pre- 
cision if  his  seat  is  so  feeble  that  under  any  cir- 
cumstances he  should  depend  upon  the  reins  for 
maintaining  his  position  on  the  horse. 

Whether  it  be  for  pleasure,  sport,  or  war,  a 
man  has  one  seat  that  is  the  best  possible.  This 
is  readily  obtained,  even  upon  mounting  the  horse 
for  the  first  time ;  but  to  keep  it  exactly  under  the 
more  or  less  vigorous  movements  of  the  horse 
requires  long  practice  and  a  suppleness  of  the 
body  in  every  part,  that  comes  from  carefully  fol- 
lowed exercises  in  the  saddle. 

The  seat  about  to  be  described  was  that  of  the 
earliest  riders,  represented  by  Pheidias,  described 
by  Xenophon,  employed  by  the  Bedouins  and 
other  Eastern  horsemen,  when  no  cumbrous  trees 
with  a  dip  of  varying  parts  of  a  circle  interfered 
with  a  position  that  was  safe,  natural,  and  rational, 
—  the  seat  in  use  before  those  saddles  which  held 
64 


J| 

.  :^:t,^^-^ 

p 

Tl 

FIG.   36. -SEAT   WITHOUT   STIRRUPS 

— n 

1     ..       -t- 

FIG.    37.— SEAT   WITH    STIRRUPS 


FIG.   38.  — LEANING    BACK 


The  Seat  65 

the  rider  between  high  pommels  and  high  cantles 
demanding  a  standing  posture  in  the  stirrups  that 
prohibited  the  grasp  of  the  knees  and  thighs  and 
the  pHancy  of  the  body  which  gives  friction  and 
balance  to  the  mounted  man. 

I  may  say  here  that  the  saddletree  was  not 
used  until  the  Romans  introduced  it  sometime 
in  the  fourth  century,  and  the  stirrup  followed  in 
the  seventh  century,  first  as  an  aid  in  mounting 
and  finally  as  a  support.  The  Greeks  and  their 
ancestors  and  the  horsemen  of  the  Euphrates 
Valley  rode  upon  cloths  and  skins,  without  stir- 
rups and  without  trees.  The  first  mention  of  the 
horse  that  we  find  upon  the  monuments  is  sup- 
posed to  date  about  3800  years  before  our  era. 
The  first  representation  of  the  horse  is  upon  a 
little  wooden  disk  now  in  the  British  Museum,  in 
which  two  horses  attached  to  a  chariot  by  har- 
nesses that  closely  resemble  those  now  in  use  are 
shown ;  and  this  work  is  ascribed  to  Aahmes  I. 
(about  1700  B.C.)  and  suggests  that  the  animal 
was  introduced  into  Egypt  by  the  Hyksos  (pos- 
sibly Bedouins),  as  they  had  possession  of  the 
country  previously.  I  cannot  find  any  represen- 
tations of  mounted  men  earlier  than  the  sculp- 
tures upon  the  Assyrian  monuments,  attributed  to 
the  middle  of  the  seventh  century  b.c.  It  would 
seem  from  the  inscriptions  and  from  historical 
writings  that,  both  in  war  and  in  the  chase,  the 


66  Riding 

horse  was  in  very  early  times  first  and  most  fre- 
quently used  in  harness;  and  there  can  be  no 
doubt  that  in  ancient  days  chariots  were  em- 
ployed in  charging  bodies  of  the  enemy  just  as 
modern  cavalry  are  used.  The  residents  of  moun- 
tainous countries,  I  venture  to  say,  were  the  first 
to  use  cavalry.  Wherever  the  ancient  rider  is 
shown  upon  the  monuments,  before  the  introduc- 
tion of  the  saddletree,  he  has  exactly  the  seat  of 
the  modern,  the  only  possible  seat  upon  a  flat  or 
treeless  saddle. 

The  variations  which  appear  in  the  seats  of 
modern  horsemen  are  observable  in  the  positions 
of  the  lower  parts  of  the  leg  from  the  knee  down, 
and  such  may  be  passed  over  as  negligible  quan- 
tities, for  the  principles  are  everywhere  observed ; 
and  while  it  is  doubtless  better  that  there  should 
be  no  deviations  from  the  canons  of  the  art  in 
any  particular,  circumstances  sometimes  demand 
trifling  changes,  as  when  the  soldier's  kit  requires 
the  lower  parts  of  his  legs  to  be  carried  unduly 
to  the  rear  of  the  perpendicular,  or  when  the  cross- 
country rider  drives  his  feet  home,  to  secure  the 
irons,  and  so  obtains  rigid,  insensible  bearing  in- 
stead of  the  lively,  springy  contact  of  the  balls  of 
the  toes.  It  is  like  walking  on  the  heels.  For 
the  best  results,  that  pressure  only  should  be  given 
to  the  tread  of  the  stirrup  that  will  hold  the  iron 
with  an  elastic  touch  ;  ajiy  undue  weight  will  force 


The  Seat  67 

the  seat,  as  can  plainly  be  understood.  This  forc- 
ing of  the  seat  is  usually  avoided  by  the  rider 
carrying  his  feet  to  the  rear  when  the  horse 
springs  in  jumping,  and  then  he  depends  upon 
his  true  seat  without  the  aid  of  the  stirrups ; 
where  this  is  not  done,  the  rider  does  not  stick 
very  closely  to  his  saddle,  as  many  of  the  photo- 
graphs of  leaping  horses  show.  I  do  not  say 
that  it  is  not  necessary  on  occasion  to  ride  with 
the  feet  home,  but  I  do  say,  that  it  gives  a  stiff 
seat,  and  that  it  should  only  be  followed  when 
the  necessity  arises;  certainly  not  for  pleasure 
riding,  where  that  mode,  as  well  as  the  crop,  are 
unsuitable. 

On  page  200  of  that  admirable  work,  "  Horses, 
Saddles,  and  Bridles,"  General  Carter  gives  a 
photographic  illustration  of  the  American  mili- 
tary seat,  which  is  an  absolutely  perfect  represen- 
tation of  the  seat  about  to  be  described.  The 
photographs  of  the  best  riders  of  the  various 
countries  reproduced  here  exhibit  the  same 
type ;  and  it  will  be  observed  that  where  the 
most  violent  exertions  of  the  horse  are  to  be 
expected  the  saddle  is  of  the  English  form,  for 
in  it  the  friction  and  balance  which  insure  firm- 
ness are  found  in  the  highest  degree. 

The  fiat  race  jockey  is  a  striking  exception  to 
what  has  been  said  of  horsemen's  seats,  and  the 
ridiculous  and   tottering   pose    he  assumes  is  to 


68  Riding 

throw  as  much  of  the  weight  as  possible  on  the 
shoulder  of  the  sprinter,  in  order  that  the  drivers 
of  the  hind  quarters  may  have  free  play.  But 
when  the  Jock  comes  to  steeplechasing,  he 
lengthens  his  stirrup  leather  and  rides  like  a 
man. 

The  man  may  find  his  own  best  seat  in  the 
following  manner :  mounting  the  horse,  he  should 
sit  down  in  the  saddle,  taking  his  weight  upon 
his  buttocks,  while  he  holds  his  body  erect,  the 
shoulders  held  back  squarely,  his  chin  slightly 
withdrawn,  while  his  arms  hang  down  loosely. 
He  should  then,  without  disturbance  in  any  other 
part  of  his  body,  raise  his  legs  upward  and  in- 
ward until  the  points  of  his  knees  meet  above 
the  crest  of  the  horse.  From  this  position  he 
will  drop  his  legs  slowly  until  the  inner  sides  of 
his  thighs  and  the  flat  inner  surfaces  of  his  bent 
knees  take  every  possible  point  of  contact  with 
the  saddle,  the  lower  parts  of  the  legs  hanging 
without  stiffness.  There  can  be  no  question  with 
regard  to  the  height  and  position  of  the  knees. 
Should  they  be  too  high,  the  upper  surfaces  of 
the  thigh  will  have  contact  with  the  saddle; 
should  they  be  too  low,  the  under  surfaces  of  the 
thigh  will  find  the  saddle,  when  the  points  of  the 
knees  take  this  hold.  The  jockey  seat  is  the  ex- 
treme type  of  the  first-named  condition,  the 
armor-clad  knight  an  extreme  type  of  the  latter. 


g^"!!^ 

3'^^ji^M 

^S 

N^ 

FIG.   40.  — A   PUPIL   OF   SAUMUR,    M.  DE  GISBERT 


^^JL.^            ^^                ^^^^ 

FIG.  41.  — THAT    MASTER   OF   THE   ART,   M.   DE    BUSSIGNY 


The  Seat  69 

The  length  of  the  stirrup  leathers  will  be  right 
when  the  tread  of  the  iron  strikes  the  heels. 
When  the  rider's  feet  are  inserted  in  the  stirrups, 
it  will  be  found  that  without  effort  they  are 
parallel  with  the  sides  of  the  horse,  and  very 
slightly  in  rear  of  the  perpendicular.  From  this 
erect  position  upon  his  buttocks,  together  with 
the  grasp  of  the  knees  and  thighs,  the  rider  has 
the  strongest  and  best  possible  seat  that  can  be 
obtained  through  weight,  balance,  and  friction ; 
and  from  it  the  upper  part  of  the  body  may,  with- 
out affecting  his  stability,  be  bent  forward  or 
back,  or  swayed  from  side  to  side,  as  circumstances 
may  require,  while  the  lower  parts  of  his  legs  are 
free  to  apply  the  calf  or  the  heel  with  rapidity  and 
precision  to  the  sides  of  the  horse.  How  much 
of  this  bending  or  this  swaying  of  the  body  may 
sometimes  be  required  is  exhibited  by  the  photo- 
graph of  the  Italian  cavalry  officer  who  rides 
down  the  face  of  a  cliff,  or  by  that  of  the  rider 
who  makes  a  wheel,  or  pirouette  volte,  at  a  rapid 
pace.  From  this  seat  the  soldier  may  rise  high 
enough  to  give  force  to  the  blow  of  his  sabre; 
the  hunter  may  send  his  feet  home  in  the  irons 
without  lengthening  the  leathers,  and  every  horse- 
man will  have  the  greatest  security  in  the  saddle 
that  his  skill  in  riding  makes  possible. 

There  must  be  no  rigidity;  from  that    elastic 
touch  of  the  ball  of  the  foot,  throughout  his  whole 


70  Riding 

body,  the  man  must  be  supple  and  unconstrained. 
Stiffness  in  any  part  will  destroy  the  essential 
harmony,  and  prohibit  grace  and  ease. 

Dancing  and  calisthenics  go  far  in  producing 
that  suppleness,  facility,  and  agility  so  necessary 
for  excellence  in  horsemanship,  and  gymnastic 
exercises  upon  the  back  of  the  horse  are  of  great 
assistance  in  acquiring  balance  and  firmness  of 
grip.  Some  of  these  more  important  mounted 
exercises  are  now  given,  and  others  will  occur 
to  the  man  who  cares  to  take  the  trouble  to  ride 
w^ll.  I  may  say  here  that  I  know  men  who  have 
been  riding  from  twenty  to  thirty  years  and 
through  carelessness  and  want  of  instruction  are 
but  little  better  horsemen  than  mere  beginners. 

A  very  quiet  horse  should  be  saddled  and 
bridled  and  taken  to  some  retired  place,  if  it  be 
a  bit  of  soft  ground  there  would  be  no  harm,  or 
be  brought  into  the  riding-house  where  there  are 
no  other  horses  except  those  being  used  for  a  like 
purpose. 

The  man  will  then  mount  and  take  the  posi- 
tion of  "  the  seat  without  stirrups,"  his  arms  hang- 
ing down  loosely.  He  should  then,  without 
disturbing  the  position  of  the  seat,  and  without 
struggling,  bend  forward  until  one  or  the  other 
shoulder  touches  the  crest  of  the  horse,  regaining 
the  erect  position  slowly  and  gently.  He  should 
in  a  like  manner  lean  backward,  until  his  shoul- 


FIG.    42. —CHASSEURS    D'AFRIQUl:: 


;rvice 


General  Horsemanship  71 

ders  rest  upon  the  croup  of  the  horse,  and  then  rise 
as  before. 

The  rider  will  then  lose  his  seat,  to  the  right 
or  to  the  left,  as  far  as  he  may  without  falling,  and 
regain  the  saddle  by  a  twist  of  the  body  and  but- 
tocks and  grasp  of  the  thighs,  without  taking  any 
assistance  from  his  hands.  This  exercise  is  valu- 
able in  giving  the  rider  the  power  of  regaining 
his  seat,  should  it  be  by  chance  disturbed,  with- 
out pulling  on  the  mouth  of  the  horse. 

From  the  seat  before  described,  the  rider  will 
carry  his  right  leg  over  the  crest  of  the  horse, 
then  he  should  turn  to  the  left  so  that  both  legs 
are  hanging  on  the  near  side  of  the  horse,  then 
carry  the  left  leg  over  the  croup  of  the  horse, 
which  brings  his  face  to  the  rear,  then  carry  over 
the  right  leg  to  the  far  side  of  the  horse,  and 
finally  resume  the  seat  by  carrying  his  left  leg 
over  the  crest  of  the  animal.  In  a  similar  man- 
ner the  turn  should  be  made  to  the  right,  and  in 
neither  case  may  aid  be  sought  from  the  hands. 

None  of  these  exercises  are  difficult;  after 
more  than  fifty  years'  work  in  the  saddle  I  do 
them  with  ease,  and  a  boy  or  a  young  man  should 
find  themselves  perfect  after  a  few  trials.  Begin- 
ners should  practise  them  daily,  and  no  horseman 
who  hopes  to  keep  up  his  suppleness  in  the 
saddle  should  neglect  them  for  any  length  of 
time  as  long  as  he  rides.     It  is  not  necessary  to 


72  Riding 

be  a  contortionist,  nor  will  it  answer  to  be  an 
ossified  freak. 

I  dare  not  say  how  old  a  man  may  be  and  yet 
retain  all  of  those  powers  which  make  him  a  skil- 
ful horseman.  I  know  many  riders  who  are  well 
up  in  the  "sixties,"  who  do  not  appear  to  have 
lost  any  of  their  adroitness.  That  master  of  the 
art,  De  Bussigny,  is  no  longer  very  young,  al- 
though no  one  would  believe  the  fact  on  seeing 
him  on  a  horse.  I  saw  James  Newsome  riding 
and  training  when  he  was  far  past  seventy.  I 
remember  being  present  when  that  gallant  gentle- 
man. Count  Taubenheim,  equerry  to  the  late 
king  of  Wiirtemberg,  already  past  ninety  years 
of  age,  rode  in  a  quadrille  before  the  present 
emperor  of  Germany  and  gained  deserved  ap- 
plause for  his  admirable  performance. 

We  have  inherited  from  the  English  many 
undesirable  prejudices,  among  them  the  belief 
that  no  "foreigner"  can  sit  a  horse.  In  every 
country  of  continental  Europe  the  majority  of 
men  who  are  accustomed  to  ride  are  thorough 
horsemen,  some  of  them  of  the  highest  distinc- 
tion, because  upon  the  continent  riding  is  looked 
upon  and  practised  as  an  art  which  requires 
application.  The  English  breed  the  best  horses 
in  the  world,  they  manage  those  in  harness  mar- 
vellously well,  and  there  are  no  bolder  or  more 
determined   horsemen ;    but  it  must  be  acknowl- 


FIG.    44,  — FRENCH   OFFICER 


iiiiii 


isttiimi 


FIG     45.  — FRENCH    OFFICERS 


i 

^ 

< 

sfll 

6^ 

1^ 

^p     ^0^ 

1^ 

K 

^ 

i 

^^ 

HpJS": 

> 

s 

% 

f::^ 

i"-  ": 

FIG.    46. -THE    FAULTLESS    HORSEMANSHIP    OF    ITALIANS 


FIG.    47.  — ITALIAN    OFFICERS 


FIG.    48.  — AN    ITALIAN    OFFICER 


General  Horsemanship  73 

edged  that  there  are  riders  in  Italy,  Germany, 
France,  and  Austria  who  equal  them  in  boldness 
and  determination  and  surpass  the  best  of  them 
in  dexterity  and  knowledge  of  the  art.  The  litera- 
ture of  the  various  countries  bears  out  what  has 
been  written  above,  for  until  very  recently  the 
English  works  on  horsemanship  were  crude  be- 
yond belief,  and  any  improvement  that  has  taken 
place  is  due  to  the  influence  of  foreign  authors. 

In  America  there  has  been,  until  very  recently, 
but  little  interest  in  horsemanship  except  in  some 
of  the  Southern  states,  and  among  soldiers  and 
the  few  devoted  to  polo  and  hunting;  but  the 
horse  shows,  now  so  general  throughout  the 
country,  have  excited  great  interest  in  the  horse ; 
the  riding-schools  offer  intelligent  instruction, 
and  between  them  there  will  be  fostered,  let  us 
hope,  a  taste  and  inclination  for  good  horses  and 
riding.  This  subject  will  be  treated  at  greater 
length  in  the  following  chapter. 

The  German  foot-soldier  is  very  stiff  in  his 
movements,  at  least  on  parade,  and  there  is  a 
certain  stiffness  about  the  trooper  that  detracts 
from  his  appearance  in  the  eyes  of  the  critic,  but 
his  seat  is  firm,  and  he  handles  his  horse  with 
precision.  His  officer  is  usually  a  very  fine 
horseman,  riding  boldly  and  easily  and  with  a 
knowledge  of  the  niceties  of  the  art.  Steeple- 
chasing  and  racing  are  practised  largely  through- 


74  Riding 

out  the  German  Empire ;  they  are  encouraged 
by  the  authorities  and  are  participated  in  by 
nearly  all  of  the  younger  army  men.  Every  one 
who  has  there  witnessed  these  sports  has  seen 
some  magnificent  examples  of  ready  and  skilful 
horsemanship.  I  must  confess  to  sharing  the 
favorable  opinion  of  the  late  emperor  regarding 
the  German  lieutenant  How  he  finds  time  with 
such  conscientious  devotion  to  his  manifold 
duties  to  make  his  frequent  and  splendid  appear- 
ances in  public  is  marvellous.  He  is,  perhaps,  a 
little  haughty  with  strangers,  and  undoubtedly 
more  than  a  little  arrogant  with  civilians,  failings 
due  to  his  education,  but  he  is  devoted  to  his 
profession,  a  high-minded  gentleman,  and  brave 
cavalier.  No  cavalry  ever  made  a  better  record 
than  did  that  of  Germany  in  the  last  war  with 
France. 

In  France,  from  a  very  early  period,  a  wide- 
spread interest  was  taken  in  systematic  horseman- 
ship that  has  not  abated,  and  both  the  military 
and  civil  life  furnish  many  excellent  horsemen. 
In  the  Bois,  in  the  exhibitions  on  the  Champs- 
Elysees,  at  the  races  and  steeplechases  about 
Paris,  and  elsewhere,  one  may  see  good  riding 
under  the  most  favorable  circumstances.  The 
troopers  of  the  French  army  are  less  rigid  in 
their  saddles  than  are  the  Germans,  and  they 
move    with    a    rapidity  and    precision  that    must 


General  Horsemanship  75 

make  them  a  formidable  force  in  the  attack. 
The  French  are  now  disposed  to  disavow  their 
obHs^ations  to  Baucher,  but  the  fact  is  that  all 
that  is  good  in  their  systems  was  invented  or 
formulated  by  that  master,  although  they  did  not 
follow  him  through  the  useless  refinements  of 
his  later  years,  and  all  modern  methods,  military 
or  civil,  are  founded  upon  Baucher's  method. 
No  country  has  furnished  such  instructors  in  the 
art  of  horsemanship  as  did  France  in  Pluvinel, 
La  Broue,  Sollisel,  Gueriniere,  Baucher,  Raabe, 
and  D'Aure,  or  the  equal  of  any  one  of 
them. 

While  the  average  rider  of  Italy  may  not  sur- 
pass his  brethren  of  other  countries,  the  Italian 
army  of  to-day  furnishes  the  most  daring  and 
the  most  skilful  horsemen  in  Europe.  Much  of 
this  excellence  is  due  to  the  instruction  and 
exercises  of  the  military  riding-school  in  Rome, 
and  the  admiration  which  the  feats  of  these 
officers  have  gained,  has  aroused  the  emulation 
of  those  in  the  other  provinces  of  the  empire, 
and,  it  may  be  said,  great  interest  among  horse- 
men throughout  the  world. 

In  considering  the  horsemanship  of  continental 
Europe,  where  nearly  everybody  who  rides  is,  or 
has  been,  in  the  army,  one's  mind  naturally  turns 
to  the  military;  but  this  is  not  so  of  England 
where  the  majority  is  with  the  civilians,  and  there 


76  Riding 

we  look  upon  the  hunting-field,  the  steeplechase 
course,  the  polo  grounds,  or  the  pleasant  Row. 

The  British  horseman  is  a  sportsman,  and  a 
good  sportsman,  for,  although  he  does  not  often 
have  to  submit  to  defeat,  he  takes  it  like  a  man 
and  is  ready  with  equal  mind  for  another  trial. 
His  insular  prepossessions  have  awakened  so 
much  animosity  in  the  minds  of  other  nations 
that  they  find  it  hard  to  be  just  to  him ;  and  after 
all  these  years  of  reciprocities  he  is  about  as 
greatly  misunderstood  by  European  nations  as 
they  are  by  him.  As  a  consequence,  he  jeers  and 
sneers  at  all  foreigners,  and  they  deny  that  he  is 
a  fair-minded  sportsman  or  a  good  horseman.  I 
am  speaking  now  of  the  general  public  who  form, 
or  at  least  express,  national  opinions,  for  it  is 
known  that  there  is  often  good  feeling  between 
those  members  of  the  various  nations  who  meet 
on  the  same  social  plane. 

An  English  sportsman,  at  his  best,  is  a  bold, 
strong,  determined  rider,  and  this  can  be  said  of 
a  greater  proportion  of  British  horsemen  than  of 
those  of  any  other  country ;  but  he  despises  all 
refinements,  and  many  things  which  upon  the 
continent  are  considered  essentials ;  he  looks 
upon  circus  tricks  as  beneath  his  notice;  the 
consequence  is  that  he  falls  behind  in  a  field  in 
which  he  should  be  first.  His  primary  object  in 
riding  is  to  get  across  a  difficult  country,  and  do 


r^m 


M 


FIG.    49. —TROOPER,    ROYAL   HORSE    GUARDS 


FIG.  50. —  TENT   PEGGING.     SCOTS   GRAYS 


General  Horsemansbip  tj 

it  quickly,  and  he  succeeds ;  he  is  encouraged  by 
his  favorite  authors,  who  know  nothing  beyond 
this,  to  believe  that  nothing  remains.  I  think 
that  the  observer  who  has  seen  the  sportsman 
ride  will  be  disappointed  with  the  horsemanship 
of  British  troopers ;  he  will,  I  think,  see  that  the 
officers,  as  a  rule,  ride  well  and  gracefully,  but 
that  the  men  do  not  ride  as  skilfully  as  they 
should,  their  instruction  being  turned  over  to 
riding-masters  who  follow  primitive  regulations. 
However,  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  British 
soldier  will  always  maintain  that  high  reputation 
for  valor  which  even  his  enemies  grant. 


CHAPTER  VII 

AMERICAN  HORSEMANSHIP  — OUR  CAVALRY 

I  HAVE  said  that  in  this  country  until  very 
recent  years  comparatively  little  interest  was  taken 
in  riding  except  in  some  of  the  Southern  states 
and  in  the  army.  This  was  not  because  aptitude 
for  the  exercise  was  confined  to  certain  districts, 
for  the  hunt,  polo,  and  riding  clubs,  and  the 
horse  shows,  now  so  general  throughout  the  con- 
tinent, are  proving  that  everywhere  our  coun- 
trymen have  the  ability  to  make  good  horsemen. 
In  the  East  there  is,  for  example,  Mr.  Foxhall 
Keene,  who  has  a  world-wide  fame  as  a  thorough 
sportsman  and  a  splendid  rider ;  and  although  he 
has  perhaps  no  superior  among  these  there  are  in 
New  York  and  Massachusetts  riders  of  the  very 
first  force. 

When  the  subject  of  riding  is  broached,  our 
minds  naturally  turn  to  Kentucky. 

From  a  long  line  of  good  horsemen  the  Ken- 
tuckian  inherits  a  love  for  the  animal  and  a  talent 
for  riding,  and  from  childhood  he  is  accustomed  to 
the  saddle.  His  work  in  breeding  and  in  training 
has  placed  his  country  under  a  debt  of  gratitude. 
78 


FIG.    51.  — GENERAL   CASTLEMAN 


American  Horsemanship  79 

Those  who  are  well  capable  of  judging  say  that 
the  sight  of  General  Castleman  upon  a  charger  of 
his  own  breeding  is  something  to  remember.  Mr. 
Charles  Railey  is  unrivalled  in  showing  the  grace- 
ful movements  of  a  well-balanced  saddle-horse, 
and  all  of  his  family  are  skilled  in  the  art  of  riding. 
These  names  are  mentioned  because  they  are  so 
widely  known,  but  there  is  no  part  of  the  state 
in  which  one  may  not  see  thr.t  the  words  "  Ken- 
tuckian  "  and  "  horseman  "  are  synonymous.  The 
writer  has  no  intention  of  slighting  Virginia,  Mis- 
souri, and  Illinois,  the  first-named  the  cradle  of 
horsemanship  in  this  country,  the  latter  two  rapidly 
taking  prominent  places  in  the  breeding  and  in 
the  training  of  the  riding-horse,  but  the  limits  of 
this  work  prevent  full  justice  being  done  to  all. 

I  have  nothing  but  admiration  for  the  skill  and 
daring  of  the  riders  of  the  Western  plains,  but 
their  bits,  their  saddles,  and,  I  may  say,  their 
horses  are  unsuited  to  the  uses  we  are  consider- 
ing, and  we  can  give  them  only  our  applause. 

Colonel  Cody,  who  was  a  "  pony  express  rider  " 
before  the  days  of  the  transcontinental  railway, 
was  a  bold  and  tireless  horseman.  On  one  occa- 
sion, his  reliefs  having  been  killed  or  driven  off 
by  Indians,  he  went  three  hundred  and  twenty- 
two  miles  in  thirty-two  hours  of  continuous  rid- 
ing. He  is  still  a  strong  and  graceful  horseman, 
having  adopted  the  military  seat,  and  is  one  of 


So  Riding 

the  best  known  and  most  picturesque  figures  of 
our  day. 

The  mention  of  Indians  reminds  me  that  they 
are  the  real  American  horsemen.  My  acquaint- 
ance with  the  red  man  is  mostly  of  rather  a 
vicarious  character,  somewhat  similar  to  Mark 
Twain's  pedestrian  excursions.  My  grandfather, 
Lieutenant-colonel  Richard  Clough  Anderson,  6th 
Virginia  Continental  Line,  went  to  the  Falls  of 
the  Ohio,  now  Louisville,  Kentucky,  in  the  year 
1 784,  and  was  one  of  that  band  of  pioneers  who 
upheld  and  advanced  the  border.  Since  then 
there  has  been  little  or  no  time  when  some  mem- 
ber of  the  family,  or  close  friend,  has  not  been  in 
contact  with  the  Indian.  When  the  red  man  be- 
gan to  break  and  ride  the  wild  horse,  it  would 
be  difficult  to  say.  The  woodland  and  border 
savages  used  horses  stolen  from  the  whites,  but 
Lewis  and  Clark  found  the  Western  tribes  using 
the  mustang,  broncho,  cayuse,  or  whatever  the 
title  of  the  free  horse  may  be,  as  early  as  1804. 
Excepting  the  Comanches  and  some  of  the  Sioux, 
the  Indians,  I  am  told,  were  neither  very  bold  nor 
very  skilful  riders,  although  they  managed  their 
horses  with  sufficient  dexterity  to  make  them  dan- 
gerous enemies,  but  they  had  no  mercy  upon  their 
beasts  and  no  sentimental  regard  for  them. 

The  story  of  the  United  States  cavalry  ex- 
plains, in  brief,  the  remarkable  efficiency  it  has 


FIG.    52.  — MR.    C.    ELMER   RAILEY 


FIG.    53.  — A   RIDER   OF   THE   PLAINS 


Our  Cavalry  8i 

maintained  in  spite  of  the  disadvantages  with 
which  it  has  been  burdened  —  single  bridles, 
short  service,  and  changeable  riding  instructions. 
Up  to  1 86 1  the  corps  consisted  of  but  five  regi- 
ments, commanded  by  the  most  select  body  of 
officers  in  any  service,  gentlemen  who  had  passed 
through  the  best  military  college  in  the  world,  or 
who  were  especially  fitted  for  the  duty  to  which 
they  were  assigned.  Between  the  Civil  War  and 
the  recent  war  with  Spain  five  more  regiments 
were  added,  which  were  soon  assimilated  through 
tradition  and  example,  and  the  still  small  body  of 
mounted  men  kept  and  augmented,  during  a  most 
trying  period  of  great  battles  and  severe  Indian 
campaigns,  its  splendid  reputation.  In  1891  five 
more  regiments  were  added,  and  these  were 
readily  taken  up  by  the  ten  existing  organizations, 
now  forming  a  fair  force  which  is  a  credit  to  our 
army,  and  which  should  be  changed  only  by 
graduated  increase,  say  with  one  or  two  regiments 
armed  with  that  unwieldy,  but  fear-provoking, 
weapon,  the  lance. 

Before  undertaking  the  present  chapter  I  went 
to  Fort  Riley,  Kansas,  to  visit  the  School  of 
Application  for  mounted  service,  to  gain  informa- 
tion regarding  our  cavalry,  and  to  obtain  photo- 
graphs for  the  illustration  of  this  book. 

Unfortunately,  the  weather  proved  so  bad  that 
I  could  take  advantage  of  but  few  of  the  oppor- 


82  Riding 

tunities  for  using  my  camera,  so  kindly  offered  me 
by  Colonel  Steevers,  the  commandant;  but  in  the 
short,  infrequent  periods  of  good  light  I  procured 
the  pictures  which  adorn  these  pages,  and  other- 
wise I  saw  much  that  was  of  great  interest. 

The  school  of  equitation,  to  which  branch  I 
gave  my  attention  chiefly,  is  under  the  direction 
of  Captain  W.  C.  Short,  a  splendid  horseman,  and 
both  his  scholars  and  the  senior  officers  spoke  in 
the  highest  praise  of  the  good  results  which  had 
followed  his  instruction.  When  a  regular,  simple, 
but  complete  method  of  horsemanship  becomes 
general  throughout  the  mounted  service,  a  cavalry- 
man may  be  made  efflcient  in  less  than  half  the 
time  required  by  less  finished  systems  which 
may  be  varied  with  each  change  in  the  company 
commander. 

I  saw  a  few  of  the  graduates  from  the  school 
of  equitation  in  such  movements  as  a  cavalryman 
might  be  called  upon  to  make,  pirouettes,  side 
movements,  etc.,  and  also  in  jumping.  The  rid- 
ing was  excellent,  and  the  horses  showed  far 
better  training  than  is  usually  found  in  officers' 
chargers.  While  at  the  fort,  it  so  happened 
that  I  saw  but  two  troops  mounted.  One  morn- 
ing Captain  Rutherford'vS  troop,  of  the  Fourth 
Cavalry,  passed  me  in  going  out  to  target  practice, 
and  I  was  greatly  pleased  with  the  appearance  of 
the  men,  as  they  bore  themselves  with  easy,  grace- 


FIG.    54.  — •■EUF-iv.L^    l^I^L/     C^L^^IJEL  W.   F.  CODY 


FIG.    55.  — AN    AMERICAN    HORSEMAN 


Our  Cavahy  83 

ful,  but  strong  seats,  the  stirrup  leathers  two  or 
three  holes  shorter  than  in  former  days,  and  just 
right  to  my  way  of  thinking,  while  the  neat  ser- 
vice uniform  was  a  wonderful  improvement  over 
the  old  blue  blouse  and  baggy  trousers,  —  as  old 
Pepys  would  have  said,  "a  pretty  sight."  Later 
in  the  day  I  saw  a  quick  drill,  trot  and  gallop, 
of  Troop  K,  Eighth  Cavalry,  under  Lieutenant 
George  Williams.  I  was  told  that,  owing  to  the 
interruptions  incident  to  target  practice,  the  men 
and  horses  were  not  in  the  best  condition  for  this 
work ;  but  there  was  no  occasion  for  adverse  criti- 
cism, and  the  performance  compared  most  favor- 
ably with  similar  movements  I  had  witnessed 
with  "  crack "  companies  of  European  cavalry. 
On  another  occasion  some  of  the  men  of  Troop  L, 
Eighth  Cavalry,  under  the  direction  of  Lieutenant 
Duncan  Elliott,  gave  an  exhibition  of  daring 
horsemanship.  "  Roman  standing  races  "  upon 
two  horses,  vaulting  upon  and  over  two  and  three 
galloping  horses,  standing  upon  the  bare  back  of 
a  horse  while  leaping  the  bar,  and,  finally,  the 
riding  of  horses  which  "  bucked  "  violently,  were 
features  of  this  entertainment,  which  was  con- 
cluded without  an  error  or  an  awkward  motion. 
Visits  to  the  farriery,  to  the  school  for  veteri- 
nary studies,  to  the  pack-train,  and  to  the  targets 
filled  in  the  time  pleasantly  and  profitably.  On 
the  whole,  one  must  be  a  very  unobservant,  unap- 


84  Riding 

preciative  visitor  who  would  not  be  impressed 
with  the  great  value  of  the  School  of  Application, 
not  only  in  the  branch  upon  which  I  have 
touched,  but  in  everything  relating  to  the 
mounted  service. 


FIG.    56.— TROOPERS,    FOURTH   AND    EIGHTH    CAVALRY, 
U.S.A. 


FIG.  57.  — CAPTAIN  SHOPT^    RIDING    INSTRUCTOR,  FORT  RILEY 


CHAPTER  VIII 

HOW  TO  RIDE  — THE  SNAFFLE-BRIDLE— THE  WALK 
AND  THE  TROT  — SHYING  — THE  CUNNING  OF  THE 
HORSE  —  SULKING  —  REARING  —  DEFEATING  THE 
HORSE 

Among  my  earliest  recollections  are  those  of  a 
Shetlander,  "  Billy  Button,"  upon  which  I  used  to 
disport  myself  on  the  gravel  footwalk  in  front  of 
our  house.  My  children,  also,  have  been  accus- 
tomed to  horses  from  infancy.  These  youthful 
experiences  are  doubtless  useful  in  teaching  con- 
fidence and,  what  is  of  equal  importance,  discre- 
tion. If  he  is  not  in  terror  of  all  such  animals, 
it  is  the  inexperienced  person  who  exhibits  too 
much  boldness  and  places  himself  unnecessarily 
at  the  heels  of  a  horse  or  overrates  his  powers 
of  control.  But  a  boy  will  never  learn  to  ride 
upon  a  diminutive  pony  or  upon  any  dull,  slow- 
moving  horse;  from  them  he  does  not  get  the 
seat  that  quick  motions  quickly  give,  and  his 
hand  will  be  spoiled  by  the  hard  mouth  or  the 
"  no  mouth  "  of  a  sluggish  beast. 

Eight  or  ten  years  of  age  is  as  early  as  children 
should  receive  orderly  lessons  in  horsemanship. 
It  is  useless  to  s^ive  instructions  before  the  child 

85 


86  Riding 


is  old  enough  to  understand  them  or  strong 
enough  to  carry  them  out.  Indeed,  I  think 
that  most  riding  masters  would  prefer  taking  an 
active  boy  of  sixteen  or  eighteen  years  of  age  who 
had  never  been  on  a  horse  in  place  of  one  much 
younger  who  had  been  riding  at  his  own  sweet 
will.  Aside  from  want  of  vigor,  the  latter 
would  almost  certainly  have  faults  difficult  to 
correct. 

I  advocate  the  use  of  the  Shetland  or  other 
small  pony  as  an  amusing  and  valuable  toy  for 
very  young  children ;  but  when  they  are  old 
enough  to  receive  instruction  in  riding,  the  pony 
should  be  devoted  to  harness,  where  he  is  really 
useful  and  often  ornamental,  and  something  larger 
should  be  procured  for  the  rider. 

A  retired  polo  pony,  or  some  quick  but  steady 
animal  of  that  type,  is  an  admirable  successor  to 
the  Shetland  for  a  child's  riding.  When  I  was  a 
boy  we  used  to  get  ponies  from  the  Indian  coun- 
tr}',  I  think  they  were  called  Cherokees,  that  were 
simply  perfection  —  pretty,  nimble,  and  free  from 
all  vices.  Mounted  upon  them,  a  number  of  boys 
w^ould  together  scamper  over  the  hills,  avoiding 
the  monotony  of  the  roads,  to  try  conclusions  in 
speed,  in  jumping  logs,  low  fences,  and  such 
obstacles,  and  in  other  exploits  that  gave  firm 
seats  and  confidence.  Then,  sometime  in  the 
late  '50's,  Henri  Franconi  opened  a  riding-school 


How  to  Ride  8y 

and  initiated  us  in  the  manege,  and  we  began  to 
break  and  train  horses. 

Girls  should  occasionally  be  placed  upon  a 
cross-saddle  until  they  reach  the  age  of  ten  or 
twelve  years,  so  that  they  may  learn  the  employ- 
ment of  the  aids ;  but  there  is  no  more  ungrace- 
ful position  that  a  grown  woman  can  take  than  to 
mount  a  horse  astride ;  she  has  a  far  firmer  seat 
in  the  side-saddle,  and  when  she  is  a  good  rider 
never  shows  to  greater  advantage. 

Any  man  may  learn  to  ride  with  safety  and 
comfort  at  any  age  as  long  as  he  has  the  neces- 
sary activity ;  and  there  are  many  men  of  forty,  or 
even  of  fifty,  who  would  be  able  to  ward  off  old 
age  for  a  long  time,  and  have  a  pleasurable,  whole- 
some exercise,  by  riding  horses  that  do  not  require 
too  much  skill  in  their  management. 

For  one  to  excel  in  horsemanship,  certain 
physical  qualifications  and  a  rare  gift,  aptitude 
for  the  art,  are  required.  I  have  often  heard 
William  Fritz  of  Stuttgart  say  at  an  early  lesson, 
"  That  boy  will  never  make  a  rider,"  or,  less 
frequently,  "  Ah !  here  we  have  a  good  one ;  "  for 
that  experienced  teacher  soon  recognized  the 
possession  of  the  necessary  adroitness  or  the 
want  of  it. 

But  even  where  one  has  every  natural  advan- 
tage, he  will  never  become  a  horseman  without 
some  instruction  in  the  general  principles  of  the 


88  Riding 

art.  These  have  been  formulated,  after  centuries 
of  experiment,  and  it  is  impossible  that  any  one 
should  acquire  a  useful  knowledge  of  them  by  his 
unaided  endeavors.  The  worst  rider  who  ever 
mounted  a  horse  imitated  other,  and  of  course 
better,  horsemen  when  he  essayed  to  get  outside 
of  the  animal;  but  he  doubtless  thought  that  he 
was  his  own  instructor,  and  it  is  the  man  of  such 
reasoning  powers  who  refuses  to  learn.  We 
know  that  in  the  history  of  the  world  there  was 
but  one  "natural  rider,"  the  brother  of  the  first 
oyster-eater,  who  in  the  dawn  of  the  quaternary 
period  rode  his  family  dinner,  a  broken-down, 
prehistoric  horse,  to  his  cave  home.  Since  that 
event  riding  has  been  an  art  handed  down  by 
tradition   and   imitation. 

The  aptitude  of  which  I  speak  is  indicated  by 
suppleness  of  the  body,  deftness  of  hands  and  legs, 
and  the  faculty  of  obtaining  an  understanding 
with  the  horse.  Rigidity  in  any  part  will  prevent 
one  becoming  a  good  horseman.  The  aids 
(hands  and  heels)  must  be  applied  with  celerity 
and  precision,  and  the  rider  must  feel  what  the 
horse  is  doing  and  what  it  purposes  to  do.  All 
of  these  things  demand  long  and  carefully  con- 
ducted practice,  but  their  full  acquirement  is 
denied  to  most  men;  otherwise  we  would  have 
more  such  masters  as  De  Bussigny. 

From   long  practice   in  applying  the  aids  the 


Haw  to  Ride  89 

thorough  horseman  can  use  hands  and  legs  with- 
out conscious  thought,  and  he  would  often  find 
it  difficult  to  say  offhand  what  he  had  done 
under  certain  conditions.  His  movements  be- 
come as  impulsive  as  those  of  the  skilled  pianist, 
who  methodically  touches  thousands  of  keys 
with  such  marvellous  rapidity  that  it  seems  im- 
possible that  his  mind  can  even  follow  his  fingers. 

The  trained  horse  under  the  trained  rider 
moves  at  the  master's  will ;  the  two  are  one,  it  is 
the  centaur.  The  intent  is  one  with  the  action, 
there  is  no  time  for  consideration,  thought  has 
been  expended  in  early  practice  and  has  pro- 
duced those  instinctive  motions  of  the  man  which 
are  always  right  and  always  instantly  obeyed 
instinctively. 

From  the  first,  it  should  be  known  that  riding 
is  the  production  by  the  rider's  heels  of  impulses 
which  are  met,  governed,  and  directed  by  his 
hand.  Therefore  the  secret  of  success  in  horse- 
manship is  that  the  spur  must  always  precede  the 
hand,  whether  it  be  to  advance,  to  turn,  or  to  go 
backward.  If  the  hand  is  not  given  impulses,  it 
is  powerless,  and  the  horse  is  not  under  control. 
Whenever  the  word  "  spur "  is  used,  it  indicates 
such  effect  of  the  leg  aid  as  the  condition  re- 
quires, whether  it  be  the  pressure  of  the  calf 
against  the  side  of  the  horse,  the  tap  of  the  heel, 
or  the  prick  of  the  sharp  rowel. 


90  Riding 

The  beginner  should  use  the  simple  snaffle- 
bridle,  for  it  has  a  much  wider  range  of  effects 
than  the  curb-bit,  and  with  it  he  can  do  less 
dama2:e  to    the   horse  and   to    himself   when   he 

o 

hangs  on  to  the  reins  to  aid  his  seat  or  uses  more 
force  than  is  requisite.  The  instructions  con- 
tained in  this  chapter,  I  should  say,  are  primarily 
intended  for  the  behoof  of  the  tyro,  but  they 
would  not  be  superfluous  for  ninety-nine  hun- 
dredths of  those  who  fancy  they  can  ride. 

The  general  principles  of  horsemanship  are  so 
few  and  so  simple  that  any  one  should  readily 
master  them ;  afterward  it  is  a  mere  matter  of 
practice  and  aptitude.  It  is  a  matter  of  surprise 
that  so  many  men  ride,  and  yet  do  not  think  it 
worth  while  to  investigate  the  principles  of  the 
art  which  they  think  they  follow. 

The  rider,  having  taken  his  position  upon  the 
horse,  as  has  been  described,  for  the  seat,  he  will 
take  a  snaffle-rein  in  each  hand,  the  loose  ends 
toward  his  thumbs  and  held  by  them,  the  reins 
passing  through  the  breadth  of  his  hands,  which 
are  held  knuckles  up,  close  together,  to  assist 
each  other,  and  take  a  gentle  feeling  upon  the 
mouth  of  the  horse.  He  should  then  quietly  close 
his  legs  against  the  sides  of  the  horse  and  draw 
the  reins  until  he  has  collected  the  forces  of  the 
animal,  so  that  it  will  be  able  to  go  forward  in  a 
measured  pace  and  not  in  the  loose  and  disunited 


FIG.   59.— THE   SMALL   PONY    IS   BUT   A   TOY 


FIG.  60. —UNTIL  TEN    OR  TWELVE,    GIRLS   SHOULD 
RIDE   ASTRIDE 


The  Walk  and  the  Trot  91 

condition  that  would  ensue  were  it  driven  on 
before  it  had  been  prepared.  This  collection 
will  be  evidenced  by  the  alertness  of  the  impulses 
and  by  the  movements  of  its  muscles,  as  the  horse 
arranges  the  bearers  to  take  each  its  share  of  the 
weight.  To  advance  at  a  walk  the  rider  will  in- 
crease the  pressure  of  his  legs,  or  give  a  gentle 
tap  of  the  whip  behind  the  girth,  until  he  pro- 
duces the  necessary  impulses,  which  should  be  met 
by  the  hand  in  such  a  manner  that  the  horse  will 
proceed  in  an  evenly  cadenced  walk.  The  move- 
ments of  the  horse  are  due  to  the  changes  of  the 
centre  of  gravity  produced  by  the  impulses,  and 
the  legs  make  corresponding  changes  of  posi- 
tion in  order  that  they  may  support  the  mass  as 
it  passes  over  them  in  any  direction.  As  the 
violence  and  rapidity  of  the  changes  of  the 
centre  of  gravity  increase,  so  does  the  speed  and 
also  the  changes  in  the  positions  of  the  legs  as 
they  are  required  to  give  support.  This  is  all 
very  simple,  and  the  rider  should  know  at  the 
start  how  the  impulses  he  demands  act,  and  how 
they  may  be  governed. 

The  lowest  form  of  collection  of  the  forces 
in  which  the  horse  may  move  in  a  regularly 
cadenced  pace,  say  in  the  walk,  the  moderate 
trot,  and  the  hand-gallop  (sometimes  miscalled 
the  canter),  is  the  state  which  we  call  "  in  hand." 
When  the  horse  hangs  upon  the  bridle  and  sham- 


92  Riding 

bles  along,  it  is  out  of  hand,  and  renewed  exertion 
should  be  called  for  from  the  hind  quarters,  which 
should  be  met  and  measured  by  the  bit.  When 
the  animal  proceeds  in  free  and  even  strides,  its 
head  fairly  elevated,  its  face  about  perpendicular 
to  the  ground,  and  there  is  a  light,  elastic  tension 
against  the  reins,  it  is  "  in  hand,"  and  between 
heels  and  hand  should  be  kept  so. 

If  a  horse  is  "  out  of  hand,"  it  is  not  only 
careless  in  raising  its  feet,  but  the  bearers  are 
not  moved  rapidly  enough  for  the  preservation 
of  the  centre  of  gravity,  and  so  the  animal  is 
very  apt  to  stumble  and  fall.  When  in  hand, 
a  horse  goes  as  safely  as  is  possible  for  that 
particular  horse,  action  and  strength  being  con- 
sidered. 

What  has  been  recommended  above  will  not 
be  accomplished  perfectly  when  the  rider  mounts 
a  horse  for  the  first  time.  It  is  the  goal  for  which 
he  should  strive,  and  when  he  has  reached  it,  he 
has  made  good  progress  in  the  art. 

It  is  while  riding  at  the  walk  that  the  rider 
may  best  obtain  the  seat  and  that  ease  and 
pliancy  which  is  so  greatly  to  be  desired.  It 
also  gives  him  a  better  opportunity  of  practis- 
ing the  various  applications  of  his  hands  and 
heels  than  would  be  practicable  in  more  vigor- 
ous movements.  A  story  is  told  of  a  certain 
master  of  the  art,  who,  in  reply  to  the  question 


FIG.    61.  — THE   ALERTNESS   OF    IN    HAND 


^ 

^ 

j£B| 

kd 

^^H 

! 

^^^Bl               '^        .     5-'f' 

FIG.    62.  — IN   HAND   AT   THE  WALK 


The  Walk  and  the  Trot  93 

how  long  it  would  take  for  a  man  to  acquire  a 
good  seat,  replied,  "  Fifteen  years  at  the  walk." 
If  the  rider  pays  strict  attention  to  every  detail, 
maintains,  with  occasional  guarded  relaxations, 
his  position,  and  studies  the  effects  of  his  appli- 
cation of  the  aids,  a  liberal  deduction  might  be 
made  from  the  above  estimate  of  the  time 
required  to  acquire  proficiency  in  the  most 
important  feature  of  horsemanship.  It  is  true 
that  a  man  should,  and  probably  will,  learn  some- 
thing nearly  every  time  he  mounts  a  horse,  for 
"art  is  long,"  but  an  apt  pupil  should  become 
a  very  good  horseman,  without  confining  himself 
to  the  walk,  in  two  or  three  years,  and  be  able 
to  ride  fairly  in  a  much  shorter  time. 

It  is  not  to  be  understood  that  a  proficient 
should  never  let  his  horse  go  out  of  hand,  for 
occasionally  it  will  be  a  relief  to  horse  and  man 
to  be  free  from  all  constraint;  but  this  liberty 
should  never  be  given  to  a  leg-weary  animal 
or  upon  rough  or  slippery  ground,  or  in  descend- 
ing steep  slopes.  The  Italian  riders,  in  taking 
their  horses  down  precipitous  hillsides,  put  the 
animals  straight,  the  horses  closely  united. 

In  the  walk  the  rider  will  proceed  in  straight 
lines,  in  circles  and  curves  of  varying  diameters, 
and  in  turns  to  either  hand.  The  pace  should 
be  even  and  regular,  and  the  impulses  from  the 
croup  kept  up  so  that  the  horse  will  not  become 


94  Riding 

heavy  in  hand.  The  forehand  will  be  kept  light 
and  the  jaw  pliant  by  light  tensions  upon  the 
reins,  with  occasional  vibrations  made  by  a  play 
of  the  fingers  upon  the  reins.  A  very  little  prac- 
tice will  show  what  these  vibrations  should  be. 

In  turning  to  the  right  the  movement  will  be 
directed  by  the  right  rein,  its  effects  measured 
and  restrained  by  the  left  rein,  while  the  outside  or 
left  leg  of  the  rider  will  give  an  increased  press- 
ure against  the  side  of  the  horse  to  keep  the 
croup  from  swaying  out.  The  whole  body  of  the 
horse  should  conform  to  the  arc  of  the  path  fol- 
lowed. In  making  short  turns,  the  horse  should 
first  be  collected  a  little  more  closely,  and  as  soon 
as  the  animal  enters  upon  the  new  direction  it 
should  be  put  straight  and  be  ridden  in  exactly 
the  same  form  as  it  had  before  the  turn  was  made. 
The  turn  to  the  left  will  be  made  in  the  same 
manner,  —  the  left  rein,  guarded  in  its  effects  by 
the  right,  demanding  the  turn,  the  right  leg  of 
the  rider  keeping  the  croup  upon  the  path. 

In  bringing  the  horse  to  a  halt  from  the  walk, 
the  rider  should  close  his  legs  against  the  animal's 
sides,  lean  back  slightly,  and  raise  the  bridle-hand. 
This  will  bring  the  horse  to  a  stop  in  a  finished 
manner,  with  its  hind  legs  under  the  mass,  ready 
to  furnish  impulses  for  further  movements.  The 
tension  upon  the  reins  should  then  be  relaxed 
and  the  legs  of  the  rider  withdrawn. 


FIG.    63.  — UNITED    HALT 


FIG.    64.  — IN    HAND    IN   TROT 


The  IValk  and  the  Trot  95 

It  is  a  rule,  without  exception,  that  when  one 
rein  or  heel  is  applied,  the  other  rein  or  heel  must 
be  prepared  to  guard  its  effects  from  being  an- 
swered in  too  great  a  degree. 

The  walk  is  a  pace  of  four  beats,  one  foot  being 
planted  after  another  at  regular  intervals.  If  the 
right  fore  foot  comes  to  the  ground  first,  it  is  fol- 
lowed by  the  left  hind  foot,  then  the  left  fore  foot 
is  planted,  and  lastly  the  right  hind  foot.  Then 
a  new  stride  begins.  In  every  stride  the  mass  is 
borne  by  two  legs  or  by  three  legs ;  just  before  a 
fore  foot  is  planted,  its  diagonally  disposed  hind 
foot  leaves  the  ground  ;  at  that  moment  the  two 
legs  bear  the  weight ;  when  the  fore  foot  is  planted, 
three  legs  bear  the  weight.  By  stride  we  mean 
the  movement  that  covers  the  ground  from  the 
time  a  certain  foot  comes  to  the  ground  until  it 
is  again  planted.  Through  moment  photography 
we  have  gained  a  knowledge,  not  only  in  every 
phase  of  the  ordinary  paces  of  the  horse,  but  prac- 
tically of  every  movement  the  animal  is  capable 
of  making ;  and  through  the  same  medium  I  was 
able  to  explain,  for  the  first  time,  the  gallop 
changes,  which  very  important  movement  was 
previously  not  understood,  and  was  procured  only 
by  tentative  experiments  with  each  horse  trained 
to  make  it. 

When,  the  horse  having  been  in  the  walk,  the 
speed  is  increased,  a  different  movement  of  the 


96  Riding 

legs  must  take  place  to  keep  the  bearers  under 
the  centre  of  gravity,  and  the  diagonally  disposed 
hind  leg  acts  in  unison  with  a  fore  leg,  when  we 
have  a  pace  in  which  the  horse  springs  from  one 
pair  of  legs  to  the  other,  which  gives  the  trot.  In 
the  trot  we  have  a  gait  of  two  beats,  as  the  horse 
takes  the  weight  upon  the  right  (or  left)  fore  leg, 
and  the  left  (or  right)  hind  leg  after  each  spring, 
going  into  the  air  as  each  pair  of  bearers  leaves 
the  ground. 

The  horse  should  be  ridden  in  the  trot  in 
exactly  the  same  manner  as  in  the  walk,  except 
that  in  the  turns  the  horse  should  be  more  closely 
united  between  hand  and  heels,  particularly  as  the 
rate  of  speed  is  increased.  As  far  as  the  rapidity 
of  the  movement  will  permit,  the  state  of  collec- 
tion described  as  "  in  hand  "  should  be  observed. 
In  trotting  or  in  galloping  at  great  speed  a  horse 
must  extend  itself  too  much  to  permit  any  such 
condition  of  its  forces  as  that  indicated ;  but  if  at 
sharp  turns  the  flying  horse  is  not  somewhat 
brought  together,  so  that  it  may  have  the  bearers 
under  the  centre  of  gravity,  as  the  mass  leans  in- 
ward, a  fall  will  probably  result,  almost  certainly 
if  the  horse  be  galloping  with  the  outside  legs 
taking  the  advanced  strides. 

But  the  horse  should  not  be  put  into  the  gal- 
lop until  it  has  been  drilled  in  the  double  bridle, 
and  has  been  taught  the  various  forms  of  collec- 


Sbying  97 

tion  which  prepare  it  for  that  pace ;  and  we  shall 
hope  that  even  the  rapid  trot  will  not  be  under- 
taken by  the  beginner  until  he  is  quite  sure  of 
himself  at  lower  rates  of  speed,  or  he  will  acquire 
faults  difficult  to  remedy.  When  an  indifferent 
rider  is  in  the  habit  of  speeding  a  horse  in  the 
trot,  he  almost  invariably  takes  his  weight  upon 
his  spine,  arches  the  body,  holds  his  arms  stiffly 
forward,  loosens  his  knee  contacts,  and  has  about 
the  same  security  in  the  saddle  that  a  bag  of 
meal  laid  upon  it  would  have. 

To  reduce  the  speed  in  the  trot  or  to  bring 
the  horse  to  a  halt  from  that  pace,  the  rider 
should  close  his  legs  against  the  sides  of  the 
horse,  lean  back  slightly,  and,  raising  the  hand, 
increase  the  tension  upon  the  reins  until  the 
animal  answers  his  demands  by  reduced  speed. 
Then  the  increased  tension  upon  the  reins  is 
relieved,  and  the  legs  of  the  rider  withdrawn  from 
the  horse,  and  the  slower  trot  having  been  ob- 
tained, the  halt  may  be  made  from  it;  in  the 
latter  case  the  animal  should  be  first  put  into 
the  walk,  and  then  brought  to  a  stop  as  before 
described. 

Nearly  every  horse  will  shy  if  "a  bit  above 
himself "  from  want  of  work,  and  many  horses, 
otherwise  quiet,  shy  habitually  at  some  favorite 
object,  either  flying  paper,  a  high  wagon,  an 
automobile,  or  some  such  thing.     If  the  head  of 


98  Riding 

the  horse  be  turned  away  from  that  which  offends 
it,  the  animal  may  not  only  be  made  to  pass  it, 
but  it  will  not  be  nearly  so  apt  to  jump  down 
an  embankment  or  run  into  some  other  danger, 
in  its  efforts  to  avoid  that  which  caused  its  fright 
or  pretended  fright. 

Horses  show  much  cunning  in  alarming  a 
timid  rider,  and  such  an  unfortunate  is  unmasked 
at  once.  Some  horses  will  endeavor  to  rub  a 
rider's  knees  against  a  wall,  when  they  may  read- 
ily be  foiled  by  having  the  head  drawn  into  the 
wall ;  others  will  misbehave  on  slippery  pave- 
ments ;  others  will  refuse  to  go  in  desired  direc- 
tions. Indeed,  their  mischievous  tricks  are  so 
various  that  it  is  impossible  to  name  them.  It 
is  seldom  that  they  even  try  these  performances 
with  a  determined  horseman,  and  I  have  heard 
trainers  say  of  horses  sent  to  them  to  be  cured  of 
vices,  that  they  could  find  nothing  wrong  with 
the  animals. 

If  a  horse  sulks  and  refuses  to  move,  sticking 
out  its  nose  stiffly  and  spreading  its  legs  as  if  to 
brace  itself  against  being  forced  forward,  the 
rider  should  not  resort  to  punishment,  as  it  is 
probable  that  the  animal  would  retaliate  by  vio- 
lent misconduct.  If  the  animal  can  be  induced 
to  move  its  croup  to  the  right  or  left,  the  rigidity 
will  disappear  and  the  forward  progress  be 
obtained.     I  have  known  cases  where  the  horse, 


Rearing  99 

under  such  a  condition,  has  been  made  to  go  for- 
ward by  being  ridden  into  by  another  horse- 
man. 

A  horse  rears,  either  because  there  is  too 
severe  a  pull  upon  the  bit,  or  because  it  is  in 
terror  at  something  which  faces  it  unexpectedly, 
or  through  an  acquired  vice.  When  a  horse  is 
about  to  rear  through  vice,  it  almost  always 
"  drops  the  bit "  (that  is,  the  rider  finds  there  is 
suddenly  no  tension  upon  the  reins),  and  then 
thrusts  its  head  in  air  and  tries  to  rise  upon  its 
hind  legs.  If  the  rider  sends  in  one  of  the  spurs 
before  the  horse  is  balanced  upon  its  haunches, 
it  will  induce  a  movement  of  the  hind  legs  which 
will  bring  the  forehand  down,  and  the  horse 
should  then  be  pushed  forward.  Often  a  horse 
which  is  not  very  keen  about  it  will  make  two  or 
three  weak  essays  before  it  goes  quite  up,  and 
just  as  it  makes  one  of  these  little  rises  the  prick 
of  the  spur  is  very  effective  in  bringing  the  an- 
imal down  and  in  a  position  that  prevents  rearing 
until  it  is  again  prepared,  before  which  it  should 
be  driven  along.  But  if  the  horse  has  already 
risen,  the  rider  must  loosen  the  reins  and  lean 
forward ;  and  as  soon  as  the  forehand  comes 
down,  he  should  drive  the  horse  forward  in  any 
pace  or  action  that  it  will  take,  to  procure  better 
regulated  movements  later.  If  the  rider  finds 
by  a  sinking  of  the  croup  that   a  rearing  horse 


loo  Riding 

is  falling  backward,  he  should  release  his  feet 
from  the  stirrups,  seize  the  mane  and  pommel, 
drop  from  the  saddle,  and  throw  himself  away 
from  the  animal  as  it  topples  over.  I  have  cured 
a  horse,  apparently  confirmed  in  this  vice  of 
throwing  itself  backward,  by  a  thorough  course 
of  suppling ;  and  it  was  afterwards  ridden  in 
various  games  and  exercises  which  involved  the 
pirouette,  but  the  reformed  animal  never  at- 
tempted to  rise  higher  than  was  demanded. 
Whether  the  horse  falls  back  intentionally  or 
not  I  cannot  say.  But  horses  that  have  a  habit 
of  rearing  so  that  they  fall  over  are  not  rare. 
In  the  far  West  those  that  fight  the  air  are  called 
sunfishers,  and  none  are  more  resolute  or  more 
dangerous.  I  read  somewhere  recently  that  if 
a  horse  kept  its  fore  legs  bent  and  down,  it  would 
not  fall  over,  but  that  when  its  fore  legs  were 
extended  upward  and  fought  the  air,  it  would 
come  over  on  its  back.  I  have  frequently  seen 
rearing  horses  in  both  poses  which  did  not  fall 
and  which  had  no  intention  of  falling,  and  I 
have  had  a  horse  throw  itself  over  without  giv- 
ing me  the  preliminary  notice  of  extending  its 
fore  legs  in  air.  The  elder  Henri  Franconi's 
Johnster  and  Bayard,  and  Miss  Emma  Lake's 
Bonnie  Scotland,  were  well-known  examples  of 
horses  which  reared  safely  with  extended  fore 
legs ;  the  other  mode  is  not  uncommon,  but  the 


FIG.    67.  — REARING    WITH    BENT    FORE   LEGS 


FIG.  68.  — ROLLING    UP   A   RESTIVE    HORSE 


Defeating  the  Horse  loi 

horse  does  not  usually  rise  to  a  dangerous  height 
while  the  knees  are  bent. 

Should  a  horse  decline  to  leave  its  companions 
or  to  go  in  a  certain  direction,  the  rider  should 
turn  it  around  sharply  three  or  four  times  upon 
the  side  in  which  he  finds  least  resistance,  when 
the  animal  becomes  so  confused  that  it  may  be 
ridden  wherever  the  man  chooses.  This  in  Ger- 
many is  called  "rolling  up,"  and  is  often  prac- 
tised in  the  cavalry,  where  every  horse  must  be 
disciplined  to  leave  the  ranks  singly  —  a  very 
difficult  thing  to  obtain  in  any  other  manner. 

I  have  never  seen  the  time  when  a  safely 
trained  horse  of  good  disposition  could  not  be 
found  after  a  little  search ;  and  it  is  very  foolish 
for  any  one  but  an  expert  or  a  professional  horse- 
man to  mount  a  wicked  brute.  A  really  vicious 
horse  will  try  the  nerve  of  any  man,  but  fortu- 
nately they  are  not  frequently  met  outside  of  the 
ranches,  and  they  become  rarer  as  time  goes  on. 
Yet  all  of  us  have  seen  the  young  person  of 
limited  experience,  and  even  less  skill,  who 
would  boast  of  being  able  to  ride  anything  and 
was  desirous  of  dominating  a  bad  horse. 

Every  horse  that  is  lively  enough  to  make  a 
safe  and  agile  riding  animal  will  become  fresh 
and  disorderly  if  it  does  not  get  work  enough.  If 
it  be  not  ridden  sufficiently,  it  should  be  longed 
on  the  cavesson  rein,  or  turned  into  a  paddock. 


I02  Riding 

The  most  careful  riding  master  I  have  ever 
known  —  and  in  my  wanderings  I  have  kept  my 
horses  in  more  than  a  score  of  riding-schools  — 
was  accustomed  to  turn  his  fresh  horses,  one  by 
one,  for  a  little  time  into  the  "  ring,"  and,  after 
some  play,  the  horses  would  be  perfectly  quiet 
for  the  most  timid  and  inexperienced  pupil. 


FIG.    69.— CLOSELY  UNITED 


FIG.    70.  —  HALF-HALT 


CHAPTER    IX 

WHAT  TRAINING  WILL  DO   FOR   A  HORSE  — THE 
FORMS   OF   COLLECTION 

A  GREAT  deal  of  the  neglect  in  training  horses 
properly  is  due  to  the  fact  that  most  people  —  by 
very  far  the  greater  number  —  are  deterred  by 
the  imaginary  difhculties  presented  by  the  rules 
and  by  the  practice  involved,  and  in  consequence 
there  is  not  one  horse  in  a  thousand  that  is  even 
agreeable  to  ride. 

The  fact  is,  there  is  no  more  difificulty  in  ac- 
quiring a  knowledge  of  the  rules  of  training  than 
of  the  first  three  numbers  of  the  multiplication 
table ;  and  the  practice  of  them  is  far  more  pleas- 
ant and  a  great  deal  easier  than  the  daily  labor 
of  buttoning  one's  boots. 

Owing  to  the  changes  in  the  centre  of  gravity, 
due  to  the  rider's  weight  and  position,  the  normal, 
well-formed  horse  must  be  given  an  artificial  car- 
riage to  enable  it  to  bear  the  man  in  easy,  light, 
and  cadenced  paces.  Whether  the  rider  is  aware 
of  the  fact  or  not,  this  correction  always  takes 
place,  usually  through  tentative  and  chance-di- 
rected efforts,  before  the  animal  becomes  safe  and 
103 


I04  Riding 

pleasant  to  ride.  Horses  that  are  ill-formed  or 
awkward  may  be  so  greatly  improved  in  bearing 
and  action,  that  their  defects  are  nullified  to  such 
an  extent  that  many  apparently  hopeless  cases 
may  be  made  very  satisfactory  riding  animals. 
All  horses  are  benefited  in  carriage,  in  disposi- 
tion, and  in  form  by  a  course  of  schooling. 

What  can  be  done  to  correct  physical  defects 
in  a  horse  by  a  short  term  of  schooling  would 
appear  incredible  to  one  not  initiated  in  the  art. 
Weak  parts  may  be  strengthened,  strong  muscles 
may  be  developed  from  those  that  are  deficient, 
poor  action  may  be  improved,  and  the  general 
appearance  and  motions  of  any  animal  changed 
for  the  better  by  simple  exercises,  which  at  the 
same  time  establish  absolute  discipline. 

These  changes  are  procured  from  suppling 
the  horse.  By  suppling  is  meant  overcoming 
the  resistaitces  of  the  horse,  whether  they  be  ac- 
tive or  passive,  intentiojial  or  physical,  so  that 
all  opposition  atid  rigidity  are  removed,  and 
the  anim.aJ  becomes  obediejit  and  pliant  in  every 
part. 

If  the  reader  will  think  of  the  forehand  (con- 
trolled by  the  reins),  and  the  hind  quarters  (con- 
trolled by  his  heels),  as  two  parts  to  be  brought 
to  act  together,  so  balanced  that  neither  extremity 
is  embarrassed,  and  the  point  of  union  and  bal- 
ance, the  centre  of  gravity,  is  directly  under  the 


IVbat  Training  will  do  for  a  Horse     105 

rider,  he  will  see  how  the  horse  may  be  made  to 
move  lightly  and  easily. 

Suppose  the  horse  be  low  in  the  forehand  and 
goes  too  much  on  the  shoulders  when  in  action, 
—  a  miserable  condition  of  affairs.  The  defects 
suggest  the  remedies.  The  hind  legs  will  be 
carried  under  the  body  to  depress  the  croup,  the 
forehand  will  be  raised  and  its  forces  carried  to 
the  rear,  until  the  weight  and  forces  are  brought 
to  the  desired  point  of  union  and  balance. 

Or,  let  us  take  the  case  of  a  horse  high  and 
strong  in  the  forehand,  but  low  and  weak  in  the 
hind  quarters.  Here  the  hind  legs  should  be 
brought  up  to  that  point  where,  without  lowering 
the  croup,  they  have  the  greatest  impulsive  power, 
and  the  forces  of  the  forehand  should  be  carried 
back  only  far  enough  to  balance  these  inferior 
forces  of  the  rear.  Of  course,  in  this  case  par- 
ticular attention  should  be  paid  to  strengthening 
the  loins  and  hind  quarters  by  the  exercises  here- 
after to  be  explained. 

Therefore,  if  the  horse  "goes  upon  its  shoul- 
ders "  and  hangs  upon  the  hand,  the  forces  of  the 
croup  are  too  strong  for  the  forehand,  and  the 
latter  part  should  be  elevated  while  the  hind  legs 
should  be  carried  under  the  body  of  the  horse  to 
lessen  their  effect  sufficiently  to  produce  balance 
in  the  extremities.  But  if  there  be  feeble  and 
constrained  action  in  the  hind  legs,  the  forehand 


io6  Riding 

is  too  high  and  strong,  and  the  centre  of  gravity 
too  far  to  the  rear,  and  this  state  must  be 
remedied. 

The  power  to  effect  the  conditions  described 
will  be  obtained  by  subduing  all  resistances ;  the 
jaw  of  the  horse,  and  all  those  parts  in  front  of 
the  rider,  will  be  made  pliant  and  obedient  to  the 
reins ;  the  hind  quarters  will  be  dominated  by  the 
rider's  heels. 

In  the  preceding  chapter  the  condition  of  col- 
lection known  as  "  in  hand,"  the  lowest  form  in 
which  smooth,  even,  safe,  and  regular  paces  may 
be  made,  was  described  for  the  walk  and  the 
trot.  Unless  some  closer  form  of  collection  is 
employed  for  one  or  another  reason,  the  ordinary 
gallop  of  three  beats  or  "  hand  gallop "  should 
always  be  performed  "  in  hand " ;  that  is,  there 
should  be  such  a  collection  of  the  forces  that  the 
pace  is  even,  steady,  and  cadenced,  no  undue 
weight  upon  the  shoulders,  the  crest  curved,  the 
face  of  the  horse  about  perpendicular  to  the 
ground,  the  jaw  supple,  and  as  a  matter  of  course 
the  horse  always  under  complete  control.  The 
trainer  should  ever  bear  in  mind  that  whenever 
there  is  any  disorder  or  misconduct  the  earlier 
lesson  should  be  reverted  to,  until  the  horse  is 
absolutely  obedient  under  all  conditions.  When 
the  horse  has  been  habituated  to  maintain  the 
state  of  collection  known  as  "in  hand,"  in  the  walk, 


The  Forms  of  Collection  107 

trot,  and  gallop,  it  should   be  taught  the  closer 
forms  of  union. 

From  time  to  time  the  rider  should,  while  in  a 
slow  but  nimble  trot,  bring  the  horse  to  closer 
forms  of  collection,  the  heels  maintaining  the 
impulses,  the  hand  with  vibratory  plays  upon  the 
reins,  keeping  the  forehand  light  and  lithe.  As 
the  forces  are  more  nearly  brought  to  a  point  of 
union  and  balance  under  the  rider,  the  speed  will 
decrease,  and  when  these  forces  of  the  extremities 
are  absolutely  united  and  balanced  for  a  moment, 
the  half-halt  will  be  produced,  when  the  horse  is 
prepared  for  a  movement  in  any  direction.  But 
this  half-halt  may  be  held  for  only  a  moment, 
while  the  muscles  are  in  play,  and  at  least  one 
leg  is  flexed,  or  the  horse  will  become  heavy,  the 
feet  will  come  to  the  ground,  and  a  complete  halt 
will  ensue,  when  the  tension  upon  the  reins 
should  be  eased  and  the  heels  be  withdrawn  from 
the  sides  of  the  horse.  When  the  forces  of  the 
extremities  of  the  trotting-horse  are  as  closely 
united  as  is  compatible  with  a  forward  movement, 
any  increased  impulses  will  be  turned  into  height 
of  action  under  the  body,  and  the  animal  will 
seem  to  grow  under  the  rider,  as  with  curved 
crest,  in  which  the  quivering  muscles  prove  the 
pliancy  of  the  mass,  the  horse  goes  from  one  pair 
of  diagonally  disposed  legs  to  the  other  in  a  slow, 
measured,  brilliant  trot  —  the  most  beautiful  effect 
possible  to  obtain. 


io8  Riding 

These  closer  forms  of  collection  may  be  pro- 
duced in  a  very  slow  gallop  in  exactly  the  same 
manner  as  in  the  slow  trot ;  and  the  gallop  in  this 
case  becomes  one  of  four  beats  as  each  leg  follows 
the  other  in  regular  intervals.  The  half-halt  may, 
and  should  in  practice,  be  made  from  the  slow  gallop 
by  a  very  close  collection,  the  union  and  balance 
of  the  forces,  and  the  gallop  be  renewed  in  some 
form  immediately,  before  the  horse  becomes 
heavy  and  the  full  halt  ensues.  The  half-halt  in 
the  gallop  has  a  variety  of  important  uses,  such  as 
a  preliminary  step  for  making  the  gallop  change, 
for  making  the  gallop  wheels,  etc. 


FIG.  71.— THE  SCRATCH  OF  THE  SPUR 


FIG.  72.  — HALT  WITH  THE  SPURS 


CHAPTER   X 

THE   SPUR 

Baucher  says,  somewhere,  that  to  give  an 
indifferent  horseman  the  spur  is  as  bad  as  to  give 
a  razor  into  the  hands  of  a  monkey.  There  is 
not  one  rider  in  ten  thousand  who  knows  how  to 
give  the  sharp  rowel,  or  is  aware  of  its  true  uses. 
Improperly  and  too  frequently  applied,  the  spur 
makes  the  horse  sluggish  and  never  answers  its 
real  and  full  significance.  The  rider's  leg  and 
heel,  or  the  sharp  rowel  when  necessary  —  a  rare 
occasion  —  gives  the  horseman  control  over  the 
impulses  which  produce  action,  and  over  all  the 
movements  of  the  hind  quarters.  The  sharp 
rowel,  indeed  any  form  of  the  leg  aid,  should 
never  be  given  with  a  kick  or  a  thrust.  The 
lower  part  of  the  rider's  leg  should  be  carried 
back  until  the  scratch  or  prick  can  be  given  by 
the  elevation  of  the  heel.  To  enable  the  rider  to 
do  this  with  precision  requires  much  practice  in 
the  use  of  the  leg  below  the  knee,  so  that  even  in 
violent  movements  he  may  be  able  to  give  just 
the  effect  the  occasion  requires.  The  lower  leg 
of  the  rider  demands  the  forward  movement, 
109 


I  lo  Riding 

demands  the  movement  to  the  rear,  and  that  to 
either  side,  and  also  the  collections,  including  the 
half -halt  and  the  finished  halt.  These  results 
cannot  be  produced  properly  by  a  thoughtless  or 
an  unskilful  use  of  an  aid,  which  should  always 
be  applied  at  the  right  moment,  with  the  right 
touch,  and  in  the  right  place. 

For  the  comfort,  not  to  speak  of  the  safety,  of 
its  rider,  every  horse  should  be  taught  to  bear  the 
prick  of  the  spur  without  violent  outbursts ;  and 
this  is  more  important  for  the  poor  horseman 
than  for  him  who  is  skilful.  The  most  nervous 
animal  may  be  taught  to  bear  the  application  of 
the  rowel  with  complacency,  and  without  such 
discipline  it  would  be  impossible  to  make  the 
gallop  changes,  and  many  other  movements  di- 
rected by  the  spur,  smoothly  and  uniformly.  On 
some  occasion  when  the  horse  is  going  quietly, 
it  having  previously  been  accustomed  to  the 
pressure  of  the  rider's  legs  and  to  that  of  the 
sides  of  his  heels,  the  rider  should  carry  a  leg 
close  to  the  flank  of  the  horse  and  give  a  scratch 
with  the  rowel  just  behind  the  girths,  as  he  is 
making  a  turn  or  demanding  a  bend  of  the  croup. 
The  animal  should  be  quieted  by  caresses  after 
this  attack,  and  then  the  spur  should  be  applied 
to  the  other  side  in  the  same  way,  and  the  horse 
be  made  much  of.  In  time  both  spurs  should 
be  used  in   bringing  the   horse   to  a  halt.     The 


The  Spur  iii 

finished  horseman  can  demand  the  most  perfect 
repose  from  the  most  spirited  horse  by  the  use  of 
this  instrument.  Used  as  directed,  the  animal 
will  not  only  be  steady  when  the  scratch  is  given, 
but  also  quick  and  ready  in  obedience  to  the 
milder  forms  of  the  leg  aid,  the  pressure  of  the 
leg  or  of  the  side  of  the  heel,  and  it  will  be  rarely 
the  case  that  the  more  severe  form  will  be  neces- 
sary. In  riding  my  trained  horses  the  rowels  are 
removed  from  the  spurs;  and  I  have  had  horses 
that  were  always  free  and  lively  in  their  actions 
and  perfect  in  manege  movements  that  had  not 
felt  the  sharp  spur  for  many  years.  Some  horses 
will  "  shut  up  "  and  refuse  to  increase  their  speed 
when  punished  with  the  spur;  and  in  all  cases  its 
severe  attacks  are  as  useless  as  they  are  cruel. 
To  produce  the  impulses  for  movements  for- 
ward or  to  the  rear,  this  aid  should  be  applied 
immediately  behind  the  girths.  There  is  an  old 
French  saying  that  a  torn  girth  shows  good 
horsemanship.  To  bend  the  croup,  as  in  the 
side  movements  upon  two  paths  and  in  the  gallop 
changes,  the  spur  should  take  touch  on  the  flank 
four  or  five  inches  behind  the  girths. 


CHAPTER   XI 

SOME   WORK   ON   FOOT  — THE   SUPPLING 

It  has  been  said  that  the  term  "  suppling  "  indi- 
cates the  vanquishing  of  all  the  resistance  offered 
by  the  horse,  whether  voluntary  or  involuntary. 
The  control  which  this  gives  over  the  actions  of 
the  animal  is  produced  by  cultivating  its  instinc- 
tive yieldings  to  the  application  of  the  bit  and 
spur  until  obedience  becomes  a  natural  impulse 
and  the  animal  does  not  dream  of  opposition. 
The  lessons  are  given  in  such  a  manner  that 
there  are  no  struggles  against  restraint,  no  fears 
are  caused,  and  there  are  no  punishments  to 
arouse  animosity.  Indeed,  any  rough  treatment 
will  defeat  the  object  of  the  trainer,  who  requires 
nothing  more  than  patience  to  insure  his  success. 

For  example,  when  the  bit  comes  against  the 
horse's  mouth,  the  first  impulse  is  to  avoid  the 
pressure  and  to  yield  the  jaw  ;  the  second  impulse 
is  to  resist  the  confinement.  By  the  cultivation 
of  the  first  instinctive  yielding  of  the  jaws  the 
trainer  obtains  absolute  control  over  the  mouth  of 
the  horse,  and  by  successive  exercises,  properly 
arranged,  over  the  whole  of  those  parts  in  front 


FIG.    73.  — DIRECT    FLEXION   OF   THE   JAW 


FIG.    74.  — THE    RESULT 


Some  Work  on  Foot  113 

of  the  saddle.  In  like  manner,  when  the  leg  or 
heel  of  the  rider  is  applied  to  the  flank  of  the 
horse,  its  first  impulse  is  to  move  forward  the 
hind  leg  of  the  side  attacked,  and  bend  the  croup 
over  to  the  other  side;  the  second  impulse  will 
be  to  come  against  the  leg  or  heel  in  resistance. 
By  cultivating  the  first  impulse  on  the  applica- 
tion of  the  spur  the  rider  obtains  control  over  all 
those  parts  of  the  horse  behind  the  saddle.  So,  be- 
tween hand  and  heels,  the  man  may  obtain  perfect, 
because  instinctive,  obedience  from  the  trained  ani- 
mal. Beyond  keeping  on  friendly  terms  with  the 
horse,  and  the  avoidance  of  everything  that  would 
start  its  fears,  no  trust  is  to  be  placed  in  the  ani- 
mal's voluntaiy  dutifulness,  for  what  is  desired 
may  be  demanded,  and  the  good-will  of  a  horse  is 
a  very  slender  reed  upon  which  to  lean.  My 
horses  know  my  footsteps,  and  show  recognition 
of  my  voice,  but  I  have  never  permitted  their 
blandishments  to  lead  me  to  trust  one  of  them 
beyond  control  without  finding  cause  for  regrets 
sooner  or  later. 

Much  of  the  work  in  suppling  the  horse  can 
be  done  far  more  quickly  with  the  trainer  on  foot 
than  from  the  saddle.  Indeed,  almost  all  the 
education  of  a  riding-horse  might  be  carried  on 
without  the  trainer  mounting  at  all,  and  that  very 
expeditiously ;  the  finishing  lessons  under  the 
saddle  would  be  required  to  transfer  the  indica- 


114  Riding 

tions  of  the  whip  to  the  rider's  heels.  The  hand- 
ling that  would  be  given  by  the  trainer  on  foot 
would  prepare  the  horse  for  anything  that  might 
follow,  and  I  have  always  found  that  the  longer 
the  horse  was  worked  in  hand,  the  better  were 
the  results.  That  is,  if  the  horse  be  longed  care- 
fully ;  be  driven  before  the  trainer  in  a  long  pair 
of  reins  attached  to  a  snaffle-bridle ;  be  taught  to 
yield  the  jaw,  the  head,  and  the  neck  to  the  bits  ; 
and  be  made  to  bend  the  croup  and  to  bring  the 
hind  legs  under  the  body  at  the  application  of  the 
whip,  there  will  be  very  little  left  to  do  when 
the  man  mounts. 

I  shall  now  describe  the  least  amount  of  work 
that  the  trainer  should  perform  on  foot,  as  few 
men  will  have  the  patience  to  carry  the  system 
farther;  but  as  the  principles  are  always  the  same 
any  one  who  desires  to  try  the  experiment  may 
readily  carry  on  the  training  in  hand  to  its  ut- 
most limit. 

When  the  young  horse  —  or  any  horse,  for  that 
matter  —  is  going  well  in  the  snaffle-bridle,  the 
animal  should  be  given  daily  lessons  in  the 
double  bridle  (curb  and  snaffle)  in  the  following 
manner:  the  curb-chain  being  removed  for  the 
early  lessons,  the  trainer  should  stand  at  the 
head  of  the  horse  on  the  right,  or  off,  side,  and 
take  the  right  snaffle-rein  in  his  right  hand,  while 
the  left  hand  grasps  the  two  curb-reins  at  equal 


FIG.    75.  — BENDING    HEAD  AND   NECK  WITH    GURB-BIT 


»^^^P^ji*M» 

Pfl 

FIG.    76.  — BENDING    HEAD   AND    NECK   WITH    CURB-BIT 


The  Suppling  115 

lengths  under  the  chin  of  the  horse  a  few  inches 
from  the  bit.  Then,  extending  his  right  arm  away 
from  the  nose  of  the  horse  and  drawing  the  curb- 
reins  toward  the  chest  of  the  animal,  he  will,  with 
just  so  much  force  as  is  necessary,  induce  the 
horse  to  open  the  mouth  and  relax  the  lower  jaw, 
the  head  being  held  up  by  the  snafifle-rein.  As 
soon  as  this  is  accomplished  the  tensions  upon 
the  reins  should  be  released  and  the  horse  re- 
warded by  caresses.  The  snaffle  must  keep  the 
head  of  the  horse  at  the  proper  height,  for  the 
tendency  of  the  curb  is  to  depress  the  head,  and 
the  face  of  the  horse  should  be  kept  about  vertical 
to  the  ground,  certainly  not  any  nearer  the  chest. 
From  time  to  time  the  trainer  will  release  the 
tension  upon  the  snaffle-rein  and  draw  the  curb- 
reins,  as  before,  in  gentle  vibrations  toward  the 
neck  of  the  horse  to  test  the  progress  of  his  work. 
When  the  horse  curls  the  upper  lip,  and  the  reins 
always  find  nothing  more  than  a  light,  elastic  feel- 
ing upon  the  lower  jaw,  the  crest  being  curved 
and  the  face  held  perpendicularly  to  the  ground, 
the  man  will  know  that  the  object  of  his  work 
has  been  accomplished,  and  it  remains  for  him  to 
maintain  this  condition  by  constant  practice  until 
it  becomes  habitual.  If  at  any  time  the  jaw 
becomes  rigid,  or  there  is  any  resistance,  a  return 
should  be  made  to  the  exercises  with  the  two 
bits,  as  in  the  beginning.     It  is  a  rule  observed 


ii6  Riding 

by  all  trainers  that  when  a  horse  does  not  per- 
form perfectly  that  which  is  desired,  to  "  go  back 
to  number  one,"  the  first  lesson. 

The  same  work  should  be  done  with  the  trainer 
standing  on  the  left  side  of  the  horse,  when  his 
left  hand  will  hold  the  left  snaffle-rein,  his  right 
the  curb-reins.  These  exercises,  and  those  which 
follow,  should  be  given  at  least  once  every  day, 
twice  or  thrice  will  be  better,  and  each  exercise 
should  be  followed  no  longer  than  for  five  minutes, 
so  that  the  horse  may  not  be  fatigued  or  annoyed 
by  the  monotony. 

Standing  at  the  head  of  the  horse,  on  the  right 
side,  the  trainer  should  take  a  rein  of  the  curb-bit 
in  each  hand,  near  the  branches,  and  turning  the 
bit  in  the  mouth  of  the  horse,  right  branch  for- 
ward, bend  the  animal's  head  toward  the  left ;  at 
first  making  a  slight  turn  only,  and  by  steps  in- 
creasing the  bend  until  the  face  of  the  horse  looks 
to  the  rear.  As  soon  as  the  head  of  the  horse  is 
bent  sufficiently  to  satisfy  the  trainer,  he  should 
take  equal  tensions  upon  the  bit,  straighten  it  in 
the  mouth  of  the  horse,  and  by  gentle  vibrations 
induce  the  horse  to  yield  the  lower  jaw  so  that 
the  reins  shall  find  no  more  than  an  elastic  feel- 
ing upon  that  part  as  the  face  is  turned  to  the 
rear.  The  horse  must  never  be  allowed  to  bring 
its  head  straight  after  this  bend  has  been  de- 
manded, but  the  trainer  should  quiedy  bring  it 


■SIHHi^HRSmiH 

W^'  l^SBkr               '* 

BIMilff'iWt^^trliW 

■!  i-flBflri          -    ^ 

iHw^ 

B^j^HHk 

i 

^Hr^^^^Lll' '  ^^^V^~'  ^^ 

pHpl 

^^Wi 

^P    ''^^1^  ^ 

' ' ,  > '^!''''?^H '^^^B./4L m  '^'■'" 

^■'-" 

FIG.    77.  — CARRYING    HIND  LEGS   UNDER  THE    BODY 


■-■•                              -■"•          ■  ■'•      A 
■    •             -                        ■'  — i   ■■ " 

1^ 

y 

m 

FIG.    78.  — GROUP   ABOUT    FOREHAND,  TO   THE   RIGHT 


The  Stippling  117 

back  into  the  normal  position  by  means  of  the 
reins.  In  a  similar  manner  the  head  of  the  horse 
should  be  bent  to  the  right,  the  trainer  standing 
at  the  head  of  the  horse  on  the  left  side.  After 
the  horse  has  been  habituated  to  bend  the  head 
by  means  of  the  curb-bit  to  the  right  and  to  the 
left,  its  face  perpendicular  to  the  ground  and  its 
jaw  pliant,  it  will  be  made  to  do  the  same  by  the 
snaffle,  the  reins  of  that  bit  held  as  were  those  of 
the  curb-bit. 

These  lessons,  in  addition  to  those  recom- 
mended in  Chapter  II.,  will  give  the  man  com- 
plete control  over  the  forehand  of  the  horse, 
making  the  mouth  light  and  compliant,  and 
developing  and  suppling  the  muscles  of  the 
neck  greatly  to  the  improvement  of  the  horse  in 
grace  and  in  appearance. 

Two  very  simple  exercises  will  give  control  of 
the  hind  quarters,  when  the  completion  of  the 
education  of  the  horse  will  be  a  mere  matter  of 
repetition  and  riding,  as  the  discipline  necessary 
for  demanding  instant  and  exact  obedience  will 
have  been  put  in  train. 

To  make  the  horse  carry  its  hind  legs  under 
the  body,  the  man  should  stand  on  its  left  side 
facing  the  saddle ;  then,  taking  the  snaffle-reins 
held  under  the  chin  of  the  horse  at  equal  lengths 
in  his  left  hand,  he  should  give  some  light  taps 
of  a  slender  whip  upon  the  animal's  croup,  pre- 


ii8  Riding 

venting  a  forward  movement  by  a  tension  upon 
the  snaffle-reins.  At  first  the  trainer  should  be 
satisfied  when  the  horse  brins^s  its  hind  feet  for- 
ward  a  few  inches,  but  in  time  the  animal  should 
by  gradual  steps  be  induced  to  carry  its  hind  legs 
so  far  under  the  mass  that  the  four  feet  might 
stand  upon  a  handkerchief.  To  transfer  the  in- 
dications of  the  whip  to  the  heels,  the  rider  should 
mount,  and,  as  he  taps  the  horse  on  the  rump  with 
the  whip  held  behind  his  back,  he  should  apply 
his  heels  to  the  animal's  sides  until  the  hind  legs 
are  carried  forward  sufiiciently  to  satisfy  his  de- 
mands, while  a  forward  movement  is  prohibited 
by  a  tension  upon  the  snaffle-reins  held  in  the 
left  hand.  Gradually  the  employment  of  the  whip 
should  cease  and  the  horse  be  made  to  carry  the 
hind  legs  under  the  mass  to  any  extent  by  the 
pressure  of  the  rider's  heels.  After  the  horse  has 
carried  its  hind  legs  under  the  mass,  the  man 
should  release  the  tension  upon  the  reins,  and  by 
permitting  the  forehand  to  advance,  let  the  animal 
take  a  natural  position. 

To  make  the  horse  carry  the  croup  around  the 
forehand,  the  trainer  should  stand  at  the  left  side 
of  the  horse,  facing  the  saddle,  with  his  left  hand 
he  should  take  a  grasp  of  the  snaffle-reins  under 
the  chin  of  the  horse  and  bend  the  head  slightly 
away  from  him,  and  with  the  whip  he  should  give 
a  light  tap  or  taps  on  the  side  of  the  horse  just 


FIG.    79.  — CROUP   ABOUT   FOREHAND,    TO   THE   RIGHT 


FIG.    80.  — IN   HAND    IN    PLAGE 


The  Suppling  119 

behind  the  girth.  When  the  horse  makes  one 
step  with  the  croup  away  from  the  man,  the  fore- 
hand held  in  place  by  the  snaffle-reins,  the  whip 
taps  should  cease,  and  the  horse  be  rewarded 
by  caresses.  Another  step  from  the  croup  will 
then  be  demanded,  and  step  by  step  the  croup 
will  be  carried  to  the  right  completely  about  the 
stationary  forehand,  the  left  fore  leg  acting  as  the 
pivot,  the  right  fore  leg  being  brought  forward  to 
conform  to  the  movement  by  light  taps  of  the 
whip,  the  head  of  the  horse  bent  toward  the  ad- 
vancing croup.  The  horse  must  not  be  permitted 
to  volunteer  a  step,  but  every  step  should  be  made 
on  the  demand  of  the  trainer. 

In  the  same  manner  the  horse  should  be  made 
to  carry  the  croup  to  the  left  about  the  right  fore 
leg  as  the  pivot,  the  trainer  holding  the  snaffle- 
reins  in  the  right  hand,  the  whip  in  the  left,  and 
standing  on  the  right  side  of  the  horse. 

It  will  be  well  for  the  rider  to  mount  the  horse 
in  place,  at  this  stage,  and  to  conduct  the  suppling 
and  bending  exercises  just  described,  from  the 
saddle.  That  is,  from  the  saddle  he  should  bend 
the  head  of  the  horse  to  either  hand,  first  with 
the  curb-bit  and  then  with  the  snaffle-bit,  bring- 
ing the  head  back  to  the  normal  position  by 
means  of  the  reins ;  he  should  elevate  the  head, 
and  then  by  dropping  the  hand  and  playing  with 
the  reins  bring  the  face  of  the  horse  vertical  to 


1 20  Riding 

the  ground,  with  the  jaw  pliant  in  answer  to 
either  bit;  he  should  induce  the  horse  to  carry 
the  croup  about  the  forehand  to  either  side  at 
the  application  of  his  heel,  enforced,  if  necessary, 
by  the  whip  held  behind  the  rider's  back,  the 
outer  fore  leg  acting  as  pivot;  and,  finally  and 
frequently  between  the  pressure  of  his  legs  and 
gentle  vibrations  of  the  reins,  he  should  unite 
and  balance  the  forces  of  the  horse  so  that  by  the 
working  of  the  muscles  under  him,  as  the  horse 
arranges  the  bearers,  he  may  know  that  the 
animal  is  ready  to  move  in  hand. 


CHAPTER   XII 

THE  CURB-AND-SNAFFLE  BRIDLE  — GUIDING  BY  THE 
REIN  AGAINST  THE  NECK  — CROUP  ABOUT  FORE- 
HAND—UPON  TWO   PATHS 

If  but  one  bit  is  used  in  riding,  it  should  be 
the  snaffle,  for  it  has  a  much  wider  range  of 
effects  than  the  curb-bit,  and  the  latter,  when 
employed  alone,  tends  to  lower  the  head  of  the 
horse,  and  has  other  defects.  It  is  better,  how- 
ever, to  have  both  bits,  as  together  they  answer 
every  requirement.  With  the  snaffle  the  rider 
may  raise  or  depress  the  forehand,  freshen  and 
relieve  the  mouth  of  the  horse  occasionally  from 
the  restraint  of  the  curb-bit,  and  counteract  the 
defective  action  of  the  latter,  prepare  the  horse 
for  obedience  to  the  indications  of  the  more 
severe  mouthpiece,  and  give  many  other  results 
which  will  show  themselves  in  practice.  The 
curb-bit  gives  more  power  to  restrain  the  horse, 
applies  the  pressure  of  the  mouthpiece  upon  the 
proper  place,  which  the  snaffle  does  not  always 
do,  and  by  it  the  rider  may  more  readily  keep 
the  nose  of  the  horse  down  so  that  the  face 
of  the  animal  shall  be  vertical  and  thereby  insure 
the  right  power  upon  the  right  place. 


122  Riding 

With  trained  horses  I  seldom  draw  the  curb- 
reins,  for  the  animals  are  so  drilled  and  so  sensi- 
tive that  the  snaffle  is  nearly  always  sufficient 
but  the  curb-bit  is  ever  ready  to  enforce  its  pecul- 
iar powers  should  there  be  failure  on  the  part  of 
the  snaffle,  as,  for  example,  where  the  horse  throws 
forward  its  nose  so  that  the  snaffle  takes  a  bear- 
ing in  the  corners  of  the  mouth  and  so  loses 
much  of  its  power. 

Ordinarily  the  curb-bit  is  used  in  riding,  while 
the  snaffle-reins  lie  slack,  to  be  brought  into  play 
when  necessary ;  and  most  horses,  and  most  riders, 
require  the  curb-bit. 

The  man,  having  mounted,  will  take  in  his  left 
hand  the  reins  of  the  curb-bit  divided  by  the  little 
finger,  the  reins  of  the  snaffle  divided  by  the  long 
finger,  the  loose  ends  of  both  pairs  of  reins  carried 
through  his  hand  and  held  by  the  thumb  against 
the  forefinger,  and  draw  the  curb-reins  until  he 
can  feel  the  mouth  of  the  horse.  The  right  hand 
will  be  kept  on  the  loose  ends  of  the  reins  behind 
the  left,  but  when  it  is  called  upon  to  assist  the 
bridle-hand  it  will  act  upon  the  reins  in  front  of 
the  left  hand,  except  in  shortening  the  reins,  when 
it  will  draw  them  through  the  bridle-hand  from 
behind.  Then,  closing  his  legs  against  the  ani- 
mal's sides,  the  rider  should  make  gentle  vibra- 
tions of  the  curb-reins  by  a  play  of  his  fingers 
until    the    pliant   jaw    and    the   working    of    the 


FIG.    81.  — LEFT   REIN    AGAINST    NECK,  TO   TURN 
TO   THE   RIGHT 


FIG.    82. —  RIGHT   REIN   AGAINST    NEGK,  TO   TURN 
TO   THE   LEFT 


The  Curb- and- snaffle  Bridle  123 

muscles  under  him  show  that  the  horse  is  ready 
to  move  in  hand.  In  this  form  of  collection  he 
should  go  forward  in  the  walk.  To  turn  to  the 
right  he  should  bend  the  head  of  the  horse  with 
the  right  snaffle-rein  caught  in  his  right  hand,  and 
carry  the  left  hand  in  which  are  the  curb-reins 
over  to  the  right  until  the  outer  rein  comes  against 
the  neck  of  the  horse.  When  the  turn  is  begun, 
he  should  drop  the  snaffle-rein,  and  when  the  new 
direction  is  entered  upon,  he  should  bring  the 
bridle-hand  in  front  of  him,  so  that  there  shall  be 
equal  tensions  upon  both  curb-reins,  and  resume 
a  direct  path.  In  the  same  manner  the  turn  to 
the  left  side  should  be  inaugurated  by  the  left 
snaffle-rein,  and  the  bridle-hand  will  be  carried 
over  to  the  left  until  the  right  curb-rein  is  brought 
asrainst  the  rio;ht  side  of  the  neck  of  the  horse. 
This  use  of  the  curb-reins  is  called  the  indirect 
indications  of  the  bit.  On  straight  lines  the 
bridle-hand  should  be  held  just  above  the  pom- 
mel of  the  saddle,  the  thumb  uppermost  and 
pointing  toward  the  horse's  ears.  No  great 
movement  of  the  bridle-hand  should  be  made  in 
demanding  the  turn ;  when  carried  over  to  the 
right,  the  thumb  should  point  toward  the  rider's 
right  shoulder;  when  carried  over  to  the  left,  the 
thumb  should  point  toward  the  ground  over  the 
left  shoulder  of  the  horse.  By  observing  these 
directions  the  rein  may  be  brought  against  the 


124  Riding 

neck  of  the  horse  to  give  the  indirect  indications  of 
the  bit  without  too  great  movement  of  the  bridle- 
hand.  Gradually  the  employment  of  the  direct 
snafifle-rein  to  inaugurate  the  turn  will  be  dis- 
pensed with,  and  the  change  of  direction  will  be 
made  by  the  curb-reins  only  as  they  are  brought 
against  the  neck  of  the  horse. 

In  the  walk  and  in  the  slow  trot  the  horse 
should  be  ridden  in  hand  on  straight  paths  and 
in  circles  of  varying  diameters  to  accustom  the 
horse  to  that  form  of  collection  in  the  curb-bit; 
and  from  time  to  time  closer  forms  of  collection 
should  be  demanded,  first  in  the  walk  and  then 
in  the  trot,  until  the  half-halt  may  be  produced 
and  the  advance  be  again  made  before  the  horse 
grows  heavy.  Whatever  the  form  of  collection, 
the  jaw  of  the  horse  must  be  kept  pliant  and  the 
forces  of  the  two  extremities  be  kept  balanced. 
If  the  horse  hangs  upon  the  reins,  its  hind  legs 
must  be  brought  under  the  mass  to  lighten  the 
forehand,  and  every  movement  should  be  light, 
even,  and  regular. 

It  is  poor  policy  to  put  the  horse  into  the 
gallop  before  its  education  has  been  brought  to 
the  point  described  in  the  preceding  pages.  It 
is  highly  important  that  the  horse  should  be 
taught  a  perfectly  controlled  gallop,  one  in 
which  every  form  of  collection  may  be  observed 
and  in  which  the   rider  may   demand    the   lead 


FIG.  83.— REVERSED    PIROUETTE,  TO   THE   LEFT 


FIG.    84.  — ON    TWO   PATHS,  TRAVERSE    RIGHT 


Croup  about  Forehand  125 

with  either  side  and  the  changes  of  lead  with 
precision. 

The  croup  about  the  forehand,  or  reversed 
pirouette,  prepares  the  horse  for  the  movements 
on  two  paths,  for  wheels  in  the  gallop,  for  the 
pirouette  volte,  and  for  the  gallop  changes,  all 
of  which  are  requisite  in  a  thoroughly  trained 
saddle-horse,  when  the  rider  aspires  to  have  mas- 
tery over  every  movement  of  the  animal. 

To  make  the  horse  perform  the  reversed  pir- 
ouette, the  rider  should  bring  it  in  hand  in  place. 
Then,  bending  its  head  slightly  to  one  side,  say 
the  right,  he  should  apply  his  left  leg  to  the 
flank  and  make  the  horse  carry  the  croup  to  the 
right,  about  the  left  fore  leg  as  a  pivot,  the  bridle- 
hand  keeping  the  forehand  in  place,  the  heel  of 
the  rider  demanding  each  step,  the  right  leg  of 
the  rider  controlling  the  effects  of  his  left  leg. 
In  croup  about  forehand  to  the  left,  the  head  of 
the  horse  should  be  bent  slightly  to  the  left,  the 
right  fore  leg  of  the  horse  acts  as  pivot,  while  the 
rider's  right  leg  induces  the  hind  quarters  to  be 
carried  to  the  left  around  the  turning-point. 

In  the  work  upon  two  paths  the  body  of  the 
horse  should  be  placed  diagonally  across  the  line 
of  progress,  the  forehand  slightly  in  advance  of 
the  croup,  the  head  of  the  horse  bent  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  movement.  In  going  to  the  right,  the 
head  of  the  horse  will  be  bent  to  the  rieht  and  the 


1 26  Riding 

forehand  be  led  along  one  path,  while  the  rider's 
heels  carry  the  croup  along  a  parallel  path,  the 
effects  of  the  acting  or  left  heel  being  measured 
and  controlled  by  the  rider's  right  heel,  the  fore- 
hand about  two  feet  in  advance  of  the  croup.  In 
passing  upon  two  paths  to  the  left,  the  head  of 
the  horse  will  be  bent  to  the  left,  the  forehand 
being  led  to  the  left,  and  the  rider's  right  leg,  its 
effects  measured  by  the  left,  will  carry  the  croup 
upon  a  parallel  path,  so  that  the  body  of  the  horse 
shall  be  diagonally  disposed  across  the  line  of 
progress. 

In  coming  to  a  turn  or  on  a  circle,  the  croup 
will  be  slightly  retarded,  so  that  the  diagonal  po- 
sition shall  be  observed  everywhere  on  the  arc 
or  the  circumference,  if  the  forehand  be  following 
the  longer  outer  path.  But  if  in  turns  or  circles 
the  croup  be  following  the  outer  longer  path,  the 
forehand  will  be  retarded  so  that  everywhere  on 
the  arc  or  the  circumference  the  diagonal  position 
of  the  mass  shall  be  observed. 

The  horse  should  be  ridden  on  two  paths  in 
straight  lines,  in  turns,  and  in  large  and  small 
circles,  sometimes  the  forehand  on  the  outer  cir- 
cumferences, sometimes  the  croup  following  the 
longer  paths,  in  the  walk,  in  the  slow  trot,  and  in 
the  united  trot. 


FIG.    85.  — GALLOP   RIGHT,  HORSE    IN    AIR 


FIG.    86.  — GALLOP,  HIND   LEGS   COMMITTED   TO   A   STRIDE 


FIG.    87.  — GALLOP   RIGHT,  WHEN   THE   CHANGE   BEGINS 


CHAPTER   XIII 

THE  GALLOP,  AND  THE  GALLOP  CHANGE —  WHEEL 
IN  THE  GALLOP  —  PIROUETTE  TURN  —  HALT  IN 
THE   GALLOP 

Until  the  publication  of  "The  Horse  in 
Motion,"  many  of  the  movements  of  the  horse 
were  but  httle  understood,  and  of  these  the  gal- 
lop was  prominent  by  reason  of  its  importance. 
In  these  days,  thanks  to  the  quick  eye  of  the 
camera,  there  is  no  action  which  the  horse  is 
capable  of  making  that  may  not  be  clearly  shown 
in  every  phase. 

There  are  several  forms  of  the  gallop,  but  the 
general  principles  are  the  same  in  all,  the  varia- 
tions depending  upon  the  speed  and  the  state  of 
collection  of  the  horse. 

In  the  hand-gallop  of  three  beats  the  horse  goes 
into  air  from  a  fore  leg  used  as  a  leaping-pole ;  it 
then  brings  to  the  ground  the  diagonally  disposed 
hind  leg ;  the  other  hind  leg  and  its  diagonal  fore 
leg  are  then  planted  so  nearly  together  that  the 
hoofs  give  the  sound  of  but  one  beat;  then  the 
first  acting  fore  leg  comes  to  the  ground  from 
which  the  horse  again  goes  into  air  in  a  new 
127 


128  Riding 

stride.  The  horse  is  said  "  to  lead  "  with  the  legs 
which  are  advanced  in  each  stride ;  if  the  horse 
goes  into  air  from  the  right  fore  leg,  it  is  m gallop 
right,  as  the  fore  and  hind  legs  of  that  side  are 
advanced  beyond  the  fore  and  hind  legs  of  the 
other  side.  If  the  horse  goes  into  air  from  the 
left  fore  leg,  it  will  be  in  gallop  left. 

In  the  full-gallop,  or  racing  pace,  the  secondly- 
planted  hind  leg  is  brought  to  the  ground  an 
appreciable  time  before  its  diagonally  disposed 
fore  leg,  and  we  have  a  pace  of  four  beats. 

The  canter,  or  lope,  is  a  pace  of  feeble  action 
and  of  low  form  of  collection  in  which  the  diago- 
nal fore  leg  is  brought  to  the  ground  before  the 
second  hind  leg  is  planted. 

In  the  school-gallop,  the  most  finished  form  of 
the  pace,  the  horse  is  so  closely  united  that  the 
secondly  planted  hind  leg  reaches  the  ground 
before  its  diagonally  disposed  fore  leg,  and  we 
have  again  a  gallop  of  four  beats. 

It  will  be  seen,  then,  that  the  galloping  horse 
should  be  in  gallop  right  in  turning  to  the  right, 
in  gallop  left  in  turning  to  the  left,  so  that  a  hind 
leg  will  be  under  the  centre  of  gravity  as  a  bearer 
of  the  weight  when  the  turn  is  made.  If  a  horse, 
in  gallop  left,  be  turned  shortly  to  the  right,  it  will 
almost  invariably  fall,  for  as  the  horse  leans  over 
at  the  turn  there  will  be  no  support  under  the 
mass.     A    horse  at  liberty  instinctively  changes 


The  Gallop,  and  I  he  Gallop  Changes    129 

the  lead  in  the  gallop  as  circumstances  require ; 
but  the  mounted  horse  cannot  be  depended  upon 
to  make  the  change  voluntarily,  and  the  rider 
should  demand  the  change  at  the  proper  time. 
Before  the  appearance  of  "  Modern  Horseman- 
ship," no  one  had  described  how  the  horse  began 
the  change  in  the  gallop,  from  right  to  left  or 
from  left  to  right,  or  how  it  was  performed.  Dr. 
Stillman,  the  only  author  who  had  touched  upon 
the  subject,  suggested  that  the  horse  changed  the 
lead  when  in  air,  but  this  was  a  manifestly  incor- 
rect supposition  ;  for  the  photographs  show  that 
the  hind  legs  are  always  committed  to  a  certain 
stride  before  the  horse  goes  into  air.  By  riding 
trained  horses  in  the  gallop  changes  before  the 
camera,  I  discovered  when  those  movements  were 
begun  and  how  they  were  made,  and  I  was  able 
to  explain  how  the  aids  should  be  applied  to  pro- 
duce the  changes;  for  previously  it  had  been  a 
matter  of  experiment  and  tentative  practice  with 
each  horse  that  had  been  taught  to  make  the 
gallop  change.  The  loose  explanations  in  the 
riding  regulations  of  every  army,  and  even  those 
of  such  authorities  as  Baucher  and  others,  prove 
this  assertion.  I  am  somewhat  familiar  with  the 
writings  of  nearly  all  the  authors  of  standard 
works  on  horsemanship,  from  the  days  of  Grisone 
to  the  present  day,  and  I  cannot  recall  a  passage 
in  any  one  of  them  that  would  indicate  a  knowl- 


1 30  Riding 

edge  of  how  the  gallop  change  was  made,  or  one 
that  gave  a  rational  explanation  of  how  and  why 
the  aids  should  be  applied. 

The  gallop  changes  must  have  been  success- 
fully demanded  from  time  immemorial,  but,  as 
has  been  said,  it  was  always  considered  a  difHcult 
performance  to  procure  with  certainty  and  pre- 
cision, and  in  many  cases  was  made  as  a  turn 
was  begun,  the  forehand  beginning  the  change 
which  would  leave  the  hind  legs  false  for  that 
stride. 

When  the  photographs  proved  that  the  hind 
legs  were  committed  to  a  certain  order  before  the 
horse  left  the  ground  in  each  leap,  it  was  apparent 
that  the  change  must  take  place  in  the  hind 
quarters  as  soon  as  the  legs  of  that  part  were 
free  to  change  their  order;  and  that  the  legs  of 
the  forehand  must  make  a  corresponding  change 
when  they  were  free,  when  the  gallop  change 
would  be  finished  in  one  stride,  without  a  false 
step. 

To  make  the  horse  change,  say  from  gallop 
right  to  gallop  left,  in  any  stride,  the  forces  must 
first  be  fairly  united;  the  right  heel  should  be 
applied  when  the  forehand  is  down,  and  as  the 
hind  legs  are  leaving  the  ground ;  immediately 
thereafter,  as  the  forehand  is  rising,  the  left  rein 
should  make  a  slight  play  which  will  insure  the 
change  in  the  fore  legs,  and  the  change  will  be 


The  Gallop  Changes  131 

completed  without  a  false  step  and  without  any 
disturbance  of  the  pace. 

The  change  from  gallop  left  to  gallop  right 
may  be  demanded  in  a  similar  manner,  the  left 
leg  of  the  rider  and  the  right  rein  giving  the 
indications. 

The  gallops  previously  described  are  those  in 
which  the  pace  is  true,  the  only  forms  in  which 
lie  ease  and  safety. 

If  the  horse  be  in  gallop  right  (or  left)  and  turns 
to  the  left  (or  right),  it  is  false  in  the  gallop,  and 
may  fall. 

If  the  horse  has  gallop  right  (or  left)  in  the 
forehand  and  gallop  left  (or  right)  in  the  hind 
quarter,  it  is  in  the  cross-gallop,  which  is  wrong, 
and  the  error  should  be  immediately  rectified. 

To  make  the  horse  take  gallop  right  from  the 
halt,  the  walk,  or  the  slow  trot,  the  rider  should 
first  collect  the  forces  of  the  animal,  apply  the 
left  heel,  and  make  a  slight  upward  play  with 
the  right  rein ;  when  given  sufficient  freedom,  the 
horse  will  start  off  with  the  legs  of  the  right  side 
leading. 

Gallop  left  will  be  procured  in  a  similar  manner 
by  the  use  of  the  right  heel  and  the  left  rein. 

In  a  slow,  measured,  regularly  cadenced  pace, 
the  horse  should  be  ridden  in  the  gallop  on 
straight  lines  and  on  circles,  the  rider  being  care- 
ful that  the  horse  is  in  the  true  gallop  on  the  turns. 


132  Riding 

Habitually  the  horse  should  be  kept  in  hand, 
but  from  time  to  time  closer  forms  of  union  should 
be  demanded,  until  the  rider  can  bring  the  horse 
to  the  half-halt  and  resume  the  gallop  without 
struggle  or  disturbance  in  the  pace. 

In  teaching  the  horse  to  change  from  gallop 
right  (or  left)  to  gallop  left  (or  right)  in  the  beat 
of  the  pace,  the  rider  should  put  the  horse  in  a 
slow  gallop  and  after  a  while  bring  the  animal  to 
a  slow  trot  for  a  few  strides,  and  from  that  pace 
demand  the  gallop  with  the  other  side  leading. 
These  trotting  steps  will  be  gradually  reduced 
and  be  replaced  by  the  half-halt,  in  which  the 
change  should  be  made ;  and,  finally,  disregard- 
ing the  half-halt,  the  rider  will  be  able  to  demand 
the  change  in  any  stride  without  breaking  the 
cadence. 

In  a  slow,  united  gallop  the  horse  should  be 
ridden  on  two  paths,  on  straight  lines  and  on 
circles,  in  exactly  the  same  manner  as  in  the  trot, 
the  horse  being  in  gallop  right  in  passing  to  the 
right,  in  gallop  left  in  passing  to  the  left,  the  fore- 
hand slightly  in  advance  of  the  croup. 

The  wheel  in  the  gallop  is  produced  by  follow- 
ing a  sm.all  circle  on  two  paths,  the  croup  toward 
the  centre.  When  the  turn  is  so  short  and  the 
union  so  close  that  the  inner  hind  leg  of  the  horse 
remains  on  one  spot,  we  have  the  pirouette  wheel, 
—  a  very  important  movement  for  the  mounted 


Halt  in  the  Gallop  133 

soldier  and  a  valuable  one  for  many  reasons  to 
every  horseman. 

Many  forms  of  exercise  adapted  to  disciplining 
the  horse  in  various  ways  will  suggest  themselves 
to  the  rider.  As,  for  example,  taking  gallop  right 
on  a  straight  line,  bringing  the  horse  to  a  half- 
halt,  making  a  gallop  wheel,  then  a  change  of  lead, 
and  returning  over  the  same  path  in  gallop  left. 
Or,  passing  on  two  paths  in  gallop  left,  coming  to 
a  half-halt,  changing  lead,  and  going  off  at  a  right 
angle  in  gallop  right.  Or,  riding  in  gallop  to 
right  (or  left)  on  a  single  path  on  the  circumference 
of  a  small  circle  and  changing  lead  in  the  beat  of 
the  pace  to  go  on  a  similar  circle  to  the  other 
hand,  making  a  figure  8  without  disturbing  the 
pace. 

With  a  little  practice  the  trained  horse  may  be 
brought  to  make  a  finished  halt  in  any  stride  of 
the  gallop  without  shock  or  danger  of  injury  to 
the  animal.  The  rider,  to  obtain  this,  should 
accustom  the  horse  to  come  to  a  halt  from  the 
walk,  in  answer  to  the  pressure  of  his  legs  and  an 
increased  tension  upon  the  reins.  Then  the  halt 
should  be  demanded  in  the  same  manner  from 
the  trot.  When  the  horse  has  been  taught  the 
various  forms  of  collection  in  the  gallop,  the  rider 
may  bring  it  to  a  halt  in  that  pace  by  leaning 
back,  closing  his  legs  against  the  sides  of  the  ani- 
mal and  raising  the  bridle-hand,  at  the  moment 


134  Riding 

the  hind  legs  are  leaving  the  ground.  The  result 
of  this  employment  of  the  aids  will  be  to  induce 
the  horse  to  carry  the  hind  legs  simultaneously 
under  the  mass  and  so  stop  the  advance  ;  and 
upon  the  release  of  the  tension  upon  the  reins  the 
forehand  will  take  a  normal  position  and  the  halt 
will  have  been  effected  in  one  stride.  This  posi- 
tion of  the  hind  legs  under  the  body  of  the  horse 
gives  an  elastic  bearing  that  will  prevent  any 
shock  that  might  injuriously  affect  the  houghs 
of  the  animal.  All  carefully  conducted  training 
is  assurance  against  strains  or  hurts  to  the  horse, 
and  an  animal  that  has  not  been  schooled  is  far 
more  apt  to  slip  or  in  some  way  injure  itself  than 
one  that  has  been  taught  to  perform  the  most 
violent  movements  of  the  manege.  Of  the  scores 
of  horses  I  have  trained,  not  one  ever  threw  a 
curb  or  a  spavin  while  in  my  hands,  and  all  of 
them  were  the  better  in  every  way  for  the  work 
they  were  called  upon  to  do. 


FIG.    90.  — BACKING.     THE    IMPULSE 


FIG.    91.  — BACKING 


CHAPTER   XIV 

BACKING 

The  saddle-horse  should  go  backward  in  the 
walk  with  the  same  freedom  and  lightness  as  that 
with  which  it  advances  in  that  pace ;  and  it 
should  pass  to  either  hand  with  precision,  the 
spur  demanding  the  changes  of  direction,  the 
bits,  acting  like  a  rudder,  guiding  the  forehand 
upon  the  path  along  which  the  croup  moves. 

A  few  lessons  on  foot  greatly  facilitate  the 
teaching  of  this  movement. 

The  trainer,  standing  at  the  left  shoulder  of  the 
animal  and  grasping  the  snafHe-reins  under  the 
chin  of  the  horse,  should,  by  means  of  a  few  whip 
taps  upon  the  rump,  and  the  restraint  of  the  bit, 
make  a  fair  collection  of  its  forces.  Then,  after 
the  animal  is  standing  quietly,  he  should  renew 
the  whip  taps  upon  the  rump  until  a  hind  leg  is 
flexed  as  if  for  a  forward  movement;  at  this  mo- 
ment the  hand  should  draw  the  reins  toward  the 
chest  of  the  horse  so  that  the  raised  hind  leg  will 
take  one  step  to  the  rear.  The  horse  should  be 
led  forward  for  a  few  steps,  and  be  again  collected. 
In  the  same  manner  two  or  more  steps  to  the  rear 
135 


1 36  Riding 

should  be  demanded  and  the  horse  be  made  to 
advance  while  the  centre  of  gravity  is  balanced 
and  easily  brought  forward,  the  horse  being  kept 
light  and  the  impulses  alert.  The  steps  to  the 
rear  will  be  gradually  increased  in  number,  until 
the  horse  will  back  any  distance  evenly  and  freely, 
the  whip  being  ready  to  prevent  too  rapid  a  re- 
treat, and  hand  and  whip  maintaining  the  collec- 
tion ;  but  the  forward  movement  must  always  be 
demanded  before  a  complete  halt  is  effected,  and 
an  impulse  obtained  before  the  horse  is  called 
upon  to  back. 

The  rider  should  then  mount  and  bring  the 
horse  in  hand.  By  the  pressure  of  the  heels  he 
should  demand  an  impulse,  and  when  a  hind  leg 
is  flexed  it  should  be  carried  to  the  rear;  the 
rider's  legs  should  then  close  against  the  sides  of 
the  horse,  the  hand  give  freedom,  and  the  animal 
should  be  sent  forward  a  few  steps.  Gradually 
the  horse  should  be  made  to  go  to  the  rear  for 
any  distance,  every  step  being  demanded  by  hand 
and  heels,  the  latter  preventing  too  rapid  or  too 
irregular  a  movement,  the  hand  requiring  the 
raised  legs  to  be  carried  back. 

To  turn  to  the  right,  the  left  leg  of  the  rider 
should  give  an  increased  pressure,  and  the  right 
rein,  its  effects  measured  by  the  left  rein,  should 
give  an  increased  tension  upon  the  horse's  jaw,  so 
that   the   forehand  will   follow   the  croup.     The 


Backing  137 

turns  to  the  left  will  be  made  in  the  same  man- 
ner, the  right  heel  of  the  rider  and  the  left  rein 
exerting  the  greater  influence.  In  going  back- 
ward in  the  walk,  the  legs  of  the  horse  should 
follow  in  regular  order,  but  the  first  step  to  the 
rear  should  be  made  by  a  hind  leg,  because  the 
movement  begins  with  an  impulse  from  the  croup ; 
and  to  insure  this  the  animal  should  be  collected 
before  the  movement  is  begun.  The  horse  should 
not  be  permitted  to  become  heavy,  but,  by  de- 
manding a  close  collection,  every  step  should  be 
light  and  easy,  and  the  balance  should  be  such 
that  the  animal  will  be  capable  of  going  forward 
at  any  moment. 


CHAPTER   XV 

JUMPING 

A  VERY  useful  apparatus  for  teaching  the  horse 
to  jump  cleanly  and  willingly  is  a  little  gate  or 
hurdle,  about  three  feet  wide,  made  with  three 
bars ;  the  lower  one  fixed  at  eighteen  inches  from 
the  ground  to  bind  the  uprights,  which  should  be 
about  three  feet  in  height ;  the  other  two  bars  be- 
ing removable,  one  to  fit  in  slots  two  and  a  half 
feet  from  the  ground,  the  other  to  fit  on  the  top 
of  the  uprights.  But  of  course  any  bar  will 
answer  the  purpose. 

With  the  upper  two  bars  removed,  the  hurdle 
should  be  placed  on  a  bit  of  level  ground  and  the 
horse  led  over  the  lower  bar  two  or  three  times, 
the  trainer  holding  the  snafifle-reins  near  the  bit. 
When  the  horse  has  been  accustomed  to  walk 
over  the  bar,  the  man  should  take  the  ends  of  the 
reins  and  let  the  horse  cross  in  a  slow  trot ;  this 
the  animal  will  probably  do  in  a  leap,  when  the 
man  should  bring  it  to  a  halt  and  reward  it  with 
caresses.  Then  the  next  bar  should  be  placed 
between  the  uprights,  and  the  horse,  held  by  the 
length  of  the  reins,  be  brought  up  at  a  trot  to 
138 


FIG.    92.  — JUMPING    IN    HAND 


FIG.    93.  — THE   NARROW   HURDLE 


FIG.    94.  — JUMPING    IN    HAND 


I40  Riding 

belly  will  make  the  animal  gather  the  hind  legs 
under  its  body. 

After  the  horse  takes  the  hurdle  with  perfect 
calmness  when  held  by  the  snafifle-reins,  the  trainer 
should  accustom  the  animal  to  jump  over  the  ob- 
stacle while  on  the  longe-rein,  the  trainer  being 
then  twelve  or  fifteen  feet  away  from  the  hurdle. 
Then,  the  horse  being  habituated  to  jump  the 
narrow  obstacle  without  reluctance,  rugs,  colored 
cloths,  or  anything  of  the  kind  that  might  ordina- 
rily alarm  a  horse  should  be  placed,  first  near  the 
hurdle  and  then  upon  it,  as  the  horse  jumps  it  at 
the  length  of  the  longe-line. 

The  trainer  should  then  mount  and  ride  the 
horse  over  the  bar  fixed  at  two  and  a  half  feet. 
He  should  first  take  the  horse  up  to  the  obstacle 
in  a  slow,  collected  trot,  using  the  snafifle-reins,  and 
when  the  horse  is  by  its  momentum  committed  to 
the  jump,  he  should  give  it  liberty  to  take  off  as  it 
pleases  and  offer  a  light  support  as  the  forehand 
again  comes  to  the  ground.  If  the  horse  does 
not  flex  the  hind  legs  sufficiently,  a  whip  stroke 
behind  the  girths  will  induce  it  to  bring  the  hind 
legs  well  under  the  body.  But  as  far  as  is  possible 
the  use  of  whip  or  spur  as  the  horse  jumps  should 
be  avoided,  and  the  animal  should  be  mettlesome 
and  lively  when  it  approaches  the  obstacle,  and 
be  ready  to  exert  itself  with  a  will.  The  top  bar 
should  then  be  placed  on  the  uprights,  and  the 


Jumping  141 

horse  be  ridden  over  the  hurdle  now  three  feet 
high,  first  in  the  slow  trot,  then  from  the  halt,  and 
finally  from  the  slow  gallop. 

In  the  jump  from  the  walk,  the  trot,  and  the 
slow  gallop,  the  rider  should  incline  his  body 
slightly  forward  as  the  horse  rises  and  bend  his 
body  back,  more  or  less  depending  upon  the 
height  of  the  drop,  as  the  forehand  comes  down,  — 
his  feet  carried  to  the  rear,  so  that  there  shall  be 
no  pressure  against  the  stirrup  to  disturb  the  seat. 
Horses  jump  in  all  sorts  of  forms.  Some  horses 
do  not  rise  until  quite  under  the  obstacle,  when 
they  squat  down,  go  up  almost  perpendicularly, 
and  drop  on  the  other  side  quite  as  suddenly. 
Others  take  off  at  a  fair  distance,  jump  easily,  and 
land  steadily.  The  rider  must  be  prepared,  how- 
ever, to  bend  his  body  in  accordance  with  the 
movements  of  the  horse. 

In  riding  at  a  very  high  obstacle,  the  horse 
should  be  slowly  collected  at  a  moderate  gallop ; 
and  when  the  horse  has  faced  the  leap,  the  rider's 
hand  should  give  the  animal  liberty  to  act  freely, 
and  as  it  alights  he  should  offer  some  support. 

I  think  that  nearly  every  work  on  riding  warns 
the  reader  that  one  cannot  raise  the  horse.  It  is 
true  that  in  the  state  of  collection  in  which  most 
horses  are  ridden  it  would  take  a  block  and  tackle 
to  bring  up  the  forehand  ;  but  what  shall  we  call 
the  pirouette,  the  curvet,  the  pesade,  or  even  the 


142  Riding 

support  the  rider  gives  the  stumbling  horse  so 
that  a  leg  may  be  put  under  the  falling  animal, 
but  a  raising  of  the  forehand  ? 

In  jumping,  however,  the  rider  must  not  at- 
tempt to  lift  the  horse  ;  he  must  trust  to  the 
instincts  of  the  animal  necessary  to  clear  the 
obstacle  and  for  the  disposition  of  its  bearers  to 
secure  safety  in  landing. 

After  facing  the  horse  to  the  jump,  the  rider 
should  give  the  animal  freedom  of  action,  not  by 
making  such  a  change  on  the  tension  of  the  reins 
as  might  bring  the  animal  down,  but  by  giving 
his  arms  such  play  that  the  horse  may  extend 
itself.  When  the  animal  alights,  it  must  find 
some  support  from  the  bit,  so  that  in  case  of 
a  peck  or  of  a  stumble  the  forehand  can  rise 
until  a  bearer  comes  under  the  centre  of  gravity 
and  saves  a  fall.  The  bending  back  of  the  rider's 
body  as  the  forehand  reaches  the  ground  is,  of 
course,  of  great  assistance  in  recovering  from  a 
misstep. 

In  taking  low  jumps  at  a  racing  pace,  the  rider 
need  not  lean  back  as  the  horse  alights,  for  the 
momentum  is  so  great  that  no  change  in  the  body 
of  the  rider  is  required. 

Sometimes,  even  under  such  circumstances,  the 
expected  consequences  do  not  follow  a  mistake, 
and  it  is  astonishing  to  see  how  a  flying  horse, 
encumbered   by  a  man  upon   its  shoulders,  may 


Jumping  143 

recover  from  a  stumble.  But  hurdle-racing  is 
poor  sport,  neither  jumping  nor  racing. 

When  the  horse  will  leap  the  hurdle  willingly 
and  perfectly,  it  should  be  taken  into  the  fields 
and  put  over  fences,  ditches,  and  streams.  Most 
horses  are  at  first  timid  in  facing  water,  but  with 
a  little  care  a  horse  may  be  made  to  attempt  any 
obstacle  that  is  offered.  In  riding  at  broad  water 
or  at  any  wide  jump,  the  rider  should  sit  down  in 
his  saddle  and  send  the  horse  forward  in  a  good 
pace  so  that  the  momentum  will  carry  the  mass 
over. 

In  Great  Britain  and  in  Ireland,  in  those  coun- 
tries where  banks  are  sometimes  the  boundaries 
of  fields,  the  horses  are  taught,  usually  by  easy 
lessons  in  the  cavesson  or  by  being  driven  before 
the  trainer  in  long  reins,  to  leap  upon  the  top  of 
the  bank  and  from  thence  across  the  ditch.  The 
dexterity  and  cleverness  with  which  these  ani- 
mals will  poise  themselves  on  the  top  of  a  slip- 
pery bank,  and  the  security  with  which  they 
will  leap  from  such  insecure  footing,  are  things 
to  be  wondered  at. 

We  are  told  that  some  hunters  are  taught  to 
drive  themselves  forward  by  kicking  back  at  a 
stone  wall.  I  do  not  dispute  this,  but  I  can  say 
that  I  have  seen  scores  of  hunters  going  over 
such  obstacles,  and  any  displacement  of  stones 
or  striking  of  the  walls  was  manifestly  accidental ; 


144  Riding 

and  that  from  a  study  of  the  actions  of  the  horse, 
the  kick,  while  in  air,  would  in  most  instances 
result  in  disaster,  for  both  fore  legs  and  hind  legs 
would  be  extended  at  the  same  time.  I  have  had 
horses  kick  out  when  jumping  on  the  longe,  but 
the  forehand  would  then  be  on  the  ground,  and 
a  kick  given  at  such  a  time  would  not  benefit  the 
jump.  The  books  say  that  in  the  capriole  the 
kick  to  the  rear  is  given  when  the  horse  is  in  air, 
but  the  photographs  prove  that  it  is  given  after 
the  horse  alights. 

In  jumping  for  practice,  4  feet  or  4  feet  6  inches 
should  be  high  enough.  Most  horses  enjoy  jump- 
ing, but  they  should  not  be  asked  to  do  too  much, 
for  they  readily  take  a  dislike  to  the  sport.  A 
horse  should  never  be  punished  as  it  is  about  to 
make  a  jump ;  the  rider  should  sit  quite  still,  and 
he  should  avoid  raising  an  arm  as  the  horse  goes 
into  air,  as  so  many  men  do,  for  the  motion  will 
distract  the  attention  of  the  horse  at  a  critical 
moment. 

The  standard  of  jumping  has  gone  up  so  much 
in  recent  years  that  one  hesitates  to  say  where  the 
limit  will  be  found.  A  friend  of  mine  has  kindly 
offered  me  a  moment  photograph  of  a  horse  of 
four  years  of  age  passing  over  the  extraordinary 
height  of  seven  feet  one  and  three-quarters  inches 

(7'  '!")• 

I  once  asked  a  professional  rider  of  long  expe- 


Jumping  145 

rience,  the  son  of  a  professional  rider,  what  advice 
he  would  give  regarding  a  fall  from  or  with  the 
horse.  He  said  that  in  falling  he  always  bent  his 
chin  toward  his  chest  to  save  the  neck,  and  made 
himself  as  like  a  ball  as  possible.  To  this  I  will 
add  that  the  man  should  retain  the  reins  in  case 
of  a  fall  until  he  knows  that  he  is  free  from  the 
stirrups. 

Horses  used  for  jumping  should  have  strong 
hind  quarters,  sloping  shoulders,  and  good  fore 
legs. 

It  must  be  admitted  that  some  of  the  finest 
performers  over  high  jumps  have  upright  shoul- 
ders, but  the  horses  are  good  in  spite  of  the 
defect ;  and  on  the  steeplechase  course  we  often 
see  broken-down  blood-horses  come  on  as  win- 
ners, but  these  animals  are  none  the  better  for 
their  injuries,  and  are  certainly  dangerous  to 
ride. 

When  a  woman  rides  at  obstacles,  her  line 
should  be  on  an  arc  to  the  right  rather  than 
to  the  left,  so  that  if  the  horse  falls  she  will  be 
on  top  of  the  animal  and  not  pinned  beneath  it. 

The  design  in  giving  the  early  lessons  in 
jumping  over  the  narrow  hurdle  is  to  habituate 
the  horse  to  take  what  is  offered  it  without  run- 
ning out,  for  when  it  has  been  disciplined  to  leap 
an  obstacle  that  could  readily  be  avoided,  it  will 
not  look  for  means  of  escape  when  brought  to 


146  Riding 

face  other  objects.  My  horses  will  cross  over 
doubles,  in  and  out,  the  reins  hanging  upon 
their  necks,  and  the  obstacles  no  more  than 
two  feet  in  width.  In  fine,  a  well-trained  horse 
will  jump  anything  within  its  powers  without 
urging  and  in  the  safest  manner. 


CHAPTER   XVI 

GENERAL   REMARKS 

I  AM  convinced  that  nothing  has  been  recom- 
mended in  this  work  that  is  not  absolutely 
requisite  in  the  proper  training  of  the  saddle- 
horse;  for  the  same  general  principles  are  ob- 
served in  what  are  considered  the  simplest 
permissible  military  methods,  although  they  are 
not  always  attempted  in  the  manner  I  have 
followed.  But  even  admitting  that  some  of  the 
work  is  useful  only  for  its  discipline,  to  which  I 
do  not  consent,  that  would  in  itself  be  a  sufficient 
reason  for  retaining  it. 

I  have  been  told  very  frequently,  by  readers, 
that  they  have  had  no  difficulty  in  understanding 
the  instructions  I  have  offered,  and  I  know  that 
they  should  be  easily  carried  out,  seeing  that  even 
now  I  train  my  own  horses  without  assistance. 

It  is  advisable  for  the  man  who  wishes  to  train 
his  own  horse  during  rough  weather,  to  have  it 
ready  for  the  pleasant  season,  to  keep  the  animal 
in  some  public  riding-school,  where  he  will  have 
the  use  of  "  the  ring,"  until  his  work  is  finished, 
unless,  what  is  better,  he  has  some  barn  or 
147 


hS  Riding 

other  covered  area  where  he  may  carry  on  its 
education  in  spite  of  frosts  and  storms.  It  is 
important  that,  once  the  work  is  begun,  there 
should  be  no  interruption ;  and  in  our  climate  I 
should  say  that  April  is  the  best  month  in  which 
to  begin  with  a  young  horse  in  the  open.  Dur- 
ing the  summer,  the  flies  are  so  annoying  that  it 
is  difiBcult  to  keep  the  attention  of  the  animal; 
and  neither  man  nor  horse  is  fitted  in  the  ex- 
tremely cold  weather  of  winter  for  the  work  of 
training. 

Too  much  stress  cannot  be  laid  upon  the 
importance  of  sufficient  and  frequent  exercise  for 
the  avoidance  of  that  nervous  and  excitable  con- 
dition in  the  horse  known  as  "freshness."  Of 
course,  a  horse  that  has  been  thoroughly  disci- 
plined is  much  more  readily  brought  under  con- 
trol than  a  young  animal  that  has  not  yet  been 
taught  to  obey  hand  and  heel  instinctively,  but 
even  the  old,  well-drilled  horse  may  lose  much  of  its 
training  if  it  be  not  very  carefully  handled  after  a 
long  rest  with  high  feeding,  and  it  is  far  better  to 
run  no  risk  of  insubordination.  The  fresh  horse 
may  be  considered  as  hysterical  and  sometimes 
temporarily  mad ;  even  those  which  are  most 
docile  when  in  proper  work  become  flighty  with 
"  stall-courage,"  and  may  bite,  kick,  or  plunge 
when  first  brought  into  the  open  air  after  some 
days  of  idleness.     These  freaks  do  not  indicate  a 


General  Remarks  149 

vicious  disposition,  but  vice  may  grow  out  of 
them  through  injudicious  treatment.  Longeing 
on  the  cavesson,  a  run  in  the  paddock,  or  a  brisk 
trot  under  the  saddle  will  soon  relieve  this  con- 
dition, but  when  the  fresh  horse  is  ridden,  it  should 
not  be  called  upon  for  anything  beyond  a  good, 
steady  pace  until  it  becomes  composed. 

Some  jealous-minded  horses  are  easily  spoiled 
by  petting,  and  from  too  frequent  indulgences  at 
improper  times  in  sugar  and  in  such  dainties,  and 
show  a  nasty  temper  when  disappointed  in  their 
expectations.  These  animals  should  be  treated 
with  uniform  kindness,  but  should  not  be  taught 
to  look  for  such  favors  every  time  the  rider  dis- 
mounts or  approaches.  At  regular  feeding  times 
the  one  who  is  to  ride  the  horse  may  give  it  an 
occasional  treat,  never  when  the  animal  is  bridled, 
for  the  bit  must  always  be  clean  and  smooth. 
A  kind  word  or  a  caress  is  sufificient  reward  for 
good  behavior,  and  a  harsh  word  is  the  most 
effective  correction  that  can  be  given.  The  whip 
and  the  spur  must  be  employed  to  enforce 
demands,  but  these  instruments  should  be  used 
promptly  and  for  reasons,  never  for  punishment. 
For  example,  if  a  horse  hangs  back,  or  shows  a 
disinclination  to  pass  an  object,  a  smart  rap  of  the 
rod  will  usually  send  it  along ;  but  if  there  is  a 
positive  refusal,  repeated  applications  of  the  whip 
or  spur  will  work  great  harm,  and  the  rider  should 


1 50  Riding 

obtain  the  desired  obedience  by  some  ruse  which 
will  have  a  lasting  good  effect  upon  the  animal. 

A  moment's  reflection  should  show  the  reader 
that  a  "  combined  horse  "  (that  is,  one  suited  for 
harness  and  riding)  is  an  anomaly,  for  the  first 
requisite  in  a  saddle-horse  is  that  it  should  have 
a  carriage  that  is  inconsistent  with  that  to  which 
it  is  accustomed  in  drawing  loads.  There  would 
be  no  great  harm  in  putting  a  young  horse  in 
light  harness  for  a  short  time  to  steady  it,  but 
after  its  training  for  the  saddle  has  been  under- 
taken it  should  never  bear  a  collar.  A  horse  that 
is  habituated  to  harness  cannot  have  light  and 
balanced  action  under  the  rider.  The  animal 
that  is  taught  to  throw  its  weight  against  the 
traces  will  travel  upon  its  shoulders  and  be  apt 
to  trip  when  the  weight  of  a  man  augments  the 
defects  of  that  mode  of  moving.  The  day  before 
this  page  was  written  a  friend  of  the  author 
remarked  that  a  "  combined  horse  "  which  had 
never  made  a  mistake  in  harness  had  just  given 
him  a  fall ;  and  a  great  number  of  such  instances 
might  be  cited.  A  poor  rider  may  throw  any 
horse,  and  in  ninety-nine  cases  out  of  a  hundred  a 
fall  is  the  fault  of  the  rider,  but  it  requires  a  good 
and  careful  horseman  to  keep  old  Dobbin  on  his 
feet  when  the  animal  is  taken  out  of  the  shafts 
and  put  under  the  saddle. 

The   only   certain    method    of   correcting   the 


FIG.    97.  — HURDLE-RACING 


FIG.  98. —HIGH    JUMPING.     MR.  ASHBROOK'S  THISTLEDOWN 


General  Remarks  151 

faults  of  a  spoiled  horse  is  to  retrain  the  animal 
from  the  very  first  lessons  in  the  cavesson.  In 
this  manner  discipline  may  be  reestablished,  but 
the  animal  will  nearly  always  be  disposed  to 
revert  to  old  tricks,  particularly  so  if  it  remains  in 
the  hands  of  him  who  has  permitted  the  liberties 
which  grew  into  vice.  Some  horses  are  ever  on 
the  lookout  for  opportunities  of  taking  advantage 
of  a  timid  or  irresolute  rider,  and  such  are  out  of 
place  with  him  who  lacks  nerve,  and  should  be 
turned  over  to  better  horsemen.  When  faults  are 
due  to  incurable  physical  or  mental  defects,  it  is 
useless  to  attempt  to  remedy  them.  That  much 
may  be  done  by  skilful  work  to  render  such 
animals  less  dangerous  is  true,  but  the  game  is 
not  worth  the  candle.  A  horse  that  is  ground- 
shy,  that  is,  one  which  sees  objects  at  its  feet  in  a 
distorted  form,  or  that  is  subject  to  fits  of  terror 
or  excitement,  is  not  suited  to  the  saddle.  On 
the  other  hand,  it  will  not  be  difficult  to  find 
horses  that  will  prove  perfectly  tractable  and 
steady  as  long  as  they  have  regular  work.  For 
years  I  made  a  study  of  the  vices  of  the  horse  by 
taking  such  as  had  proved  troublesome  to  see 
what  could  be  done  in  the  way  of  correcting 
various  faults.  From  my  experience  I  think  it 
may  be  said  that  all  horses  are  amenable  to 
discipline  except  those  that  are  foolish  or  of 
such  nervous  conditions  that  they  are  in  effect 


152  Riding 

unmanageable.  The  bolter  was  stopped  by  the 
spurs ;  the  rearing  horse  was  cured  by  suppling ; 
the  restive  horse  was  confused  and  conquered; 
the  bully  yielded  to  bullying ;  but  the  fool  horse 
took  no  degree. 

The  growing  fancy  for  saddle-horses  of  large 
size,  because,  perhaps,  they  are  more  effective  to 
the  eye,  is  an  evil,  for  breeders  will  undertake  to 
furnish  such  animals  as  are  in  demand  at  the 
expense  of  far  more  valuable  qualities,  and  the 
rearing  of  medium-sized,  active  horses  will  be 
largely  discontinued,  for  the  market  rules  the 
stock  farm.  It  is  the  experience  of  all  horsemen 
that  15^  hands  is  the  limit  of  height  for  a  perfect 
saddle-horse, except  under  very  exceptional  circum- 
stances. When  the  would-be  seller  of  a  leggy 
horse  asserts  that  "  it  rides  like  a  pony,"  he 
recognizes  the  general  superiority  of  the  smaller 
animal  and  probably  is  in  error  regarding  his  own. 
As  a  rule,  a  horse  under  1 5  J  is  more  active,  hardier, 
and  with  greater  stamina  than  one  above  that 
height.  It  is  quality  that  gives  value  to  the 
horse,  and  this  is  usually  found  to  deteriorate  in 
those  of  excessive  bulk.  Did  not  Dickens  remark 
that  giants  are  weak  in  the  knees } 

In  a  previous  chapter  I  have  said  that  casting  a 
horse  by  the  so-called  Rarey  system  is  not  a  sover- 
eign rure  for  all  vices,  and  that  I  usually  taught  my 
horses  to  lie  down  without  using  any  apparatus. 


General  Remarks  153 

When  a  horse  is  so  vicious  that  a  man  may  not 
approach  him  without  being  attacked,  some 
artificial  restraint  must  be  resorted  to  and  straps 
used  to  confine  and  throw  the  horse.  But  with 
steady  horses  there  are  several  modes  for  casting 
them  without  the  employment  of  anything  beyond 
the  snaffle-bridle.  Of  course,  it  is  not  necessary 
for  an  ordinary  saddle-horse  to  be  taught  to  lie 
down,  but  a  good  horseman  should  know  how  to 
demand  anything,  and  a  little  superfluous  knowl- 
edge may  be  handed  over  to  some  one  who  may 
have  use  for  it. 

A  very  easy  way  of  casting  a  horse  is  for  the 
man  to  stand  on  the  off  or  right  side  of  the  animal 
and  pick  up  its  right  fore  leg  in  his  left  hand ;  this 
he  will  carry  back  and  at  the  same  time  draw  the 
snaffle-reins,  held  in  the  right  hand,  to  the  rear, 
until  the  horse  comes  down  upon  the  knee  of  the 
right  fore  leg ;  a  pull  upon  the  left  snaffle-rein 
will  then  bring  the  horse  over  on  its  right  side. 
After  some  lessons  given  in  this  manner,  the  horse 
will  carry  back  the  right  fore  leg  at  the  application 
of  the  whip  and  be  brought  to  the  ground  by  the 
same  use  of  the  snaffle-reins  as  above  described. 
After  a  few  such  lessons  the  rider  should  get  into 
the  saddle,  and  between  the  taps  of  the  whip  on 
the  right  shoulder  and  bending  the  head  of  the 
horse  sharply  to  the  left  he  can  bring  the  horse  to 
ground  while  he  is  mounted. 


154  Riding 

It  is  better  for  the  trainer  to  avoid  working  the 
young  horse  when  exposed  to  high  winds,  as  the 
animal  is  then  so  disturbed  and  easily  irritated  that 
it  is  difficult  to  engage  its  attention,  and  good 
progress  can  hardly  be  obtained.  If  on  any 
occasion  the  young  horse  persists  in  refusing 
obedience,  the  trainer  will  do  well  to  obtain  some- 
thing resembling  discipline  and  return  the  horse 
to  the  stable  rather  than  enter  into  a  contest  which 
may  be  the  source  of  much  future  trouble.  Of 
course,  if  an  old  horse  is  mutinous,  it  should  be  at 
once  controlled  and  brought  to  reason ;  but  except 
an  occasional  lark  due  to  excessive  high  spirits 
from  want  of  work,  a  trained  horse  will  not  often 
be  guilty  of  misconduct,  and  even  then  it  may  be 
checked  by  hand  and  heel. 

No  one  should  ride  a  horse  that  has  the  habit 
of  stumbling,  but  sometimes  the  most  agile  of 
animals  will  step  on  a  rolling  stone  or  make  a 
mistake  through  carelessness.  When  a  good 
horse  trips  and  falls,  the  rider  is  almost  always  in 
fault ;  in  the  first  place,  for  letting  the  horse  grow 
careless,  and  secondly,  for  permitting  the  animal 
to  go  down.  An  active  horse  should  never  stumble 
badly  when  ridden  in  hand ;  and  if  the  rider  leans 
back  and  supports  the  forehand  until  a  bearer  is 
carried  under  the  centre  of  gravity,  it  is  seldom 
that  the  horse  will  fall.  Many  falls  are  occasioned 
by  the  horse  being  leg  weai-y  through  overwork 


FIG.    99.  — RACKING 


FIG.    100.  — RUNNING   WALK 


FIG.    101.  — CASTING   A   HORSE 


General  Remarks  155 

or  from  being  ridden  too  rapidly  at  turns ;  so  that, 
however  the  mark  comes,  a  broken  knee  is  taken 
as  a  sign  of  poor  or  careless  riding. 

Doubtless,  instruction  was  given  in  the  art  of 
riding  by  amateurs  or  by  professed  teachers,  from 
the  time  the  horse  came  into  use.  The  earliest 
existing  work  on  horsemanship  is  that  of  Xeno- 
phon  (born  430  B.C.) ;  then  there  is  a  hiatus  until 
the  Italian  Renaissance,  since  which  epoch  we 
have  had  many  works  on  the  subject ;  but  before 
Xenophon's  time,  and  between  that  and  the  ap- 
pearance of  Grisone's  printed  work  in  1550  (my 
copy,  apparently  a  first  edition,  was  dated  1560), 
we  may  be  sure  that  there  was  no  lack  of  writings 
upon  the  subject,  lost  through  the  perishable 
nature  of  the  form  in  which  an  author's  labors 
were  presented.  Of  the  early  works  of  this  sec- 
ond appearance  the  best  known  are  those  of  An- 
toine  de  Pluvinel,  equerry  to  Louis  XIII.  of 
France,  —  a  splendid  effort,  published  in  Paris  in 
16 1 9,  —  and  that  of  the  Duke  of  Newcastle,  pub- 
lished in  Antwerp  in  1651.  But  none  of  the 
works  on  horsemanship  which  appeared  pre- 
viously to  that  of  Baucher  are  now  of  any  real 
value,  and  the  method  described  by  the  French 
master  is  the  foundation  of  all  that  is  good  in  any 
modern  system. 


DRIVING 

HINTS  ON  THE  HISTORY,  HOUSING,  HARNESSING 
AND   HANDLING   OF  THE  HORSE 

By   price   collier 


Illi  ardua  cervix, 
Argutumque  caput,  brevis  alvus,  obesaque  terga, 
Luxuriatque  toris  animosum  pectus. 


INTRODUCTION 


INTRODUCTION 

All  games,  pastimes,  and  sports  worthy  of  the 
name  are  artificial  work.  What  our  ancestors 
did  because  they  must  to  live,  we  do  because  we 
find  that  vigorous  use  of  our  powers,  physical, 
mental,  and  moral,  makes  living  more  agreeable. 

They  rode  and  shot  and  fished,  walked,  ran, 
carried  heavy  weights,  chopped  down  trees,  pad- 
dled canoes,  sailed  boats,  fought  wild  beasts, 
hunted  game  for  food,  and  drove  oxen,  mules, 
and  horses  because  they  had  to  do  these  things 
to  live. 

We  do  many  of  these  same  things.  We  chop 
down  trees,  paddle  canoes,  sail  boats,  run,  jump, 
struggle  against  one  another  with  the  gloves  or 
at  football,  swim,  play  golf  and  tennis,  ride  and 
drive,  but  we  call  it  sport !  In  reality  it  is  arti- 
ficial work. 

Because  the  environment  has  changed,  and  we 
are  no  longer  forced  to  do  these  things  for  a 
living  and  to  live  at  all,  we  now  do  them  to 
make  our  own  living  more  wholesome  and  agree- 
able, and  call  these  pursuits  sports. 

Either  because  human  life  originally  was  safest 
to  those  who  were  most  formidable  at  work  and 


Introduction 

at  war,  or  because  we  are  so  constituted  that  we 
cannot  live  without  exercise,  we  still  continue  the 
physical  exertions  of  our  forebears  under  the  name 
of  sport. 

The  quality  and  the  value  of  all  games  and 
sports  may  be  tested  and  graded  as  to  their 
respective  value  according  as  they  develop  in 
their  patrons  the  qualities  that  hard  work  de- 
velops. Health,  courage,  serenity  of  spirit,  good 
manners,  good  nerves,  tenacity  of  purpose,  physi- 
cal strength,  were  the  reward  of  the  hard  worker. 
Those  same  qualities  ought  to  be  the  aim  of  the 
good  sportsman.  The  moment  trickery,  effemi- 
nacy, babyism,  and  unfair  play  become  a  part  of 
sport,  the  whole  object  of  sport,  its  raison  d'etre, 
vanishes. 

Sport,  therefore,  has  ample  excuse  for  being, 
and  deserves  the  support  of  all  serious  well- 
wishers  of  their  fellow-men  to  keep  it  clean. 

The  more  seriously,  then,  sport  is  undertaken, 
—  the  more  nearly  it  resembles  work,  in  short,  — 
the  more  completely  it  accomplishes  its  purpose. 
It  goes  without  saying  that  when  sport  absorbs 
the  whole  man  it  defeats  its  own  aim,  since  it  is 
intended  merely  to  supplement  by  artifice  what 
has  been  lost  by  the  changes  in  man's  environ- 
ment. Now  that  shooting,  fishing,  sailing,  spar- 
ring, riding,  driving,  are  not  necessities,  we  wish 
to  retain  still  the  good  results  of  them  for  men 


Introduction 

doomed  by  the  rearrangement  of  life  to  live  more 
or  less  sedentary  lives. 

Hence  it  is  that  books  are  written  on  these 
subjects,  that  men  may  take  them  up  seriously, 
study  them,  use  their  heads  at  them,  and  thus 
get  the  best  there  is  out  of  them.  The  men  who 
are  best  worth  preserving  are  just  the  men  who 
will  give  but  a  half-hearted  allegiance  to  any- 
thing, unless  it  asks  much  of  them  and  makes 
large  drafts  upon  their  mental,  moral,  and  physi- 
cal energy. 

To  discover  to  man  or  boy,  therefore,  how 
much  there  is  of  training  for  his  mind  and  his 
body  in  any  form  of  sport  is  well  worth  while. 
The  more  clear  it  is  that  a  sport  or  game  re- 
quires knowledge,  patience,  courage,  tact,  and 
endurance,  all  of  which  make  for  success  in 
everyday  life,  the  more  likely  it  is  that  it  will 
become  popular  among  sturdy  men. 

The  best  of  our  sports  and  games  are,  as  we 
should  expect,  the  most  difficult,  and  require  the 
most  complete  development  in  their  patrons. 
Chess,  whist,  cricket,  golf,  fencing,  sparring,  rid- 
ing across  country,  hunting,  fishing,  have  kept 
their  place,  not  because  they  are  easy,  but  be- 
cause they  are  hard.  All  these  games  have  been 
played  for  centuries,  while  the  more  childish  pas- 
times and  sports  come  and  go,  and  ping-pong 
their  way  to  an  early  oblivion.     The  subject  of 


Introduction 

this  book,  the  horse  and  how  to  handle  him  in 
harness,  has  not  only  the  advantage  of  a  sport 
requiring  much  knowledge,  and  good  physical 
ability,  and  great  moral  self-control,  but  it  has 
the  further  very  great  advantage  of  teaching  all 
who  take  part  in  it  something  of  what  is  due  to 
the  welfare  of  the  most  useful  animal  in  the 
world.  This  sport  not  only  develops  its  patron, 
but  in  so  doing  makes  for  the  development 
and  better  care  of  the  most  valuable  helpmeet 
man  has. 

It  is  absurd  to  suppose  that  a  man  can  be 
taught  to  drive  without  knowing  something  of 
the  elementary  things  about  the  horse.  He  may 
be  put  upon  the  box,  the  reins  placed  in  his 
hands,  and  certain  cut-and-dried  instructions  given 
him  about  stopping,  starting,  and  turning;  but 
before  he  has  driven  five  miles  fifty  things  will 
occur  to  him  that  he  will  wish  to  know  about. 
A  child  with  a  box  of  colors  and  some  sketches 
in  outline  can  be  told  to  paint  this  part  red,  that 
part  blue,  that  white,  the  other  green,  and  so  on, 
and  there  follows  a  picture  of  a  kind.  But  the 
painter  knows  how  and  why  the  colors  are  mixed, 
and  could  never  be  more  than  an  automaton  if 
he  did  not  study  these  things  for  himself.  A 
man  on  a  box-seat  with  four  reins  in  his  hand, 
who  does  not  know  how  the  horses  in  front  of 
him  are  housed,  fed,  shod,  harnessed,  and  bitted, 


Introduction 

and  how  by  evolution  they  came  to  be  what  they 
are  physically  and  mentally,  and  the  relative  posi- 
tions of  their  vital  organs  and  the  bones  of  their 
skeletons,  is  not  and  will  not  be  a  coachman  of 
any  competency  until  he  knows  something  of 
these  things.  No  man  can  bit  a  horse  who 
knows  nothing  of  the  inside  of  a  horse's  mouth ; 
nor  can  he  fit  him  properly  with  his  collar  unless 
he  knows  the  relative  positions  of  the  shoulder- 
blade  and  humerus;  nor  can  he  see  that  his 
shoes  are  put  on  to  fit  him  unless  he  knows 
something  of  the  formation  of  his  foot;  nor  can 
he  spare  him  fatigue  and  help  him  through  his 
simpler  troubles  on  the  road,  or  in  the  stable, 
unless  he  knows  something  of  the  horse's  physi- 
cal make-up  and  the  weak  and  strong  points 
of  him. 

It  is  a  great  sport,  is  driving,  and  superior  to 
all  other  sports  in  one  respect  at  least,  in  that 
it  is  the  most  useful  of  sports.  Any  improve- 
ment in  the  art  of  driving  actually  adds  to  the 
wealth  of  the  world  {vide  chapter  on  the  Eco- 
nomic Value  of  the   Horse). 

In  this  book  we  have  begun  at  the  beginning, 
and  the  proper  title  of  the  book  would  be,  Hints 
on  the  History,  Housing,  Harnessing,  and  Hand- 
ling of  the  Horse.  Each  one  of  these  subjects 
would  require  a  volume,  and  volumes  indeed 
have  been  written.     A  complete  bibliography  of 


Introduction 

horse  literature  would  number  well  on  toward 
three  thousand  volumes. 

In  this  small  volume  it  is  intended  to  suggest 
to  horse  owners  the  necessary  lines  of  knowl- 
edge, with  something  more  than  the  elements 
of  each.  The  bibliography  at  the  end  of  the 
volume  offers  the  opportunity  to  go  more  deeply 
into  any  or  all  of  these  departments  as  taste, 
fancy,  or  love  of  the  sport  may  dictate.  No  one 
volume  can  do  more  than  this,  and  to  each  indi- 
vidual is  given  the  opportunity  to  discover  what 
he  ought  to  know,  and  the  opportunity  to  sup- 
plement his  knowledge  according  to  his  par- 
ticular requirements. 

For  suggestions,  good  counsel,  and  valuable 
information  I  am  indebted  to  many.  Among 
them  I  must  mention  here  R.  W.  Rives,  Esq. ; 
Frank  K.  Sturgis,  Esq. ;  Professor  Henry  F.  Os- 
born,  of  the  Natural  History  Museum;  William 
Pollock,  Esq. ;  Theodore  Frelinghuysen,  Esq., 
Captain  Pirie,  and  Fownes  of  London ;  Howlett 
pere  of  Paris,  and  his  son  Morris  Howlett,  now 
of  New  York ;  T.  Suffern  Tailer,  Esq.,  late  presi- 
dent of  the  New  York  Tandem  Club ;  and  others. 
They  will,  I  trust,  forgive  my  errors,  and  take 
to  themselves,  as  they  deserve  to  do,  the  credit 
for  such  value  as  this  small  volume  has,  in  add- 
ing to  the  comfort  of  drivers  and  the  welfare  of 
the  horse. 


DRIVING 


CHAPTER   I 

ECONOMIC  VALUE  OF  THE  HORSE 

In  dealing  with  the  horse  as  a  source  of  national 
income,  or  as  an  opportunity  for  sport  and  pleas- 
ure, there  is  little  to  be  taught  Americans  along 
the  lines  of  harness-making,  carriage-building,  and 
other  mechanical  appliances  for  the  comfort  and 
best  use  of  the  animal.  But  both  owners  of  horses 
and  their  care-takers  are  often  lamentably  ignorant 
of  the  general  history  of  the  horse. 

If  one  is  to  get  most  value  out  of  the  horse  on 
the  farm,  as  a  draught  animal  in  city  streets,  or 
on  the  road,  in  harness  or  under  saddle,  some 
knowledge  of  his  past  history  and  present  value 
cannot  be  out  of  place.  The  harness,  the  bit,  the 
vehicle,  may  be  right,  but  the  head,  hands,  heart, 
and  temper  of  the  coachman  may  be  wrong.  To 
know  how  the  horse  came  to  be  what  he  is,  and  to 
know  something  of  the  kind  of  a  machine  that 
he  now  is,  will  do  much  to  explain  his  vagaries, 
and  even  more  to  make  his  owner  and  user  more 

IS9 


1 60  Driving 

patient,  more  gentle,  and  more  intelligent  in 
handling  him. 

You  do  not  expect  poetry  from  a  black- 
smith, nor  a  fourteen-inch  forearm  on  a  poet. 
You  deal  with  men  the  more  comfortably  the 
more  you  know  of  their  antecedents  and  training. 
The  same  is  even  more  true  of  this  subject  of 
horses.  It  is  not  necessary  that  a  man  should 
be  an  experienced  navigator  or  an  off-shore  sailor 
to  enjoy  a  yacht ;  but  on  the  other  hand  there  is 
no  question  but  that  the  man  who  knows  most 
of  these  matters  gets  the  most  enjoyment  out  of 
his  boat.  It  is  not  necessary  to  write  books  in 
order  to  enjoy  them ;  but  the  practice  of  writing 
adds  an  hundred  fold  to  the  enjoyment  of  other 
men's  books. 

It  is  not  necessary  that  a  man  should  be  an 
accomplished  palaeontologist,  and  an  experienced 
veterinary,  in  order  that  he  may  take  pleasure  in 
his  stable;  but  some  knowledge  of  these  matters 
adds  greatly  to  one's  understanding  of  the  proper 
treatment  of  horses,  and  greatly,  too,  to  one's  stock 
of  patience  in  dealing  with  their  eccentricities  and 
obstinacies.  "  Mad  men  and  mad  horses  never 
will  agree  together." 

The  horse  is  not  an  intelligent  animal  as  a 
rule.  He  is  the  only  animal  that  loses  its  head 
to  the  point  of  its  own  extermination  when  not 
restrained  and  controlled.    He  has  no  affectionate 


Economic  Value  of  the  Horse  i6i 

recognition  of  even  his  best  friends.  Your  dog 
twists  himself  into  extravagant  physical  contor- 
tions when  you  return  after  a  month's  absence; 
your  horse,  on  the  other  hand,  is  no  more  warm  in 
his  welcome  than  your  saddle.  He  is,  now  that 
he  has  been  so  long  guarded  and  cared  for  by 
man,  a  pitiably  helpless  animal  when  left  to  him- 
self. The  mere  fact  that  the  reins  lie  on  the  dash- 
board, that  he  hears  no  voice  behind  him,  that  he 
is  free,  sends  him  off  at  a  gallop  —  possibly  to  his 
own  destruction.^ 

A  certain  politician  from  Tennessee,  in  describ- 
ing a  particularly  erratic  party  leader,  said  that  he 
reminded  him  of  a  horse  sold  to  a  friend  of  his. 
Many  questions  were  asked  concerning  the  horse, 
and  finally  the  seller  was  asked  about  his  gaits. 
After  some  hesitation  he  finally  drawled,  "  Well, 
I  guess  his  natural  gait  is  running  away  !  " 

This  is  true  of  practically  all  horses,  and  it  is 
because  he  is  so  well  known  to  man  and  so  useful 
to  man,  and  because  he  is  amongst  the  animals 
the  greatest  pleasure  giver  to  man,  that  some 
knowledge  of  his  ancient  and  modern  antece- 
dents and  training  is  desirable. 

1  The  average  number  of  times  the  brain  is  heavier  than  the 
spinal  cord,  which  is  a  fair  measure  of  intelligence  in  certain  animals, 
is  as  follows  :  — 

In  man        .         .         .     33.00 


In  dog     ....  5.14 

In  cat       .         .         .         .  3.75 

In  ass       .         .         .         .  2.40 

M 


In  pig  ....  2.30 
In  horse  ....  2.27 
In  ox        .         .         .         .     2.18 


1 62  Driving 

America  is  the  home  of  the  horse  in  more 
senses  than  one.  We  have  more  money  invested 
in  horse-flesh  than  any  other  country  in  the  world. 
A  very  conservative  estimate  of  the  value  of 
the  horses  in  this  country  is  something  over 
$1,050,969,093. 

Scientific  men  tell  us,  too,  that  the  first  horses 
were  natives  of  this  country.  The  prehistoric 
horse  of  America  probably  wandered  across  Beh- 
ring's  Strait  to  Europe,  Africa,  and  Asia  at  a 
time  when  that  passage  was  dry  land.  Though 
the  earliest  travellers  to,  and  the  first  settlers  in, 
America  found  no  horses  here,  there  is  no  doubt 
that  the  horse  originated  on  this  continent.  Why 
the  horse  disappeared  entirely  from  this  continent 
for  a  long  period  of  time,  while  flourishing  partic- 
ularly in  Africa  and  Asia  as  well  as  in  Europe,  is 
one  of  the  mysteries  that  science  has  not  explained. 
Whether  the  ice  age  destroyed  them,  or  a  plague 
or  flood  swept  them  away  no  one  knows.  Two 
facts  are  well  known :  the  first  is  that  the  oldest 
remains  of  the  horse  are  found  in  this  country ; 
the  second  is  that  when  Columbus  touched  at 
what  is  now  San  Domingo  in  1493  he  brought 
with  him  horses,  animals  that  for  thousands  of 
years  had  not  been  seen  here. 

In  four  hundred  years  we  have  become  the 
largest  owners  and  users  of  horses  in  the  world. 

Our   agricultural   supremacy  is    due    in   great 


Economic  lvalue  of  the  Horse 


f63 


part  to  our  use  of  horse-power  in  our  fields  and 
farms.  Our  superiority  in  this  respect  may  be 
seen  at  a  glance  by  a  comparison  of  the  number 
of  horses  in  the  leading  European  countries  and 
our  own.  It  is  to  be  noted  that  in  many  cases 
these  figures  comprise,  not  merely  the  number  of 
horses  on  farms,  but  the  total  number  in  the  coun- 
try. For  the  United  States  the  number  given  is 
for  horses  on  farms  only. 


Country 

Great  Britain     . 

Ireland 

British  India 

Australia   . 

Argentine  Republic   . 

Austria 

Hungary    . 

France 

Germany   . 

Italy  .... 

Japan 

Russia,  including  Siberia 

United  States 


I90I 

1,511,431 

I90I 

491,380 

1900 

1,343,880 

1900 

1,922,522 

1900 

4,447,000 

1899 

1,711,077 

189s 

2,308.457 

I  goo 

2,903,063 

1900 

4,184,099 

1890 

702,390 

1900 

1,547,160 

1898 

25,354,000 

1900 

21,216,888 

Iowa,  Illinois,  and  Texas  have  each  almost  as 
many  horses  as  Great  Britain,  and  these  three 
states  alone  have  more  horses  between  them  than 
any  foreign  country  except  Russia. 

These  figures  do  not  include  the  mules  which 
are  more  extensively  used  here  than  in  any  other 


1 64  Driving 

country.  Including,  with  the  horses,  mules,  and 
asses  on  farms,  those  not  on  farms,  it  is  probable 
that  the  United  States  has  more  work  animals 
than  even  the  Russian  Empire,  Siberia  included, 
with  a  population  exceeding  that  of  the  United 
States  by  many  millions. 

The  horse-power,  including  mules,  on  American 
farms  is  at  least  six  times  that  of  Germany ;  twelve 
times  that  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland ;  eight 
times  that  of  France ;  thirty  times  that  of  Italy ; 
and  six  times  that  of  Austria  and  Hungary  com- 
bined. This  difference  in  horse-power  on  Ameri- 
can farms  gives  us  a  great  advantage  over  other 
countries  —  so  great  an  advantage  indeed  that  our 
competition  affects  land  values  in  Europe,  and  is 
gradually  forcing  a  readjustment  of  the  industries 
of  the  world.  It  is  estimated  that  we  have  invested 
in  horse-flesh  in  this  country  $1,050,969,093.  In 
1 90 1  we  exported  82,250  horses,  while  in  1891  we 
exported  only  31 10,  and  the  number  of  horses 
increased  from  4,337,000  in  1850  to  16,965,000  in 
1900.  Since  1850  the  number  of  farms  has  in- 
creased 296.1  per  cent;  acres  of  improved  land 
267.0  per  cent;  and  of  horses  291.2  per  cent, 
which  seems  to  show  that  despite  the  increased 
use  of  machinery  the  horse  is  still  a  necessity  in 
agriculture. 

What  could  be  gained  economically  by  the  in- 
telligent breaking,  breeding,  shoeing,  feeding,  har- 


Economic  Value  of  the  Horse  165 

nessing,  bitting,  driving,  and  handling  of  horses  in 
this  country  is  not  easily  calculable.  The  differ- 
ence in  the  amount  of  work  one  horse  can  do  when 
he  is  properly  stabled,  fed,  harnessed,  and  driven, 
multiplied  by  millions,  gives  one  some  idea  of 
the  economic  utility  of  such  knowledge.  It  is 
well  known  that  good  roads  add  enormously  to 
the  availability  of  agricultural  land  and  has  a 
notable  effect  upon  the  cheapening  of  farm  prod- 
ucts. The  first  men  to  agitate  for  good  roads,  and 
they  who  do  most  to  see  that  good  roads  are  pro- 
vided, are  the  users  of  horses.  One  might  indeed 
write  a  telling  chapter  of  eulogy  on  the  horse,  if 
one  gave  him  the  credit  due  him,  for  bringing 
about  the  cheapening  of  products  necessary  to  the 
comfort  and  pleasure  of  mankind. 

This  whole  subject  of  the  care  of  the  horse 
takes  on  a  new  aspect  when  it  is  looked  at  with 
these  figures  in  mind.  Books  on  driving,  riding, 
and  the  like  should  be  classed,  not  merely  with 
books  of  sport  and  pleasure,  but  with  scientific 
and  economic  treatises. 

We  are  a  nation  with  over  a  billion  dollars  in- 
vested in  equine  machinery.  It  is  an  absurd  mis- 
understanding of  the  subject  to  look  upon  the 
time,  money,  and  intelligence  devoted  to  the  driv- 
ing, bitting,  and  harnessing  of  horses  as  so  much 
time,  money,  and  intelligence  devoted  to  a  sport 
of   the  rich  and  fashionable.     If  we  had  a  steel 


1 66  Driving 

plant,  or  a  coal  company  with  ;^  100,000,000  in- 
vested therein,  no  investigation  would  be  too 
minute,  no  saving  of  labor  here,  no  improvement 
there,  and  no  supervision  would  seem  out  of  place 
in  adding  to  the  economy  and  efficiency  of  such 
an  aggregation  of  capital.  The  man  who  can  bit, 
harness,  and  drive  four  horses,  or  two  horses,  com- 
fortably to  himself,  and  to  his  horses,  is  adding 
just  so  much  to  the  understanding  of  a  subject 
which  is  of  practical  bread-and-butter  interest  to 
every  man,  woman,  and  child  in  the  United  States. 
Every  ounce  more  of  work  that  a  horse  can  be 
harnessed  to  do,  every  practical  hint  that  the 
master  of  horses  can  be  induced  to  apply,  every 
yard  of  road  that  can  be  improved,  take  something 
off  the  cost  of  everything  we  eat,  drink,  or  wear. 
To  put  a  coach  on  the  road  for  a  few  weeks  in  the 
spring,  to  turn  out  a  well-mannered  pair  for  a  lady's 
phaeton,  to  temper  the  disposition  of  two  horses 
so  that  they  bowl  along  pleasantly  in  a  tandem, 
may  at  the  first  blush  seem  to  be  merely  the  idle 
vagaries  of  the  unemployed  rich.  As  a  matter  of 
fact,  the  knowledge  and  patience  required  in  these 
exercises  percolates  through  all  classes  of  horse 
owners,  and  produces  a  marked  effect  from  the 
utilitarian  standpoint.  We  of  the  large  cities, 
with  steam  and  electricity  as  our  daily  servants  of 
locomotion,  ignore  the  twenty  odd  million  agricul- 
tural machines  in  this  country  that  are  helping  to 


PLATE 


PROTOROHIPPUS 


Earliest  known  species  of  horse,  eleven  inches  high,  with  four  complete  toes, 
and  remainder  of  fifth  on  fore  feet,  and  three  on  hind  feet 


PLATE    IL  — DEVELOPMENT   OF    HORSE'S   FOOT    FROM 
FIVE  TOES  TO   ONE 


Economic  Value  of  the  Horse  167 

feed  and  clothe  us,  and  get  to  look  upon  the 
horse  as  merely  the  fashionable  physician's  pre- 
scription for  the  liver,  under  saddle ;  or  a  fashion- 
able appendage  of  wealth,  when  in  harness. 

In  forty  years  we  have  increased  from 
33,000,000  to  82,000,000  in  population ;  from 
^174,000,000  to  ^873,000,000  in  agricultural 
products  exported ;  from  2,000,000  to  6,000,000 
farms;  from  $8,500,000,000  to  $22,000,000,000 
total  value  of  farm  property;  from  $1,500,000,000 
to  $4,500,000,000  annual  value  of  farm  products  ; 
from  $1,250,000,000  to  $2,500,000,000  total  value 
of  farm  animals,  and  from  $  1 7,000,000,000  to 
$100,000,000,000  total  national  wealth.  In  this 
progress  the  horse  has  played  a  very  large  part, 
and,  contrary  to  the  general  and  ignorant  opinion, 
the  horse  still  maintains  his  place  as  the  most 
valuable  piece  of  all-round  useful  machinery  in 
the  world. 

One  has  merely  to  note  the  way  in  which  this 
valuable  partner  of  our  national  prosperity  is 
stabled,  groomed,  harnessed,  and  handled  to  excuse 
the  writing  of  any  number  of  books,  and  the  persist- 
ent hammering  away  upon  this  subject.  Sport 
and  athletics  are  serious  subjects  because  they  are 
so  vitally  important  to  the  physical  comfort  of  man; 
and  this  branch  of  sport  which  deals  with  the 
horse,  is  of  surprisingly  vital  interest  to  the  nation 
when  one  comes  to  investigate  it. 


1 68  Driving 

The  cruelty,  impatience,  and  ignorance  dis- 
played by  the  great  majority  of  horse-steerers  — 
they  are  nothing  more  nor  less  than  that  —  are 
apparent  wherever  we  turn.  Not  only  the  shock- 
headed  MicMac  who  tools  the  grocery  wagon 
about  our  crowded  streets ;  not  only  the  Sunday 
boy  who  indulges  his  Rowena  in  an  hebdomadal 
picnic  on  wheels ;  but  the  hundreds  of  so-called 
coachmen  who  drive  the  high-priced  horses  of  their 
masters  in  reins,  bits,  head-stalls,  and  collars  fitted 
without  discrimination  upon  any  horse  that  comes 
into  the  stable,  —  all  alike  are  in  dire  need  of  learn- 
ing how  to  make  the  most  of  their  opportunities. 

It  is  not  to  be  expected  that  every  man  who 
owns,  or  handles,  a  horse  should  be  a  veteri- 
nary, but  the  elementary  principles  of  harnessing 
and  bitting  a  horse  so  that  he  can  do  his  work 
comfortably  ought  to  be  required  of  every  one 
who,  either  for  his  own  pleasure,  or  for  hire,  has 
anything  to  do  with  horses.  Such  an  one  ought  to 
know  how  he  came  to  have  his  present  teeth  and 
legs,  his  present  mouth  and  small  stomach,  which 
reveals  at  once  the  secret  of  many  of  his  weak- 
nesses and  their  proper  care.  Not  to  know,  or 
to  care  to  know,  any  of  these  things  is  to  lessen 
the  value  of  your  horses  as  work-horses  very 
materially,  and  to  deprive  yourself  of  the  best  part 
of  the  pleasure  of  dealing  with  your  horses,  if  you 
have  them  and  handle  them  merely  for  sport. 


CHAPTER   II 

THE   NATURAL   HISTORY   OF   THE   HORSE 

It  is  a  curious  phase  of  the  history  of  the  horse 
in  this  country  that  the  ancestors  of  the  horse 
once  Hved  in  this  country  in  large  numbers,  and 
then  entirely  disappeared.  The  ancestry  of  the 
horse  has  been  traced  back  some  three  millions  of 
years,  and  through  that  period  practically  every 
step  of  change,  from  the  little  five-toed  whippet- 
like animal,  to  the  Percheron  or  thoroughbred  of 
to-day,  can  be  illustrated  by  actual  fossil  remains. 

The  most  complete  collection  of  fossil  remains 
of  the  horse,  and  the  best  illustrations  of  the  dif- 
ferent phases  of  his  development,  anywhere  in 
the  world,  are  in  our  Museum  of  Natural  History 
in  New  York. 

When  the  remains  of  the  prehistoric  horse 
were  first  discovered,  so  little  was  known  on  the 
subject,  that  the  great  naturalist,  Richard  Owen, 
called  him  the  Hyracotherium  or  "  Hyrax-like 
Beast,"  referring  to  the  coney  of  Scripture,  little 
suspecting  that  there  had  been  discovered  in  this 
Hyracotherium  the  fossil  remains  of  the  horse  of 
millions  of  years  ago.  In  the  Jardin  cT Acclima- 
169 


1 70  Driving 

tation  in  Paris  there  are  two  little  horses  at  the 
present  time  each  measuring  under  24  inches  at 
the  withers. 

This  little  animal  was  first  provided  with  the 
flat,  spreading,  five-toed  foot  suitable  to  the  low- 
lying  and  marshy  land  in  which  he  lived.  His 
teeth  and  mouth,  and  shorter  neck  and  jaw,  were 
adapted  to  the  softer  and  more  luxuriant  herbage 
of  that  time  and  place. 

As  the  water  left  the  earth,  this  little  animal 
gradually  adapted  himself  to  the  harder  ground, 
the  less  luxuriant  vegetable  growth  and  the  neces- 
sities of  the  situation,  which  required  that  he 
should  travel  farther  for  his  nourishment,  and  that 
he  should  travel  faster,  to  escape  his  enemies. 

Pounding  along  on  the  plateaux,  which  became 
his  natural  habitat,  he  lost  one  toe  after  another, 
first  from  his  hind  feet,  because  they  do  the  most 
work  in  propelling  him,  and  then  from  his  front 
feet.  His  neck  and  jaw  grew  longer  as  he  was 
obliged  to  reach  lower  and  lower  down  to  bite  off 
the  wiry  grasses  of  the  plain. 

In  short,  the  horse's  foot  and  leg  are  developed 
from  the  short,  slender  leg  and  cushioned  foot  of, 
say,  something  resembling  the  foot  and  leg  of  a 
delicate-limbed  tapir  to  its  present  form. 

Compared  with  a  man's  hand,  for  example,  the 
horse's  knee  is  represented  by  the  human  wrist ; 
the  hairless  spot  of  skin  with  its  cushion  beneath 


PLATE  III.  — NEOHIPPARION 

Intermediate  stage  in  development  of  the  horse,  being  about  three  feet  high, 

and  having  three  complete  toes 


PLATE    IV.  — SKULL   OF   HORSE   EIGHT   YEARS   OLD 
Showing  long  crowns  of  teeth 


The  Natural  History  of  the  Horse      171 

—  the  fatty  cushion  of  the  fetlock  —  represents 
the  prominence  behind  the  root  of  each  finger 
opposite  the  knuckles ;  and  the  hoof  itself  repre- 
sents the  nail  of  the  middle  finger  of  man. 

There  are  other  patches  of  callous  skin,  some- 
times called  "chestnuts  "  or  *' mallenders,"  which 
appear;  that  on  the  fore  leg  is  above  the  wrist 
joint  or  "  knee,"  that  on  the  hind  leg  below  the 
ankle  or  "hock"  joint.  These,  however,  are  still 
puzzles  to  the  scientists,  although  in  an  old  book 
on  the  horse,  by  Youatt,  he  speaks  of  them  as 
diseases  and  prescribes  remedies  for   their  cure. 

Huxley  maintained  that  the  theory  of  evolu- 
tion pointed  to  the  five-toed  horse,  and  he  stoutly 
insisted  that  the  fossil  remains  of  such  an  animal 
would  some  day  be  discovered,  and  sure  enough 
we  now  have  in  New  York  City  the  fossil  re- 
mains of  these  prehistoric  horses,  carrying  out, 
even  in  minute  detail,  the  steps  of  development 
he  had  outlined.  There  is  the  horse  with  four 
toes  (Plate  I.),  then  the  horse  with  these  toes 
grown  shorter,  until  they  hang  above  the  ground, 
and  finally  disappear  altogether. 

Where  the  horse  is  left  in  a  state  of  nature,  free 
to  choose  the  ground  over  which  he  will  run,  the 
hoof  grows  just  in  proportion  as  it  is  worn  away, 
and  maintains  itself  without  artificial  means,  in 
perfect  condition.  On  the  other  hand,  where  the 
horse  is  turned  out  on  low-lying  and  moist  land, 


172  Driving 

his  feet  grow  to  great  length.  This  is  the  case,  for 
example,  in  the  Falkland  Islands,  where  the  whole 
surface  is  soft,  mossy  bog-land ;  and  here  the 
horses'  feet  grow  to  be  twelve  and  fourteen  inches 
in  length  and  curl  up  in  various  ways,  so  that  the 
animals  can  hardly  walk  upon  them.  The  nails  on 
the  fingers  and  toes  of  man,  if  not  shortened  by 
abrasion  from  rouo^h,  manual  labor,  or  cut  and  filed 
artificially,  will  grow  to  great  length,  and  as  they 
grow,  curl  inward  and  around  the  tips  of  the  fin- 
gers and  toes,  attempting  to  form,  what  the  toe-nail 
of  the  horse  has  formed,  a  hoof. 

Man  himself,  who  has  recently  taken  to  walk- 
ing in  a  proud  manner,  only  upon  his  hind  legs, 
reserving  his  fore  legs  for  painting,  writing,  ges- 
ticulating, and  feeding  himself,  is  also  gradually 
losing  the  toes  off  his  hind  feet,  —  in  many  per- 
sons the  little  toe  being  already  almost  nothing 
more  than  a  short  and  useless  stump. 

When  you  run  your  fingers  down  the  fore  legs 
of  a  horse  you  may  feel  distinctly  two  of  his  toes 
tucked  away  under  the  skin,  and  now  known  as 
the  "splint  bones."  Where  horses  are  used  con- 
tinuously to  work  on  hard  roads,  this  toe-nail  or 
hoof  wears  itself  away  faster  than  it  grows,  hence 
the  necessity  for  shoes. 

It  is  this  evolution  from  a  five,  and  then  a  four 
toed  animal,  to  an  animal  that  walks  on  the  nail 
of  the  middle  toe,  which  makes  the  legs  and  the 


The  Natural  History  of  the  Horse       173 

feet  of  the  horse  such  a  very  delicate  and  difficult 
problem  to  the  horse  owner  (Plate  II.). 

It  cannot  fail  to  be  of  value  and  interest  to  every 
one  who  deals  with  horses  to  trace  their  develop- 
ment as  they  increase  in  stature,  and  in  brain, 
and  with  greater  and  greater  complexity  of  teeth ; 
at  the  same  time  that  the  number  of  toes  de- 
creases, according  to  the  law  which  rules  that  the 
fewer  the  toes,  the  greater  the  speed;  the  swiftest 
bird  being  the  ostrich  and  the  fastest  mammal 
the  horse  (Plate  III.). 

The  teeth  of  the  earliest  prehistoric  horses  were 
short-crowned  and  covered  with  low,  rounded  knobs 
of  enamel,  like  the  teeth  of  monkeys,  or  pigs,  or 
other  omnivorous  animals,  and  entirely  different 
from  the  grinders  of  the  horse  of  to-day.  Along 
with  the  development  of  the  legs  and  feet  of  the 
horse,  from  an  animal  destined  to  live  in  marshy 
and  forest  ground,  to  an  animal  obliged  to  take 
care  of  itself  in  open,  grassy  plains,  came  a  corre- 
sponding change  in  the  teeth,  from  short-crowned, 
to  long-crowned  (Plate  IV.),  enabling  the  animal 
to  live  on  the  hard,  dry  grasses  which  require 
thorough  mastication,  before  they  are  of  use  as 
nutritious  food. 

The  teeth  of  the  modern  horse  are,  perhaps, 
the  most  perfect  grinding  battery  that  could  be 
devised.  There  is  an  external  layer  of  enamel, 
and  a  second  inner  ring  of  enamel  around  the  pit 


1 74  Driving 

of  the  tooth,  and  these  grinding  one  upon  and 
across  the  other,  as  the  horse  chews,  make  a 
most  effective  crusher  and  masticator  of  his  food. 

The  incisor  teeth  of  the  horse  have  all  the  great 
peculiarity,  not  found  in  the  teeth  of  any  other 
mammal,  and  only  in  the  Equidce  of  comparatively 
recent  geological  periods,  of  an  involution  of  the 
external  surface  of  the  tooth,  by  which  what  should 
properly  be  the  apex,  is  carried  deeply  into  the  in- 
terior of  the  crown,  forming  a  pit,  the  bottom  of 
which  becomes  partially  filled  up  with  cement.  As 
the  tooth  wears,  the  surface,  besides  the  external 
enamel  layer  as  in  an  ordinary,  simple  tooth, 
shows  in  addition  a  second  inner  ring  of  the 
same  hard  substance  surrounding  the  pit,  which, 
of  course,  adds  greatly  to  the  efficiency  of  the 
tooth  as  an  organ  for  biting  tough,  fibrous  sub- 
stances. This  pit,  generally  filled  with  particles 
of  food,  is  conspicuous  from  its  dark  color,  and 
constitutes  the  "  mark"  by  which  the  age  of  the 
horse  is  judged,  as,  in  consequence  of  its  only 
extending  to  a  certain  depth  in  the  crown,  it 
becomes  obliterated  as  the  crown  wears  away, 
and  then  the  tooth  assumes  the  character  of  that 
of  an  ordinary  incisor,  consisting  only  of  a  core 
of  dentine,  surrounded  by  the  external  enamel 
layer.  It  is  not  quite  so  deep  in  the  lower  as  in 
the  upper  teeth. 

Between  the  canines  and  premolars  is  a  space 


The  Natural  History  of  the  Horse       175 

called  the  "  bars  "  of  a  horse's  mouth.  It  is  here 
that  the  bit  is  placed,  and  not  a  few  horsemen 
believe  that  this  space  in  the  horse's  mouth  has 
been  gradually  worn  away  by  the  use  of  bits 
until  now  it  has  become  a  regular  bit-socket 
produced  by  the  constant  use  of  the  horse  by 
man.  This  is  only  one  of  the  many  absurd 
beliefs  of  the  equinely  wise  in  their  generation. 
This  space  is  no  doubt  the  result  of  the  length- 
ening of  the  jaw  and  head  of  the  horse  to  reach 
his  food.  As  his  legs  grew  longer,  placing  him 
farther  and  farther  above  the  ground,  his  neck  grew 
longer  and  his  jaw  lengthened,  and  lengthened  at 
a  place  where  the  grinding  muscles  would  not 
interfere.  The  incisor  teeth,  three  below  and 
three  above,  developed  more  and  more  into  ef- 
fective nippers,  and  the  premolars  and  molars 
into  grinders  of  the  most  delicately  complicated 
and  complete  kind. 

It  must  not  be  supposed  that  this  outline  of 
the  evolution  of  the  horse  is  part  patchwork  and 
part  surmise.  On  the  contrary,  the  history  of 
the  evolution  of  the  horse  is  the  best-known 
illustration  —  and  has  been  worked  out  with 
greater  detail  and  success  than  any  other  ex- 
ample—  of  the  doctrine  of  evolution  by  natural 
selection  and  adaptation  to  environment.  "  The 
skull  of  a  man  and  the  skull  of  a  horse  are  com- 
posed   of   exactly   the    same    number   of   bones, 


1 76  Driving 

having  the  same  general  arrangement  and  rela- 
tion to  each  other.  Not  only  the  individual 
bones,  but  every  ridge  and  surface  for  the  attach- 
ment of  muscles  and  every  hole  for  the  passage 
of  artery  or  nerve  seen  in  one,  can  be  traced  in 
the  other."  The  difference  is  mainly  in  this: 
in  man  the  brain-case  is  very  large  and  the  face 
relatively  of  very  small  proportions ;  while  in  the 
horse  the  brain  is  very  much  reduced,  and  the 
face,  especially  the  mouth,  of  great  size.  One  can 
readily  recall  types  of  both  animals  where  these 
differences  sink  to  insignificance. 

Even  the  man  who  is  least  interested  in  the 
ancestry  of  the  horse  cannot  fail  to  see  that  the 
horse  of  to-day  is  the  result  of  thousands  of 
years  of  adaptation  to  his  environment.  His 
legs  grew  longer  that  he  might  go  faster;  his 
feet  grew  harder  and  encased  themselves  in  a 
hoof;  his  head  and  neck  grew  longer  that  he 
might  the  more  easily  get  his  natural  food ;  his 
teeth  adapted  themselves  to  the  nipping,  grind- 
ing, and  mastication  of  that  food ;  his  bones, 
muscles,  intestines,  lungs,  stomach,  and  general 
conformation  inside  and  out,  developed  along 
the  lines  that  have  brought  him  to  the  point 
where  he  is  far  and  away  man's  most  useful  side- 
partner  amongst  all  animals. 

These  matters  are  worth  keeping  in  mind 
when  you  look  over  a   horse  with  a  view  to  his 


The  Natural  History  of  the  Horse       177 

purchase.  So  far  as  your  purse  permits,  you 
want  the  horse  best  adapted  to  your  require- 
ments. As  you  look  him  over,  you  have  at  least 
an  intelligent  notion  of  what  you  may  expect 
from  his  past  history  and  the  points  of  the  ani- 
mal which  indicate  that  he  will  bear  out  those 
expectations. 

Let  us  suppose  you  want  a  harness  horse  for 
all-round  work,  one  that  will  go  single,  double, 
or  in  a  makeshift  four.  It  is  not  required  that 
he  trot  in  2.10,  nor  that  he  be  able  to  be  one 
of  four  to  pull  a  loaded  coach  ten  miles  an  hour. 

First  of  all,  he  must  see.  Next  he  must  have 
legs  and  feet  to  go  on.  Then  he  must  have 
room  for  a  furnace  inside  of  him,  to  furnish  the 
propelling  force  for  those  legs;  and  the  more 
intelligence  he  has,  and  the  more  good-natured 
he  appears,  the  better.  Later,  some  of  the  more 
prominent  good  points  and  bad  points  of  the 
horse  will  be  noticed  in  detail,  but  it  is  as  well 
to  say  at  the  start  that  the  horse-dealer,  or  your 
most  horsy  friend,  or  the  veterinary,  avail  little 
to  find  you  the  perfect  horse. 

All  that  reading,  study,  and  experience  can  do 
is  to  avoid  the  worst  faults,  to  keep  in  mind  the 
salient  good  points,  and  then  to  make  the  veiy 
most  of  your  purchase  by  care  and  training  after 
he  is  your  property.  You  may  learn  the  good 
and  bad  points  of  a  horse  by  heart  and  be  as  a 


1 78  Driving 

babe  in  the  hands  of  a  clever  horse-seller,  whether 
he  be  professional  or  amateur.  He  knows  the 
weaknesses,  and  also  the  good  points,  of  what  he 
has  to  sell,  and  you  do  not ;  and  there  are  very 
few  Launcelots  in  the  horse  business.  We  have 
all  bought  horses  of  a  shrewd  dealer  and  sold 
them  again  for  five  times  what  we  paid ;  we  have 
also  bought  horses  and  gladly  disposed  of  them 
for  one-fifth  of  the  purchase  price. 

The  main  trouble  in  the  whole  matter  is  that 
buying  and  selling  horses  is  looked  upon  by  many 
people  as  either  necromancy  or  thievery.  It  is 
neither.  Study,  intelligence,  and  experience  are 
as  necessary  and  as  valuable  in  choosing  a  horse 
as  in  any  other  department  of  life,  and  in  the 
end  are  just  as  valuable.  Art  critics  have  been 
fooled  ;  book-worms  have  been  deceived ;  lovers 
have  been  disappointed;  financiers  have  gone 
into  bankruptcy ;  educated  men  have  been  fail- 
ures ;  but  study,  intelligence,  and  experience  still 
rank  high,  none  the  less.  It  is  possible  that  in 
this  matter  of  choosing  a  horse  the  aleatory  in- 
stinct in  man  comes  to  the  fore  and  he  is  apt  to 
think  luck  plays  too  great  a  part,  but,  aside  from 
that,  much  the  same  qualities  succeed  here  as 
elsewhere. 


CHAPTER  III 

THE  EARLY  DAYS  OF  THE  HORSE  IN  AMERICA 

Why  the  horse,  the  fossil  remains  of  which  are 
found  so  abundantly  in  the  middle  West  of  this 
country  that  these  places  are  known  in  the  Scien- 
tific world  as  "  Equus  Beds,"  became  extinct, 
there  being  no  horses  here  at  the  time  of  the 
Spanish  Conquest,  is  a  mystery. 

It  is  the  more  remarkable,  for  when  the  horse  was 
introduced  here  and  ran  wild  in  South  America 
and  Texas,  he  increased  and  multiplied  rapidly, 
showing  that  the  climate,  food,  and  general  con- 
ditions were  exceptionally  well  adapted  to  him. 

Various  animals  have  been  used  as  beasts  of 
burden,  and  even  as  cavalry,  all  over  the  world. 
In  the  old  days  of  Cape  Town,  the  Hottentots 
broke  their  oxen  to  the  saddle  and  used  them 
even  for  cavalry  purposes  in  time  of  war. 

In  a  report  of  the  Treasurer-general  of  Peru, 
written  in  1544,  it  is  stated  that  the  Spaniards 
even  in  those  days  used  the  large  sheep  or  llama 
of  that  country  both  as  beasts  of  burden  and  to 
ride. 

The  first  importation  of  horses  into  the  new 
179 


i8o  Driving 

world,  credited  by  authentic  history,  was  made  by 
Columbus  in  1493,  when  he  landed  in  what  is  now 
known  as  San  Domingo  with  seventeen  vessels. 

When  Cortes  landed  at  what  is  now  known  as 
Vera  Cruz,  having  sailed  thither  from  Cuba,  he 
had  with  him  the  first  horses  that  any  man  had 
ever  seen  in  the  Western  hemisphere,  and  this 
was  in  15 19.  The  Indians  thought  these  visitors 
were  from  the  sun,  and  that  the  horses  were 
fabulous  creatures  of  incomparable  prowess,  and 
brought  offerings  of  bread  and  flesh  to  them. 

Later,  in  the  bloody  wars  of  Mexico  and  Peru, 
the  war-horses,  whose  riders  were  slain,  escaped 
and  reproduced  themselves  rapidly  in  the  great 
and  luxurious  plains,  well  provided  with  food  and 
water  and  in  a  climate  especially  suited  to  them. 

De  Soto  had  horsemen  with  him  on  his  expedi- 
tion when  he  discovered  the  Mississippi  River, 
and  doubtless  many  of  the  horses  were  left  be- 
hind to  run  wild  when  the  survivors  of  that  dis- 
astrous expedition,  without  their  leader,  returned 
in  rough  boats  and  rafts. 

It  is  thought  by  some  investigators  that  the 
horses  found  by  Cabot  in  La  Plata  in  1530  could 
not  have  been  imported,  but  this  is  highly  improb- 
able. There  is  practically  no  doubt  but  that  the 
wild  horse  of  America  is  a  direct  descendant  of 
the  Spanish  horse,  and  therefore  of  the  selfsame 
blood,    which    later   made   the    thoroughbred    in 


Early  Days  of  the  Horse  in  America    i8i 

England,  and  the  trotter  in  the  United  States, 
the  fleetest  and  most  valuable  of  their  race. 

The  first  importation  of  horses  into  what  is 
now  the  United  States  was  in  1527  by  Cabeza  de 
Vaca;  these,  forty-two  in  number,  were  brought 
to  Florida,  but  through  accident,  disease,  and  ill- 
usage,  all  of  them  died. 

The  next  importation  was  by  De  Soto  from 
Spain,  and  these  no  doubt  were  the  progenitors 
of  our  wild  horses  of  the  West  and  Southwest. 

In  1625,  the  Honorable  Pieter  Evertsen  Hueft 
agreed  to  ship,  and  did  ship,  to  Manhattan  Island, 
one  hundred  head  of  cattle,  including  a  certain 
number  of  stallions  and  mares.  These  horses 
were  of  the  Flanders  breed,  from  which  descended 
the  Conestoga  horse,  afterwards  justly  prized  in 
Pennsylvania. 

The  first  horses  came  to  Massachusetts  prob- 
ably in  1629.  At  any  rate,  we  know  that  Gov- 
ernor Winthrop,  writing  on  board  the  Arabella, 
at  Cowes,  March  28,  1630,  says:  "We  are  in  all 
our  eleven  ships  about  seven  hundred  persons 
and  240  cows  and  about  sixty  horses." 

English  horses  were  landed  at  Jamestown,  Vir- 
ginia, as  early  as  1609,  and  there  is  a  tradition  that 
the  first  horse  to  land  in  Canada  was  brought  to 
Tadousac  in  1647. 

As  early  as  164 1-2  we  read  of  horses  and  carts 
crossing  Boston  harbor  on  the  ice,  so  severe  was 


1 82  Driving 

the  winter  of  that  year.  In  1636,  when  the  Rev- 
erend Thomas  Hooker  and  his  followers  left  the 
colony  to  found  Hartford,  Mrs.  Hooker,  so  a  letter 
of  that  date  reads,  was  carried  in  a  horse-litter. 
But  the  diligence  and  care  of  these  first  settlers 
in  New  England  is  nowhere  more  clearly  shown, 
than  by  the  fact  that  already,  in  1640,  Governor 
Winthrop  writes  of  shipping  eighty  horses  from 
Boston  to  the  Barbadoes.  Hardly  had  they  im- 
ported horses  for  themselves  before  they  were 
breeding  them  and  shipping  them  to  other  parts 
of  the  world. 

These  horses  were  not  of  very  valuable  stock. 
As  early  as  1650  a  young  mare  with  her  second 
or  third  foal  was  valued  at  about  ^60 ;  a  five  or  six 
year  old  stallion  at  about  $55 — this  in  Mahattan. 
In  New  England,  where  cattle  were  especially 
abundant,  horses  were  worth  about  one-third  less. 

This  is  accounted  for  by  the  fact  that  horses  in 
England  even  as  late  as  the  beginning  of  the 
eighteenth  century  were  held  in  low  esteem  at 
home,  where  they  were  valued  at  about  fifty  shil- 
lings each.  The  better  class  of  horses  in  Eng- 
land at  this  time  were  brought  from  Barbary  or 
from  Flanders.  The  well-known  saying,  "  The 
gray  mare  is  the  better  horse,"  arose  from  the 
recognized  superiority  of  the  gray  mares  from 
Flanders  over  the  English  horses  of  that  date. 

Even  as  late  as  1 700,  dogs  harnessed  to  small 


Early  Days  of  the  Horse  in  America    183 

trucks  did  most  of  the  teaming  in  the  narrow  and 
badly  paved  streets  of  the  EngHsh  towns,  and 
were  by  no  means  uncommon  in  London  for 
many  years  after  that  time. 

One  may  judge  of  the  condition  of  the  roads, 
and  the  difhculties  of  transportation,  by  the 
charges.  Seven  pounds  sterling  a  ton  was 
charged  for  transportation  from  London  to 
Birmingham;  and  twelve  pounds  sterling  a  ton 
from  London  to  Exeter.  Coal  in  those  days  was 
unknown  except  in  the  districts  where  it  was 
mined,  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  transportation 
of  coal  over  the  roads  as  they  then  were  in  Eng- 
land, would  have  made  the  price  prohibitive. 

The  demand  for  the  better  class  of  horses  in 
England  at  the  time  of  the  earlier  importations 
of  these  animals  to  America,  was  mainly  for  the 
army,  and  for  heavy  horses  to  pull  the  carriages 
and  heavy  travelling  coaches  of  the  nobility  and 
gentry.  Such  horses  as  were  needed  for  these 
purposes  were  pretty  generally  imported  from 
Barbary  and  Arabia,  and  from  Flanders. 

There  seems  to  have  been,  however,  a  native 
horse  in  Great  Britain,  for  Caesar  notes  the  fact 
that  the  Britons  drove  war-chariots. 

William  the  Conqueror,  who  represents  to 
England  genealogically  what  the  Mayfloiver 
represents  to  America,  gave  to  a  certain  Simon 
St.  Liz,  a  Norman  friend  of  his,  the  entire  town 


1 84  Drmng 

of  Northampton  and  the  whole  hundred  of 
Falkley,  then  valued  at  ^40  a  year,  "  to  provide 
shoes  for  his  horses." 

From  1066  to  the  close  of  the  twelfth  century 
there  was  renewal  and  improvement  of  the  British 
horse  by  importations  from  the  continent,  and 
also  by  stray  animals  brought  back  by  the  Crusad- 
ers under  Richard  and  others;  but  such  improve- 
ments of  the  native  breed  as  these  importations 
imply  were  of  small  importance,  and  without 
system  or  aim  of  any  kind. 

During  the  reigns  of  Henry  VIII.  and  Eliza- 
beth, important  legislation  looking  to  the  care 
and  breeding  of  horses  was  passed,  and  when 
James  I.,  who  was  fond  of  racing,  came  to 
the  throne,  he  bought  from  a  Mr.  Markham 
an  Arabian  stallion,  afterwards  always  known 
as  the  "  Markham  Arabian,"  paying  for  him 
what  was  for  those  days  the  extravagant  amount 
of  five  hundred  guineas. 

This  purchase  by  King  James  marks  the 
beginning  of  high-class  breeding  in  England. 
From  then  on,  down  through  the  reigns  of 
Charles  I.,  Charles  II.,  and  William  III.,  not 
to  mention  Oliver  Cromwell  who  raced  horses 
with  the  same  enthusiasm  that  he  sang  psalms, 
many  horses  were  imported,  much  interest  was 
taken  in  racing  and  breeding,  and  for  the  last 
three    hundred    years,   from    1603,    when    James 


Early  Days  of  the  Horse  in  America    185 

came  to  the  throne,  till  now,  England  has 
been  the  home  of,  probably,  the  best  horses 
in  the  world,  and  nothing  pleases  her  people 
as  a  whole  more  than  to  have  the  reigning 
sovereign  win  the  Derby. 

The  first  volume  of  the  English  Stud  Book, 
then  known  as  the  "  Match  Book,"  was  published 
in  1808,  and  from  then  on  we  have  had  a  more  or 
less  orderly  sequence  of  breeding  history,  and 
the  English  thoroughbred  race-horse,  the  pro- 
genitor at  one  time  or  another  of  the  best  types 
of  horses  in  this  country,  became  a  recognized 
standard  of  horse. 

Our  own  horse  history  may  be  said  to  begin 
at  the  beginning  of  the  nineteenth  century.  The 
Treaty  of  Peace  with  Great  Britain  was  signed 
in  Paris,  July  3,  1783,  and  the  British  troops  left 
November  25.  The  population  of  the  United 
States  at  that  time  was  less  than  four  millions, 
about  the  number  of  people  settled  in  and  around 
New  York  City  to-day. 

The  carriage  roads  of  Boston  were  unpaved ; 
and  marked  off  by  a  line  of  posts  and  gutters, 
and  laid  with  ill-assorted  pebbles.  The  horse- 
man who  rode  too  fast  over  these  pebbles,  and 
thus  threatened  their  disarrangement,  was  fined 
three  shillings  and  fouipence. 

The  mail  was  carried  between  Boston  and  New 
York  thrice  a  week  in  summer,  and  twice  a  week 


1 86  Driving 

in  winter,  taking  six  days  in  summer  and  often 
nine  days  in  winter,  and  all  carried  in  one  pair  of 
saddle-bags.  The  post-riders  knitted  mittens  and 
stockings  as  their  horses  jogged  along  over  the 
well-known  roads. 

The  very  first  coach  and  four  in  New  England 
began  running  in  1744,  and  the  first  coach  and 
four  between  New  York  and  Philadelphia,  the 
two  most  populous  cities  in  the  colonies,  was  put 
on  in  1 756  and  accomplished  the  journey  in  three 
days. 

Two  stages  and  twelve  horses  carried  all  the 
goods  and  passengers  between  New  York  and 
Boston,  doing  forty  miles  a  day  in  summer,  and 
scarce  twenty-five  miles  a  day  in  winter.  Josiah 
Quincy,  writing  at  this  time,  tells  us  that  he  once 
spent  thirty  days  in  his  own  coach  going  from 
Boston  to  Washington. 

The  streets  of  New  York  were  so  badly  paved 
that  Benjamin  Franklin  was  wont  to  say  that  you 
could  distinguish  a  New  York  man  in  Phila- 
delphia by  the  awkward  way  in  which  he  shuffled 
over  the  smoother  pavements  of  the  latter  city. 

There  were  but  three  roads  out  of  New  York 
in  those  days :  the  Knightsbridge  road,  a  continu- 
ation of  the  Bowery  Lane,  which  went  to  Knights- 
bridge and  thence  along  the  river  to  Albany ;  the 
old  Boston  post-road,  which  started  from  the 
neighborhood  of  what  is  now  Madison  Square, 


Early  Days  of  the  Horse  in  America    187 

thence  to  Harlem,  and  then  east  toward  Boston ; 
and  the  so-called  middle  road,  direct  to  Harlem. 

In  the  southernmost  states  there  were  no 
public  conveyances  of  any  kind  except  a  stage- 
coach between  Charleston  and  Savannah. 

It  is  only  one  hundred  years  ago,  only  the  span 
of  two  lives,  and  the  population  has  grown  from 
four  millions  to  eighty  millions;  the  gross  re- 
ceipts from  postage  from  ^320,000  (the  gross 
receipts  for  the  year  ending  October  i,  1801)  to 
over  ^121,000,000  in  1902.  The  total  estimate 
for  the  expenses  of  the  city  of  New  York  in  1800 
was  for  ^130,000. 

These  were  the  days  when  the  fashionable 
assemblies  were  advertised  to  "  open  with  a  Passe- 
Pie  and  end  with  the  Sarabund  a  I'Espagnole  " ; 
days  when  eight  bags  of  cotton  were  seized  by 
the  officers  of  the  customs  in  England,  because  it 
was  claimed  no  such  enormous  amount  of  cotton 
could  have  come  from  America;  days  when,  so 
writes  Josiah  Quincy  at  any  rate,  the  minister 
alone  had  white  bread,  "for  brown  bread  gave 
him  heart-burn,  and  he  could  not  preach  upon 
it ; "  and  it  was  some  fifty  years  later  even  than 
this,  before  we  had  the  wheel-plough  of  iron,  the 
reaper  and  binder,  the  drill,  the  hay-rake,  and  the 
corn-cutter. 

There  was  little  leisure,  and  little  money  to  be 
devoted  to  sport  of  any  kind,  and  the  horse  and 


1 88  Driving 

the  dog  existed  in  New  England,  at  least,  in  va- 
rieties little  suited  to  sport. 

In  the  South  it  was  somewhat  different.  A 
jockey-club  was  organized  in  Charleston,  South 
Carolina,  as  early  as  1735,  and  there  was  horse- 
racing  in  Maryland,  Virginia,  and  other  Southern 
states  for  years  before  the  Revolution. 

In  New  England,  on  the  contrary,  racing  was 
strictly  forbidden  on  moral  and  religious  grounds. 
No  such  thing  as  a  running-race  could  be  tol- 
erated by  the  Puritans  of  that  section.  As  a 
consequence  of  this,  we  may  trace  the  pedigree 
of  the  American  trotting-horse  straight  to  Arch- 
bishop Laud,  who  having  infuriated  the  Puritans 
to  the  point  of  desiring  emigration  for  themselves 
and  their  families  to  the  new  world,  they  founded 
New  England. 

The  scandalous  levity  and  apparently  papal 
leanings  of  Charles  and  Laud  were  not  to  be 
permitted  for  a  moment  in  their  new  home,  and 
pretty  much  all  amusements  were  frowned  upon. 
But  the  Cromwellian  love  of  a  fast  horse  survived 
in  some  of  his  fellow-Puritans  living  in  New  Eng- 
land, and  men  trained  to  the  theological  hair-split- 
ting of  that  day  made  a  distinction  between  horses 
trotting  in  friendly  competition  between  church- 
members  and  horses  runimig  for  money  prizes ! 

"  Thou  shalt  not  covet,  but  tradition 
Approves  all  forms  of  competition." 


Early  Days  of  the  Horse  in  America    189 

Two  horses  trotting  down  the  streets  of  Piing- 
ham,  Massachusetts,  and  one,  perhaps,  going  a 
little  faster  than  the  other,  would  hardly  lead  even 
the  godly  Rev.  Ebenezer  Gay  to  suppose  that  he 
was  looking  on  at  the  beginnings  of  the  sport 
of  trotting-races,  and  that  a  mare  called  Gold- 
smith Maid  would  win  for  her  owners  over 
$200,000  between  1866  and  1878  at  this  same 
sport.  Strangely  as  it  may  read,  there  is  little 
doubt  but  that  Puritan  principles  or  prejudices, 
as  you  please,  gave  the  impetus  to  the  develop- 
ment of  the  trotting-horse.  Horses  used  for  rac- 
ing had  always  run,  but  when  it  was  discovered 
that  horses  could  also  be  raced  at  a  trot,  those 
that  showed  speed  at  this  gait  were  used  to  breed 
from,  and  pains  were  taken  to  develop  their  speed- 
ing qualities.  Hence  it  is  not  flippant  humor 
that  traces  the  trotting-horse  back  to  Laud. 

'■'■Fast  Trotting.  —  Yesterday  afternoon  the  Haerlem  race- 
course of  one  mile  distance,  was  trotted  around  in  tivo  minutes 
and  ffty-nine  seconds  by  a  horse  called  Yankey,  from  New 
Haven  ;  a  rate  of  speed,  it  is  believed,  never  before  excelled  in 
this  country,  and  fully  equal  to  anything  recorded  in  the  Eng- 
lish sporting  calendars."  —  From  the  Connecticut  Journal,  June 
19,  1806. 

The  first  trotting-match  of  which  there  is  any 
authentic  account  was  in  18 18,  when  Boston  Blue 
was  produced  to  win  the  wager,  that  no  horse 
could  trot  a  mile  in  three  minutes,  and  won  it ; 


I  go  Driving 

what  the  amount  was  is  not  stated.  From  that 
time  on,  trotting  horses  against  one  another  and 
against  time  became  a  popular  amusement.  In 
1834,  Andrew  Jackson  trotted  a  mile  in  2  minutes 
42J  seconds;  in  1858,  Ethan  Allen  trotted  a  mile 
in  2  minutes  28  seconds;  in  1859,  Flora  Temple 
trotted  a  mile  in  2  minutes  19J  seconds;  in  1874, 
Mambrino  Gift  lowered  the  record  to  2  minutes 
and  20  seconds ;  in  1874,  the  famous  Goldsmith 
Maid  trotted  a  mile  in  2  minutes  and  14  seconds. 

In  1843  there  were  only  two  horses  that  could 
trot  a  mile  under  2  minutes  and  30  seconds ; 
while  in  1881  there  were  over  twelve  hundred 
horses  with  records  of  2  minutes  30  seconds  or 
better. 

Trotting  in  those  early  days  was  mostly  under 
saddle,  and  some  of  the  races  were  even  three 
miles  in  length.  Since  about  1850  trotting-races 
have  been  over  a  mile  stretch,  best  three  in  five 
heats. 

It  is  noted  as  a  curious  fact  in  the  history  of 
the  trotting-horse  that  Messenger,  who  served  a 
number  of  thoroughbred  mares,  served  a  far 
larger  number  of  cold-blooded  mares,  and  it  was 
in  these  latter  that  the  trotting  instinct  was 
almost  invariably  developed.  This  is  repeated 
through  the  trotting  register  —  almost  no  thor- 
oughbreds have  been  trotting  dams.  Palo  Alto  is 
about  the  only  half-breed  that  was  a  successful 


Early  Days  of  the  Horse  in  America    191 

trotter,  and  one  campaign  finished  him.  Messen- 
ger was  imported  in  1792  and  was  at  stud  in  New 
York  and  in  Philadelphia  for  many  years. 

The  first  known  importation  of  a  thoroughbred 
to  America  was  that  of  a  horse  called  Bully 
Rock,  by  the  Darley  Arabian,  out  of  a  mare  by 
the  Byerly  Turk,  brought  over  to  Virginia  in 
1730.  A  number  of  Derby  winners  were  im- 
ported to  America  before  1800,  including  Diomed, 
the  winner  of  the  first  Derby  in  1780,  Saltram, 
John  Bull,  Spread  Eagle,  Sir  Harry,  and  others. 

It  must  not  be  forgotten  in  dealing  with  the 
subject  of  driving  that  not  only  the  history  of 
the  harness-horse  in  America  is  all  very  modern 
history,  but  that  the  condition  of  the  roads  and 
the  state  of  the  carriage-building  trade  prevented 
any  great  progress  until  lately. 

Carriages,  indeed,  were  hardly  an  ordinary  ar- 
ticle of  manufacture  until  late  in  the  reign  of 
Charles  II.,  or  about  1675.  It  is  maintained  that 
a  rough  coach  or  wagon  ran  as  a  public  convey- 
ance between  Edinburgh  and  Leith  as  early  as 
1 6 10,  but  little  is  known  on  the  subject.  The  in- 
little-things-omniscient  Pepys  writes  in  his  diary 
under  date  of  1665  of  springs  on  certain  carriages. 
But  coach  and  carriage-building  had  not  pro- 
gressed very  far  till  later  than  this.  The  state 
coach  of  George  III.,  1762,  weighed  four  tons,  was 
24  feet  long,  8  feet  3  inches  wide,  12  feet  high, 


192  Driving 

and  had  a  pole  12  feet  long.  "Hansom's  Patent 
Safety  Cab"  did  not  appear  until  1834. 

In  the  spring  of  1669,  a  coach,  described  as 
the  "  Flying  Coach,"  went  from  Oxford  to  Lon- 
don in  one  day,  a  distance  now  covered  in  an 
hour  and  three-quarters  by  rail.  This  Flying 
Coach  departed  on  its  first  trip  from  Oxford  sur- 
rounded by  the  dignitaries  of  the  town  and  the 
university,  and  was  welcomed  in  London  by  no 
less  imposing  official  personages. 

With  this  coach  and  others  to  follow,  began  all 
sorts  of  objections  to  conveyances  going  at  this 
rate  of  speed.  It  was  contended  that  they  would 
spoil  the  roads,  ruin  the  inns  along  the  route  by 
not  stopping  at  them,  and  do  great  harm  to  the 
breed  of  horses  by  promoting  speed  at  the  ex- 
pense of  bone  and  weight. 

It  is  curious  to  think  that  even  the  first  mail- 
coach  was  criticised  on  much  the  same  grounds 
as  the  first  railroad  trains.  There  was  little 
danger  either  in  England  or  in  America  of  un- 
duly fast  travel  with  horses  and  vehicles  in  their 
then  condition. 

Even  now  in  the  United  States  the  condition 
of  the  roads,  except  in  and  around  the  wealthier 
cities,  is  deplorable.  In  the  last  quarter  of  a  cen- 
tury in  this  country  we  have  built  132,865  miles 
of  steam  railway  and  we  now  have  203,133  miles 
of   railroad.     During   the   past   fifteen    years  we 


Early  Days  of  the  Horse  in  America    193 

have  built  some  23,000  miles  of  trolley  road;  we 
have  spent  in  ten  years  ^176,226,934  for  the  im- 
provement of  rivers  and  harbors,  but  for  the  in- 
land farmer  almost  nothing  has  been  done  to  give 
him  good  wagon  roads.  There  are  74,097  miles 
of  public  highway  in  the  state  of  New  York  alone. 
It  is  calculated  that  ^1.15  will  haul  a  ton  — 

Five  miles  on  a  common  road, 

Twelve  and  one-half  to  fifteen  miles  on  a  well-made  road, 

Twenty-five  miles  on  a  trolley  road, 

Two  hundred  and  fifty  miles  on  a  steam  railway, 

One  thousand  miles  on  a  steamship. 

France  has  23,603  miles  of  wagon  roads  built 
and  maintained  by  the  government.  Italy  has 
some  5000  miles  of  road  built  and  maintained 
by  the  government.  Here  in  the  United  States, 
where  more  and  more  depends  upon  the  ability 
of  the  farmers,  small  and  large,  to  get  their  prod- 
uce quickly  and  safely  to  market,  nothing  has 
been  done  as  yet  by  the  Federal  government.  It  is 
worth  knowing  that  a  pair  of  horses  drawing  a 
load  of  4000  pounds  on  a  level  road  with  a  cer- 
tain effort,  can  only  draw  with  the  same  effort  — 

3600  pounds  on  a  road  with  a  grade  of  i  foot  rise  in  loo  feet, 
3200  pounds  on  a  road  with  a  grade  of  i  foot  rise  in  50  feet, 
2880  pounds  on  a  road  with  a  grade  of  i  foot  rise  in  40  feet, 
2160  pounds  on  a  road  with  a  grade  of  i  foot  rise  in  25  feet, 
1600  pounds  on  a  road  with  a  grade  of  i  foot  rise  in    20  feet. 

It  is  worth  knowing,  too,  that  careful  experi- 
ments  prove   that    wide   tires  —  3    to   4   inches 


194  Driving 

—  are  lighter  in  their  draught  than  narrow  tires. 
That  they  are  better  for  the  road  is  very  appar- 
ent. The  wider  tires  act  almost  as  a  stone- 
crusher,  and  actually  help  to  keep  roads  in  repair. 

In  Austria,  all  wagons  carrying  a  load  of  more 
than  2j  tons  are  obliged  by  law  to  have  wheels 
with  rims  4^  inches  wide. 

In  France,  the  tires  of  wheels  on  wagons  used  for 
carrying  heavy  loads  are  from  4  to  6  inches  wide 
and  some  of  them  as  much  as  10  inches  wide. 
In  France,  too,  the  rear  axles  on  such  wagons 
are  made  from  12  to  14  inches  wider  than  the 
front  axles,  so  that  the  rear  wheels  run  outside 
the  track  of  the  front  wheels,  thus  making  a  very 
effective  road  improver  of  every  heavy  wagon. 

In  Germany,  the  law  requires  that  all  wagons 
carrying  heavy  loads  shall  have  tires  to  their 
wheels  at  least  4  inches  wide. 

It  is  now  within  the  jurisdiction  of  boards  of 
supervisors,  in  the  state  of  New  York  at  least,  to 
enact  laws  regulating  the  width  of  tires  on  heavy 
wagons. 

What  good  roads  and  wide  tires  and  properly 
cared  for  and  properly  harnessed  and  handled 
horses  would  mean  to  us,  in  this,  now  the 
greatest  agricultural  and  manufacturing  country 
in  the  world,  is  almost  beyond  calculation. 


CHAPTER    IV 

POINTS   OF   THE   HORSE 

Though  you  will  probably  never  find  just  the 
horse  you  want  for  your  particular  purpose,  that 
is  no  reason  for  not  knowing  something  about 
the  ideal  horse. 

There  must  be  some  intelligent  and  rational 
notions  in  regard  to  a  horse  if  you  are  to  choose 
one.  It  is  better  to  know  what  one  wants,  and  to 
keep  it  clear  in  mind,  in  this  world,  even  if  one 
never  gets  it.  It  is  as  sure  as  anything  can  be 
that  the  man  who  does  not  know  what  he  wants 
will  not  get  it. 

Probably  the  best  way  to  know  a  good  horse 
is  to  study  attentively  a  fine  specimen  of  harness- 
horse  (Plate  IX.),  polo  pony  (Plate  VII.),  saddle- 
horse  (Plate  VIII.), coach-horse,  light-harness  horse 
(Plate  XIII.),  children's  pony  (Plates  XI.,  XII.), 
and  carry  the  type  in  your  mind's  eye  for  refer- 
ence (Plate  XXX.). 

A  man  learns  to  know  a  good  book  by  years 

of  intelligent  study  of  good  books;  he  comes  to 

know  a  good  picture  by  seeing  the  best  pictures. 

The  man  who  has  seen  champion  Lord  Lismore 

195 


196  Driving 

knows  forever  after  what  an  Irish  setter  ought 
to  look  like ;  the  man  who  has  seen  Pierre  Loril- 
lard's  Geneva  knows  what  a  light-weight  Llewellyn 
setter  ought  to  look  like. 

No  instrument  has  been  invented  which  can 
teach  a  man  to  know  a  good  book,  a  good  picture, 
a  good  dog,  a  good  horse,  or  a  good  woman.  No 
such  instrument  will  ever  be  invented,  and  that 
is  what  makes  life  so  surprisingly  unexpected, 
interesting,  and  exciting.  We  may  deplore  our 
ignorance,  but  it  is  precisely  this  which  keeps  us 
all  alive. 

To  begin  with,  then,  the  head  of  the  ideal  horse 
should  be  lean,  the  skin  fine,  the  bones  prominent, 
the  muscles  well  developed,  showing  the  masti- 
cating apparatus  in  good  working  order.  The 
space  between  the  jaws  underneath  should  be 
broad  and  well  hollowed  out.  There  is  a  saying 
that  a  man  should  be  able  to  put  his  clinched 
fist  there,  but  such  a  test  would  require  a  very 
unhorsemanlike  hand.  Remember  that  a  horse 
breathes  through  his  nose,  and  that  the  air  pas- 
sages from  nostrils  to  windpipe  alwa3^s  must  have 
space.  The  windpipe  should  be  large  and  well 
defined  in  its  detachment  from  the  neck.  It  is 
preferable  that  his  profile  should  be  Grecian,  or 
straight,  rather  than  either  concave  or  convex. 
He  should  be  broad  between  the  eyes  for  three 
reasons:   first,  because  that  forehead  is  the  roof 


6  years 


1 2  years 


1 7  years 
PLATE   VI.— TEETH  OF   HORSE 


Points  of  the  Horse  197 

over  the  spaces  through  which  he  breathes ;  sec- 
ond, because  to  it  are  attached  the  muscles  by 
which  he  opens  and  shuts  his  mouth ;  third,  be- 
cause this  space  also  contains  the  brain.  The 
eye  should  not  be  conspicuously  small,  denoting 
trickiness,  nor  unduly  prominent,  known  among 
horsemen  as  the  "  buck  eye,"  and  often  denoting 
defective  vision.  It  should  be  set  well  up  in  the 
head,  and  when  looked  into  should  not  show  too 
much  white,  and  should  be  clear.  The  eye- 
lids should  be  thin  and  comparatively  without 
wrinkles.  The  lips  should  be  thin  and  flexible, 
and  without  undue  length,  either  above  or 
below. 

The  ears  should  be  lean,  and  the  skin  and  hair 
on  them  fine.  A  quick,  decisive  movement  of 
the  ears  gives  an  air  of  readiness  and  determina- 
tion and  usually  implies  those  qualities.  A  lop- 
eared,  hanging-lipped  animal  may  turn  out  useful, 
just  as  men  with  faces  like  Socrates  and  Savona- 
rola turned  out  to  be  saints;  but  in  buying  horses 
and  trusting  men  it  is  better  to  go  by  general  laws 
than  by  exceptions. 

The  head  should  be  set  on  to  the  neck  to  give, 
what  is  very  hard  to  describe,  but  easy  to  recog- 
nize, viz.  an  appearance  as  though  the  neck  con- 
trolled the  head,  and  not  as  though  head  and 
neck  were  all  of  one  piece.  At  this  juncture  of 
head  and  neck  the  distance  between  the  throat 


198  Driving 

and  poll  should,  as  compared  with  the  size  of  the 
neck  elsewhere,  be  small. 

The  shoulders,  not  only  for  a  saddle-horse,  but 
for  the  harness-horse  as  well,  should  be  sloping 
(Plate  VIII.).  Put  a  saddle  on  half  a  dozen  differ- 
ent horses  one  after  the  other  and  note  where 
the  stirrup-leathers  fall,  i.e.  how  far  behind  the 
fore  legs.  If  you  have  no  other  way  of  knowing 
whether  the  horse  you  are  looking  at  has  straight 
or  oblique  shoulders,  this  will  tell  you  infallibly. 
Remember  that  about  this  question  of  shoulders, 
as  about  most  other  points  of  the  horse,  much 
nonsense  is  talked  by  the  slovenly  omniscient,  of 
whom  there  is  a  multitude  in  the  horse  world. 
For  though,  as  a  rule,  a  horse  can  trot  and  gallop 
and  walk  with  straight  shoulders,  he  can  do  none 
of  these  exercises,  except  the  last  (that  not  fast) 
comfortably  to  himself  with  straight  shoulders. 
Remember,  in  examining  the  shoulder  of  a  horse, 
that  there  is  the  shoulder-blade  and  also  the  short 
bone  (humerus)  connecting  the  shoulder-blade 
with  the  upper  bone  of  the  leg.  This  shorter 
bone  slopes  backward  and  downward.  The 
shoulder-blade  is  the  better  the  more  it  slants, 
this  shorter  bone  is  the  better  the  less  it  slants. 
A  good  horse,  whether  saddler,  road-horse,  or 
harness-horse,  steps  from  the  shoulder,  not  from 
the  knee.  Do  not  be  deceived  by  the  up-and- 
down  action  from  the  knee,  which  is  often  taken 


■■IP 

IP 

i 

^^^H  Jltt 

^Hi9 

PLATE   VII.  — POLO   PONY 


PLATE   VUL— LIGHT-HARNESS   HORSE 


Points  of  the  Horse  199 

to  mean  free  and  high  action.  The  contrary  is 
true.  Such  a  horse  can  travel  all  day  on  a  tin- 
plate. 

The  ribs  should  be  well  rounded  from  above  to 
below,  should  be  definitely  separated,  and  of  full 
length.  A  horse  with  flat,  short  ribs  near  together 
must,  anatomically,  be  lacking  in  power.  The 
chest  should  be  deep,  but  not  excessively  wide. 
The  depth  of  the  chest  measured  around  should 
be  large.  When  a  horse  is  pointed  out  to  you 
as  being  "  well  ribbed  up,"  this  does  not  mean  that 
a  line  drawn  from  the  bottom  of  his  chest  along 
his  belly  should  slope  abruptly  upward  like  a 
greyhound ;  on  the  contrary,  the  loins  and  back, 
at  the  point  slightly  behind  where  the  cantle  of 
a  saddle  would  come,  should  be  broad,  flat,  and 
powerful-looking,  and  there  should  be  no  appear- 
ance of  being  tucked  in,  or  tucked  up,  at  the 
hinder  end  of  the  back  and  loins.  A  line  drawn 
around  the  horse's  body  from  the  top  of  the  withers 
to  the  elbow-joint,  and  from  the  point  of  the  hip 
to  the  stifle-joint,  would  include  between  them 
where  the  horse  lives,  and  this  valuable  space 
should  be  roomy  and  enclosed  in  muscular,  but 
elastic,  walls.  If  you  put  a  tape  around  a  well- 
developed  and  well-bred  polo  pony  14.2  in  height, 
around  his  barrel  just  behind  his  fore  legs,  he  will 
measure  66  to  68  inches;  around  his  barrel  just 
in  front  of  his  hind  legs  61   to  63  inches.     The 


200  Driving 

same  measurements  for  a  well-bred  horse  15.2 
will  be  from  'jo  to  jT)  inches,  and  from  65  to  67 
inches  respectively.  These  are  the  proportions 
of  an  animal  "  well  ribbed  up  "  in  the  best  sense. 
"  Tucked  up  "  or  "  tucked  in  "  would  mean  that 
the  measurements  are  smaller  in  proportion,  be- 
hind. In  looking  over  your  prospective  horse, 
therefore,  see  that  his  body  be  well  rounded  out 
not  only  in  front  but  also  behind,  so  that  the  last 
ribs  look  to  be  long,  well  rounded,  and  having  but 
a  small  space  —  two  or  three  fingers  —  between 
themselves  and  the  point  of  the  hip.  Depth, 
shortness,  and  roundness  of  body  are  the  essen- 
tials (Plate  VII.). 

As  for  the  legs,  the  upper  bone  should  be  long 
in  proportion  to  the  lower  or  cannon-bone,  and 
should  be  large  and  well  supplied  with  muscle. 
The  elbows  should  stand  out  far  enough  from  the 
body  to  insure  freedom  of  action.  The  knee 
should  be  wide  from  side  to  side,  flat  in  front, 
and  thick  from  before  to  behind.  The  leg  just 
below  the  knee  should  not  look  disproportionately 
small,  or  "  tied  in  "  as  it  is  called,  but  should  be 
as  large  as  other  parts  of  the  lower  limb.  The 
tendons  that  run  down  behind  the  cannon-bone 
should  not  adhere  closely  just  below  the  knee. 
This  bone  (cannon-bone)  between  the  knee  and 
the  fetlock  should  be  short,  straight,  and  strong. 
The  fetlock  —  the  upper  and  lower  pastern  bones 


Points  of  the  Horse  201 

—  should  be  of  moderate  length  and  neither  too 
sloping  nor  too  straight.  Out  of  a  number  of 
horses  those  with  the  best  pasterns  were  those 
who  stood  the  following  simple  test :  Drop  a  line 
with  a  weight  on  it  from  the  shoulder  opposite 
the  middle  of  the  leg;  in  the  case  of  the  perfect 
pastern  the  line  should  end  immediately  behind 
the  hoof.  If  the  line  drops  in  front  of  the  heels 
of  the  hoof,  the  pastern  is  too  straight ;  if  behind, 
the  pastern  is  too  flexible. 

The  hoof  of  the  horse  corresponds  to  the  claw 
or  nail  in  other  animals,  and  is  made  so  that  it 
forms  a  solid,  tough,  horny  case  around  the  ex- 
panded end  of  the  toe.  This  non-sensitive  sub- 
stance renews  itself  from  within  as  friction  and 
work  wear  it  away. 

The  feet  of  the  horse  should  be  moderately 
large,  with  the  heels  open  and  the  frogs  sound 
and  with  no  sign  of  contraction.  Big,  spreading, 
awkward-looking  feet  mean  weight  to  lift,  coarse 
breeding,  and  usually  a  dull,  heavy  disposition. 
Smallish,  round  hoofs  mean  just  the  contrary. 

Behind,  the  horse  should  have  long  and  wide 
hips,  with  no  appearance  of  raggedness,  the  stifle 
and  thigh  strong  and  long,  and  the  hind  quarters 
well  let  down,  and  not  turned  in  nor  turned  out. 
The  hind  feet  should  be  under  the  end  of  the 
croup,  and  the  hocks  and  fetlocks  should  be  a 
little  back  of  a  line  dropped  from  the  buttocks. 


202  Driving 

The  hock  should  have  plenty  of  bone,  be  neatly 
outlined,  wide,  and  thick.  The  bones  below  the 
hock  should  be  flat,  the  tendons  well  developed 
and  standing  out  from  the  bone,  the  feet  and 
pasterns  as  in  front. 

The  dock  of  the  tail  should  be  large  and  strong. 
Muscular  development  there,  means  proportionate 
strength  all  along  the  spine.  The  tail  should  be 
set  on  high,  and  be  carried  firmly  and  away  from 
the  quarters.  A  fat,  awkward  tail  is  a  mark  of 
poor  breeding.  The  tail  of  the  well-bred  horse 
usually  tapers  off  toward  the  end. 

As  a  well-known  Continental  breaker  and  trainer 
of  horses  phrases  it :  "I  like  a  handsome  head, 
long  and  light  neck,  prominent  withers,  short  and 
strong  back  and  loins,  long  croup,  long  and 
oblique  shoulders,  close  coupling  between  the 
point  of  the  hip  and  the  last  rib,  hocks  well  let 
down,  short  cannon-bones,  long  forearms,  and 
the  pasterns  fairly  long.  A  horse  should  be  close 
to  the  ground,  which  he  will  be  when  the  distance 
from  the  brisket  to  the  ground  will  be  equal  to 
that  from  the  withers  to  the  brisket.  A  horse 
which  is  high  off  the  ground  is  generally  clumsy 
in  his  movements  and  liable  to  stumble."  An 
old-time  writer  on  the  subject  of  the  horse  claims 
that  a  good  horse  should  have:  three  qualities  of 
a  woman,  —  a  broad  breast,  round  hips,  and  a  long 
mane;    three  of  a  lion,  —  countenance,    courage, 


PLATE    IX.  — HARNESS  TYPE 


PLATE   X.  — FLYING   CLOUD.    HARNESS  TYPE 


Points  of  the  Horse  203 

and  fire ;  three  of  a  bullock,  —  the  eye,  the  nos- 
trils, and  the  joints;  three  of  a  sheep,  — the  nose, 
gentleness,  and  patience ;  three  of  a  mule,  — 
strength,   constancy,  and  foot;     three  of  a  deer, 

—  head,  legs,  and  short  hair ;  three  of  a  wolf,  — 
throat,  neck,  and  hearing;  three  of  a  fox, — ear, 
tail,  and  trot;  three  of  a  serpent,  —  memory, 
sight,  and  turning ;   and  three  of  a  hare  or  cat, 

—  running,  walking,  and  suppleness. 
Xenophon  writes :  "  The  neck   should  not  be 

thrown  out  from  the  chest  like  a  boar's,  but  like 
a  cock's  should  rise  straight  up  to  the  poll  and 
be  slim  at  the  bend,  while  the  head,  though  bony, 
should  have  but  a  small  jaw.  The  neck  would 
then  protect  the  rider,  and  the  eye  see  what  lies 
before  the  feet." 

One  cannot  go  to  buy  a  horse  with  a  tape- 
measure,  but  certain  proportions  are  well  enough 
to  keep  in  mind.  The  length  of  the  head  of  a  well- 
proportioned  horse  is  almost  equal  to  the  distance : 
(i)  from  the  top  of  the  withers  to  the  point  of 
the  shoulder ;  (2)  from  the  lowest  point  of  the 
back  to  the  abdomen ;  (3)  from  the  point  of  the 
stifle  to  the  point  of  the  hock ;  (4)  from  the  point 
of  the  hock  to  the  lower  level  of  the  hoof ;  (5)  from 
the  shoulder-blade  to  the  point  of  the  haunch. 
Two  and  a  half  times  the  length  of  the  head 
gives  :  (i)  the  height  of  the  withers  and  the  height 
of  the  croup  above  the  ground,  and  (2)  very  nearly 


204  Driving 

the  length  from  the  point  of  the  shoulder  to  the 
extreme  of  the  buttock  (Plate  XVI 1 1.). 

One  should  never  judge  a  man  or  a  horse  by 
his  defects  and  weaknesses,  but  rather  by  his 
strong  points  and  his  general  proportions.  Any 
political  campaign  will  teach  the  absolute  impos- 
sibility, not  to  say  imbecility,  of  any  or  all  the 
candidates;  and  yet  one  or  another  of  them  is 
fairly  certain  to  give  us  a  respectable  government. 
Tammany  has  been  known  to  elect  an  upright 
mayor ;  Reform  has  been  known  to  elect  a  weak 
one.  There  have  been  trotters  and  runners  of 
surprising  records  with  numerous  defects  of  build, 
and  we  all  have  one  or  more  equine  paragons  in 
the  stable  that  are  for  sale  at  a  moderate  price. 

None  the  less,  there  are  certain  defects  which 
should  be  constantly  kept  in  mind.  They  are, 
beginning  at  the  head :  a  coarse,  heavy  head,  a 
thick,  short  neck,  a  small,  sunken  eye,  a  long  back, 
a  hollow  back  (though  there  have  been  good 
racers  with  sway-backs),  flat  sides,  too  much 
length  between  last  rib  and  hind  quarters  (a 
mare,  as  compared  with  a  horse,  has,  as  a  rule,  a 
lighter  neck,  a  broader  pelvis,  is  higher  behind  and 
slacker  in  the  loins),  prominent  and  bony  hips, 
low  at  the  withers,  a  shallow  chest,  fore  legs  too 
close  together  and  not  straight,  very  straight  or 
very  bent  pasterns  and  hocks,  much  split  up 
between    the   quarters,  tail    put  on    too  low  and 


J^-  XSK^M 

^^Ba-jot!^ 

¥i-                   ■  ^ijJ^^^^M^^M 

1 

^B^!r.  / !     ^-^"x^ifc  ■   — ^"^'^ 

»^^^^i  - — - 

^^^>4^A^ 

^m 

gp^-^-.  ... .. 

■>.->  ,-.'  ■ 

[,.,  ■ ..-. .--r-r- 

PLATE   XL— CHILDREN'S   PONY 


PLATE   XIL  — CHILDREN'S   PONY 


Points  of  the  Horse  205 

hanging  close  to  the  quarters,  flat  feet,  over-big 
feet,  contracted  feet. 

Of  the  age  of  a  horse,  after  eight  years,  only 
those  who  have  given  much  time  and  study  to 
the  subject  can  determine  anything  very  accurately. 
The  receding  of  the  gums  and  wear  and  tear  of 
the  teeth,  of  course,  are  indubitable  signs  of  age. 
The  lower  jaw,  too,  as  a  horse  advances  in  years, 
tends  to  bend  outward,  making  an  angle  more  and 
more  acute  rather  than  an  obtuse  angle.  The 
cross-sections  of  the  teeth,  too,  are  smaller  as  the 
teeth  grow  up  from  the  gums  to  supply  the  parts 
worn  away.  Up  to  the  age  of  six  years  the  age 
of  the  horse  can  be  determined  fairly  accurately, 
but  even  then  difference  in  food  and  care  make 
a  marked  difference  in  the  wear  on  the  teeth. 

The  young  foal  has  two  and  sometimes  three 
temporary  molars  in  each  jaw  (Plate  V.). 
When  about  twelve  months  old  another  molar 
appears  (Plate  V.)  which  is  permanent,  and  be- 
fore the  completion  of  the  second  year  a  fifth 
molar,  also  permanent,  appears  (Plate  V.).  Be- 
tween the  age  of  three  and  four  the  mouth  is 
completed  with  twelve  permanent  molars  in 
each  jaw,  or  twenty-four  in  all  (Plate  V.).  The 
incisors  are  six  in  number  in  each  jaw  when 
the  mouth  is  complete,  at  the  age  of  four.  Just 
back  of  these,  on  each  side,  at  the  age  of  four 
appears  a  pointed  tooth  called  a  tusk  (Plate  VI.). 


2o6  Driving 

These  tusks  are  rarely  found  in  mares.  The 
lower  jaw  of  a  horse  three  years  old  is  marked 
by  two  permanent  teeth  in  the  centre  and  two 
milk  teeth  on  either  side.  Milk  teeth  are  easily 
distinguished  from  permanent  incisors  by  their 
smallness,  whiteness,  and  their  more  distinct 
necks.  At  the  age  of  four  the  lower  jaw  has 
four  permanent  and  one  milk  tooth  on  either  side. 
At  the  age  of  five  there  are  six  permanent  teeth 
and  no  milk  teeth.  At  the  age  of  six  there  are 
six  permanent  teeth  and  the  corner  teeth  are 
filled  in  the  centre.  At  the  age  of  seven  the 
dark  filling  in  the  pit  of  the  two  centre  teeth 
disappears  (Plate  VI.).  At  the  age  of  eight 
(Plate  VI.)  the  dark  filling  disappears  from  the 
four  centre  teeth,  and  at  the  age  of  nine  these 
marks  have  generally  disappeared  from  all  the 
teeth  (Plate  VI.).  For  all  practical  purposes 
this  measure  of  the  age  of  the  horse  is  accurate 
enough,  though  it  is  apparent  that  the  nature 
of  the  food  on  which  the  horse  is  fed,  whether 
it  be  hard  or  soft,  makes  a  difference.  Horses, 
for  example,  fed  upon  the  fresh  food  of  a  farm 
will  retain  the  marks  in  the  teeth  longer  than 
horses  grazing  upon  tough  grass.  As  a  rule,  in 
examining  a  horse's  mouth  only  the  lower  jaw  is 
looked  at.  It  is  well  to  lift  the  lips  above  the 
upper  incisors  to  see  if  they  are  unduly  worn  —  a 
sure  sign  of  "  cribbing." 


PLATE   XIII.  — GOOD   SHOULDERS,    LEGS,    AND    FEET 


PLATE   XIV.  — HEAVY-HARNESS  TYPES 


Points  of  the  Horse  207 

What  has  been  written  thus  far  as  to  the  points 
of  the  horse  may  puzzle  the  amateur  owner,  for 
the  reason  that  these  points  seem  to  apply  to  all 
horses  of  whatever  description.  In  proper  pro- 
portions they  do.  It  is  only  necessary  to  adapt 
these  measurements  and  proportions  to  the  kind 
of  a  horse  we  want,  remembering  always  the 
well-known  law,  that  muscles  and  bones  of  speed 
are  long  and  slender,  and  those  of  strength  are 
short  and  thick.  A  pony  14  hands  2  inches, 
capable  of  carrying  200  odd  pounds,  and  a  three- 
quarters  bred  polo  pony  of  the  same  size,  but 
wanted  for  speed  and  quickness,  would  naturally 
enough  not  look  alike,  but  the  general  relation  of 
the  parts  to  one  another  would  be  the  same ;  and 
in  looking  at  one  for  a  weight-carrier  and  at  the 
other  for  speed,  you  should  bear  in  your  mind's 
eye  the  same  distinct  principles  of  what  consti- 
tutes a  good  horse  and  what  a  bad  one. 

If  you  are  looking  for  a  horse  for  your  runabout, 
or  for  a  horse  for  a  heavy  station-wagon,  one 
should  be  lighter,  cleaner-built  perhaps,  quicker, 
and  livelier  than  the  other ;  but  it  is  a  grave  mis- 
take to  suppose  that  the  same  remarks  about 
head,  neck,  back,  legs,  feet,  and  so  on  do  not 
apply  with  equal  pertinency  to  the  one  as  to  the 
other.  Remembering  always  that  weight  is  of 
great  help  in  pulling  a  load,  —  a  horse  with  a 
heavy  man  on  his  back  can  pull  a  big  load  up  a 


fc^'T-- 


2o8  Driving 

hill  that  without  the  weight  on  his  back  he  could 
scarcely  move,  —  the  other  general  definitions  of 
what  constitute  a  good  horse  apply  to  all  classes. 
A  straight-shouldered  horse  is  less  noticeable  and 
less  uncomfortable  in  harness  than  under  saddle ; 
a  slab-sided,  ragged-hipped,  goose-rumped  animal 
well  covered  with  heavy  harness  in  a  brougham 
is  less  offensive  than  under  saddle,  but  such  an 
one  is  a  poor  specimen  wherever  he  is. 

The  ideal  way,  however,  to  cultivate  an  eye  for 
a  horse  is  to  study  his  make-up  externally  and 
internally  from  the  plates  of  the  skeleton  and  the 
internal  parts  (Plates  XVI.  and  XVII.) ;  to  bear 
in  mind  what  his  ancestry  is ;  to  note  the  relation 
of  the  parts  to  one  another,  and  the  position  of 
his  various  organs;  to  study  carefully  the  dispo- 
sitions, abilities,  strength,  and  weaknesses  of  the 
horses  that  you  know  well ;  and  to  come  to  your 
conclusions  with  this  knowledge  and  experience 
in  the  back  of  your  brain.  To  be  able  to  gabble  off 
the  points  of  a  horse  memoriter  avails  about  as 
much  as  to  know  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  avails 
to  write  one  of  Rossetti's  sonnets.  Even  then 
you  will  make  mistakes ;  but  to  enjoy  the  sport 
of  owning  and  using  horses,  either  in  harness  or 
under  saddle,  one  cannot  know  too  much,  either 
theoretically  or  practically. 

Although  this  volume  is  included  in  a  library 
on  sport,  it   should   never   be   forgotten  that  in 


Points  of  the  Horse  209 

dealing  with  every  branch  of  sport,  particularly 
where  live  animals  are  trained  and  used  by  the 
sportsman,  a  very  serious  ethical  element  enters. 
No  man  who  knows  nothing  about  horses,  no 
matter  how  charitable  he  may  be,  no  matter  how 
ecclesiastically  regular  he  may  be,  no  matter  how 
conspicuously  tender-hearted  he  may  be  to  chil- 
dren, insects,  and  the  poor,  has  any  business  on  a 
horse  or  behind  a  horse.  First,  because  he  is 
almost  invariably  cruel  to  the  horse;  and  sec- 
ondly, because  he  is  endangering  the  lives  of 
other  people.  How  often  I  have  seen  Piety  in 
the  saddle,  sawing  the  tender  bars  of  the  horse's 
mouth,  and  sliding  back  and  forth  from  pommel  to 
cantle  of  the  saddle,  excoriating  the  tender  skin 
and  flesh  beneath.  How  often  I  have  seen 
Philanthropy  and  Worth  driving  horses  with 
cruel  bearing-reins,  traces  too  long,  pole-straps 
too  tight,  coupling-reins  of  the  same  length  for 
the  long-necked  and  the  short-necked  horse, 
belly-band  tight  and  girth  loose,  bit  too  wide, 
nose-band  flapping  up  and  down,  and  breeching 
too  tight  or  too  loose.  Little  did  Philanthropy 
and  Worth  realize  that  these  things  were  as  un- 
comfortable to  the  horse  as  tight  shoes,  trousers 
too  long,  coats  too  small,  collars  too  tight,  and  a 
toothache  and  headache  to  them.  It  is  because 
sport  has  been  handled  in  this  country  to  such 
a  large  extent  by  the   professional   and    by  the 


2IO  Driving 

uncultivated,  that  its  prime  value  as  a  teacher  of 
practical  and  economic  morality  has  been  over- 
looked. 

Above  all  things,  do  not  imagine  that,  because 
you  own  one  or  more  horses  and  stroke  their 
necks  occasionally,  that  you  know  a  horse  when 
you  see  one.  Such  knowledge  does  not  come 
by  cutaneous  friction  nor  by  money.  A  wise 
man  has  three  attributes  always ;  he  may  have 
more,  but  he  must  have  these:  (i)  he  is  never 
afraid  to  ask  questions;  (2)  he  is  thankful  for 
the  many  things  he  does  not  want ;  (3)  he  knows 
when  he  does  not  know  things.  Therefore,  ask 
questions  and  make  no  pretence.  The  most  ill- 
informed  man  I  ever  met  is  one  who  has  never 
failed  to  answer  every  question  asked  him,  and 
who  never  asks  one  himself.  It  is  needless  to 
say  that  he  is  a  failure  in  his  profession,  a  bore 
socially,  and  an  encyclopaedia  of  voluble  mis- 
information. 


CHAPTER   V 

THE   STABLE 

Once  you  have  a  horse,  the  next  thing  is  to 
provide  a  place  for  him  to  live  in.  It  may  be 
better  to  keep  a  horse  in  a  livery-stable  rather 
than  to  have  no  horse  at  all,  but  certainly  nine- 
tenths,  and  something  more,  of  the  pleasure  of 
owning  horses  is  lost  if  you  have  no  stable  of  your 
own.  There  are  three  classes  of  stables,  —  good 
stables,  bad  stables,  and  magnificent  stables;  just 
as  there  are  three  kinds  of  lies, — lies,  damned  lies, 
and  statistics.  Wise  men  have  good  stables  and 
sometimes  tell  lies ;  ignorant  and  bad  men  have 
poor  stables  and  often  tell  damned  lies ;  gamblers 
and  shoddy  millionnaires  — ! 

Whatever  else  they  may  have,  good  stables 
must  infallibly  have  light,  air,  and  good  drainage. 
To  accomplish  these  things,  the  stable  should  be 
above  the  level  of  the  ground  surrounding  it,  if 
only  a  few  inches,  to  facilitate  proper  drainage. 
It  should  face  preferably  south  or  west,  to  get 
the  largest  possible  amount  of  sunlight.  Pay  no 
attention  to  any  talk  about  "a  dark  stable."  It  is 
an  exploded  notion.     It  is  of  course  necessary  to 


2 1 2  Driving 

be  able  to  darken  the  part  of  the  stable  where  the 
horses  take  their  rest ;  and  it  is  a  great  convenience 
to  have  a  box-stall  or  two,  separated  entirely  from 
the  others,  where  a  horse  may  be  kept  quiet,  cool, 
and  out  of  the  light.  But  if  necessity  demands  a 
choice  between  light  and  darkness,  choose  the 
light  every  time.  Sunlight  is  the  best  antiseptic 
in  the  world  for  either  men  or  horses. 

The  size  of  the  stable  depends  upon  the  purse. 
It  is  not  a  question  of  the  number  of  horses, 
because  no  horse  owner  was  ever  known  to  have 
all  the  horses  he  wanted.  Just  as  every  yacht 
owner  wishes  to  add  just  ten  feet  to  his  yacht, 
so  every  man  with  a  stable  of  horses  could  use 
just  one  or  two  more  to  advantage.  It  is  a  fair 
statement  to  work  upon,  however,  that  every 
horse  in  a  stable  is  entitled,  for  his  health  and 
comfort,  to  nine  hundred  cubic  feet  of  space,  at 
least.  Next  to  the  proper  allowance  of  food  and 
water,  this  matter  of  good  air  in  the  stable  is  the 
most  important  of  all.  The  gases  given  off 
through  the  lungs  and  skin,  and  those  generated 
from  urine,  and  faeces,  are  poisonous  and  irrita- 
ting. Coughs,  colds,  bad  coats,  swelled  legs, 
general  debility,  are  all  due  to  badly  ventilated 
stables,  and  if  a  contagious  disease  starts  in  such 
a  stable,  it  is  well-nigh  impossible  to  save  any  one 
of  the  inmates. 

Bad  ventilation  does  not  mean  necessarily  that 


The  Stable  213 

a  stable  is  hot,  nor  good  ventilation  that  a  stable 
is  cold.  If  properly  managed,  a  stable  may  be 
so  ventilated  as  to  avoid  either  extreme.  What 
is  wanted  is  abundance  of  fresh  air  without 
draughts.  All  systems  of  ventilation  are  based 
upon  the  principle  that  heated  air  expands  and 
ascends,  so  that  the  inlets  should  be  below,  the 
outlets  above.  The  inlets  should  be  so  arranged 
that  the  cool  air  does  not  come  in  where  it  may 
blow  upon  the  legs  of  the  horses  or  make  them 
uncomfortable  when  lying  down. 

All  windows  and  doors  should  be  kept  in  easy 
working  order,  so  that  it  is  no  trouble  to  servants 
to  open  and  close  them. 

For  after  all  has  been  said  and  done  upon 
these  matters  theoretically,  the  practice  will  de- 
pend almost  entirely  upon  the  man  or  men  in 
charge.  I  would  rather  have  a  poor  stable,  with 
a  first-rate  man  in  charge  of  it,  than  the  best 
stable  ever  built,  with  a  careless,  indifferent, 
ignorant,  and  occasionally  inebriate  man  in 
charge.  No  mechanical  arrangements,  no  matter 
how  minute  and  delicate  in  their  serviceability,  are 
of  the  slightest  value  when  in  control  of  the  incom- 
petent. Spend  time,  thought,  money,  and  patience 
in  building  yourself  the  best  stable  your  purse 
permits;  but  in  proportion  spend  even  more  in 
procuring  the  man  who  is  to  be  at  the  head  of  it. 

When  you  get  him,  don't  pamper  him,  or  bribe 


2  14  Driving 

him,  or  kotow  to  him,  —  no  self-respecting  man 
is  held  by  such  bonds,  —  but  make  him  your  friend 
and  run  your  stable  jointly  with  him,  respecting 
him  in  his  capacity  and  retaining  his  respect  for 
you  in  yours. 

Above  all  things,  abjure  the  maudlin  sentiment 
of  the  day,  that  there  should  be  no  master  and  no 
man.  The  universe,  so  far  as  telescope  can  see, 
the  earth,  from  centre  to  rim,  recognize  love,  law, 
and  obedience.  Every  intelligent  man  is  the 
servant  of  somebody,  and  ought  to  be  proud  of  it ; 
if  he  is  not,  something  is  radically  wrong  with 
him  or  the  master  he  has  chosen  to  serve.  Try 
to  make  the  man  in  the  stable  proud  of  being 
your  servant.  If  you  succeed,  everything  will  go 
well ;  if  you  cannot  accomplish  this  with  love  and 
law,  then  you  will  have  to  fall  back  upon  some 
makeshift,  like  money,  and  get  on  the  best  you  can. 
But  make  no  mistake,  and  save  yourself  untold 
troubles  by  realizing  at  the  start  that  money 
alone  does  not  make  good  servants  in  the  stable 
or  anywhere  else.  The  sailors  who  fought  with 
Paul  Jones,  and  the  cavalry-men  who  rode  with 
Phil  Sheridan,  were  not  thinking  much  of  their 
pay.  The  manikin  moved  by  money  will  spoil 
your  stable,  your  temper,  and  your  horses.  Study 
carefully  the  characters  of  those  who  are  contin- 
ually complaining  of  their  servants ! 

The  simpler  the  construction  of  the  stable,  the 


The  Stable  215 

better.  Have  as  few  separate  rooms  and  as  few 
passageways  as  possible ;  this  means  light,  air, 
cleanliness,  and  convenience.  If  you  are  about  to 
build  a  stable,  go  about  among  your  friends,  view 
their  stables,  and  hear  what  they  have  to  say  from 
their  experience.  Money  spent  in  practical  in- 
spection before  building  will  be  saved  many 
times  over,  in  getting  what  you  want,  and,  best 
of  all,  knowing  why  you  want   it. 

A  few  inches  above  the  ground  is  enough  for 
drainage ;  if  the  stable  is  higher  than  this,  you 
have  a  pent  to  go  up  and  down  at  the  stable  door. 
In  winter  this  is  dangerous,  and  at  all  times  it 
frets  the  horses  to  slide  out  of  the  stable  at  the 
start-off. 

Your  entrance  door  should  be  at  least  10  feet 
6  inches  wide  and  at  least  10  feet  6  inches  high. 

The  ceilings  in  coach  house,  and  over  the 
stables,  should  be  at  least  12  feet  high,  and  a  foot 
or  two  more  gives  that  much  more  air  space. 

Windows  in  coach  house,  saddle  room,  harness 
room  and  cleaning  room  should  be  at  a  height 
convenient  for  opening  and  shutting  and  always 
in  easy  working  order.  Windows  in  stalls  and 
boxes  should  have  the  lower  sill  at  least  6  feet  3 
inches  above  the  ground,  so  that  the  light  shall 
not  be  in  the  horse's  eyes  and  draughts  shall  not 
blow  upon  them.  These  windows  should  all 
have  shutters  on  the  outside,  should  hinge  from 


2i6  Driving 

the  bottom,  let  down  from  outside  in,  and  be 
enclosed  on  the  inside  in  a  box  to  prevent  side 
draughts. 

The  stalls  should  be  at  least  9  feet  long,  though 
10  feet  is  not  too  long,  and  at  least  5  feet  7  inches 
wide,  though  a  narrower  stall  may  prevent  a  horse 
getting  cast.  If  there  are  stalls  on  both  sides,  or 
stalls  on  one  side,  and  boxes  on  the  other,  the  aisle 
between  should  be  at  least  10  feet  wide,  that  the 
horse  may  be  brought  out  and  turned  comfortably. 

If  possible,  have  one  or  two  box-stalls  com- 
pletely detached  from  the  other  stalls  and  boxes, 
for  sick  horses,  for  horses  needing  rest  and  quiet, 
and  for  new  horses  that  may  come  into  the  stable 
with  distemper. 

If  there  are  living  rooms  over  the  stable,  do  not 
have  them  over  the  horses.  Horses  ought  to  be 
allowed  to  sleep  in  peace. 

The  coach-house  floor  should  be  preferably  of 
wood  on  account  of  dampness,  though  cement  is 
cheaper,  and  in  a  well-aired  and  dry  stable  is  good 
enough. 

The  aisle  between  stalls  should  be  of  brick,  or 
of  well-laid  small  flint  brick,  laid  in  mortar,  and 
with  the  lines  running  parallel  to  one  another, 
and  not  in  herring-bone  fashion,  so  that  a  hose 
and  a  stable  broom  can  thoroughly  cleanse  the 
cracks.  Any  other  arrangement  requires  a  knife 
to  get  all  the  dirt  away. 


The  Stable  217 

The  stalls  should  have  brick  floors,  or  brick  or 
cement,  with  a  slatted  wooden  floor  over  it.  There 
are  advocates  of  wood  alone  and  brick  alone  for 
the  stall  floor;  the  slats  are  a  fair  compromise. 
These  slats  should  run  down  the  centre  of  the  stall, 
beginning  some  4  feet  from  front  of  stall.  The 
slats  should  be  held  together  with  iron  rods,  and 
either  pull  out  bodily  or  move  on  hinges,  so  that 
the  stall  may  be  washed  out  thoroughly  with  the 
hose.  The  partitions  between  stalls  should  be 
7  or  8  feet  high  in  front  and  5  or  6  behind.  It 
is  well  to  leave  a  few  inches  of  space  between 
the  partitions  and  the  wall  in  front,  and  between 
the  bottom  of  the  partitions  and  the  floor,  for 
circulation  of  air. 

The  ideal  stall  would  have  both  a  box-drain  in 
the  centre,  and  a  drain  running  at  the  bottom 
from  one  end  of  the  line  of  stalls  to  the  other 
at  a  slight  incline.  The  latter  is  sufiicient,  how- 
ever. Horses  should  stand  as  nearly  as  possible 
on  a  level.  A  slope  of  one  in  eighty  is  enough 
for  drainage. 

Box-stalls  should  have  a  centre  drain  with  a 
well-secured  top  to  prevent  accident.  All  drain- 
age in  stables  should  be  surface  drainage.  Per- 
mit no  underground  pipes,  traps,  or  drains  in 
your  stable!  Boxes  should  be  at  least  10  feet  6 
by  12  feet. 

It  is  claimed  by  practical  horse  owners  of  long 


2i8  Driving 

standing  that  no  more  straw  is  used  in  stalls  and 
boxes  with  brick  floors  than  in  those  with  wooden 
or  wooden  slat  floors,  and  that  the  former  are 
cleaner.  It  goes  without  saying  that  the  less 
wood  and  iron  you  have  in  stalls  and  boxes,  the 
better.  They  rust,  corrode,  get  soaked,  and  smell. 
In  a  well-kept  stable  your  nose  should  not  be  a 
factor  in  the  recognition  of  the  fact  that  you  are 
in  a  stable. 

The  harness  room  should  be  of  wood  through- 
out, ceiling  as  well,  to  avoid  dampness.  Unless 
you  have  dozens  of  sets  of  harness,  some  of  which 
are  seldom  used,  and  therefore  conveniently  kept 
in  cases,  cover  your  harness-room  walls  with  baize 
stuff,  and  have  your  harnesses  in  the  full  blaze  of 
all  the  light  and  publicity  there  is.  They  will  be 
kept  better. 

Have  a  box  with  a  baize  stuff  back  and  a  glass 
door  for  bits,  chains,  etc.,  and  have  it  too  big 
rather  than  too  small. 

Harness  room,  coach  house,  saddle  room,  and 
cleaning  room  should  each  have  a  place  for  a  stove. 

There  should  be  no  artificial  heat  where  the 
horses  are  kept.  Well-blanketed  horses  can  be 
kept  without  injury  even  in  an  occasional  tem- 
perature of  30°,  as  happened  frequently  in  many 
stables  during  the  severe  winter  of  1903-4.  Such 
a  temperature  is  not  good  for  them,  but  even  that 
is  much  better  than  artificial  heat  incompetently 
superintended. 


The  Stable 


219 


Six  or  seven  horses  in  one  stable  are  enough. 
They  have  more  air,  more  quiet,  are  kept  cleaner, 
and  the  coming  and  going  makes  less  disturbance 
and  does  not  change  the  temperature  of  the  stable 
so  violently. 

In  this  climate  a  stable  of  wood  is  cheaper, 
cooler  in  summer,  warmer  in  winter,  and,  at  all 
times,  drier. 

After  studying  a  number  of  stables  and  experi- 
menting with  my  own,  I  should  build  a  stable  — 


Ik    —      ^ 


South 

PLATE  XV.  — STABLE   PLAN 


say  to  accommodate  seven  horses,  or  fourteen  at  a 
pinch — as  follows:  coach  house  to  stand  fourteen 
vehicles  (Plate  XV.).  The  building  to  face  south 
or  west.  Horses  to  face,  the  majority  of  them, 
to  the  north.  Ground  floor  4  inches  above  the 
outside  ground.  Entrance  door  to  slide  and  to 
be  10  feet  6  inches  wide  and  the  same  in  height. 
The  ideal  thing,  of  course,  is  to  be  able  to  drive 


2  20  Driving 

through  your  stable  by  having  another  door  oppo- 
site your  entrance  door.  It  only  diminishes  the 
wall  space,  and  is  convenient  in  many  ways,  espe- 
cially in  a  country  stable,  where  you  may  wish  to 
stand  a  horse  and  trap  indoors.  Drive  in  the  door 
on  to  carriage  wash,  sloping  toward  drain  in  centre, 
this  to  be  of  cement.  Sliding  door  to  the  right  ad- 
mitting to  the  stables,  with  six  stalls  facing  north 
and  two  box-stalls  facing  south.  Space  lofeet  by 
lo  feet  for  cleaning  harness,  between  box-stall  and 
wall  that  separate  carriage  wash  from  stables,  with 
a  door  at  the  end,  half  door  preferred,  furnished  with 
hooks  and  two  telescope  harness-hangers,  water- 
trough,  and  shelves.  Aisle,  lo  feet  wide  between 
stalls  and  box-stalls,  laid  in  vitrified  brick,  all  lines 
between  bricks  running  into  one  another  both 
lengthwise  and  sideways  for  greater  convenience 
in  cleaning.  Drain  in  centre  of  each  box-stall, 
and  covered  drain  running  at  foot  of  stalls. 
Covers  of  all  drains  removable,  and  drains  to 
be  easily  washable  with  hose.  Stalls  floored 
with  brick,  box-stalls  of  the  same.  Half  door  at 
end  of  aisle  to  face  large  door  leading  into  car- 
riage wash.  In  this  climate,  screens  on  all  doors 
and  windows  for  summer.  Windows  as  described. 
Feed  and  hay  to  come  down  shafts  on  one  side  of 
space  allotted  to  harness  cleaning.  Trough  in 
that  space  with  cold  water  only.  Hot  water  to 
be  furnished  by  boiler  on  stove  in  carriage  house. 


The  Stable  221 

No  separate  harness  cleaning  room  in  a  stable  of 
this  kind.  The  rough  work  can  be  conveniently 
done  in  the  space  described,  and  the  polishing, 
dusting,  etc.,  in  the  harness  room.  This  saves  an 
extra  room,  probably  dark,  and  at  any  rate  another 
room  to  be  kept  clean.  Carriage  house  to  the 
left  of  carriage  wash,  preferably  floored  and 
ceiled  with  wood,  with  hospital,  or  rounded  cor- 
ners and  edges,  so  that  it  can  be  readily  and 
thoroughly  cleaned,  25  by  35  feet,  which  will 
easily  contain  twelve  to  fifteen  vehicles. 

Harness  room  to  be  entered  from  end  of  car- 
riage wash  opposite  entrance  door,  to  be  eleven 
by  twenty-four,  walls  lined  with  baize  and  fur- 
nished with  fixtures  for  harness,  saddles,  whips,  etc. 
Two  extra  box-stalls,  tool  room,  water-closet,  and 
separate  entrance,  with  stairs  to  living  rooms  above, 
built  out  from  southwest  angle  of  carriage  house. 
These  box-stalls  to  have  half  doors,  if  possible, 
opening  into  a  small  paddock  and  floored  with 
dirt  or  peat  moss.  Forty  dollars'  worth  of  Miss 
Hewitt's  well-made  hurdles  will  make  you  a  very 
useful  paddock  and  save  scores  of  dollars  in  veter- 
inary bills.  By  all  means  have  cleats  to  form  a 
ladder  on  the  wall  of  the  hay-shaft,  so  that  the  man 
can  get  directly  and  quickly  to  his  horses  in  case 
of  accident  or  danger.  Poles,  fastened  to  the  wall 
with  hinges,  so  that  they  are  not  in  the  way  when 
not  used,  along  the  walls  of  the  carriage  house,  for 


222  Driving 

robes,  and  rests  for  poles  themselves.  Chests 
lined  with  tin  for  travelling  and  for  storing  win- 
ter or  summer  clothing,  blankets,  robes,  etc. 

Hay  should  be  fed  from  the  floor,  not  from 
overhead  mangers.  Feed  boxes  and  water-recep- 
tacles movable,  that  they  may  be  from  time  to' 
time  taken  out  to  be  scoured  and  sunned.  Horses 
watered  with  water-buckets  and  not  by  having 
water  in  stalls  always  at  hand.  As  regards  this 
practice,  the  theory  is  indisputable,  but  in  practice 
you  have  dirty  water,  stale  water,  water  when  horses 
are  heated  or  just  after  meals,  unless  you  have  first- 
class  servants ;  and  if  you  have  these,  the  buckets 
are  safer  and  save  that  much  plumbing  —  the  less 
of  which  you  have  in  a  stable,  the  better.  In  such 
a  stable  you  drive  your  carriage  in  on  to  the  wash. 
The  horses  are  unhooked  and  taken  into  the 
stables,  where  if  it  is  a  raw  day  the  door  may  be 
closed.  The  harness  is  taken  off,  hung  on  hooks, 
and  the  horses  are  cared  for.  The  harness  is 
then  cleaned  and  taken  to  the  harness  room,  where 
it  may  be  given  finishing  touches.  The  carriage 
is  washed  down  and  run  into  its  place,  and  all  with 
the  very  minimum  of  going  and  coming  and  so  ar- 
ranged that  no  dirt  need  be  carried  across  clean 
spaces.  Horses,  carriages,  and  harness  are  all 
landed  where  they  are  to  be  first  cared  for,  and 
are  then  close  to  where  they  belong  when  cleaned. 
This  of  course  is  an  economical  plan,  and  is  not 


The  Stable  223 

intended  to  describe  the  ideal  stable.  It  is  merely 
an  ideal  stable  for  a  man  of  moderate  means. 

Once  a  week,  weather  permitting,  all  carriages 
should  be  aired  and  sunned  outside.  It  may  be 
said,  however,  that  a  thoroughly  dry  carriage 
house  is  better  than  even  this  much  exposure  to 
the  sun,  with  the  effect  of  fading  cushions,  trim- 
mings, etc.  Saddles  should  always  be  dried  in 
the  sun  when  possible.  Once  a  week,  too,  the 
coach  house  should  be  cleaned  and  dusted.  Once 
a  week  horses  should  be  moved  from  their  stalls 
to  other  stalls  or  box-stalls,  bedding  removed, 
slats  lifted  or  taken  out,  if  there  are  slats,  and  the 
stable  flushed  and  broomed  out  thoroughly  and 
sprinkled  with  disinfectant  and  water.  I  have 
known  stables  where  there  has  not  been  a  sick 
horse  for  years,  except  in  the  case  of  new  horses 
with  distemper.  The  temperature  of  a  stable  is 
best  between  50°  to  70°.  The  nearer  it  is  kept 
at  65°  the  year  round,  the  better. 

Into  the  details  of  fixtures,  implements,  archi- 
tectural and  plumbing  minutiae,  it  is  not  the  pur- 
pose of  this  small  volume  to  go.  There  are  books 
which  cover  this  ground  completely,  accurately, 
and  in  great  detail,  the  titles  of  which  may  be 
found  in  the  Bibliography. 

Although  only  the  ground  plan  of  a  stable  is 
outlined  and  described  here,  the  rooms  above  the 
stable   are   important.     The   coachman,  with   or 


2  24  Driving 

without  family,  should  live  in  the  stable,  and  it  is 
convenient  to  have  the  undermen  there  too  if 
possible.  Horses  should  never  be  left  to  take 
care  of  themselves  through  the  night.  The  liv- 
ing rooms  should  be  properly  ventilated,  heated, 
and  provided  with  bath  rooms,  and  everything 
within  reason  done  to  make  those  who  care  for 
the  horses  at  least  as  comfortable  as  the  horses. 

Racing  stables,  breeding  stables,  stables  for 
twenty  and  thirty  horses,  are  subjects  in  them- 
selves, although  the  principles  outlined  here 
must  of  necessity  obtain  in  a  good  stable  of  what- 
ever size  and  for  whatever  purpose.  There  are  two 
stables,  that  I  have  seen,  and  probably  others, 
where  money  has  waved  experience  to  one  side, 
and  insisted  upon  this  or  that,  where  a  pliant 
architect  has  obeyed,  and  they  are  both  useless. 
There  is  such  a  thing  —  it  was  discovered  in  these 
cases  —  as  having  a  stable  too  big,  and  of  attempt- 
ing to  house  too  many  horses  under  one  roof. 


CHAPTER   VI 

FEEDING  AND   STABLE   MANAGEMENT 

Experience  has  shown  that  one  man  can  care 
for  three  horses ;  that  two  men  can  care  for  seven ; 
three  men  are  needed  for  ten,  and  so  on.  But 
even  this  must  be  modified.  Where  the  members 
of  the  family  live  in  the  country  and  do  most  of 
their  own  driving,  these  figures  are  correct,  but  in 
an  establishment  where  two  men  are  required  on 
the  box  with  one  or  more  vehicles,  and  a  groom 
must  accompany  each  trap,  and  there  is,  to  boot,  a 
fair  amount  of  riding,  additional  help  is  needed  in 
the  stable,  if  everything  is  to  go  smoothly;  and 
horses,  harnesses,  saddles,  and  carriages  are  to  be 
turned  out  well. 

The  whole  problem  of  the  care  and  system  of  a 
stable  centres  around  the  horse,  and  more  particu- 
larly the  horse's  stomach.  No  animal,  in  propor- 
tion to  its  size,  has  such  a  small  stomach  as  a 
horse.  The  stomach  of  a  man,  whose  weight  is 
one-eighth  of  that  of  a  horse,  will  hold  something 
more  than  three  quarts  of  water ;  while  the  stom- 
ach of  a  horse  will  only  hold  three  gallons,  or  four 
times  that  quantity.     The  great  bulk  of  the  horse 

Q  225 


2  26  Driving 

requires  a  large  quantity  of  food,  and  what  food 
he  eats  digests  and  passes  through  him  quickly. 
If  this  were  not  so,  the  stomach  would  for  a  large 
part  of  the  time  be  so  distended  and  so  press 
upon  other  organs  of  the  body  that  his  usefulness 
would  be  seriously  impaired. 

He  must,  therefore,  be  fed  regularly  and  often, 
that  is  to  say,  three  times  a  day  at  least,  and  four 
times  is  better.  The  management  of  the  stable 
must  hinge,  therefore,  upon  the  meal  hours  of  its 
inmates  and  their  use  by  the  owners  —  where 
horses  must  do  duty  at  an  early  train  in  the  morn- 
ing and  another  train  in  the  evening,  or  where 
horses  are  out  shopping  from  ii  a.m.  to  1.30  p.m. 
and  there  is  driving  and  riding  in  the  afternoon, 
and  night  duty  as  well,  the  routine  of  the  stable 
must  be  adapted  to  those  demands. 

In  the  case  of  a  large  stable,  where  three  or  four 
men  are  kept,  a  regular  routine  of  duty  should  be 
laid  out  as  on  shipboard,  with  hours  and  duties 
clearly  set  down,  otherwise  confusion  will  reign. 
In  a  small  stable  the  requirements  of  the  family 
should  be  so  far  as  possible  along  regular  lines, 
and  in  all  cases  everywhere  no  coachman  or 
groom  ought  to  be  subjected  to  calls  for  horses 
without  warning.  By  nine  o'clock  in  the  morn- 
ing the  orders  for  horses  wanted  up  to  noon 
should  be  given;  by  two  o'clock  the  orders  for 
horses  wanted  up  to  eight  o'clock.     This  cannot 


Feeding  and  Stable  Management       227 

be  done  always,  but  it  ought  to  be  done  so  far 
as  possible,  otherwise  the  best-natured  and  most 
systematic  man  in  the  world  will  find  it  impos- 
sible to  keep  his  stable  running  smoothly,  his 
horses  fed  and  watered  and  dressed  at  the  proper 
times,  and,  most  important  of  all,  his  horses  ready 
for  work  when  they  are  needed. 

A  horse  just  watered,  or  with  a  stomach  full  of 
hay,  or  with  a  hearty  feed  in  him,  is  perhaps  the 
most  uncomfortable  of  all  conveyances,  and  if 
worked  hard  under  the  circumstances  does  him- 
self serious  injury. 

There  is  no  real  pleasure,  no  real  sport,  in  this 
world  that  does  not  entail  intelligence  and  labor. 
It  is  one  of  the  greatest  of  pleasures,  one  of  the 
most  w^holesome  sports,  to  own,  to  ride,  and  to 
drive  horses.  But  to  have  a  stable  of,  say,  from 
three  to  ten  horses  and  to  get  your  own  fun  out 
of  it,  requires  work,  intelligence,  and  oversight. 

Visit  your  friends  who  have  horses  and  see  how 
often  this  horse  cannot  go  out,  that  horse  cannot 
go  out.  One  is  lame,  another  has  a  sore  back, 
another  is  used  up  from  yesterday,  and  so  on. 
Or  look  about  you  at  the  condition  of  your  neigh- 
bors' horses,  —  tired-looking,  staring  coats,  bags 
of  bones  to  look  at,  rattling  carriages  and  ill- 
fitting  harnesses,  interfering,  and  overreaching; 
and  these  establishments  cost  money  and  are  sup- 
posed to  give  pleasure. 


228  Driving 

How  shall  we  avoid  all  this  ?  If  you  have  no 
interest  in  your  stable  and  have  no  time,  say  half 
an  hour  a  day,  to  devote  to  it,  and  no  other  mem- 
ber of  the  family  knows  or  cares  anything  about 
it,  by  all  means  job  your  horses  and  do  not 
attempt  a  stable.  At  least  you  can  avoid  being 
particeps  criminis  in  the  ruining  of  horses,  the 
spoiling  of  coachmen  and  grooms,  and  the  waste- 
ful destruction  of  harnesses  and  carriages. 

But  if  you  have  a  stable,  look  after  it.  Provide 
yourself  with  a  Stable  Book ;  a  long-leaved  book  of 
a  hundred  and  fifty  pages,  —  the  left-hand  page 
with  the  month  at  the  top  and  thirty-one  spaces 
below  for  days  of  the  month.  At  the  top  as  head- 
ings have  Feed  —  Shoeing  —  Repairs  —  Cash  — 
Miscellaneous.  On  the  right-hand  page  have 
blank  space  for  Remarks  and  any  details  about 
horses,  veterinary  visits,  horses  bought  or  sold. 
The  coachman  should  enter  against  the  proper 
dates  what  horses  are  shod  and  how,  what  feed 
comes  in,  all  articles,  including  clothes,  purchased, 
and  all  other  details.  This  book  comes  in  at  the 
end  of  the  month,  to  be  compared  with  the 
owners'  bills,  and  he  should  add  the  amounts  and 
check  off  the  items.  Both  the  coachman  and  the 
owner  should  know  to  a  penny  what  the  stable  is 
costing. 

We  have  all  probably  discovered  that  we  do 
not  know  where  to  save,  if  we  do  not  know  how 


Feeding  and  Stable  Management       229 

we  spend.  The  beginning  of  all  economy  is  the 
knowledge  of  expenditures.  It  may  be  main- 
tained just  here  that  all  this  is  too  much  trouble! 
Those  who  feel  that  way  had  best  close  the  book. 
Neither  this  chapter  nor  any  of  the  others  is 
written  for  those  who  know  it  all,  —  of  whom, 
alas,  there  are  so  many, —  nor  for  those  who 
do  not  wish  to  know  anything  which  entails 
trouble. 

The  necessary  implements  for  the  work  of  the 
stable  should  be  furnished  willingly,  and  buckets, 
hose,  forks,  hangers,  clothes,  chamois,  hooks, 
brooms,  sponges,  should  be  kept  in  repair  or 
renewed.  It  is  a  poor  plan  to  economize  at  the 
working  end  of  the  stable.  One  or  two  horses 
or  traps  less,  or  a  groom  less,  but  let  what  you 
have  be  good  of  its  kind  and  be  kept  good. 

Once  a  week  the  stable  should  be  washed  out, 
polished,  and  dusted,  and  sprinkled  with  Sanitas 
or  some  other  good  disinfectant,  and  the  owner 
should,  as  they  say  on  shipboard,  have  "quarters." 
Look  over  everything  from  end  to  end  ;  if  you  do 
not  take  that  much  interest  in  the  matter,  it  is  not 
likely  that  the  executive  officer  at  the  stable  will 
retain  a  very  enthusiastic  interest  in  the  affairs  of 
the  stable  for  long.  A  man  with  half  an  eye  can 
tell,  from  the  horses,  harnesses,  and  vehicles  he 
sees,  whether  the  owners  cooperate  with  their 
coachmen  or  not. 


230  Drrcing 

A  man  should  be  able  to  groom  a  horse  thor- 
oughly in  from  thirty  to  forty  minutes,  and  this 
work  should  be  done,  if  possible,  away  from  the 
other  horses. 

A  good  routine  for  stable  management  can 
only  be  worked  out  by  each  man  for  himself,  ac- 
cording to  the  regular  demands  upon  the  stable 
from  the  family,  as  a  basis. 

Although  horses  are  kept  primarily  to  work,  it 
is  bv  no  means  easy,  althouo-h  of  all  things  most 
necessar}%  that  they  should  have  exercise  regu- 
larly. Many  of  the  accidents  and  much  of  the 
illness  in  most  stables  arise  from  irregular  ex- 
ercise and  careless  feeding.  The  average  horse 
in  the  private  stable  should  be  out  two  hours  a 
day,  and  should  do  ten  miles.  With  one  day's 
rest  in  seven,  seasoned  horses  can  do  more  than 
this  —  up  to  fifteen,  and  even  more,  miles  a  day  — 
and  be  the  better  for  it. 

Their  muscles  harden,  respirator}^  organs  are 
less  liable  to  disease,  and,  strange  as  it  may  sound 
to  the  uninitiated,  their  feet  and  legs  do  better, 
even  when  the  work  is  on  hard  roads.  Swelled 
legs,  founder,  azoturia,  colic,  and  the  like  are  more 
often  the  result  of  overfeeding  and  under  exercis- 
ing than  the  reverse. 

If  the  feet  are  washed  out  when  the  horse  re- 
turns to  the  stable — being  careful  to  dry  the 
legs  thoroughly  —  and   stopped   at  night  with  a 


Feeding  and  Stable  Management       231 

sponge  or  bit  of  thick  felt,  these  precautions, 
with  regular  exercise  and  judicious  feeding,  will 
do  more  than  anything  else  to  keep  your  horses 
in  condition  to  go  when  you  want  them.  Coach- 
manitis  and  groomaturia  sometimes  interfere  with 
the  owner's  wish  to  use  his  horses ;  and  where 
this  malady  is  of  frequent  occurrence,  a  prolonged 
holiday  is  the  only  remedy. 

There  are  some  men  who  are  constitutionally 
unfitted  to  get  on  with  men  under  them.  They 
are  not  necessarily  bad  men,  but,  from  their  golf 
caddy  to  their  butlers  and  secretaries,  they  are 
disliked.  One  woman  will  run  her  house  year 
after  year  without  friction  ;  another,  of  the  bump- 
tious variety,  will  supervise  the  whole  universe, 
while  her  husband,  children,  and  household  drift, 
growl,  and  suffer.  One  man  will  step  aboard  a 
yacht,  and  his  crew  and  officers  will  pull  and  haul 
and  quarrel  and  leave ;  while  another,  with  the 
same  men,  will  have  no  trouble.  The  writer  has 
no  prescription  to  offer  for  the  curing  of  fussy 
wives  or  bad  masters.  It  is  not  to  be  expected 
that  even  the  Almighty  will  create  a  man  who 
shall  combine  the  attributes  of  Oliver  Cromwell 
and  Heinrich  Heine.  But  in  this  matter  of  the 
management  of  the  stable  there  are  a  few  rules 
worth  keeping  in  mind. 

Don't  use  your  influence  till  you  get  it! 

Don't  worry  yourself  or  others  about  trifles ! 


232  Driving 

In  the  vital  matters  of  honesty,  sobriety,  care- 
fulness, neatness,  be  insistent  and  positive. 

Don't  put  on  airs  about  things  of  which  you 
know  less  than  your  coachman. 

Don't  show  your  damned  authority  —  as  the 
Irishman  with  his  pig  —  just  for  the  pleasure  of 
showing  it ! 

Horses,  no  doubt,  lived  upon  grasses  and  the 
like  when  they  cared  for  themselves.  Horses 
even  now  can  do  a  certain  amount  of  slow  work 
upon  hay  alone,  but  to  do  this  a  large  quantity  is 
needed,  say  from  eighteen  pounds  to  twenty 
pounds.  But  by  a  mixture  of  food  a  horse  can 
be  made  to  do  more  and  faster  and  more  ex- 
hausting work. 

Hay  —  good  hay — is  short,  fine,  agreeable  to 
smell  and  taste,  hard  and  crisp,  and  is  generally 
mixed  with  clover,  and  the  best  hay  is  one  year 
old  —  is  the  basis  of  all  feeding.  An  average 
allowance  is  about  twelve  pounds  a  day,  with 
the  larger  quantity  given  at  night.  A  little  hay 
also  at  noon  helps  digestion.  If  a  horse  is 
wanted  for  fast  work,  eight  pounds  of  hay  is 
enough.  A  horse  does  his  work  more  comfort- 
ably to  himself  if  his  stomach  is  somewhat  empty 
rather  than  distended  with  hay.  The  feeding 
of  the  hay  should  be  regulated  so  that  the  animal 
is  not  given  his  hay  just  before  going  to  work, 
but  at  the  meal  after  he  comes  in.     Many  coach- 


Feeding  and  Stable  Management       233 

men  are  great  believers  in  chopped  hay  or  chaff. 
There  is  not  much  saving  in  feeding  hay  in  this 
way  —  none  at  all  if  it  is  bought  already  in  the 
form  of  chaff — although  a  little  chaff  mixed  with 
the  other  food  requires  more  time  in  mastication 
and  hence  is  better  for  digestion.  Hay  should  be 
fed  from  the  bottom  of  the  stall. 

Oats — good  oats  are  heavy,  thin-skinned, 
clean,  hard  and  sweet,  and  without  musty  smell. 
Good  oats  will  weigh  from  42  to  45  pounds  to 
the  bushel ;  fair  oats,  38  to  40  pounds.  Horses 
in  average  work  should  have  from  eight  to  ten 
quarts  of  oats  a  day.  Where  the  work  of  the 
horses  is  severe,  they  should  have  as  much 
as  they  want.  The  cavalry  allowance  is 
ten  quarts  a  day,  which  is  a  good  medium 
allowance.  The  rations  of  oats  should  be  in- 
creased or  decreased  according  to  the  amount  of 
work  the  horse  is  doing.  Oats  may  be  boiled  or 
steamed,  may  be  flavored  with  ginger  or  a  little 
"  black  jack  "  molasses,  or  even  mixed  with  a  few 
slices  of  apples  for  nervous  or  bad  feeders.  If  a 
horse  gobbles  his  feed,  it  is  well  to  sprinkle  his 
oats  with  dry  bran,  or  to  mix  them  with  chaff. 

Barley,  beans,  peas,  are  not  much  used  in  pri- 
vate stables,  though  beans  for  a  horse  in  hard 
work  or  for  fattening  are  valuable.  A  quart  of 
crushed  beans  mixed  with  the  other  food  at  night 
is  recommended.     They  should  be  at  least  a  year 


2  34  Driving 

old,  weigh  from  60  to  64  pounds  to  the  bushel, 
and  be  hard,  plump,  and  sweet. 

Corn  is  used  largely  in  the  West  for  horses,  but 
seldom  in  the  East,  in  private  stables.  It  is  a 
strong,  fattening  food,  and,  served  to  the  horses 
on  the  ear,  is  good  for  teeth  and  gums,  and  makes 
them  eat  slowly.  It  should  not  be  fed  in  quan- 
tity, but  as  a  change,  or  a  cob  or  two  at  a  time 
with  other  food. 

Bran  —  should  be  dry,  sweet-tasting,  free  from 
mould  —  is  not  exactly  an  article  of  food.  It  may 
be  fed  with  other  feed,  but  is  usually  given  once 
or  twice  a  week  in  the  form  of  a  mash,  preferably 
the  night  before  a  day  of  light  work  or  no  work 
at  all. 

Linseed  is  an  aperient,  like  bran,  and  is  used 
to  moisten  food  that  is  too  constipating,  and  is 
recommended  strongly  by  some  authorities  in  the 
form  of  a  mash  mixed  with  bran  or  as  a  jelly  in 
the  case  of  horses  out  of  condition  and  needing  a 
palatable  stimulant.  It  is  also  conducive  to 
glossiness  of  coat  and  healthiness  of  skin,  but 
unless  used  sparingly  affects  the  wind. 

Apples,  boiled  potatoes,  carrots,  black  molasses, 
clover,  or  other  fresh  forage  may  all  be  used 
as  a  change  of  diet.  This  last  should  be  given 
sparingly  at  first,  for  it  is  often  the  cause  of 
serious  trouble  when  given  in  quantity  all  at  once. 

Carrots  are  altogether  the  best   substitute  for 


Feeding  and  Stable  Management       235 

fresh  grass.  They  can  be  given  without  harm, 
occasionally,  the  year  round,  either  alone  or 
mixed  with  other  food  —  always  cut  up  length- 
wise, otherwise   the  horse   may  choke  on   them. 

Remember,  always,  the  smallness  of  the  horse's 
stomach  in  feeding  him.  When  left  to  himself, 
he  will  graze  all  day  long,  eating,  however,  but 
little  at  a  time.  When  he  comes  in  tired,  give 
him  a  little  food,  a  mash  or  gruel,  or,  if  he  is  to 
have  a  hard  day,  carry  a  little  oatmeal  and  a 
botde  of  Bass  for  his  luncheon.  If  you  are 
caught  far  from  home  with  a  tired  horse,  almost 
any  house  can  furnish  oatmeal,  warm  water,  and, 
if  procurable,  a  small  amount  of  stimulant  added, 
and  this,  with  a  good  rubbing  down,  will  make 
another  horse  of  your  tired  beast. 

Though  the  stomach  of  the  horse  is  small, 
his  water  capacity  is  large.  The  water  he  drinks 
does  not  remain  in  the  stomach,  but  passes 
directly  through  it,  and  the  small  intestines  to 
the  caecum  (one  of  the  large  intestines).  Except 
where  a  horse  is  ill,  overheated,  or  overtired, 
he  may  be  allowed  to  drink  as  much  as  he  will. 
Horses  should  always,  too,  be  watered  before  they 
are  fed,  for  reasons  obvious  from  what  has  been 
said  of  the  horse's  stomach.  Horses  should  be 
watered  the  last  thing  at  night,  say  10  p.m.  No 
horse  should  be  tortured  by  being  kept  without 
water  from  7  p.m.  till  6  a.m.      This  is  cruelty  and 


236  Driving 

soon  tells  on  the  horse  to  his  great  and  very 
perceptible  disadvantage.  Even  horses  coming 
in  from  work  in  warm  weather  may  have  a  small 
quantity,  but  only  a  small  quantity,  of  water  while 
they  are  being  cooled  out  and  rubbed  down.  No 
overheated,  tired  horse  should  be  allowed  to  fill 
himself  up  with  cold  water ;  neither,  on  the 
other  hand,  should  he  be  kept  in  a  raging  thirst 
indefinitely. 

Sali  is  so  necessary  a  part  of  the  horse's  diet 
that  it  is  best  to  have  a  piece  of  rock  salt  weigh- 
ing two  or  three  pounds  always  in  his  manger, 
rather  than  to  leave  it  to  his  feeders  to  give  him 
so  much  at  each  meal,  which  often  results  in  an 
irregular  supp]}^ 

Express  companies  and  other  large  owners 
and  users  of  horses  have  been  experimenting 
with  molasses  as  a  food.  It  has  been  used,  too, 
in  both  the  French  and  German  armies.  One 
quart  of  molasses,  three  quarts  of  water,  one 
and  one-half  pounds  of  corn  meal,  one  and  one- 
half  pounds  of  bran,  and  six  pounds  of  cut  hay, 
is  the  proper  mixture  for  one  horse,  and  should 
be  fed  morning  and  evening,  with  some  dry  oats 
at  noon.  This  is,  of  course,  very  much  cheaper 
than  the  usual  methods  of  feeding,  and  in  a  num- 
ber of  cases  has  proved  successful.  The  writer 
has  seen  horses  fed  upon  this  diet ;  they  did  the 
slow  and  heavy  work  in  large  brewers'  wagons, 


Feeding  and  Stable  Management       237 

and  looked  sleek  and  well,  and  were  said  to  do 
their  work  as  well  if  not  better  than  on  the  old 
system  of  feeding.  It  is  difficult  to  use  molasses 
in  private  stables,  particularly  in  summer,  when 
it  attracts  flies  and  sours  when  left  in  the 
manger,  but  it  is  a  good  adjunct  to  the  bill  of 
fare  in  any  stable,  and  anything  that  gives  vari- 
ety and  is  wholesome  is  valuable  as  a  food. 


Table. - 


Nutritive  Value  of  Certain  Articles  of  Diet 
IN  100  Parts 


articles 

Water 

Albumi- 
nates 

Fats 

Carbo- 
hydrates 

Cellu- 
lose 

Salts 

Grass,  before  blossom 

75.0 

3-0 

0.8 

12.9 

7.0 

2.0 

Grass,  after  blossom  . 

69.0 

2.5 

0.7 

15.0 

II. 5 

2.0 

Meadow  hay    .     .     . 

14-3 

8.2 

2.0 

41-3 

30.0 

6.2 

Oats       .     . 

14-3 

12.0 

6.0 

60.9 

10.3 

3-0 

Barley    .     . 

14-3 

9-5 

2.5 

66.6 

7.0 

2.6 

Maize,  Indian 

12.9 

9-23 

1.59 

68.0 

5.0 

1.66 

Peas .     .     . 

14-3 

22.4 

2.5 

52.3 

9.2 

2-5 

Beans     .     . 

14.5 

25.5 

2.0 

45-5 

II.5 

3-5 

Rice  .     .     . 

14.6 

7-5 

0.5 

76.5 

0.9 

0.5 

Linseed 

11.8 

21.7 

37-0 

17-5 

8.0 

4.0 

Bran       .     . 

131 

14.0 

3-8 

50.0 

17.8 

i;-! 

Carrots  .     . 

85.0 

1-5 

0.2 

10.8 

1-7 

I.O 

Linseed  cake 

12.4 

27.3 

12.8 

34-5 

6.5 

6.1 

Represent 

Mainte- 

Waste- 

Woody- 

muscle- 

nance  of 

repairing 

fibre 

forming 

animal 

ingredi- 

ingredi- 

ingredi- 

heat 

ents 

ents, 

ents 

stimulate 
digestion 
and   sepa- 

rate richer 

particles 

of  food 

238 


Driving 


Table.  —  Common  Weights  and  Measures 


I  quart  oats  =  I  pound 

I  quartern  oats         =  2  pounds 
I  peck  oats  =  8  pounds 

I  bag  oats  =  65  pounds 

(i  lb.  for  the  weight  of  bag) 


2  pints  oats 
2  quarts  oats 
8  quarts  oats 
4  pecks  oats 
2  bushels  oats 


=  I  quart 
=  I  quartern 
=  I  peck 
=  I  bushel 
=  I  bag 


I  ton  hay  =  2000  pounds 

I  bale  hay  =  300  pounds  (varies 

50  pounds) 
I  ton  loose  hay  occupies  about 

500  cubic  feet 
I  ton  baled  hay  occupies  space 

of  about  10  cubic  yards 
I  ton  straw  =  2000  pounds 
I  bale  straw  =  250  pounds  (varies 

50  pounds) 
I  ton  loose  straw  occupies  space 

of  about  600  cubic  feet 
I  ton  baled  straw  occupies  space 

of  about  1 2  cubic  yards 


CHAPTER   VII 

FIRST   AID   TO   THE   INJURED 

It  is  a  dangerous  thing  for  owners  to  doctor 
their  own  horses,  unless  they  are  practically  vet- 
erinarians by  experience,  or  profession.  It  is 
even  more  dangerous  to  leave  such  matters  to 
the  man  in  the  stable.  An  omniscient  coach- 
man can  do  more  harm  to  his  cattle  than  all 
other  evil  surroundings  combined.  To  treat  a 
horse  for  a  wrongly  diagnosed  malady,  with  half- 
understood  remedies,  is  the  height  of  folly  and 
the  acme  of  cruelty. 

On  the  other  hand,  there  are  certain  simple 
remedies  and  certain  familiar  maladies,  of  which 
the  horse-owner  ought  to  know  something  for  his 
own,  and  his  horse's  protection. 

The  range  of  pulse  per  minute  in  a  healthy 
adult  horse  is  from  thirty-four  to  thirty-eight. 
In  disease  the  range  is  from  as  low  as  twenty 
to  as  high  as  one  hundred  and  twenty.  The  fore 
and  middle  finger  should  be  placed  transversely 
on  the  artery  inside  of  the  jaw,  near  the  jowl,  to 
feel  the  pulse.  Do  this  often  when  your  horses 
are  in  health,  and  thus  accustom  yourself  to  find 
239 


240  Driving 

the  pulse  instantly  and  to  note  its  pulsations 
accurately  in  time  of  need. 

The  average  temperature  of  the  horse  is 
1 00°  F.,  a  third  more  or  less.  The  tempera- 
ture of  the  horse  is  taken  by  the  insertion  of 
a  clinical  thermometer  in  the  rectum,  where 
it  should  remain  five  minutes.  Horses  register- 
ing a  temperature  as  high  as  106°  have  recov- 
ered, but  above  this  death  generally  ensues. 
Nursing,  in  cases  where  the  ordinary  ailments 
are  concerned,  is  better  than  blistering  and  fir- 
ing, which  are  more  spectacular  and  to  the  half- 
ignorant  more  popular. 

Good  laxative  foods  are  green  grass,  green 
wheat,  oats,  or  barley,  carrots,  parsnips,  bran 
mash,  linseed  tea,  hay  tea,  and  linseed  oil. 

A  gallon  of  gruel  may  be  made  from  a  pound 
of  meal  put  into  cold  water,  placed  on  the  fire 
and  stirred  till  boiling,  and  then  allowed  to 
simmer  till  the  water  is  thick. 

A  draji  mask  should  be  made  in  a  clean  bucket ; 
three  pounds  of  bran,  one  ounce  of  salt,  two  pints 
and  a  half  of  boiling  water,  covered  and  allowed 
to  stand  twenty  minutes  or  so  till  it  is  cooked. 

A  Bran  and  Linseed  Mash.  —  Boil  one  pound 
of  linseed  slowly  for  two  hours  or  more,  add  two 
pounds  of  bran,  one  ounce  of  salt;  the  whole  to 
be  stirred  up  and  allowed  to  steam.  The  thicker 
the  mash,  the  better. 


First  Aid  to  the  Injured  241 

Linseed  Tea.  —  Boil  one  pound  of  linseed  in 
two  gallons  of  water  until  the  grains  are  soft. 

Hay  Tea.  —  Fill  a  clean  bucket  with  clean  hay, 
then  pour  on  as  much  boiling  water  as  the  bucket 
will  hold,  then  cover  and  allow  to  stand  till  cool, 
when  the  liquid  may  be  strained  off  and  used. 

Linseed  oil,  from  a  quarter  to  half  a  pint  daily 
may  be  mixed  with  the  other  food,  keeps  the 
bowels  and  skin  in  good  condition;  but  no  artifi- 
cial stimulant  as  food  should  be  used  constantly. 

In  weakening  diseases  or  low  fever,  or  in  cases 
of  severe  exhaustion,  a  quart  of  ale  or  porter,  or  a 
pint  of  port  or  sherry,  may  be  given  mixed  with 
the  mash.  Oatmeal  and  ale  are  easy  to  carry, 
and  a  palatable  mash  can  be  made  quickly  of  these 
with  a  little  warm  water  almost  anywhere,  and 
nothing  will  help  out  a  tired  horse  more. 

Common  cold  is  an  inflammation  of  the  mucous 
membrane  lining  the  nostrils  and  air  passages. 
Symptoms  are  loss  of  appetite,  staring  coat,  ten- 
dency to  sweat  easily,  and  discharge  from  the 
nostrils.  Treatment :  removal  to  loose  box,  plenty 
of  fresh  air,  well  blanketed  if  cold  weather,  band- 
ages for  the  legs,  laxative  diet,  green  food,  warm 
mashes  instead  of  oats,  and  plenty  of  water.  If 
the  irritation  and  cough  continue  and  the  running 
at  the  nose  is  bad,  the  head  may  be  steamed  by 
holding  it  over  a  pail  of  hot  water.  If  the  horse 
becomes  and  continues  feverish,  a  dose  of  one  to 


242  Driving 

two  drams  of  nitrate  of  potash  may  be  given  daily 
for  two  or  three  days.  Where  the  cold  is  accom- 
panied by  sore  throat  and  difficulty  of  swallowing, 
give  nitrate  of  potassium,  one  dram  to  half  a 
bucket  of  water  three  times  a  day.  A  good  lini- 
ment to  use  on  the  throat  and  to  be  well  rubbed  in 
is  mustard  and  water  rubbed  on  and  allowed  to 
remain  half  an  hour  and  then  washed  off,  or  two 
parts  linseed  oil,  one  part  turpentine,  and  one  part 
solution  of  ammonia. 

Colic  is  caused  by  bad  food,  change  of  diet, 
sudden  exposure.  The  horse  gives  evidence  of 
spasmodic  pain,  turns  his  head  toward  his  flank, 
bites  and  kicks,  and  even  rolls.  As  an  immediate 
remedy,  give  a  pint  of  gruel  with  two  ounces  spirit 
of  nitrous  ether,  one  ounce  tincture  of  opium,  and 
half  an  ounce  of  aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia. 
There  should  be  relief  within  the  hour;  if  not, 
repeat  the  dose,  and  use  oil  and  warm  water  as 
an  injection. 

Diarrhcea,  in  the  form  of  scouring,  may  be  a 
natural  effort  to  get  rid  of  some  obnoxious  sub- 
stance. Horses  that  are  not  well  "  ribbed  up" 
or  of  a  nervous  temperament  are  prone  to  it. 
Feed  dry  food  after  giving  a  laxative  of  half  a 
pint  of  raw  linseed  oil.  Give  an  infusion  of 
gentian,  one  ounce,  and  one  to  two  ounces  tincture 
of  opium. 

Worms.  —  Several  kinds  of   worms  are  found 


First  Aid  to  the  Injured  243 

in  the  horse's  intestines,  but  the  most  common 
is  the  bony  white  worm  tapering  at  both  ends. 
The  horse  loses  condition  in  spite  of  a  voracious 
appetite.  After  a  fast  of  twelve  hours,  give  a 
dose  of  two  ounces  of  turpentine  in  a  pint  of 
linseed  oil  with  half  an  ounce  of  tincture  of 
opium.  Injections  of  a  weak  solution  of  salt 
serve  to  clear  away  the  smaller  worms  that 
inhabit  the  rectum.  Change  of  food  and  salt 
are  good. 

Irregular  Teeth.  —  The  molars  sometimes  grow 
into  sharp  edges.  The  horse  feeds  badly,  "  hogs  " 
on  one  side  of  his  mouth  in  driving,  and  shows 
sometimes  signs  of  inflammation  in  the  mouth. 
The  remedy  is  the  simple  one  of  having  the  teeth 
filed  down  smooth  and  even. 

Scratches.  —  A  very  common  condition  of  the 
skin  in  the  hollow  of  the  heel,  sometimes  called 
"  cracked  heels."  It  is  caused  by  exposure  to  wet, 
cold,  and  dirt.  The  skin  is  inflamed  and  diy  and 
a  watery  discharge  exudes.  Keep  the  parts  dry 
and  clean,  wash  with  warm  water  and  Ivory  soap. 
Dust  with  powdered  alum  three  times  a  day.  Or 
apply  a  dressing  composed  of  one  part  of  carbolic 
acid  to  twenty  of  oil  or  glycerine  and  keep  there 
with  a  soft  bandage  around  the  pastern  and  heel. 

Wounds  and  bruises,  whether  the  skin  is 
broken  or  not,  should  be  carefully  bathed  in  warm 
water,  three  parts  of  carbolic  acid  to  one  hundred 


244  Driving 

of  water.  Warm  linseed  poultices  may  then  be 
applied.  In  all  serious  cases  of  this  kind  little 
more  can  be  done  than  to  relieve  the  animal  till 
the  veterinarian  comes.  In  minor  casualties,  as 
cases  of  sprained  tendons,  bruises,  and  the  like,  a 
cooling  antiseptic  wash  is:  four  ounces  of  witch- 
hazel,  two  ounces  of  spirits  of  camphor,  two 
ounces  of  tincture  of  opium  mixed  in  an  equal 
amount  of  water. 

Splints.  —  Probably  eighty  per  cent  of  horses 
have  splints  and  not  over  five  per  cent  remain 
lame  from  them.  A  splint  is  an  enlargement  or 
horny  excrescence  of  a  part  of  the  shank  bone. 
It  is  more  common  in  young  than  old  horses. 
Splints  caused  by  striking  in  action,  on  the  con- 
trary, are  ample  cause  for  judging  a  horse  un- 
sound. 

When  a  splint  begins  forming,  shave  off  the 
hair  about  it  and  rub  in  an  ointment  of  biniodide 
of  mercury  for  three  days,  then  apply  a  strong 
blister.  The  best  blister  is  composed  of  one 
ounce  powdered  Spanish  flies,  one  ounce  powdered 
resin,  four  ounces  of  lard.  Mix  the  lard  and  resin, 
and  then  add  the  Spanish  flies.  After  blistering 
a  horse,  his  head  must  be  tied  up  for  forty-eight 
hours  at  least,  to  prevent  his  getting  at  the  irri- 
tated part. 

Shoe  boils  are  usually  caused  by  the  pressure 
of  the  shoe  when  the  horse  lies  down.     The  boil 


PLATE   XVI.  — SKELETON    OF   THE    HORSE 


Rectunv 


PLATE   XVIL  — INTERNAL   PARTS   OF   THE   HORSE 


Fir^t  Aid  to  the  Injured 


should  be  opened  and  drained  and   a  three  per 

cent   solution   of   zinc   sulphate   injected.      The 

must  then  wear  a  shoe-boil  boot  at  night. 

'7  in  tJic  Frof. —  Remove  ^he  nail  and  pare 

the  wound      skeleton  of  the  horse    sible,  disin- 


fe- 

^-  ,_..;  K 

n  thirty, 

tV 

Eye  cavity 

21. 

Great  trochanter      ]'    three 

2. 

Face  bones 

22. 

Thighbone  ..K^um  and  a 

3. 

Incisor  teeth 

23. 

Ischium       ,.,,.,]  ^-eniedy 

Radius,  or  forearm  bone        , 
Carpal,  or  knee  bones 

A. 

Molar  teeth 

24. 

5. 

Lower  jaw 

25. 

6. 

First  vertebra  of  neck 

26. 

Trapezium 

Cannon  bones        '    ^r^cHy 

7. 

Second  vertebra  of  neck 

27. 

8. 

Cervical  vertebrae 

28. 

Pastern  bones                      \ 

9. 

Spinal  processes  of  back 

29. 

Sesamoid  bone            .;.i/.el 

10. 

Dorsal  and  lumbar  vertebrae 

30. 

Small  pastern  bone-^^^^jj.^ 

J^- 

Sacrum 

31. 

Upper  end  of  leg  bone 

Stifle  joint 

Leg  bone,  or  tibia          -^i'-d 

12. 

Tail  bones 

32. 

P.i. 

Shoulder  blade 

33. 

■■44^  Hollow  of  shoulder  blade 

15.  Upper  end  of  arm  bone 

16.  Arm  bone,  or,  huijf>erus  . 


34.  Point  of  hock        i  S:     Wash 

35.  Hock  joint  '' 

36.  Head  of  small  metatarsal  bone 


leansed 
.     Hot 


17..  Elbow  bone^f  arnica  mixed  %  ^^""°"°^"^^^^^T";!5fcr. 
'^:''^'         ^"^.r  should  b|^rg°fV 

19.  Haunch  ^?.  Fetlock 

20.-  Haunch  bone     ''  '^^^^^  ^  SOlll^r.p^^^„^^  ^^  ^^.j,g 

fo;'  :  good^jai^^lJic  wojnd  should  be 

di',  'jmed  alum  or  with  alum  and  bo- 

racic  acid  in  equal  parts  dissolved  in  water. 

Laminitis  or  Foot  Founders. —  Remove  me 
shoes,  place  the  feet  in  hot  water  for  an  hour, 
poultice  twice  a  day  for  four  or  five  days.    As  the 


anod  rigirt  1 

muicfbst 

3nod  rmB3Tol  io  .auibfiSl 

zsnod  33n?l  lo  .Isqi^O 

muisa 

Esnod  nonnsO  .VS 


rillBt  io2i: 
U33}  i£foI 

jfoan  \o  Bidstiav  fanoosS 


PLATE   XVI.  — SKELETON   OF   THE    H0H3E„ 


snod  biomseaS  .9S 

snod  maJasq  IlsmS  .06 

©nod  §91  \q  bna  isqqU  AC 

Bidh  10  ,3nbd  ^aJ  .CC 

anod  [B2-<^^J9m  Ilfima  Jo  b^aH  .d6 
anod  (£2iBtB>6m  lo  non~r"     "■" 
anod  nf; 

slYiiz  10  ,fin 


TioBd  Jo  aaaaaooiq  [sniqS  .9 

96idaJiav  ifidmi/I  bns  IbzioQ  .01 

mutOBZ  .  1 1 

aanod  UbT  .Sf 

abfild  labluoda  .£( 

(,i    abfild  labluodz  io  wolIoH  .l>f 

■  ""••■'anod  m-ffi  io  bna  laqqU  .51 

2uiamud  no  .anod  mxA-''.<arf"'T^ 


^:;u-^ 


PARTS  OF   THE   HORSE 


First  Aid  to  the  Injured  245 

should  be  opened  and  drained  and  a  three  per 
cent  solution  of  zinc  sulphate  injected.  The 
horse  must  then  wear  a  shoe-boil  boot  at  night. 

Nail  in  the  Foot.  —  Remove  the  nail  and  pare 
the  wound  as  near  the  bottom  as  possible,  disin- 
fect with  a  solution  of  carbolic  acid,  one  in  thirty, 
then  linseed  poultice  the  foot  for  two  or  three 
days  and  let  the  foot  be  shod  with  oakum  and  a 
leather  sole  till  healed.  An  old-fashioned  remedy 
is  to  apply  a  piece  of  salt  pork,  flesh  side  in,  and 
bandage  it  on  the  part. 

Chafing,  Collar,  and  Saddle  Galls.  —  Properly 
fitting  harness  and  saddles  is  the  preventive.  A 
mild  astringent  wash,  say  four  ounces  witch-hazel, 
two  ounces  spirits  of  camphor,  two  ounces  tincture 
of  opium,  will  serve,  and  the  part  to  be  without 
pressure  or  rubbing  till  healed.  For  inflamed 
legs  or  galled  shoulders  another  excellent  wash 
is :  one  ounce  of  sal  ammoniac,  seven  ounces  of 
vinegar,  two  ounces  of  spirits  of  wine,  two  drams 
of  tincture  of  arnica  mixed  in  half  a  pint  of  water. 

Broken  knees  should  be  thoroughly  cleansed 
and  disinfected  with  a  solution  of  carbolic.  Hot 
fomentations  are  good,  and  the  wound  should  be 
dressed  with  burned  alum  or  with  alum  and  bo- 
racic  acid  in  equal  parts  dissolved  in  water. 

Laminitis  or  Foot  Founders.  —  Remove  the 
shoes,  place  the  feet  in  hot  water  for  an  hour, 
poultice  twice  a  day  for  four  or  five  days.    As  the 


246  Driving 

horse  is  without  exercise,  give  him  a  gentle  pur- 
gative, half  to  a  quart  of  linseed  oil,  two  drams  of 
ginger,  one  dram  nux  vomica  as  a  drench,  then 
four  ounces  of  nitrate  of  potash  and  four  drams 
gentian,  known  as  founder  powder,  daily. 

Chills,  after  violent  exertion  when  the  horse  is 
unfit  for  work,  or  from  undue  exposure.  Clothe 
warmly,  rub  ears  and  legs,  and  give  stimulants, 
one  and  one-half  ounce  spirits  of  nitrous  ether, 
one-half  ounce  aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia  to  one 
pint  of  water,  is  a  valuable  remedy  in  any  case  of 
prostration. 

Straiiied  or  bruised  tendons,  —  first  hot  fomen- 
tations, then  a  cooling  lotion,  such  as  vinegar  and 
water;  or  two  ounces  witch-hazel,  two  ounces  spirits 
of  camphor,  two  ounces  laudanum  ;  or  four  ounces 
acetate  of  ammonia,  four  ounces  spirits  of  wine, 
eight  ounces  water. 

Lameness  had  best  be  left  for  diagnosis  to  the 
expert,  unless  the  lameness  is  the  result  of  injury 
and  the  seat  of  the  trouble  plainly  visible.  Firing 
and  blistering  should  be  a  last  resort. 

Do  not  expect  too  much  of  the  veterinary; 
except  in  simple  cases  their  task  is  often  a  blind 
one.  The  best  way  to  save  trouble  is  to  begin 
at  the  beginning,  by  studying  the  horse,  the 
stable,  the  food,  and  the  care  of  the  horses  your- 
self ;  and  this  elementary  knowledge,  with  careful 
handling  when  the  horses  are  in  harness  or  under 


First  Aid  to  the  Injured  247 

saddle,  make  the  best  "  ball,"  "  drench,"  "  lotion," 
or  "  fomentation  "  known. 

It  is  not  intended  in  this  chapter  to  suggest 
more  than  can  be  understood  and  carried  out  by 
an  intelligent  man,  with  a  few  simple  and  non- 
dangerous  remedies. 

Rice-water  gruel,  made  thick,  is  a  soothing  drink, 
and  useful  in  continued  scouring  or  diarrhoea. 

Alcohol  is  to  be  rubbed  into  the  skin  of  horses 
who  are  apt  to  chafe  easily  under  harness  or 
saddle.     It  hardens  the  skin. 

Vinegar  and  water  is  a  cooling  lotion. 

Fomentation  means  the  continued  application 
of  hot  cloths  wrung  out  to  the  injured  part. 

Purgative,  a  popular  purgative  is  composed  of 
eight  parts  of  aloes,  two  parts  of  glycerine,  one 
part  powdered  ginger,  well-mixed  and  given  in  a 
dose  of  from  six  to  eight  drams. 

Linseed  oil  is  also  a  purgative  and  less  irri- 
tating than  aloes ;  the  dose  is  from  ten  to  thirty 
ounces. 

Stimulant,  one  ounce  aromatic  spirits  of  ammo- 
nia, one  ounce  tincture  of  gentian,  one  pint  of 
water.     Useful  in  all  cases  of  severe  prostration. 

Tonics. — The  mineral  tonics  had  best  be  left  to 
the  veterinary.  A  quart  of  good  ale  warmed  and 
two  drams  of  grated  ginger  is  a  simple  cordial 
drench.  A  safe  vegetable  tonic  is  two  ounces  of 
tincture  of  gentian  in  a  pint  of  water.     A  good 


248  Driving 

tonic  powder  is :  two  drams  of  gentian,  two  drams 
of  ginger,  one-half  dram  of  fenugreek. 

For  acidity  of  the  stomach,  and  to  prevent  ten- 
dency to  colic,  a  tablespoonful  of  bicarbonate  of 
soda,  powdered  gentian,  powdered  ginger,  mixed 
in  equal  parts  and  sprinkled  over  the  feed,  is 
harmless  and  a  valuable  minor  tonic. 

To  cool  a  horse  quickly  and  effectively,  dash 
water  between  the  fore  legs,  between  the  hind 
legs,  over  the  head,  and  down  the  back  or  spine. 
An  overheated,  almost  prostrated,  horse  may 
often  be  saved  serious  if  not  fatal  trouble  in 
our  hot  climate  by  a  bath  of  this  kind.  In  pri- 
vate stables,  water  is  seldom  used,  except  on  the 
feet,  to  wash  out  the  mouth,  eyes,  sheath,  and 
anus,  and  on  the  legs  of  white  or  gray  horses. 
But  this  should  not  be  taken  as  the  article  of  a 
creed.  A  bath,  or  shampoo,  all  over  does  no 
horse  harm,  and  all  horses  good,  in  our  hot 
climate,  if  precautions  are  taken  to  dry  them 
thoroughly  and  close  the  pores  if  necessary  by 
a  rub-down  with  alcohol.  In  cases  of  actual  sun- 
stroke, souse  the  horse  well,  all  over  with  water, 
if  possible  from  a  hose,  and  an  easily  prepared 
remedy  is :  an  ounce  of  aromatic  spirits  of  ammo- 
nia, two  ounces  of  whiskey  in  half  a  pint  of  water 
—  give  this  every  hour,  till  the  horse  is  relieved. 

Flexible  collodion  is  a  valuable  remedy  in  any 
stable.     In  case  of   wounds  or  cuts  that  do  not 


First  Aid  to  the  Injured  249 

need  sewing,  shave  the  hair  about  the  cut,  cleanse 
carefully,  and  apply  the  collodion  with  a  camel's- 
hair  brush ;  this  will  keep  the  edges  together, 
and  in  minor  wounds  no  other  remedy  is 
necessary. 

Iodoform  is  one  of  the  very  best  antiseptics 
for  either  man  or  beast,  and  may  be  dusted 
on  wounds;  or  two  parts  of  iodoform  and  eight 
parts  of  cosmoline  make  an  ointment  that  may 
be  a  more  convenient  way  of  applying  it. 

The  well-known  "white  lotion"  for  bruises, 
sprains,  inflammation,  sore  backs,  shoulders,  or 
any  part  of  the  animal  rubbed  by  the  harness 
or  saddle,  or  by  accident  is :  one  ounce  acetate  of 
lead,  one  ounce  sulphate  of  zinc  mixed  in  a  quart 
of  water,  to  be  used  as  a  lotion.  Nitrate  o/potas- 
siujn  is  useful  when  you  wish  to  promote  the  ac- 
tion of  the  skin  and  kidneys  or  to  reduce  fever. 
It  should  be  given  dissolved  in  the  drinking-water 
in  doses  of  from  two  drams  to  an  ounce  three 
times  a  day.  It  is  the  most  valuable  remedy 
known  in  cases  of  founder,  and  may  be  given  in 
doses  of  from  two  to  three  ounces  three  times  a 
day,  and  may  be  continued  without  danger  for  two 
or  three  days. 

Salicylic  acid  is  another  remedy,  equally  good 
for  man  or  beast,  as  an  antiseptic  to  be  dusted 
upon  wounds  and  indolent  sores,  proud  flesh :  for 
rheumatism,  one  dram  of  the  salicylic  acid  with 


250 


Driving 


two  drams  of  bicarbonate  of  soda,  given  twice  a 
day,  is  as  good  as  anything. 

But  when  all  is  said  and  done  on  this  subject, 
it  must  be  repeated  again  and  again  that,  regu- 
larity as  to  time,  and  variety  as  to  fodder  in  feed- 
ing, plenty  of  water,  regular  exercise,  peace  and 
quiet  during  rest  hours,  a  dry  stable,  thorough 
grooming,  the  eye  of  the  master,  and  the  interest 
of  the  man  in  the  stable,  —  these  taken  daily  in 
large  doses  make  the  best  prescription  in  the 
world  for  the  continued  health  and  usefulness  of 
your  horses. 

TABLES 

1  dram    =  \  ounce  =  teaspoonfiil 

2  drams  =  \  ounce  =  dessertspoonful 

3  drams  =  f  ounce  =  one  teaspoonful  and  one  dessertspoonful 

4  drams  =  ^  ounce  =  two  dessertspoonfuls 
8  drams  =  i  ounce  =  four  dessertspoonfuls 
2  ounces  =  wineglassfiil 

4  ounces  =  teacupful 


Doses  according  to  Age 


For  a  yearling  . 
For  a  two-year-old 
For  a  three-year-old 
For  a  four-year-old 
For  a  five-year-old 


one-third  of  adult  dose 
one-half  of  adult  dose 
two-thirds  of  adult  dose 
three-fourths  of  adult  dose 
full  dose,  or  adult  dose 


CHAPTER   VIII 

SHOEING 

The  shoeing  of  horses  was  not  known  to  the 
earliest  users  of  horses.  It  is  true  the  Romans 
used  a  sort  of  leather  sock,  with  an  iron  plate 
beneath,  and  the  extravagant  Poppaea,  the  wife  of 
Nero,  had  gold  plates  on  her  favorite  horses,  as 
wives  of  similar  traditions  to-day,  have  silver 
bath-tubs  and  satin  sheets. 

When  the  monument  to  Childeric,  the  father  of 
Clovis,  the  founder  of  the  French  monarchy,  was 
discovered  in  1653,  a  horseshoe  was  found  therein. 
It  was  the  custom  then,  as  at  one  time  among  our 
own  Indians,  to  bury  the  horse  and  his  owner  to- 
gether. 

Polydore  Vergil  writes,  "  Hos  quoque  Pele- 
thronios  Thessaliae  primos  equorum  ungulas 
munire  ferreis  soleis  coepisse  ferunt." 

As  we  have  related  in  another  chapter,  William 
the  Conqueror  shod  his  horses. 

The  horse's  foot  is  so  apparently  the  most  im- 
portant part  of  him  to  his  owner,  that  every  horse 
owner  should  at  least  know  the  elementary  first 
principles  of  the  formation  and  shoeing  of  the 
251 


252  Driving 

foot  and  should  always  bear  in  mind,  "  no  foot 
no  horse."  The  foot  is  a  sensitive  structure,  with 
two  bones  and  part  of  the  third,  viz.  the  coffin- 
bone,  navicular  or  shuttle  bone,  and  the  lower  or 
smaller  pastern  bone  enclosed  in  a  horny  case. 
This  case  is  deepest  in  front  where  it  is  called  the 
toe,  and  shallower  at  the  sides  which  are  called 
the  quarters,  and  narrowest  behind  where  it  is 
called  the  heel.  This  outer  case  is  fibrous,  the 
fibres  running  from  above  to  below  as  they  grow 
from  where  the  skin  terminates,  and  consists  of 
the  outer  case  or  wall  and  the  bars,  which  are  the 
continuation  of  the  crust  under  the  foot,  and  be- 
tween the  triangle  of  which  lies  the  frog.  (Plate 
XIX.) 

The  horse,  as  a  wild  animal  left  to  care  for 
himself,  had  a  beautiful  cushion,  the  frog,  to  run 
on,  protected  by  the  horny,  tough  case  and  bars, 
which  renew  themselves  as  do  the  nails  of  a  man. 

Hard  roads,  heavy  weights  to  carry  and  to  pull, 
and  confinement  in  stables  developed  shoeing  as 
a  necessity. 

Very  few  men  own  their  horses ;  the  horses  are 
generally,  except  for  a  legal  right  which  is  a 
formality,  the  property  of  the  coachmen  and  the 
blacksmith.  They  dictate  when,  and  how,  and 
how  far  they  shall  go,  and  the  owner  for  lack  of  a 
little  study  of  the  subject  accepts  their  say-so. 

The  feet  of  a  horse  do  not  wear  out,  as  do  his 


32510H   3HT   HO   ST5IAS    JAH$?3TX3 


idrfoioJp 


?ioBa  .tt 

zqU  .1 

adiH  .81 

920M    .S. 

rH-.in    or 

---'•^     p 

rigiriT 

.0^ 

sllija 

.1^ 

:I.:k.v..    .>.?. 

jiooIJua 

.£^ 

.,;>i"^-n  -i'S 

ni?i2x;0 

.ei^ 

-ifll 

rr^i^sa  -ss 

jJooH 

.^i- 

lit£3ri2  .dS 

tjjnt23r(0 

.3^ 

■  1 

■bitasT  .VS 

?InBri2 

.dl^     n 

^J 

Huod2  .8£ 

Iniol  ?)ooI)3t[ 

.V^ 

T 

^odI3  .9S 

>i00lj3H 

.81^ 

J 

nAioH  .OC 

msJE^q 

.9*'   ;.i 

Cu 

Hmawtf^"^ 

JsnoioO 

.02 

39n:>i  .se 

iooH 

,t3 

An^dZ  .68 

Jnio[ 

.^aohsT  .-l^e 

"r°";i 


j26HO";g=f 
eiariHW  .dl 


32510H   3HT  no   TOOT 


iJsIuoivBn    ,EE9!!j,TTei    ^o 


snod  ni^^on  srfT   t> 


maJafiq   is^ibI    k 


anocJF?.' 
3nod  bid?ii£ESis  SffT     a 
sUiudz  10    ,iBluoiv£n    ariT   .\ 
anod 
avitranaa  ,301^  lanni   .w 
;    HORSE 


-:)-  EXTERNAL  PARTS  OF  THE  HORSE 


'  or       r.                                         ''O      foot 

Lips                             17.  Back  35.  Pastern                        . 

Nose                           18.  Ribs  36.  Coronet          ^"^'  W^'^" 

Face                            19.  Girth  37.  Foot                      -'>*lfin- 

Forehead                   20.  Loins  38.  Fetlock                         or 

Eyebrows                   21.  Croup  39.  Haunch 

Forelock                    22.  Tail  40.  Thigh 

Ears                             23.  Dock  41.  Stifle 

Lower  jaw                  24.  Flank  42.  Buttock 

Cheek                         25.  Belly' ''"/'''■'' ''''  43.  Gaskin 

Nostrtl'     '    ^'"        26.  Sheath' ^''^^    <»i'^''M4.  Hock  the 

Poll  Ji'es  run,      27.  Testicles  45.  Chestnut   they  grOW 

Throatm    whei\.    28.  Shoulder  and  arrn  46.  Shank      innsistS    of 

Parotid  gl^Pl^r  ca.sl5-(liH^ll  and  the*l>;-^^^'°^^  J°'"S  are  the 

Neck     .-          .•       SO.rForearm        ,  ,48.  Fetlock 

continuation  ot  the  crust  ur-.  .,  ,  ^  !ot,  and  be- 

,Mane             ,           31.  Chestnyt  49.  Pastern 
Jug^u^a?^cPan4f  ^'b^^me'-^'   '"'^''^^ 
Che"^'^'                    33.  Shank 
Witheri  >  r^                34.  Fetlock  joint 

■imself.  had  a 


,48.  Fetlock 

49.  Pastern 

50.  Coronef^G:-      ^P^^^e 

51.  Foot 


FOOT   OF  THE   HORSE 


an. 
ill, 
as 


a.  The  cgffin  bone 

b.  The  low^r  6r  snrtaller  pastern 

■^bne"^"---^'-    • 

c.  The  uppi^r  >or   larger   pastern 

i>i«e-k.vniith. 

e.  The.sesamQid  bone  r 

lit™:;  sli;'i\'  ol.  I.  , 
/.   The    ruyicular,   or  shuttle 

Jheteetof  a  . 

w.   inner  frog,  sensitive 


p.  Seat    of    lameness,    navicular 

joint 
r.  Coronary  ring-    the  horseS  are 

b'  ■    which    is   a 

a.  The  coronary  ring:en    and    the 

b.  Horny  lining,  ofa<^\.^t  h^^v^    ^nd 

^•'^^^^^•■^.•.vnerforlackofa 

e.   Inside  of  horny  ftog 

r  r^r  W''i^\u-  in-'ir  say-so. 

/.  Cleft  ot  the  frog  -^ 

g.  The  ^ro^^'^'^''  out,  as  do  his 

h.  Outside  wall  or  crust 


PLATE  XVIII.  — EXTERNAL  PARTS  OF  THE  HORSE 


PLATE  XIX.  — FOOT  OF  THE  HORSE 


Shoeing  253 

teeth,  for  instance.  An  old  horse  may  have, 
barring  accident,  just  as  good  feet  as  a  young 
one.  Nature  has  provided  amply  for  the  renewal 
of  the  frog  and  the  sole  and  the  crust  of  the 
horse's  hoof.  But  in  order  that  this  renewal 
should  not  be  interfered  with,  the  foot  should  be 
kept  clean,  moist,  and  well  shod.  As  the  foot  is 
kept  on  hard  substances  in  and  out  of  the  stable, 
and  not  as  nature  intended  in  contact  with  the 
moist  ground,  this  moisture  should  be  supplied 
artificially  by  stopping  the  feet  once  or  twice  a 
week.  If  the  foot  is  not  cleaned  each  time  the 
horse  comes  in,  the  tender  fro2:  and  sole  become 
diseased;  if  the  frog  and  sole  are  not  mois- 
tened, but  kept  dry,  the  frog  and  sole  crack, 
chip,  and  fail  to  renew  themselves  properly;  if 
shoes  too  big  or  too  small,  or  shoes  that  do  not 
fit  the  crust  and  bars  are  put  on,  or  if  nails  are 
put  in  carelessly  or  pulled  out  roughly,  the  foot 
contracts,  corns  appear,  and  you  have  a  lame,  an 
unnecessarily  lame,  horse  on  your  hands.  The 
fore  feet  are  nearly  circular  in  a  healthy  horse,  the 
hind  feet  more  oval  in  form. 

It  is  no  economy  not  to  shoe  horses  at  least 
every  three  or  four  weeks,  whether  the  shoes 
are  worn  out  or  not;  for  the  simple  reason  that 
the  shoes  are  nailed  to  a  substance  which  is 
always  growing,  and  after  that  interval  of  time  the 
shoe  no  longer  fits  the  foot.     The  shoe  should  be 


254  Driving 

made  and  put  on  to  fit  the  foot,  and  no  black- 
smith should  be  allowed  to  rasp  the  foot  down  to 
fit  the  shoe.  The  crust  or  wall  of  the  foot  is 
about  three-quarters  of  an  inch  wide  in  most 
horses,  and  this  is  the  proper  width  for  the  shoe, 
and  the  shoe  to  be  flat  toward  the  foot.  If  the 
shoe  is  wider,  as  is  often  the  case,  —  go  over  your 
horse's  feet  and  see,  —  it  leaves  a  little  shelf  for 
stones  and  dirt,  and  a  horse  going  in  wet,  heavy 
ground  may  even  have  his  shoes  pulled  wholly 
off  by  suction.  The  shoes  should  be  as  wide  as 
this  crust  to  the  heels,  but  where  the  crust  nar- 
rows at  the  juncture  with  the  bars,  the  shoe  should 
narrow  too. 

For  the  ordinary  horse  for  riding  or  driving, 
neither  a  racer  nor  a  hunter,  a  shoe  may  weigh 
from  nine  to  fourteen  ounces.  It  is  to  be  remem- 
bered in  this  connection,  that  shoes  grow  rapidly 
lighter  as  they  get  thinner  from  wear.  This 
should  be  considered  in  deciding  upon  the 
weight  of  a  horse's  shoes.  Big  work  horses  are 
sometimes  shod  with  shoes  weighing  five,  six, 
and  seven  pounds.  As  few  nails  as  possible  to 
make  the  shoe  secure  is  best  —  five  to  seven  is 
enough.  As  the  inside  of  the  crust  of  the  hoof 
is  always  thinner  and  more  elastic  than  the  out- 
side on  account  of  the  greater  weight  it  bears, 
contraction  is  generally  found  on  the  inside;  use 
two  nails  inside  and  three  outside,  or  three  inside 


Shoeing  255 

and  four  outside,  if  seven  are  necessary.  The 
outside  crust  is  thicker  and  stronger  than  the 
inside  crust  of  the  heel  and  affords  more  nail- 
hold.  No  matter  what  the  blacksmith  or  the 
coachman  —  who  is  often  only  his  echo  —  says, 
insist  that  the  bars  of  the  horse's  feet  shall  on  no 
account  be  cut  away.  The  wall  of  the  hoof  is  not 
only  much  weakened  by  this  operation,  but  the 
hoof  must,  in  consequence  of  it,  contract  toward 
the  heel.  The  reason  advanced  for  doing  this  is 
that  it  allows  room  for  expansion,  when  as  a  matter 
of  fact,  with  the  bars  cut  away,  there  is  nothing  to 
keep  the  foot  open,  and  there  follow  contraction 
and  corns.  Corns  mean  lameness,  a  timid  way  of 
putting  the  feet  down,  and  hence  stumbling,  and 
corns  are  very  difficult  to  get  rid  of.  Look  at  the 
healthy  foot  of  a  horse  and  see  for  yourself  that 
this  must  be  so,  and  then  have  your  horses  shod 
as  though  they  really  belonged  to  you.  Remem- 
ber that  most  blacksmiths  shoe  the  horse  to  look 
well  on  the  outside.  It  should  be  your  business 
to  insist  that  he  be  so  shod  that  the  hoof  shall 
keep  well  on  the  inside ! 

To  discuss  different  styles  of  shoes,  questions 
of  balancing  horses  for  speed  or  action,  would 
require  a  treatise  by  itself. 

It  is  fair  to  condense  advice  on  the  subject  by 
saying  that  the  lightest  and  closest-fitting  shoe  that 
will  suit  the  work  and  the  peculiarities  of  moving 


256  Driving 

of  the  horse  will  be  the  best  for  him.  Do  not 
allow  paring  of  the  sole  and  frog ;  have  light  shoes 
properly  fitted ;  use  as  few  nails  as  possible ;  make 
the  shoe  to  fit  the  foot,  and  permit  no  rasping, 
burning,  and  paring  to  fit  the  foot  to  the  shoe ; 
do  not  allow  the  front  of  the  hoof  to  be  rasped. 
It  must  not  be  forgotten  in  this  matter  of  shoe- 
ing that  there  are  no  muscles  below  the  knee 
and  the  hock,  and  the  muscles  used  to  move 
the  legs  are  high  up.  What  weighs  little  at  the 
shoulder  or  stifle  weighs  very  much  more  at  the 
end  of  the  leg.  Take  a  stick  three  feet  long  and 
put  a  pound-weight  on  it  next  your  hand,  then 
transfer  the  pound-weight  to  the  end  of  the 
stick  next  the  ground,  and  you  see  for  yourself 
the  difference.  Or  suppose  in  fencing  you  put 
a  weight  equal  to  the  handle,  where  the  button  is, 
and  the  difference  in  using  the  weapon  is  enor- 
mous. A  horse  shod  with  shoes  unnecessarily 
heavy  is  at  just  that  disadvantage ;  therefore  it  is 
of  the  utmost  importance  both  for  his  comfort 
and  your  safety  that  he  should  be  shod  as  lightly 
as  is  compatible  with  the  work  required  of  him. 
In  fitting  the  shoe,  great  care  should  be  taken 
that  both  sides  of  the  hoof  are  of  the  same  height. 
If  they  are  not  of  the  same  height,  the  whole  foot 
is  thrown  out  of  plumb;  this  twists  the  delicate 
joints  of  leg  and  pastern  and  leads  to  disease. 
In    the   majority  of  cases   that    I    have   noticed, 


Shoeing  257 

the  inside  of  the  foot  is  left  higher  than  the 
outside. 

The  horse  left  without  shoes  does  not  suffer 
from  corns,  thrush,  "  speedy-cut,"  sand-cracks, 
quittor,  and  the  like.  On  the  contrary,  he  devel- 
ops and  keeps  in  condition  a  foot  wonderfully 
well  adapted  to  carry  him  and  hold  him.  He 
has  a  wonderful  cushion  to  run  on  and  take  the 
jar  off,  enclosed  in  a  fibrous  case  of  horn.  The 
care  of  the  foot  and  the  shoeing  thereof  should 
leave  as  much  to  nature  and  as  little  to  the  black- 
smith as  possible.  Artificial  conditions  make  iron 
shoes  necessary,  but  except  for  the  heaviest  kind 
of  work  on  the  roughest  and  hardest  roads  the 
less  shoe,  the  fewer  nails,  and  the  less  paring  and 
rasping  of  the  foot,  the  better.  The  cavalry  in 
this  country  do  not  shoe  the  horses  on  the  hind 
feet  unless  special  service  requires  it. 

Where  a  horse  interferes  or  forges,  certain 
changes  in  his  shoeing  may  help  matters.  In 
interfering,  unless  it  arises  from  bad  malforma- 
tion, the  height  of  the  shoe  may  be  increased  on 
the  inside,  or  a  three-quarter  shoe  used  on  the 
outside;  or,  if  this  fails,  the  exact  opposite  may 
be  tried.  The  so-called  Charlier  shoe,  which  fits 
into  a  bevelled  hollow  around  the  crust,  suits 
some  horses. 

Clicking  or  forging  arises  from  the  striking  of 
the  toe  of  the  hind  shoe  against  the  under  edge 


258  Driving 

of  the  toe  of  the  fore  shoe.  It  results  usually 
from  the  quicker  action ^of  the  hind  quarters  than 
the  fore  quarters.  A  remedy  is  to  shorten  the 
toes  of  the  hind  feet  and  level  off  the  edges  of 
the  toe  of  the  fore  shoe.  Shortening  the  toes  of 
the  fore  feet  enables  the  horse  to  raise  his  fore 
feet  more  quickly  and  thus  to  get  them  away 
before  the  hind  quarters  reach  his  fore  feet.  In 
hilly  country,  or  where  horses  are  overworked 
or  weakened  by  illness,  this  overreaching  is  most 
common,  and  often  disappears  when  horses  get 
accustomed  to  the  country,  or  get  stronger  and 
better  able  to  lift,  and  to  carry  their  feet  properly. 


CHAPTER    IX 

HARNESS 

The  harness  has  two  fundamental  functions: 
first,  to  attach  the  horse  to  the  vehicle,  so  that  he 
may  pull  it ;  second,  to  enable  the  coachman  to 
guide  the  horse.  The  elements  of  all  harness, 
therefore,  are :  the  collar,  hames,  and  traces,  and 
the  bridle,  bit,  and  reins. 

The  pulling  part  —  the  collar,  hames  and  traces 
— should,  of  course,  be  first  of  all  strong  and  then 
as  light  as  will  fulfil  their  puipose;  the  guiding 
part  —  the  bridle,  bit,  and  reins  —  should  first  of 
all  be  light,  but  strong  enough  to  hold  the  horse. 
Whether  you  buy  harness,  or  use  harness,  or  wish 
to  be  guided  in  examining  and  keeping  in  repair 
your  own  harnesses,  these  are  the  underlying 
principles  of  the  whole  subject. 

All  questions  of  form  or  fads  or  personal 
peculiarity  must  first  conform  to  these  principles, 
otherwise  the  harnessing  will  be  wrong.  From 
judging  the  appointment  classes  at  a  horse 
show  to  the  buying  of  a  harness  for  your  chil- 
dren's pony,  these  first  principles  of  what  a  har- 
ness should  be  apply  rigidly. 
259 


26o  Driving 

Unless  there  is  a  rational  basis  to  go  upon  in 
all  these  matters,  form  and  style  and  so  on  are 
mere  silliness.  As  an  example  of  this,  there  is 
the  absurd  dictum  in  this  country  that  a  lady 
should  sit  on  the  right  side  of  her  own  carriage, 
due,  of  course,  to  the  fact  that  in  England  vehicles 
pass  to  the  left,  which  of  course  makes  the  right 
side  the  prominent  side.  In  this  country  vehicles 
pass  to  the  right,  which  of  course  makes  the 
left  side  the  prominent,  and,  for  purposes  of  seeing 
and  being  seen,  the  more  convenient  side.  This 
is  a  very  happy  illustration  of  vehicular  toadyism, 
or  of  so-called  "form,"  which  is  simian,  rather 
than  sensible.  Wherever,  therefore,  in  the  matter 
of  manners  and  appointments  on  the  road,  from 
the  harnessing,  furnishing,  and  handling  of  a 
pony  cart  to  a  "  drag,"  you  are  met  with  a  state- 
ment or  given  advice  that  has  no  rational 
sanction,  be  sure  you  are  wrong  and  investigate 
further. 

A  similar  question  to  the  above  is  the  much- 
mooted  one  as  to  whether  the  reins,  particularly 
in  four-in-hand  driving,  should  be  buckled  or  left 
unbuckled.  When  the  mail-coaches  were  making 
the  best  time  possible  from  stage  to  stage  or  when 
the  amateur  whip  was  making  the  best  time  pos- 
sible in  imitation  thereof,  it  was  claimed  that  a  cer- 
tain amount  of  time  was  saved  at  the  end  of  each 
stage  by  doing  away  with  the  unbuckling  of  the 


PLATE   XX. 
2.  Double-ring  snaffle.        3.  Half-cheek  jo'nted  snaffle. 


j'^X 


PLATE  XXL -BIT   FOUND  ON  THE  ACROPOLIS.    DATE  500  B.C. 


Harness  261 

reins.  True,  time  was  saved,  and  with  professional 
coachmen  there  was  the  minimum  of  danger  from 
dropping  a  rein.  But  nowadays,  in  driving  a 
coach,  either  on  the  road  or  in  the  park,  the 
safety,  comfort,  and  pleasure  of  the  passengers  are 
first  of  all  important,  and  the  seconds  saved  in 
unbuckling  reins  are  of  no  consequence. 

The  best  road  coachman  I  know  in  this  country, 
and  a  man  who  probably  never  dropped  a  rein  in 
his  life,  drives  with  his  reins  buckled.  As  to  the 
question  of  the  leaders  running  away,  when  of 
course  buckled  reins  would  catch  in  the  terrets  of 
the  wheel  horses'  pads,  —  that  is  as  though  a  man 
should  sleep  every  night  in  a  rope  harness  for 
getting  out  of  windows  in  case  of  fire. 

These  two  questions  are  typical  of  certain 
vapid  discussions  of  questions  relating  to  harness 
and  harnessing,  and  they  are  also  typical  of  how 
the  student  of  such  matters  should  settle  them. 
Usage  is  the  law  of  language,  so,  too,  usage 
should  not  be  dethroned  in  any  department  of  life 
without  good  reason ;  but  when  usage  becomes 
an  empty  form,  and  when  a  change  makes  for 
safety,  comfort,  and  convenience,  there  should  be 
no  hesitation  about  making  it. 

The  earliest  form  of  vehicle  and  harness,  and 
upon  which  all  improvements  have  been  built  up, 
are  the  Indian  pony  with  two  long  poles  attached 
to   his    belly-band   and    a    rawhide    rope   around 


262  Driving 

his  neck.  There  you  have  all  the  elements  of  a 
harness,  but  with  no  comfort  and  no  convenience, 
and  only  the  most  precarious  safety.  In  the 
famous  picture,  "  Attila  at  Rome,"  by  Raphael,  the 
Huns  are  riding  without  bit  or  bridle,  merely  a 
rope  or  strap  around  the  neck  of  their  mounts. 
In  certain  pictures  of  Roman  chariots  there  is 
but  one  rein  attached  to  a  snafBe-bit,  and  the 
horse  was  evidently  guided  by  the  pressure  of 
the  rein  and  the  whip;  though  it  is  to  be  re- 
membered that  the  complicated  turnings  of 
modern  traffic  and  modern  roads  were  unknown, 
and  to  keep  straight,  and  to  start  and  stop,  were 
the  main  thino^. 

To  begin  at  the  beginning  in  a  discussion  of  mod- 
ern harness  (Plate  XXII.),  it  is  proper  to  empha- 
size the  fact  that  the  very  best  leather  is  none  too 
good,  whether  in  your  traces  or  in  your  reins. 
The  best  leather  is  made  of  the  hides  of  heifers 
or  steers  and  tanned  with  oak  bark.  The  total 
supply  of  oak  bark  in  England  is  only  about 
three  hundred  thousand  tons  a  year,  which  amount 
is  quite  insufficient ;  and  most  of  the  English 
leather  is  tanned  by  cheaper  and  quicker  meth- 
ods. The  old  oak-tanning  process  took  eighteen 
months,  and  made  leather  of  unequalled  quality. 
To-day  the  process  hardly  consumes  as  many 
weeks,  and  in  America,  hemlock  bark  is  the  most 
important  material  used. 


Harness  263 

It  is  not  easy,  except  by  long  experience,  to  tell 
good  leather  at  a  glance.  One  authority  says 
that  good  leather  should  "  be  solid,  but  not 
hard  ;  mellow,  but  not  soft."  The  black  leather 
in  a  harness  should  have  a  smooth  surface,  close 
texture,  and  when  bent  between  the  hands  should 
not  show  minute  cracks. 

The  collar  is  the  keystone  of  the  pulling  part 
of  the  harness.  It  should  fit  to  a  nicety,  every 
horse  having  his  own  collar  as  much  as  the  coach- 
man should  have  his  own  boots.  The  collar 
should  be  lined  with  some  non-porous  material, 
preferably  soft  leather  —  even  thin  patent  leather 
is  good  and  easily  cleaned.  If  the  collar  is  too 
wide,  it  will  rub  the  shoulders ;  if  too  short,  it  will 
choke  the  horse  ;  if  rounded  at  the  top,  it  will  press 
on  and  gall  the  withers.  Usually  the  collar  that 
will  go  over  a  horse's  head  will  fit  as  to  width,  and 
is  long  enough  when  four  fingers,  held  vertically, 
will  go  between  the  collar  and  neck,  when  the 
head  is  held  in  its  usual  position.  The  sides  of 
the  upper  part  of  the  collar,  as  well  as  the  sides 
over  the  shoulders,  should  be  well  filled  out,  to 
prevent  the  rubbing  of  the  point  of  the  collar  on 
the  withers.  In  cases  where  the  horse  has  an 
unusual  conformation  of  head  and  neck  a  collar 
opening  at  the  top  is  a  convenience  —  one  or 
two  such  collars  should  be  kept  in  every  stable. 
Collars  may  be  either  straight  or  curved   back, 


264  Driving 

the  latter  variety  showing  off  the  horse's  neck  to 
advantage. 

The  hames  must,  of  course,  fit  the  collar;  and 
the  draught-eye  in  the  hames,  to  which  the  tug  is 
attached,  should  be  placed  so  that  the  pull  comes 
upon  the  muscles  of  the  lower  part  of  the  shoulder- 
blade,  or  at  a  point  where  this  large  bone  is  nar- 
rowest. Usually  hame-rings  are  placed  too  low  by 
a  full  inch  on  the  hames  when  fitted  to  the  collar. 
This  is  important,  as  it  puts  the  draught  where 
the  horse  can  most  easily  apply  most  power  and 
leaves  his  shoulders  as  free  as  though  the  collar 
were  not  there.  The  incline  of  the  trace  from 
the  collar,  so  far  as  applied  mechanics  are  con- 
cerned, matters  little  so  long  as  it  is  not  too  high 
nor  too  low ;  but  as  a  wheel  meets  with  friction 
and  obstructions  up  and  over  which  it  must  be 
pulled,  it  is  an  advantage  to  have  the  trace  de- 
dine  from  the  collar  to  the  vehicle. 

It  is  well  to  put  the  collar  on  some  minutes  be- 
fore the  horse  is  to  be  used  in  it,  so  that  his  neck 
and  shoulders  may  be  warmed  for  their  work; 
and  it  is  absolutely  essential  to  sound  skin  on 
neck  and  shoulders  that  the  collar  should  be  left 
on  the  horse  five  or  ten  minutes  after  his  return, 
hot  from  work.  Pads  or  saddles  should  fit  as 
well  as  collars  and  should  be  placed  just  back  of 
the  shoulders,  where  the  muscles  are  no  longer 
prominent.     If  horses  were  saddled  twenty  min- 


Harness  265 

utes  before  they  were  wanted,  and  only  unsaddled 
—  girths  of  course  being  loosened  —  twenty  min- 
utes after  their  return  to  the  stable,  these  precau- 
tions, and  a  liberal  use  of  alcohol  rubbed  into  the 
skin,  would  lessen  materially  the  number  of  sore 
backs.  A  Dutch  collar,  or  breastplate,  is  some- 
times used  in  light  harness  instead  of  a  neck 
collar.  In  the  case  of  a  horse  with  sore  shoulders 
this  is  a  convenience,  or  a  horse  with  graceful 
neck  and  shoulders  in  the  lead  of  a  tandem  shows 
off  better  with  such  a  collar.  But  for  draught  it 
is  not  as  good  as  the  neck  collar. 

To  the  hames  on  the  collar  is  fastened  the  tug, 
to  the  tug  the  trace,  which  at  its  other  end  is 
fastened  finally  to  the  vehicle.  Of  the  length  of 
tugs  and  traces  it  is  to  be  said  that  they  should 
be  of  such  length  that  the  back-band  lies  on  the 
middle  of,  not  in  front  or  behind,  the  pad,  when 
the  horse  is  pulling.  The  reason  for  this  is  that 
otherwise  the  horse  will  be  pulling  the  vehicle, 
not  by  the  trace,  but  by  the  back-band.  Many 
illustrations  of  this  awkwardness  may  be  seen 
wherever  you  see  horses  in  harness. 

Of  the  particular  fastenings  of  tugs  to  hames, 
and  of  traces  to  vehicles,  —  these  must  depend 
upon  the  type  of  vehicle,  and  had  best  be  left  to 
the  choice  of  the  technically  experienced.  But 
it  is  every  owner's  business  to  see  to  it  that  these 
draught  portions  of  the  harness  are  strong  and 


266  Driving 

of  the  proper  length.  In  the  case  of  traces  in  a 
coach  harness,  the  inside  trace  should  be  about 
half  a  hole  shorter  than  the  outside  trace  to  make 
the  draught  even,  and  the  convenient  way  to  do 
this  is  to  wrap  the  inside  roller-bolt  with  leather, 
thus  taking  up  more  of  the  trace  on  that  side,  and 
saving  the  weakening  of  the  trace  by  punching 
an  extra  hole  in  the  tug  end  of  it. 

Good,  strong,  pliable  reins,  particularly  of  the 
length,  23  feet  6  inches,  required  for  the  lead-reins 
of  a  coach,  are  hard  to  get,  but  merit  all  the  time 
and  money  spent  in  getting  them.  Of  the  size, 
viz.  the  width,  of  the  reins,  one  writer  says :  "  Medio 
Mtissimus  ibis''  which  back-of-the-dictionary  Latin 
would  apply  equally  well  to  a  man's  gloves  or 
collars.  If  you  have  short  fingers,  the  reins  should 
be,  say,  three-quarters  or  seven-eighths  of  an  inch 
wide;  if  long  fingers,  one  inch  wide  or  even  a  little 
more.  A  man  with  short  fingers  would  be  ham- 
pered, and  his  work  in  fingering  four  reins  would 
be  cramped,  with  wide  reins. 

A  horse's  bridle  should  fit  him  nicely  and  with 
no  loose  ends  hanging  or  sticking  about  his  head. 
Nothing  looks  more  slovenly  than  trace  points 
or  back-band  points  or  bridle  billet  ends  sticking 
out  of,  and  beyond  their  loops. 

The  horse's  eyes  should  come  in  the  middle  of 
the  winkers,  and  the  headstall  should  be  so  fitted  as 
to  keep  them  there.    The  winkers  should  not  bulge 


Liverpool 


PLATE  XXlll. 


Gig 


Harness  267 

out  nor  turn  in,  and  thus  almost  touch  the  eye. 
Above  all,  they  should  not,  as  is  often  the  case, 
drop  so  that  the  horse  can  see  over,  and  behind 
them.  Many  horses  under  these  circumstances 
will  pay  so  much  attention  to  the  man  and  the 
whip,  and  perhaps  the  parasol,  behind  them,  that 
they  will  see  nothing  else.  The  throat-latch 
should  be  loose  enough  to  allow  three  fingers 
between  it  and  the  throat.  It  is  intended  to  keep 
the  whole  bridle  in  place,  but  not  to  choke  the 
horse.  The  nose-band  is  a  survival.  It  was 
intended  to  keep  the  jaws  of  the  horse  together 
so  that  he  could  not  relieve  himself  from  the  bit 
by  opening  his  mouth.  In  the  case  of  a  bit  with 
a  high  port  it  is  still  useful  for  that  purpose ;  but 
even  when  used  merely  because  it  came  as  part 
of  the  harness,  it  should  fit  and  not  be  a  flopping 
ring  of  leather  around  the  horse's  nose.  A  nose- 
band properly  adjusted  should  have  the  width  of 
two  fingers  between  it  and  the  horse's  jaws  and 
should  fit  snugly  and  not  too  far  up  over  his  nose. 
The  brow-band  should  so  fit  that  it  does  not  rub 
the  ears.  When  the  bridle  is  hung  up  as  one 
piece,  see  that  it  is  not  hung  on  a  hook,  so  that 
one  side  or  the  other  is  pulled  out  of  shape,  but 
on  a  proper  bridle-rack. 

Of  bits,  as  of  books,  there  is  no  end.  Xeno- 
phon  advises  a  flexible  bit  covered  with  leather. 
"  No  matter  what  the  kind  of  bit,  it  must  always 


268  Driving 

be  flexible,"  he  maintains  (Plate  XXL).  William 
Cavendish,  Duke  of  Newcastle,  in  probably  the 
most  sumptuous  book  on  the  horse  ever  pub- 
lished, writing  in  1657,  says,  "But  above  all, 
this  rule  is  chiefly  to  be  observed,  to  put  as  little 
iron  in  your  horse's  mouth  as  possibly  you  can." 

With  bits  as  with  shoes,  the  less  and  the  lighter, 
the  better,  so  long  as  they  be  strong  enough  to 
hold  your  horse.  The  plain  snafiie,  ring  snaffle, 
double  ring  snafifle,  Liverpool  bit.  Elbow  bit,  Bux- 
ton bit,  Swales's  patent,  and  (Plates  XXIII.  and 
XXIV.)  innumerable  modifications  of  these,  offer 
opportunity  to  shift  responsibility  from  your  own 
hands  to  the  tender  bars  of  the  horse's  mouth. 
Outside  of  here  and  there  a  horse  who,  on  account 
of  bad  early  training  or  from  ill-usage  or  from 
fracture,  it  is  impossible  to  bit  so  that  he  will  go 
comfortably,  the  matter  of  bits  and  bitting  is  a 
matter  of  patience  and  experiment. 

Bits  are  often  bought  as  though  any  size  of  bit 
would  do  for  any  size  of  horse.  But  a  bit  too 
large  is  as  injurious  as  a  bit  too  small.  The  mouth- 
piece should  be  exactly  the  width  of  the  mouth, 
and  if  you  have  not  a  bit  that  fits  exactly,  it  is  a 
simple  matter  to  insert  around  the  mouthpiece  and 
inside  the  branch  of  the  bit,  a  disk  of  leather  of 
the  thickness  required  to  make  your  bit  fit  snugly 
(Plates  XXV.  and  XXVI.).  This  fitting  of  the 
bit  alone  makes  a  great  difference  to  the  comfort 


PLATE   XXIV. —SWALES   PATENT 


PLATE   XXV. —  BRUSH   BURR  PLATE   XXVL  — PLAIN    BURR 


Harness  269 

of  the  horse,  as  may  be  seen  by  looking  closely 
at  the  way  in  which  a  bit  with  the  mouthpiece 
too  long  works  in  the  horse's  mouth,  when  at- 
tached to  two  long  reins  and  pulled  this  way 
and  that.  The  bit  should  be  placed  neither  too 
high  nor  too  low  in  the  mouth,  but  about  an 
inch  above  the  tusk. 

The  curb-chain  should  allow  of  two  fingers 
between  it  and  the  horse's  jaw.  This  curb-chain 
is  a  part  of  the  lever  which  works  by  the  bit, 
through  the  reins,  on  the  mouth,  and  should  be 
handled  with  discrimination  and  soberly.  The 
curb-chain  may  be  made  more  severe,  either  by 
tightening  it,  or  by  turning  the  chain  itself  so 
that  it  will  be  with  rough  edges  against  the 
horse's  jaw.  It  is  doubtful  whether  this  is  more 
than  a  temporary  solution  of  pulling.  Its  final 
effect  is  to  deaden  the  horse's  mouth.  When 
you  are  tempted  to  tighten  your  curb-chain, 
tighten  your  nose-band  and  loosen  your  curb- 
chain  instead ;  or  lift  the  bit  by  a  hole  in  the 
horse's  mouth  or  lower  it ;  or  buckle  your  reins 
in  the  cheek  instead  of  the  bar,  middle  bar,  or 
lower  bar ;  or  if  there  seems  to  be  trouble  on 
one  side  of  the  horse's  mouth  and  not  on  the 
other,  —  if  on  the  near  side,  put  the  off  rein  into 
the  middle  bar,  leaving  the  near  rein  in  the  cheek. 
or  vice  versa;  or  look  to  see  if  your  horse  has 
his  tongue  over  the  bit ;   or  if  he  is  inclined  to 


2  70  Driving 

loll  with  his  tongue,  tie  his  tongue  down  with  soft 
string  ;  or  loosen  or  tighten  the  bearing-rein ;  — 
in  short,  use  every  means  in  your  power  to  make 
the  horse  comfortable  before  you  resort  to  harsh 
measures  —  which  last,  by  the  way,  are  almost 
never  permanently  successful. 

Above  all  things,  don't  lose  your  temper,  and 
make  matters  absolutely  impossible  of  remedy  by 
doing  just  what  the  horse  is  doing  —  pulling! 
The  horse  may  be  merely  nervous,  or  ignorant 
of  what  the  bit  means,  or  really  suffering;  and 
you  have  more  intelligence  than  he  has  —  the 
comparative  weights  of  your  brains  and  spinal 
cords  prove  it  —  and  that  being  true,  you  should 
illustrate  this  physiological  law  by  managing 
him,  rather  than  to  permit  him  to  manage  you. 
But,  you  reply,  what  if  you  have  tried  everything, 
and  he  still  continues  to  pull  your  arms  out  and 
endanger  the  lives  of  yourself  and  others  ?  Then 
get  out  of  a  bad  fix  as  best  you  can.  Tele- 
graph him  that  you  decline  the  nomination 
as  candidate  unless  he  reforms,  and  get  him 
back  to  Nebraska  as  speedily  and  with  as  little 
danger  as  possible. 

Anything  that  can  be  done  to  freshen  or  to 
keep  fresh  the  animal's  mouth,  and  to  give  him 
something  rather  to  play  with,  than  to  pull 
against,  is  important.  Hence  the  reason  for 
changing   the   position   of   the   bit,  for   movable 


Harness  271 

mouthpieces,  or  for  any  other  device  to  keep 
the  horse  from  taking  the  bit  too  seriously. 

There  are  innumerable  experiments  to  be  tried 
before  a  horse  is  to  be  set  down  as  a  "  puller." 
Often  when  a  horse  finds  he  is  not  to  be  hurt, 
he  goes  well  enough.  Take  out  the  heavy  bit, 
and  drive  him  in  a  snaffle.  Cover  his  bit  with 
rubber,  or  sew  salt  pork  on  his  bit ;  or  give  him 
a  bit  that  works  up  and  down,  or  change  from 
the  straight  bit  to  one  with  a  slight  port,  so  that 
it  does  not  rest  on  his  tongue,  or  go  to  your 
harness  maker  and  have  a  Liverpool  made  with 
a  jointed  mouthpiece,  —  why  not }  What  you 
want  is  something  not  unsightly  to  drive  your 
horse  in,  and,  as  we  have  said  before,  though 
"  form  ^'  and  "  correctness  "  are  absolutely  essen- 
tial to  persons  and  things  without  content,  they 
are  to  be  set  aside  always  when  there  is  a  rational 
sanction  for  doing  so.  Dress  parade  at  quarters 
if  you  please  and  without  a  speck  or  a  spot  or  a 
stir  of  a  muscle  ;  but  undershirts  and  bare  feet 
for  coaling  ship  and  going  into  action.  The 
man  who  is  overawed  by  twaddle  about  "  form  " 
in  the  treatment  of  a  live  animal,  whether  man  or 
beast,  must  have  cur  blood  in  him  from  some 
source,  and  is  not  a  proper  person  to  be  put 
in  authority  over  either. 

There  are  many  things  about  the  harness 
which  annoy  the  horse  and  make  him  restive  and 


272  Driving 

uncomfortable  to  drive.  His  brow-band  may  be 
chafing  his  ears ;  his  winkers  may  be  flapping  or 
pushing  against  his  eyes;  his  pad  or  saddle  may 
not  fit,  and  be  rubbing  his  backbone ;  the  crupper 
may  be  too  short,  catching  him  hard  under  the 
tail  or  pulling  the  saddle  backward ;  the  traces 
may  be  too  long  or  too  short,  hampering  him  in 
his  work ;  his  shoes  may  have  been  on  too  long 
and  become  too  small  for  his  ever  growing  hoof; 
the  bearing-rein  may  be  too  tight;  the  bit  too 
wide,  or  hard  on  his  tongue,  or  pressing  against 
inflamed  tissue  caused  by  ragged  teeth  which 
ought  to  have  been  filed  down. 

All  these  matters,  it  ought  to  be  the  pride,  as  it 
is  the  duty,  of  a  coachman  to  look  out  for.  It  is 
for  this  reason,  if  for  no  other,  that  the  owner  of  a 
horse  or  horses  should  know  the  elements  at  least 
of  the  history,  housing,  harnessing,  and  handling 
of  the  horse.  Ignorance  not  only  means  discom- 
fort and  danger,  but  it  means  cruelty  as  well. 

A  martingale  is  intended  to  prevent  the  horse 
from  throwing  up  his  head.  It  is  looped  through 
a  buckle  and  attached  to  the  belly-band  at  one 
end;  the  other  end  is  a  split  strap  with  rings 
through  which  the  reins  pass,  or  it  may  be  fastened 
to  the  bit  itself,  or  to  the  nose-band  if  the  horse  is 
refractory  or  fussy  about  his  mouth. 

The  question  of  bearing-reins  is  not  a  question 
of  bearing-reins  or  no  bearing-reins,  but  a  question 


Harness  273 

of  the  use  and  misuse  of  bearing-reins.  No  horse 
or  pony  of  spirit  should  be  driven  by  a  woman  or 
a  child  without  a  bearing-rein.  It  prevents  the 
animal  rubbing  his  head  against  shaft  or  pole, 
and  catching  and  perhaps  pulling  his  bridle  off; 
it  prevents  him  from  getting  his  head  down  be- 
tween his  legs  and  becoming  unholdable ;  and  it 
makes  kicking  more  difficult.  A  halter  is  enough 
for  Dobbin  when  Dobbin  goes  his  sleepy  way, 
but  there  is  no  knowing  what  day  in  ten  years 
Dobbin  gets  well,  and  devil  a  saint  is  he !  The 
bearing-rein,  properly  adjusted,  does  not  incon- 
venience the  horse  in  the  slightest  and  is  a  valu- 
able safeguard  in  time  of  need.  For  a  boring  or 
heavy-headed  or  gross-necked  horse,  the  bearing- 
rein  takes  weight  off  the  coachman's  hands  and 
helps  rather  than  impedes  the  horse. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  bearing-rein,  like  a  cer- 
tain feminine  piece  of  harness,  may  be  used  for 
purposes  of  fashionable  distortion.  The  horse's 
head  is  twisted  up  high  in  the  air  to  make  him 
lift  his  legs  and  to  give  him  a  lofty  and  proud 
appearance.  This  use  of  the  bearing-rein  is  in- 
deed an  abomination.  The  gag  bearing-rein  is  a 
rein  passing  from  a  point  of  the  headstall  on  each 
side,  through  a  swivel  attached  to  the  snaffle, 
thence  through  another  ring,  and  fastened  on  to 
the  hook  of  the  pad  or  saddle.  The  sides  of  the 
horse's    mouth   are   drawn  up,  and  with  a  tight 


274  Driving 

crupper  to  boot,  the  horse  looks  as  though  he 
were  tied  together  at  the  teeth  and  the  tail.  One 
sees  little  of  this  nowadays.  Only  the  very 
newest  dollars,  daubed  with  unusual  ignorance, 
permit  this  turkey-cock  style  of  harnessing. 

The  crupper,  passing  from  the  pad  or  saddle 
and  ending  in  a  padded  loop  under  the  tail, 
holds  the  saddle  from  slipping  forward  when 
the  harness  is  without  breeching,  and  also,  as  a 
horse  always  tucks  his  tail  into  his  quarters  when 
about  to  kick,  prevents  kicking  to  some  extent. 
The  crupper  should  be  stuffed  with  linseed  to 
keep  it  moist,  and  to  prevent  its  hardening  and 
becoming  a  worry  to  the  horse. 

In  these  days,  when  even  light  carriages  have 
brakes,  breeching  is  seldom  used  except  with  state 
or  very  dressy  harness.  In  a  hilly  country  or  with 
two-wheeled  traps,  particularly  those  driven  by 
women  or  children,  it  should  be  a  part  of  the 
harness.  In  such  cases,  safety  rather  than  appear- 
ance or  lightness  is  the  essential  thing.  The 
breeching  should  hang  about  twelve  inches  below 
the  upper  part  of  the  dock,  and  have  four  to  six 
inches'  play  when  the  horse  is  in  his  collar. 

The  kicking-strap  in  a  single  harness  is  fas- 
tened on  one  shaft  and  passes  up  and  over  the 
horse's  quarters  through  a  loop  in  the  crupper  and 
down  on  the  other  side  to  the  other  shaft.  In  double 
harness  two  straps  are  needed.     They  are  fastened 


Harness  275 

to  the  pad  and  run  alongside  the  crupper  to  the 
spHnter-bar  and  are  connected  by  a  strap  across 
the  quarters.  No  advice  is  necessary  here.  When 
a  kicking-strap  is  needed,  the  necessity  is  obvious. 
Pains  should  be  taken,  however,  to  have  the  kick- 
ing-strap well  back  on  the  quarters,  otherwise  it  is 
valueless,  and  also  to  have  it  loose  enough  not  to 
be  the  cause  itself  of  kicking. 

Though  the  whip  is  not  part  of  the  harness, 
it  is  an  important  adjunct.  The  best  stocks 
are  made  of  holly  or  of  our  own  white  hickory. 
The  stock  should  be  five  feet  long,  and  the  thong, 
for  four  horses,  ten  feet  six  inches  —  for  one  or 
two,  four  feet  long.  The  balance  of  the  whip  to 
one  who  drives  much  is  as  important  as  the 
suitable  balance  of  a  fishing-rod,  golf-club,  or 
rapier.  If  badly  balanced,  it  adds  a  surprising 
burden  of  weight  on  the  hand,  to  one  who  has 
not  experienced  it.  A  good  maker's  whip  will 
balance  at  its  best,  at  the  collar ;  that  is  to  say, 
when  grasped  at  the  collar  it  is  carried  with  the 
weight  most  evenly  distributed  for  its  holder. 
The  thong  should  be  kept  pliable  with  mutton 
tallow  or  soap,  —  crown  soap  is  the  best,  —  and 
never  pipe-clayed,  which  rots  the  thong.  It 
should  never  be  left  standing,  but,  in  order  to 
keep  its  shape,  it  should  hang,  when  not  in  use, 
on  a  spool.  Even  heavy  poles  will  warp,  if  not 
properly  cared  for,  by  keeping  them  lengthwise 


276  Driving 

on  proper  rests;  much  more  true  is  this  of  the 
far  h'ghter  and  more  delicate  whiphandles.  The 
large  or  butt  end  of  a  good  stock  will  be  nine- 
tenths  of  an  inch  round,  the  small  end  six-tenths. 
For  a  heavy  whip  the  handle  should  be  covered 
with  pigskin,  and  sewn  down  its  length,  or,  even 
better,  wound  in  a  spiral,  each  fold  overlapping, 
which  makes  the  handle  less  slippery  in  wet 
weather;  the  chief  value  of  pigskin  here  and 
elsewhere  in  saddlery  and  harness-making  is  that 
it  is  not  made  rough  by  friction.  Imitation  pig- 
skin is  made  in  quantity.  In  genuine  pigskin, 
the  bristles  reach  clear  through  the  skin,  so 
that  there  are  holes  on  the  flesh  side.  In  the 
imitations  the  holes  only  reach  part  way  through. 
The  thong  on  every  whip  should  be  of  the  same 
material  throughout,  and  not  terminate  in  whip- 
cord, or  silk,  or  ribbons,  or  any  other  fussy 
material.  The  whip  is  for  use  —  important  use  — 
to  a  good  coachman,  and  should  be  made 
accordingly. 

Of  the  care  of  harness,  it  would  be  difficult 
to  say  too  much.  The  whole  pleasure  and  safety 
of  driving  depend  practically  upon  the  watch 
that  is  kept  to  see  that  it  is  safe  and  strong. 
When  there  is  question  about  wear,  it  is  better 
to  replace  the  worn  part  at  once.  Better  throw 
an  old  harness  aside,  than  run  the  risk  of  its 
being  used  by  leaving  it  in  the  stable.     It  may 


Harness  277 

be  put  on  in  muddy  weather,  or  through  careless- 
ness, and  disaster  follows.  As  long  as  leather 
remains  dry  and  clean,  it  needs  little  attention. 
Once  it  is  wet,  it  should  be  carefully  cleaned  and 
well  rubbed  with  oil.  Neat's-foot  oil  is  the  best. 
Vegetable  oils,  with  the  single  exception  of  castor- 
oil,  which  is  disagreeable  by  reason  of  its  odor, 
are  apt  to  become  hard.  All  brass  or  plate  on 
harness  tarnishes  easily,  and  should  be  kept  from 
the  ammonia  of  the  stable  and  from  the  fumes 
of  gas,  if  it  is  burned;  as  well  as  from  gas  from  the 
stove.  A  good  mixture  for  black  harness  is  one 
pint  spirits  of  turpentine,  four  ounces  of  beeswax, 
one  ounce  prussian  blue,  half  an  ounce  lampblack ; 
after  the  application,  plenty  of  hand  polishing. 
It  would  seem  almost  unnecessary  to  warn  against 
soaking  any  part  of  leather  harness  in  water,  if 
the  writer  had  not  seen  on  more  than  one  occa- 
sion parts  of  harness  literally  left  to  soak  in  the 
water-bucket!  In  the  case  of  the  parts  of  the 
harness  made  of  patent  leather,  no  wax  prepara- 
tion should  be  used ;  vaseline  and  a  soft  rag  will 
do  the  cleaning  sufficiently  well. 

What  has  been  said  of  the  care  of  harness 
is  equally,  and  for  the  same  reason,  of  safety, 
true  of  the  carriages  in  your  stable.  All  carriages 
profit  by  an  airing  occasionally.  If  they  are  not 
often  used,  they  should  be  run  out  and  left  for  an 
hour   or   two   in  a   dry,  warm   place.     Carriages 


278  Driving 

newly  painted  and  varnished  should  be  washed 
several  times  before  they  are  used.  This  sets 
and  hardens  paint  and  varnish. 

Carriages  should  not  be  merely  dusted  or 
wiped  over,  but  washed  when  they  come  in,  and 
thoroughly  dried  —  a  soft  sponge  on  fine  car- 
riages, a  hose  on  rougher  vehicles,  and  a  soft 
chamois  to  dry  both,  and  patience  —  never  hoti 
water  and  never  picking  off  of  dried  mud,  lest 
paint  and  varnish  come  with  it.  Carriages 
with  plain  axles  should  have  the  axles  seen  to 
after  every  outing.  Men  who  do  much  driving 
of  heavy  vehicles  with  Collinge  or  Mail  axles, 
unless  they  have  competent  servants  or  are  com- 
petent themselves,  find  it  safer  and  better  to  have 
the  carriage  builder  look  after  their  axles  at  reg- 
ular intervals.  Collinge  axles  will  go  from  one 
to  two  months  ;  Mail  axles  a  week  without  oil- 
ing, on  a  private  coach.  On  public  coaches  it  is 
the  custom  to  examine  the  axles  each  day. 

Washing  and  caring  for  carriages  is  not  a  dif- 
ficult matter,  except  that  the  human  qualities  of 
patience  and  painstaking  are  more  difficult  to  find 
even  than  mechanical  ability.  Time  should  be 
taken  on  the  wash-stand,  if  nowhere  else.  Of 
the  care  of  the  cushions  and  stuffed  parts  of  car- 
riages, and  the  metal  parts,  common  sense,  and 
the  well-known  commercial  pastes  sold  by  all 
harness  and  carriage  makers,  will  fit  a  man  out 


Harness  279 

to  do  his  duty.  With  styles  of  carriages  and  ap- 
propriate vehicles  for  exhibiting  and  the  like,  this 
book  does  not  deal.  The  most  scientific  treatise 
on  the  subject  of  the  coach  and  carriage  is  "  A 
Manual  of  Coaching,"  by  Fairman  Rogers.  The 
author  was  of  high  attainments  as  an  engineer, 
and  of  great  practical  experience  as  a  coachman. 
A  valuable  book  of  reference,  with  complete  and 
very  good  illustrations  covering  the  ground  of 
appropriateness  and  "  good  form,"  is  "  Driving 
for  Pleasure,"  by  Francis  T.  Underhill.  A  very 
useful  compilation,  very  complete  and  clear  as  to 
all  details  of  the  stable  is,  "  The  Private  Stable," 
by  James  A.  Garland. 

All  parts  of  steel,  bits,  curb-chains,  pole-chains, 
kidney-links,  and  the  like,  after  washing,  may  be 
put  into  lime-water  —  dissolving  as  much  com- 
mon lime  as  the  water  will  take ;  this  does  steel 
no  harm  and  keeps  off  rust.  To  polish  these 
parts,  they  should  be  shaken  in  a  bag  with  fine 
sawdust  and  sand.  Sand  and  emery  paper  scratch, 
and  do  not  burnish  satisfactorily ;  a  steel  burnisher 
is  the  only  way  in  which  the  original  polish  can 
be  regained  or  retained. 

That  harness  should  be  appropriate  to  the 
horse,  the  vehicle,  and  the  use  to  which  it  is  to 
be  put,  goes  without  saying.  The  pony-cart,  the 
runabout,  the  drag,  the  miniature  Victoria,  the 
station  wagon,  need  harness  to  suit  them.     But 


28o  Driving 

this  by  no  means  entails  different  harness  for 
every  vehicle.  On  the  contrary,  a  few  changes, 
and  a  pair  of  leaders'  reins,  both  for  four  and 
tandem,  will  fit  you  out  for  almost  any  kind  of 
driving.  Collars,  bits,  saddles,  should  fit  their 
wearers;  and  of  these,  if  there  are  many  horse- 
men and  horsewomen  in  the  family,  you  must 
have  an  adequate  supply.  But  the  light  pony-pair 
harness  with  long  reins,  and  the  heavier  harness 
if  a  larger  pair  fitted  with  removable  terrets,  gives 
you  a  four-in-hand  harness.  A  similar  arrange- 
ment with  two  single  harnesses  will  give  you  a 
tandem  harness ;  and  it  is  well  to  remember  that 
the  greater  variety  of  driving  you  have,  the  more 
confidence  you  will  gain  and  the  better  you  will 
drive.  It  is  hard  on  the  men  in  the  stable  to 
have  too  little  harness,  and  it  is  a  burden  to  have 
a  lot  of  harness  that  is  never  used.  Leather  up  to 
a  certain  age  improves  with  use  and  deteriorates 
when  left  to  hang  and  become  dry,  so  that  it  is 
almost  as  necessary  not  to  have  too  much  harness 
as^o  have  enough.  Let  it  be  repeated  that  any 
question  of  worn  parts  of  a  harness  should  be 
investigated  and  attended  to  at  once.  This  is 
not  merely  economy ;  it  is  gross  extravagance  not 
to  do  so,  and  a  peril  besides. 

When  men  wore  close  armor  and  a  beaver 
down,  they  could  only  be  distinguished  by 
emblems   on   their   shields   or   harness.      When 


Harness  281 

reading  was  an  almost  unknown  accomplishment, 
it  was  necessary  that  men  should  have  over  their 
tents  in  the  field,  or  over  their  gates  or  doors 
at  home,  signs  and  symbols  that  could  be  easily 
seen  and  distinguished.  Hence  arms  and  heraldry. 
The  more  conspicuous  the  man  or  the  family,  the 
more  necessary  that  he  and  they  should  be  easily 
recognizable.  Hence  the  inns  of  the  local  village, 
the  servants,  the  carriages,  and  the  like  were  dis- 
tinguished by  a  particular  badge. 

The  reason  for  this  has  passed.  The  over- 
powering instinct  in  man  to  prolong  his  existence, 
by  having  been,  by  being,  and  by  affirming  that 
he  will  be,  as  shown  in  genealogy,  in  ambition 
to  be  well  known,  and  in  the  belief  in  immortality, 
is  the  explanation  of  heraldry.  That  the  army, 
navy,  or  diplomatic  officer  should  put  a  cockade 
in  his  servants'  hats,  is  therefore  not  difficult  to 
understand.  That  almost  every  man  should  wish 
to  make  the  best  of  his  ancestry,  —  to  cut  out  the 
tailors,  and  hatters,  and  tinsmiths,  and  tanners,  and 
make  prominent  the  worthies, — is  also  not  difficult 
to  understand.  To  the  American,  however,  the 
conspicuous  use  of  insignia  of  this  kind,  unless 
the  authenticity  thereof  be  verifiable  by  proofs 
unquestionable,  is  rather  childish.  There  is  no 
doubt  whatever  but  that  we  all  have  a  strain  of 
the  right  to  bear  arms  blood ;  there  is  also  no 
doubt  that  we  have  all  more  or  less  lived  through 


282  Driving 

days  of  small  and  tradesman-like  things  in  this 
country,  and  perhaps  your  own  initials  on  your 
harness  are  the  safest  badge.  If  you  are  a  gentle- 
man, it  will  probably  show  itself  most  conspic- 
uously by  the  fact  that  you  never  remind  others 
of  it  and  never  forget  it  yourself.  If  either 
technically  or  morally  you  are  not  a  gentleman, 
no  sign  and  motto  will  make  you  one.  Indeed, 
some  badges  on  harness  only  serve  to  make  con- 
spicuous the  fact  that  the  horses  are  better  bred 
than  the  owners.  This  is  a  comparison  that 
should  be  avoided.     It  is  not  fair  to  the  horses. 

Lastly,  in  writing  of  harness,  it  is  proper  to 
remind  the  horse  owner  that  his  harness  like  his 
horse  improves  by  use  and  proper  care  after  use. 
Therefore  avoid  having  too  much  harness.  Unless 
you  are  a  constant  exhibitor  in  the  show  ring, 
you  can  adapt  your  harnesses,  if  they  are  all 
made  in  the  same  general  pattern  as  to  pads, 
blinkers,  terrets,  brow-bands,  and  the  like,  to  many 
uses. 

A  runabout  harness  of  heavy  make,  with  part 
of  a  double  harness  for  your  leader  and  a  pair  of 
long  reins  and  a  pair  of  traces  and  terrets  that 
screw  in  and  can  be  taken  off,  fit  you  out  with  a 
tandem  harness.  One  heavy  and  one  light  set 
of  double  harness  with  similar  arrangements  as  to 
reins  and  terrets  will  fit  you  out  with  a  four-in- 
hand  harness ;  and  if  you  stick  to  about  the  same 


Harness  283 

type  of  horse,  with  your  saddlers  in  the  lead  and 
your  harness  horses  in  the  wheel,  you  may  have 
all  the  varieties  of  driving  without  undue  expense 
and  without  an  over-accumulation  of  harness. 


CHAPTER    X 

THE   AMERICAN   HORSE 

By  far  the  most  interesting  type  of  horse  to 
the  American  is  the  American  trotting-horse,  not 
only  for  the  reason  that  he  is  of  our  own  develop- 
ment, but  because  in  one  way  or  another  he  does 
duty  for  our  harness  horse,  in  practically  every 
capacity  except  as  a  draught  animal.  He  is  known 
to  horsemen  the  world  over  as  the  most  docile  and 
most  versatile  of  horses.  He  has  been  developed 
and  trained  to  go  a  mile  in  two  minutes,  and  he 
has  been  trained  to  step  high,  and  to  prove  himself 
to  be  in  the  highest  class  of  harness  horse,  and  he 
is  not  bad  under  saddle.  Indeed,  more  than  one 
blue-ribbon  winner  under  the  saddle  from  Virginia 
and  Kentucky  is  of  this  same  stock.  This  docility 
is  shown  in  the  wonderful  performance  of  Belle 
Hamlin,  Justina,  and  Globe,  driven  a  mile,  three 
abreast,  in  2.14  by  Ed.  Geers. 

In  writing  of  the  American  trotting-horse  one 
is  confronted  at  the  outset  with  the  question  of 
from  what  standpoint  he  is  to  be  considered; 
whether  as  race-horse,  road-horse,  heavy  harness 
horse,  or  general  utility  horse,  as  in  all  of  these 
capacities  he  is  without  an  equal,  and  almost 
without  a  competitor. 


The  American  Horse  285 

The  American  trotting-horse  is  the  result  of 
the  development  of  a  type  produced  from  hetero- 
geneous breeds ;  and  while  several  districts  of  the 
country  had  their  favorite  strains  of  blood,  there 
was  no  system  of  breeding  which  promised  sure 
results  until  Hambletonian  stamped  his  offspring 
with  speed,  and  the  instinct  to  trot ;  which  have 
been  developed  by  the  breeding  of  horses  with 
speed  already  developed  or  with  speed  inherit- 
ance. Trotters  may  now  be  bred,  with  a  certainty 
that  the  produce  will  at  least  excel  in  speed  horses 
of  any  other  breed,  and  with  a  likelihood  of  great 
speed. 

The  breeding  of  Hambletonian  (Plate  XXVII.), 
who  traces  back  to  Messenger  on  side  of  both 
sire  and  dam,  has  never  been  questioned. 
Messenger  was  imported  to  Philadelphia  from 
England  in  1788.  He  was  a  gray  stallion  by 
Mambrino,  first  dam  by  Turf,  second  dam  by 
Regulus,  third  dam  by  Starling,  fourth  dam  by 
Fox,  fifth  dam  Gipsey,  by  Bay  Bolton,  sixth  dam 
by  Duke  of  Newcastle's  Turk,  seventh  dam  by 
Byerly  Turk,  eighth  dam  by  Taffolet  Barb,  ninth 
dam  by  Place's  White  Turk.  He  was  eight  years 
old  when  he  came  over. 

The  breeding  of  the  dam  of  Hambletonian, 
known  as  the  Charles  Kent  mare,  is  only  ques- 
tioned by  those  who,  having  failed  in  breeding 
on    other  lines,  have  sought  relief  by  attacking 


286  Driving 

Hambletonian's  breeding,  conformation,  disposi- 
tion, and  individuality,  without  considering  that 
his  record  in  the  stud  disproves  any  and  every 
contention  of  the  kind.  There  is  no  success  like 
success.  At  any  rate,  all  agree  that  the  greatest 
success  in  breeding  trotters  has  been  achieved  by 
a  liberal  use  of  Hambletonian  blood ;  and  a 
winner  with  none  of  his  blood  is  a  curiosity. 
From  Dexter,  with  a  record  of  2.17^  in  1867  down 
to  Lou  Dillon  with  a  record  of  1.58J  in  1903, 
every  champion  trotter  except  one  is  known  to 
have  carried  Hambletonian's  blood,  and  the  ex- 
ception probably  did.  The  2.10  list  of  to-day 
contains  few  without  Hambletonian  blood. 

That  Hambletonian  impressed  his  progeny 
with  the  trotting  instinct,  and  that  this  remains 
through  generations,  is  shown  by  the  history  of 
the  Dexter  branch  of  the  family.  Dexter's  full 
brother  Dictator  founded  a  family  which  increases 
in  number  of  winners  yearly.  This  is  also  true  of 
his  other  offspring  who  were  properly  bred  and 
developed. 

Whether  Hambletonian  inherited  his  ability  to 
impress  his  progeny  with  the  trotting  brain  from 
the  Arab,  the  thoroughbred,  the  hackney,  or 
the  native  horse,  is  immaterial ;  that  he  had  that 
ability  from  some  source,  the  stud  book  proves 
beyond  peradventure.  Whatever  combination 
produced  him  it  was  a  fortunate  day  for  American 


The  American  Horse  287 

horse-breeding  when  he  was  produced  and  placed 
in  Orange  County,  New  York,  where  there  were 
many  good  mares  for  him  and  where  soil  and 
water  and  climate  all  worked  together  for  the  good 
of  his  offspring  and  enabled  him  to  found  perhaps 
the  best  all-round  type  of  horse  in  the  world. 

All  of  Hambletonian's  get  had  the  instinct  to 
trot,  and  by  breeding  to  those  also  having  this 
instinct,  which  was  of  necessity  in-breeding,  it  has 
been  increased  until  the  trot  is  their  natural  gait, 
and  three-year-olds  trot  as  fast  as  the  champion 
of  thirty  years  ago.  While  it  has  taken  nearly  a 
century  to  reduce  the  trotting  record  a  minute, 
and  while  this  reduction  has  been  helped  by  im- 
proved tracks,  sulkies,  methods  of  training  and 
shoeing,  no  one  will  question  that  the  percentage 
of  horses  who  can  trot  fast  has  increased  to  such 
an  extent  that  a  horse  to  trot  in  2.20  is  easier  to 
find  to-day  than  a  three-minute  horse  thirty  years 
ago. 

The  breed  of  American  trotting-horse  is  of 
such  recent  origin,  only  five  generations  from 
Hambletonian  to  Lou  Dillon,  that  it  is  not  to  be 
wondered  at  that  the  type  is  not  exact,  and  that 
there  are  instances  of  reversion  to  outcrosses 
which  produce  individuals  which  subject  the 
breed  to  criticism  from  those  who  judge  quickly 
rather  than  calmly. 

There  is  practically  no  question  that  intelligent 


288  Driving 

breeding  to  a  type  will  produce  that  type.  This 
is  proved  by  the  phenomenal  success  of  the 
Messrs.  Hamlin.  When  Mr.  C.  J.  Hamlin  en- 
tered the  breeding  business,  he  stated  that  he  pro- 
posed to  breed  not  only  speed,  but  beauty ;  and  for 
years  Village  Farm  was  not  only  the  home  of  the 
champions,  but  its  produce  was  the  most  uniform 
and  beautiful  known.  The  great  majority  of  the 
Hamlin  horses  bear  the  imprint  of  that  grand 
horse  Mambrino  King,  who  for  several  years  called 
forth  spontaneous  cheers,  and  applause,  at  Madi- 
son Square  Garden,  captivating  the  audience  by 
his  distinguished  gait  and  bearing. 

In  conformation,  the  trotter  has  two  distinctive 
differences  from  the  runner,  in  that  the  trotter  is 
longer  in  the  body,  than  he  is  high,  and  is  higher 
at  the  coupling,  or  rump,  than  at  the  withers. 
These  differences,  no  doubt,  are  to  accommodate 
the  structure  to  the  rotary  gait  rather  than  to  the 
series  of  jumps  of  the  runner.  The  trotter  is 
steadily  improving  not  only  in  speed,  but  in  beauty, 
and  it  is  only  a  matter  of  shoeing  and  education  to 
make  him  step  high  for  heavy  harness  use.  Pho- 
tographs show  that  all  trotters  at  speed,  step  high 
at  some  point  in  their  stride,  and  shoeing  and 
bitting  will  so  change  the  stride  that  it  develops 
a  more  circular  form,  and  the  grit  and  instinct  to 
trot  enables  them  to  go  fast,  high,  and  far,  as  com- 
pared to  any  other  high  stepper. 


Tbe  American  Horse  289 

In  every  use,  other  than  draught-horse  work, 
the  trotter  stands  alone  as  a  general  utility 
horse.  The  intelligence  and  nervous  restraint 
which  makes  the  two-minute  trotter  a  possibility 
also  makes  him,  when  used  as  a  carriage  horse, 
safer  than  any  other,  even  when  surrounded  by 
the  many  hideous  objects  and  noises  he  must  face 
in  the  city  streets  of  to-day.  Prominent  coaching 
men  say  that  no  horse  in  the  world  can  draw  a 
loaded  coach  at  the  same  speed,  and  stand  the 
work  so  well,  as  the  American  trotting-bred  horse. 

The  road-horse  is  a  strictly  American  institution, 
and  the  possession  of  a  trotter  is  about  the  first 
sign  of  prosperity  of  a  successful  American  who 
lives  outside  of  our  great  cities,  where  he  is  not 
influenced  by  the  desire  for  show.  The  typical 
road-horse  should  have  substance  so  that  he  can 
draw  two  men  twelve  miles  an  hour  with  pleasure 
to  them  and  comfort  to  himself.  He  should  have 
speed  enough  to  acquit  himself  creditably  in 
friendly  brushes.  Together  with  these  qualities 
he  should  have  looks  and  manners.  No  breed 
of  horse  except  the  American  trotter  combines 
the  conformation,  speed,  and  brain,  to  fulfil  these 
requirements. 

The  attached  diagram  and  table,  taken  from 
the  New  York  Herald  after  Lou  Dillon  had 
trotted  in  two  minutes,  shows  clearly  the  progress 
of  the  trotter  in  the  last  hundred  years. 


290  Driving 

TOOK   NEARLY  A   CENTURY   TO   GAIN   A   MINUTE 


In  1806  Yankee  lopped  a  Second  from  the  Three-minute 

Mark  and  Ninety-seven  Years  later  Even 

Figures  are  attained 


The  following  table  shows  the  records  of  the  trotting  cham- 
pions since  1806  and  the  distance  which  Lou  Dillon  would 
have  beaten  each  of  them  in  a  mile  race. 


Record 

FOR 

One  Mile 


Year 
Made 


Distance 

COVERED 

IN    FEET 

EACH 

Second 


No.  Feet 

TROTTED 
IN   2.00 


No.  Feet 

BEHIND 

Lou 
Dillon 


Yankee 
Boston  Horse 
Trouble 
Sally  Miller    . 
Edwin  Forrest 
Confidence     . 
Dutchman 
Lady  Suffolk  . 
Pelham      .     . 
Highland  Maid 
Flora  Temple 
Dexter  .     .     . 
Goldsmith  Maid 
Rams    .     . 
St.  Julien  . 
Jay-Eye-See 
Maud  S.     . 
Sunol    .     . 
Nancy  Hanks 
Mix       .     . 
The  Abbot 
Cresceus    . 
Lou  Dillon 


2.59 

2.48^ 

2432 

2-37 

2.36^ 

2.36 

2.32 

2.29I 

2.28 

2.27 

2.19I 

2.17i 

2.14 
2.13? 

2.1l| 

2.10 

2. 08 1 

2.08J 

2.04 

2.03f 

2-03i 


1806 
I8I0 
1826 
1834 
1838 


1845 
1849 

1853 
1859 
1867 
1874 
1878 
1880 
1884 
1885 
I89I 
1892 
1894 

1900 
I90I 

1903 


29.49 

31-33 
32.28 

33-63 
33-74 
3385 
34-73 
35-32 
35-67 
35-92 
37-77 
38-47 
39-40 
39.62 
40.22 
40.61 
41.01 
41.17 
42.58 
42.65 
42.84 

43-19 
44.00 


3,539 
3,760 

3,874 
4,036 
4,049 
4,062 
4,168 
4,238 
4,280 
4,310 
4,532 
4,626 
4,728 

4,755 
4,826 

4,873 
4,921 
4,940 
5,109 
5,118 
5,141 
5,199 
5,280 


1,741 

1,520 

1,416 

1,244 

1,231 

1,218 

1,112 

1,042 

1,000 

970 

748 

654 

552 

525 

427 

380 

342 

313 

154 

145 

122 

81 


The  American  Horse  291 

LOU   DILLON'S   DESCENT   FROM    HAMBLETONIAN 
IN   THE    MALE   LINE 

Lou  Dillon  is  fifth  in  descent  from  Hambletonian  in  the 
male  hne.     This  pedigree  is  as  follows :  — 

LOU   DILLON 

SIDNEY  DILLON 

SIDNEY 

SANTA   GLAUS 

STRATHMORE 
HAMBLETONIAN 

As  to  the  training  and  education  of  the  trotter, 
that  is  a  science  which  would  require  a  book  in 
and  of  itself.  Of  the  training  of  the  trotting-bred 
road-horse,  no  two  men  probably  pursue  exactly 
the  same  methods,  and  no  two  horses  require 
exactly  the  same  treatment,  hence  no  hard  and 
fast  rules  can  be  laid  down  for  every  man  or  for 
every  horse.  Each  man  can  only  give  the  fruit 
of  his  own  practical  experience,  judiciously  mixed 
with  the  experience  of  others. 

The  first  lesson  cannot  be  given  too  soon. 
The  day  the  foal  is  born  it  should  be  handled,  and 
made  to  feel,  even  at  that  tender  age,  that  man  is 
its  friend  and  master.  This  should  be  repeated 
every  day  for  several  weeks,  or  even  longer,  until 
the  foal  is  perfectly  gentle  and  friendly  toward 
its  attendant,  allowing  itself  to  be  stroked  and 
patted,  and  each  leg  in  turn  to  be  lifted  so  that 


292  Driving 

the  hoof  may  be  examined  and  attended  to,  a 
small  halter  put  on  and  taken  off,  and  by  degrees 
the  foal  gradually  accustomed  to  lead  and  stand  to 
halter.  With  a  little  patience  and  judgment,  all 
this  can  be  accomplished  by  the  time  the  foal 
is  a  month  old,  simply  through  kindness  and 
coaxing. 

Most  breeders  leave  all  this  undone,  letting  the 
foals  run  wild  until  they  are  weaned,  when  they 
are  roughly  and  partially  broken  by  sheer  force 
and  awkwardness  combined.  Sometimes  this  is 
not  done  till  they  are  yearlings,  or  even  older. 
The  educating  methods  when  they  are  young 
give  the  best  results.  These  first  lessons  are 
never  forgotten,  and  the  foal  is  practically  born 
in  an  atmosphere  of  docility  and  obedience.  He 
gains  confidence  in  his  master  or  attendant,  and 
never  really  learns  to  fight  back  at  the  end  of  a 
halter  strap,  and  is  much  more  willing  to  accept 
passively  what  may  follow  later  on. 

Instead  of  being  in  a  state  of  terrorized  obe- 
dience and  fearful  of  being  hurt  every  time  he  is 
approached  by  man  with  a  strap  or  a  piece  of 
harness  in  his  hands,  he  comes  to  look  upon  his 
training  as  agreeable  play. 

Before  the  foal  is  weaned  he  should  be  tied  up 
by  the  halter  rope  to  a  small  manger  in  the  stall 
with  his  dam,  long  enough  to  finish  a  small  feed 
of  crushed  oats,  and  this  should  be  continued  as 


1 

i-^y^ 

■''4^        ■-'"-*'■*' 

^ 

-i^-'amj^ 

.-#^ 

« 

.»'   ■         ■ 

_  ■'  U 

PLATE   XXVII.  — HAMBLETONIAN 


":":   J 

PLATE   XXVHI.  — GEORGE   WILKES 


The  American  Horse  293 

part  of  his  daily  routine.  He  will  fret  much  less 
after  being  weaned  when  this  is  done. 

His  first  lessons  to  harness  should  be  given 
soon  after  being  weaned,  during  the  winter  that 
he  becomes  a  yearling.  A  surcingle  may  be  first 
thrown  over  his  back  and  loosely  buckled  at  first, 
then  gradually  tightened  up.  Being  already  used 
to  the  halter,  he  will  not  object  to  a  snug-fitting 
bridle.  A  leather  bit  is  preferable  to  any  other 
for  a  young  colt.  By  degrees  the  rest  of  the 
harness  may  be  put  on  with  little  or  no  trouble. 
If  the  colt  is  suspicious,  let  him  see,  smell,  and 
nose  the  harness  before  putting  it  on.  The  colt 
should  be  led  around  with  long  reins,  taught  to 
turn  to  either  side,  to  stop  at  the  word  "whoa," 
and  also  to  back.  Then  he  may  be  hitched  up  to 
a  small  cart,  especially  built,  with  long  shafts,  low 
to  the  ground  and  running  out  behind  the  wheels, 
so  as  to  prevent  rearing  should  this  be  attempted. 
It  is  well,  also,  always  to  use  a  strong  kicking-strap, 
on  the  theory  that  "an  ounce  of  prevention  is 
worth  a  pound  of  cure."  With  such  a  cart  and 
harness  and  lessons  two  or  three  times  a  week  when 
the  weather  is  pleasant,  wonderful  progress  will 
often  be  made  before  it  is  time  to  turn  the  year- 
ling out  to  grass. 

Next  winter  he  is  coming  two  years  old,  and 
when  taken  up,  the  harness  lessons  should  be  re- 
sumed, this  time  to  regulation  road-cart.     At  this 


294  Driving 

stage  a  plain  snaffle-bit  should  be  used.  An  aver- 
as^e  of  twice  a  week  in  harness  will  be  found  suffi- 
cient,  although  a  short  drive  every  pleasant  day 
may  be  indulged  in.  The  colt  should  have  the 
run  of  a  paddock  for  exercise.  The  bitting  rig 
may  now  be  used  to  give  the  colt  a  good  mouth,  a 
most  essential  thing,  for  there  is  no  comfort  in 
driving  a  horse  with  a  mean  mouth.  It  is  assumed 
that  all  the  driving  is  done  with  a  light  hand, 
otherwise,  instead  of  a  road-horse,  a  rank  puller  is 
being  developed. 

A  young  horse  in  harness  can  hardly  be  accus- 
tomed at  too  early  a  stage  to  different  sights  and 
sounds,  provided  they  are  introduced  to  him  with 
judgment  and  in  a  way  not  calculated  to  frighten 
him.  He  should  become  acquainted  with  dogs, 
cows,  and  such  things  as  he  is  liable  to  meet  on 
the  road.  An  umbrella  open  or  shut  should  have 
no  terrors  for  him.  In  showing  him  an  umbrella 
and  gradually  opening  it,  —  and  putting  it  over 
his  head  and  all  about  him,  —  it  is  well  to  bear  in 
mind  that  a  colt  should  be  educated  on  both 
sides.  Whatever  is  done  on  the  near  side  should 
be  repeated  on  the  off  side.  Carts  should  be  rat- 
tled and  pushed  up  against  his  haunches, and  a  hun- 
dred and  one  things  of  the  sort  done, — all  of  which 
will  suggest  themselves  to  a  careful  trainer.  A 
horse  has  little  or  no  reasoning  power.  He  has  a 
tenacious  memory.     What  he  has  seen  and  knows 


The  American  Horse  295 

does  not  harm  him,  he  is  not  afraid  of.  What  he 
has  not  seen  he  dreads,  and  being  naturally  the 
most  timid  of  all  animals,  he  instinctively  and 
instantly  thinks  of  flight,  as  his  sole  chance  of 
escape.  Confidence  in  his  driver  will  counteract 
to  a  certain  extent  his  dread  and  his  thoughts  of 
flight.  A  horse  that  is  whipped  past  an  object  he 
is  afraid  of  is  being  forced  to  choose  the  lesser  of 
two  evils,  and  in  proportion  to  the  extent  of  his 
fear  must  be  the  severity  of  the  whipping  to 
induce  him  to  pass  the  dreaded  object.  Some 
horsemen  pride  themselves  on  their  ability  to 
"  make "  a  horse  pass  anything  or  go  anywhere. 
This  method  ruins  a  horse  for  pleasure  driving, 
for  when  he  sees  something  which  frightens  him, 
he  knows  he  is  between  two  fires.  Ultimately,  he 
may  be  cowed  into  submission  and  pass  things 
without  starting,  but  his  spirit  is  broken,  and  he 
is  no  longer  a  gentleman's  road-horse. 

The  better  plan  is  to  gradually  accustom  a 
horse  to  steam  cars,  trolley  cars,  automobiles, 
steam  rollers,  etc.,  taking  him  a  little  nearer  each 
time,  and  encouraging  him  with  voice  and  rein  to 
pass.  Not  every  man  will  succeed  in  doing  this. 
Your  true  horseman,  like  your  poet,  is  born  and 
not  made.  Before  bringing  his  charge  to  this 
point,  he  will  have  absolute  control  of  his  young 
horse,  and  the  horse  has  every  confidence  in  his 
driver.     The  driver  is  confident  and  fearless,  and, 


296  Driving 

knowing  thoroughly  the  nature  and  limited  capac- 
ity of  his  pupil,  so  manages  things  that  the  confi- 
dence and  fearlessness  are  mutual,  and  so  in  time 
the  horse  responds  cheerfully  and  fearlessly  to  the 
slightest  wish  of  his  driver.  In  the  hands  of  a 
timid,  nervous  man,  the  same  horse  is  likely  to 
develop  into  a  dangerous  shyer,  if  not  a  puller  or 
a  runaway. 

Every  harness-horse  should  be  taught  to  back 
and  to  stand.  He  should  understand  this  before 
being  harnessed  to  a  cart,  and  time  and  care  can- 
not be  better  employed  than  in  making  him  pro- 
ficient in  both  backing  and  stopping  at  the  word 
of  command,  with  every  vehicle  to  which  he  may 
be  harnessed.  A  horse  may  do  both  every  time 
he  is  asked  in  a  two-wheeled  cart,  and  yet  refuse 
to  do  either  and  have  to  be  taught  all  over  again 
when  put  to  a  four-wheeled  vehicle. 

Another  valuable  accomplishment  is  to  walk 
fast.  A  lazy  driver  will  sometimes  make  a  slow 
walker  of  a  naturally  fast  one,  but  this  should  not 
be  tolerated.  Some  colts  are  naturally  inclined 
to  poke  along  at  a  snail's  pace  when  walking,  and 
are  most  satisfactory  in  every  other  respect. 
They  will  acquire  the  habit  of  brisk  walking  if 
they  are  harnessed  double  with  a  fast-walking 
horse.  It  is  time  well  spent  in  teaching  a  horse 
to  acquire  the  habit. 

In  driving  young  horses  to  pole,  they  should 


The  American  Horse  297 

be  driven  different  days  on  alternate  sides,  —  first 
on  the  near  side,  then  on  the  off  side,  or  vice 
versa. 

Open  bridles  should  be  used  to  begin  with,  and 
afterwards  the  blind  bridle  may  be  substituted. 
A  driving-horse  should  be  equally  at  home  with 
either  kind.  While  a  plain  snaffle  is  preferable 
for  most  horses,  it  will  not  always  answer.  In 
that  case,  the  only  way  is  to  experiment  with  dif- 
ferent bits  until  a  suitable  one  is  found.  A 
severe  bit  should  never  be  used  except  as  a  last 
resort. 

The  abuse  of  overdraw  checks  cannot  be  too 
severely  reprobated.  Many  a  good  horse  has  his 
mouth  and  temper  ruined,  and  his  neck  muscles 
made  rigid  instead  of  remaining,  as  they  should, 
flexible  and  pliable,  by  the  inordinate  craze  for 
the  "  Kimball  Jackson "  check.  Some  horses 
may,  and  probably  do,  require  it;  but,  in  my 
opinion,  they  are  few  and  far  between.  Many 
road  drivers  seem  to  think  such  a  check  must  be 
used  on  a  fast  trotter.  It  is  well  to  recall  that 
Jay- Eye-See,  the  first  horse  to  trot  a  mile  in  2.10, 
was  driven  with  a  side-check;  and  Lou  Dillon, 
who  has  trotted  a  mile  in  1.58J,  and  is  the  two- 
minute  marvel  of  the  day,  goes  without  any  check 
whatever.  These  two  noted  examples  should 
silence  all  arguments  about  the  necessity  for  an 
overdraw  check  in  order  to  increase  the  speed. 


298  Driving 

The  pleasure  of  a  driving-horse  depends  as 
much  as  anything  else  upon  his  stopping  and 
standing  wherever  and  whenever  you  wish  him  to 
do  so.  Young  horses  are  often  impatient  of  this 
restraint,  coming  at  irregular  intervals  and  places, 
and  it  is  one  of  the  hardest  things  to  train  a  horse 
to  do.  A  good  plan  is  to  have  them  follow 
behind  a  wagon,  particularly  if  loaded  with  hay, 
and  have  the  wagon  start  and  stop,  and  the  colt 
you  are  driving  behind  it  do  likewise.  This 
stopping  and  starting  seems  to  him  more  natural, 
coming  as  it  does  from  the  forcible  argument  of  a 
load  of  hay  in  front  of  him,  rather  than  a  pulling 
on  his  mouth  from  behind. 

Just  as  the  American  trotting-bred  horse  makes 
the  most  agreeable  harness-horse  in  the  world,  so 
he  is  well  worth  all  the  time  and  patience  required 
to  make  him  what  he  can  become.  A  few  months' 
kindliness,  firmness,  and  patience  when  his  school- 
ing begins  mean  years  of  pleasure  and  safety  to 
his  owner  later  on.  Above  all,  get  all  idea  out  of 
your  head  of  "  breaking  "  a  horse.  He  is  the  last 
animal  in  the  world  to  be  made  companionable  or 
useful  by  being  beaten  and  roughly  handled  and, 
as  the  phrase  is,  *'  broken."  In  his  bitting,  har- 
nessing, and  handling  he  should  be  made  to  do 
things  by  patience  rather  than  by  force.  The  no- 
tion that  a  horse  should  never  be  allowed  to  refuse 
to  do  what  is  required  of  him,  but  that  he  should 


The  American  Horse  299 

there  and  then  be  beaten  into  obedience  is  not 
only  a  false  notion,  but  results  badly.  Instead  of 
thrashing  him  past  what  he  shies  at,  it  is  far 
better  in  the  end  to  keep  at  the  problem  day  after 
day  until  he  learns  through  habit  rather  than  by 
the  whalebone.  It  takes  more  time,  but  in  the 
end  the  results  are  far  more  satisfactory.  It  is  in 
these  early  days  of  the  training  of  the  road-horse 
or  harness-horse  that  the  wise  owner  puts  all  he 
knows  of  bitting,  harnessing,  shoeing,  and  feeding 
into  practice.  It  is  at  these  times,  too,  that  he 
learns  by  scores  of  experiments  which  of  the 
many  counsels  he  has  read  or  listened  to  is  the 
wisest.  It  may  be  said,  indeed,  that  an  owner  is 
and  remains  partially  ignorant  and  incompetent, 
until  he  has  watched  and  bitted  and  driven,  day 
after  day,  an  equine  problem  of  his  own. 


CHAPTER  XI 

A   CHAPTER   OF   LITTLE   THINGS 

The  success  of  every  drive,  whether  with  one 
horse,  two  horses,  four  horses,  or  six  horses, 
depends  upon  three  things :  the  comfort  of  your 
horse,  yourself,  and  your  passengers. 

Of  the  comfort  of  the  horse  much  has  been 
said  already,  and  all  that  has  been  said  may  well 
be  emphasized  and  even  repeated.  He  should  be 
ready  to  go  out,  that  is,  not  too  soon  after  nor  too 
long  after  feeding.  His  bit  and  harness  should 
be  comfortable  and  adequate  to  the  work  he  is  to 
do.  His  shoes  and  feet  should  be  in  good  con- 
dition. If  a  horse  is  properly  looked  after  by  his 
caretaker  in  the  stable,  casting  a  shoe  should  be 
a  rare  occurrence.  The  horse  being  comfortable 
at  the  start,  ever^-body's  comfort  behind  him 
depends  upon  his  being  kept  comfortable.  He 
should  not  be  asked  to  go  too  fast  or  too  slow,  or 
asked  to  do  too  much  at  one  time,  and  his  mouth 
should  be  kept  fresh. 

As  for  the  coachman,  his  harness,  too,  should  fit 
him.  The  writer  has  seen  a  rein  dropped  and  a 
horse  in  a  four  go  sprawling  on  the  pavement,  all 
300 


A  Chapter  of  Little  Things  301 

on  account  of  the  ill-fitting  hat  of  the  coachman, 
who  was  grabbing  at  his  head-gear  at  an  inoppor- 
tune moment.  It  is  even  a  matter  of  consequence, 
if  you  are  to  be  the  custodian  of  other  people's 
safety  on  a  drive,  that  your  hat  should  fit  you  well 
enough  to  stay  on,  even  in  a  fresh  breeze. 

Gloves  should  be  of  dogskin,  and  at  least  a 
size  too  big.  Your  hand  should  be  able  to  bend 
as  though  there  was  no  glove  on  it.  If  the  glove 
is  not  as  big  as  this,  or  even  bigger,  your  reins 
will  slip  toward  the  middle  of  your  fingers,  where 
they  should  not  be,  but  held  snug  in  toward  the 
roots  of  the  fingers ;  and  you  cannot  easily  bend 
your  hand  round  to  make  a  pivot  of  your  wrist, 
upon  which  the  whole  easy  give-and-take  between 
the  hand  and  the  horse's  mouth  depends.  In 
our  hot  climate  it  makes  for  coolness  in  summer 
to  punch  a  few  holes  in  the  backs  of  the  gloves, 
and  turn  over  the  wrists  on  to  the  backs  of  the 
hands.  Driving  gloves  with  only  one  seam  up 
and  down  the  fingers  are  the  most  comfortable 
(see  plates). 

A  pair  of  woollen  gloves  should  always  be  taken 
in  tandem  or  four-in-hand  driving  to  use  in  case 
of  wet  weather.  Nobody  can  drive  in  tight-fitting 
gloves.  You  may  steer  and  pull,  but  drive,  never. 
Every  single  suggestion  as  to  holding  and  finger- 
ing the  reins  is  negatived  if  tight  gloves  are  worn. 
It   then  becomes  a  physical   impossibility  to  so 


302  Driving 

manoeuvre  hands,  wrists,  and  fingers  that  the 
horse's  mouth  shall  have  a  chance.  Wet  gloves 
can  be  got  in  shape  and  flexibility  again  by  the 
use  of  Crown  soap  well  rubbed  into  them  while 
they  are  wet.  When  they  are  dry  again,  they  will 
be  as  good  as  ever. 

In  the  matter  of  the  driver's  cushion,  it  is  well 
to  be  above  your  horse,  even  in  a  runabout.  This 
gives  better  control,  more  power,  and  keeps  the 
reins  off  the  horse's  back,  so  that  they  may  come 
back  directly  from  the  pad-terrets  to  the  hand. 
The  cushion  should  always,  in  whatever  vehicle, 
be  of  cloth,  and  tufted  to  avoid  slipping.  You 
will  have  enough  to  do  without  using  your  legs 
as  props  to  hold  you  on  your  seat.  So  much 
depends  upon  the  physical  proportions  of  the 
coachman  that  it  is  impossible  to  give  figures  as 
to  the  proper  size  and  slant  of  cushion.  Three 
inches  and  a  half  is  a  fair  slant  of  cushion.  The 
knees  should  be  bent  at  a  comfortable  angle,  and 
the  feet  resting  on  the  foot-board  in  such  a  way 
that  the  ankles  are  not  bent  at  an  uncomfortable 
angle.  In  driving  two  as  a  pair  or  tandem,  or 
four  horses,  this  matter  of  a  comfortable  and 
secure  seat  is  important,  and  will  repay  consider- 
able attention. 

If  for  any  reason  —  as  in  the  case  of  a  dog-cart 
balanced  at  different  angles — the  distance  between 
the  seat  and  the  foot-board  is  altered,  or  where 


A  Chapter  of  Little  Things  303 

a  child  or  short-legged  person  needs  a  brace  for 
the  feet,  never  under  any  circumstances  have  a 
rail.  A  foot-board  covered  with  corrugated  rub- 
ber made  to  fit  in,  and  which  can  be  taken  out 
when  not  needed,  is  all  that  is  necessary.  A  rail 
across  the  bottom  of  the  foot-board,  often  seen  in 
the  lighter  style  of  vehicles,  such  as  buggies,  buck- 
boards,  and  the  like,  is  an  invention  of  the  devil 
and  most  dangerous.  It  is  entirely  unnecessary, 
and  it  is  easy  to  catch  your  toe  or  toes  underneath 
it,  and  the  consequences  may  be  horribly  serious. 
In  one  case  a  lady,  catching  a  low  shoe  under  such 
a  rail  and  struggling  to  get  it  out,  was  thrown 
over  the  dash-board  between  her  horses  and 
killed.  Such  a  rail  serves  no  real  purpose  and 
has  no  possible  defence  except  a  very  short- 
sighted economy.  If  your  light  vehicle  has  such 
a  rail  as  a  rest  for  the  feet,  either  take  it  out  or 
put  another  rail  across  parallel  to  it  so  that  it  is 
impossible  to  catch  even  the  toes  underneath  it. 

If  a  horse  gets  his  tail  over  a  rein,  stop  him 
and  lift  his  tail  off  the  rein ;  do  not  jerk  the  rein 
from  under  the  tail.  A  clever  whip,  driving 
tandem  or  four,  can  often,  by  a  judicious  turn- 
ing of  the  horse  and  a  flick  with  the  whip,  make 
the  horse  take  his  tail  off  the  rein  himself,  but 
this  is  for  the  cognoscenti;  the  beginner  had 
best  take  the  safest  and  surest  way  out  of  trouble 
and   either  let  the  groom  or  his  passenger  help 


304  Driving 

him  out.  If  alone,  slow  up,  do  no  tugging  and 
jerking,  loosen  the  rein,  turn  your  horse  quickly 
and  decidedly  the  other  way,  and  flick  him  on  the 
quarters  with  the  whip.  If  it  were  not  that  every 
now  and  then  some  one  is  kicked  in  the  head  by 
leaning  over  the  dash-board  to  get  hold  of  the 
horse's  tail,  it  would  seem  unnecessary  to  forbid 
absolutely  such  a  copper-fastened  fool  proceeding. 

Of  docked  tails,  bearing-reins,  cruppers,  and 
the  like,  there  are,  season  after  season,  endless  dis- 
cussions. The  cause  of  the  discussion  is  usually 
due  not  to  a  wise,  but  to  a  cruel,  use  of  these,  and  is 
generally  carried  on  in  a  legislature  where  only 
a  small  minority  know  anything  of  the  horse 
except  as  a  quiet  farm  animal,  seldom  driven  out 
of  a  walk.  As  soon  as  the  Society  for  the  Pre- 
vention of  Cruelty  to  Animals  adds  to  its  board 
of  directors  half  a  dozen  theoretically  and  prac- 
tically competent  horsemen,  there  will  be  a  change 
for  the  better  in  these  matters,  both  practically 
and  legislatively. 

There  are  many  competent  horsemen  who  main- 
tain, and  with  reason,  that  the  long  tail  is  danger- 
ous, particularly  where  women  and  children  drive ; 
that  a  tail  over  the  rein  may  mean  a  mishap,  and 
probably  injury;  that  it  is  dirty,  bedraggles  and 
wets  the  legs,  and  with  the  fast-moving,  well-cared- 
for  carriage  horse  is  unnecessary,  even  to  his  com- 
fort.   This  does  not,  on  the  other  hand,  imply  that 


A  Chapter  of  Little  Things  305 

horses'  tails  should  be  docked  and  "  set  up  " ;  but 
it  does  point  to  a  happy  medium  between  the 
dangerous  and  dirty  long  tail  and  the  unneces- 
sarily short  dock.  The  question  should  not  be 
looked  upon  as  having  but  one  answer.  Men 
who  have  themselves  docked  horses  and  seen 
scores  of  horses  docked,  and  who  take  the  most 
instructed  care  of  their  horses,  are  naturally  pro- 
voked by  criticism  from  citizens  who  hardly  know 
that  a  horse's  tail  has  joints  in  it,  let  alone  any- 
thing about  the  feeding,  housing,  or  handling  even 
of  their  own  horses. 

So  very  few  people  know  how  much  there  is  to 
know  about  the  horse,  that  their  ignorance  neither 
oppresses,  nor  suppresses  them. 

As  for  the  bearing-rein,  here  again  the  question 
is  one  of  use.  For  the  misuse  of  the  bearing-rein 
there  is  no  defence.  The  bearing-rein  prevents 
shaking  about  of  the  head,  rubbing  off  of  the 
bridle,  catching  the  bit  or  bridle,  getting  the  head 
down  between  the  legs,  obstinate  boring;  and, 
driving  in  town,  it  is  a  valuable  piece  of  auxiliary 
harness.  Its  misuse,  to  hold  a  horse's  head  in  an 
unnatural  position  and  to  make  him  lift  his  feet, 
is  not  only  cruel,  but  vulgar  —  vulgar  being  used 
to  express  the  type  of  mind  that  measures  every- 
thing by  appearances. 

The  crupper  keeps  the  saddle  in  place,  helps 
materially   to    prevent    the    horse    from    getting 


3o6  Driving 

his  tail  over  the  rein,  and  disinclines  him  to 
kick. 

The  breeching  is,  or  ought  to  be,  considered 
indispensable  in  a  hilly  country,  even  with  light 
•vehicles,  and  is  a  proper  precaution  in  all  cases 
where  women  or  children  act  as  coachman. 

Brakes  are  a  French  invention,  and  might  be 
supposed  to  come  under  much  the  same  strictures 
as  the  breeching.  But  while  a  breeching  is  useful 
and  never  out  of  place,  except  perhaps  on  the 
leaders  where  horses  are  driven  in  front  of  each 
other,  the  brake  is  so  often  misused,  with  conse- 
quent damage  to  the  horse,  the  harness,  the  ve- 
hicle, and  the  skill  of  the  driver,  that  it  almost 
deserves  a  chapter  by  itself.  In  the  old  days  of 
heavy  coach-loads,  the  wheelers,  helped  by  the 
skilful  coachman,  took  the  coach  down  hill.  But 
a  mistake,  or  a  break  in  the  harness  or  the  pole, 
meant  disaster.  The  brake,  which  cramps  the 
wheels  and  takes  some  of  the  strain  of  holding 
back  off  the  horses,  was  a  valuable  invention. 

A  limited  amount  of  alcohol  given  at  the  right 
time  is  an  indispensable  medicine  and  a  boon  to 
the  race.  Alcohol  taken  at  all  times  and  generally 
by  the  wrong  persons,  in  the  wrong  places,  is  the 
curse  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  race.  England,  with 
one  in  forty  of  its  population  classed  as  incom- 
petent, is  the  story  of  the  misuse  of  alcohol. 

The  brake  shoved  on  violently  at  every  decliv- 


A  Chapter  of  Little  Things  307 

ity  racks  the  vehicles,  burdens  the  horse  by  not 
allowing  him  to  go  part  of  his  road  without  the 
weight  of  the  vehicle  behind  him,  puts  unneces- 
sary strain  on  the  harness  at  the  wrong  time,  and 
tends  to  make  the  coachman  careless.  The  brake 
shoved  on  with  a  jerk  at  every  stop  jars  every- 
body in  the  vehicle,  and  has  been  known,  not 
once,  but  often,  to  actually  chuck  people  clean 
out  of  the  vehicle,  both  behind  and  in  front,  be- 
sides bringing  the  horse  into  his  collar  with  a 
painful  galling  of  his  shoulders.  On  a  level  place 
the  brake  should  never  be  used  to  stop  the  vehicle. 
After  the  vehicle  has  been  stopped,  particularly  if 
it  be  a  heavy  one,  the  brake  may  be  put  on  and 
left  on  until  the  next  start  is  made  —  this  as  a 
measure  of  precaution. 

Never  put  on  the  brake  in  any  case  with  the 
whip  in  the  right  hand.  Transfer  your  whip  to 
the  left  hand  and  avoid  the  danger  of  flicking 
the  horse  in  front  of  you  by  dropping  it  toward 
him;  or  of  flicking  the  passengers  behind  you  by 
dropping  it  toward  them ;  and  above  all  avoid  the 
danger  of  breaking  or  losing  your  whip  altogether. 
When  the  brake  is  to  be  put  on,  you  need  your 
whole  hand  to  do  it.  Put  on  and  take  off  the 
brake  quietly.  Knowing  horses  will  often  start 
off  at  the  sound  of  the  brake.  The  brake  should 
not  be  regarded  as  a  regular  part  of  the  harness. 
It  is  good  for  a  horse  to  do  some  holding-back 


3o8  Driving 

work,  and  a  bad  habit  to  get  him  to  the  point 
where  he  shirks  this  part  of  the  work,  or  refuses 
to  do  it  at  all.  Then  in  case  the  brake  does  not 
work,  or  you  are  without  one,  the  refusal  may 
cause  trouble.  The  brake  is  only  for  use  when 
there  is  too  much  strain  on  horse  and  harness  — 
not  for  use  every  time  we  go  down  the  smallest 
declivity.  Such  use  of  it  spoils  rather  than  helps 
the  horse.  It  is  torture  to  a  passenger  to  see  and 
feel  the  brake  go  on,  before  the  descent  is  reached 
even,  and  then  kept  on  yards  after  there  is  no 
need  of  it.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  good  men  and 
good  horses  are  able  to  negotiate  any  ordinary 
road,  without  any  brake  at  all ;  it  is  a  precautionary 
measure  and  a  convenience.  But  for  all  driving 
in  hilly  country  by  the  average  coachman  it 
should  not  be  omitted,  nor  should  it  be  mis- 
used. Where  other  people  share  the  danger,  it 
is  always  best  to  err  on  the  safe  side.  Do  not 
start  down  any  hill  fast.  With  a  heavy  load,  and 
horses  well  in  hand,  you  may  put  on  steam  toward 
the  bottom  and  give  the  cattle  a  little  relief.  In 
going  up  a  hill,  do  not  become  impatient  and 
urge  horses  into  a  faster  pace  before  you  reach  the 
brow  of  the  hill.  It  is  hard  on  a  horse  to  pull  up 
a  hill,  and  then  to  be  forced  into  a  trot  just  before 
reaching  the  top,  where  the  strain  is  hardest.  Once 
on  the  level,  give  a  little  breathing-space  and  then 
start  along.      Remember  always,  whether  going 


A  Chapter  of  Little  Things  309 

down  hill,  or  approaching  a  troublesome  crowd  of 
vehicles,  or  with  a  corner  to  turn  ahead  of  you, 
that  the  time  to  slow  up  is  before  you  get  there. 
You  should  slow  up  with  your  eyes,  and  stop  with 
your  hands.  That  is  to  say,  you  should  begin 
operations  as  soon  as  your  eyes  discover  trouble 
ahead,  and  not  leave  it  to  the  last  moment ;  and 
then,  with  your  hands  in  the  air,  your  back  at  an 
angle  of  45°,  your  horses  on  their  haunches,  and 
the  carriage  on  top  of  them,  just  save  yourself. 
It  is  much  easier  to  avoid  trouble  than  to  get  out 
of  it.  If  you  are  alone,  and  with  no  one  depend- 
ent upon  you  for  support,  your  neck  is  your  own ; 
but  with  passengers,  for  whose  safety  you  have 
tacitly  pledged  yourself,  the  moment  you  take 
the  reins  you  have  no  right  to  take  the  smallest 
risk,  and  besides  you  are  in  honor  bound  to  use 
your  very  best  efforts  for  their  safety  and  com- 
fort. Above  all  things  do  not  fancy  that  you  are 
a  coachman,  because  you  own  horses  and  can 
drive  them.  Bad  driving  in  New  York  is  re- 
sponsible for  one  death  a  day  the  year  round. 

The  hands  should  be  carried  under  average  cir- 
cumstances at  about  the  level  of  the  watch  chain 
when  worn  in  the  lower  waistcoat  pocket;  the 
arm  horizontal  from  the  elbow,  which  position 
puts  the  hands  slightly  lower  than  the  elbow. 
But  this  direction  should  not  for  a  moment  be 
taken  as  a  hard  and  fast  rule.     You  will  see  first- 


3IO  Driving 

rate  coachmen,  some  with  the  hand  higher,  some 
with  the  hand  lower  than  this.  The  reasons  for 
the  differences  are  simple.  With  a  nicely  bitted 
team  in  a  show  ring  or  in  the  Park,  where  a 
touch  is  enough,  the  left  hand  if  raised  a  little  can 
be  turned  more  easily,  the  points  can  be  made  by 
the  right  hand  with  less  movement,  and  there  is 
no  danger  of  tiring  either  hand  or  arm.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  coachman  who  has  a  fifty-mile 
drive  before  him,  with  many  different  horses  to 
handle,  will  place  his  hand  lower,  with  more  com- 
fort to  himself,  and  with  less  risk  of  numbing  his 
hand  and  arm. 

Driving  with  the  hands  held  up  under  the  chin, 
or  out  in  front  of  one,  as  though  presenting  a 
visiting-card  on  a  tray,  are  merely  the  monkey 
mannerisms  of  the  ignorant.  This  is  often  the 
result  of  having  seen  others  drive  without  under- 
standing the  reasons  for  their  position  of  the 
hands.  Those  most  accomplished  coachmen, 
Howlett,  father  and  son,  in  teaching  hold  the 
hands  higher  than  the  ordinary  for  the  very 
sufficient  reason  that  they  can  handle  a  team 
admirably,  this  way  or  any  other  way,  and  because 
it  is  much  easier  to  show  the  pupil  what  is  going 
on  with  the  reins  and  fingers  in  that  position. 
But  when  young  Howlett  so  easily  distanced  his 
competitors,  and  won  the  five-hundred-dollar 
prize  at  the  Madison  Square  Garden,  he  did  not 


A  Chapter  of  Little  Things  311 

handle  the  reins  in  an  exaggerated  or  conspicuous 
fashion.  Holding  the  hands  too  high  is  con- 
spicuously awkward,  besides  showing  the  per- 
former to  be  ignorant  of  his  business  and  making 
it  exceedingly  difficult  to  pull  up  quietly  and 
quickly.  It  may  be  set  down  as  an  axiom,  that 
the  coachman  who  looks  self-conscious  and  in  a 
strained  position  is  doing  something  he  does  not 
understand,  because  he  guesses  it  is  right.  A 
snob  may  be  borne  with  on  dry  land ;  but  on  the 
cushion  he  is  dangerous.  The  institutional  bore 
who  illustrates  the  evident,  explains  the  obvious, 
and  expatiates  on  the  commonplace  is  merely  an 
irritant  at  dinner;  but  at  the  helm  of  a  boat  or 
behind  horses  his  slovenly  omniscience  presages, 
or  prepares  for,  disaster. 

But  more  than  any  other  one  thing,  inattention 
is  the  cause  of  most  accidents.  Something  goes 
wrong  because  the  coachman,  through  inattention, 
was  unprepared  for  it,  and  then  things  happen 
that  cannot  be  avoided.  Nine  runaways  out  of 
ten  begin  with  carelessness ;  once  started  there  is 
no  help  this  side  of  a  smash-up.  You  may  see 
not  once,  but  ten  times,  a  day  the  owner  of  a 
vehicle  put  down  his  reins,  get  out,  and  instead  of 
going  to  the  horse's  head,  until  the  groom  can 
get  to  the  reins,  walk  off.  The  writer  has  seen 
two  expensive  smash-ups  due  to  the  fact  that  a 
high-strung    horse,    startled    by    a    noise    or    an 


312  Driving 

unexpected  sight,  broke  away  while  the  groom  was 
getting  from  the  horse's  head  to  the  seat.  A 
horse  finding  himself  entirely  and  unexpectedly 
at  liberty,  loses  his  head  more  often  than  not,  and 
then  does  any  mad  thing,  from  kicking  to  running 
away,  that  comes  easiest. 

The  harness-horse,  it  is  to  be  remembered,  is 
always  under  control,  and  just  to  feel  no  restrain- 
ing hand  is  in  and  of  itself  enough  to  upset  him. 
Very  few  horses  if  restrained  in  time  can  get 
away  with  a  fairly  strong  man,  but  no  man  living 
can  stop  two,  or  even  one,  much  less  four  horses, 
once  they  get  the  jump  on  him  and  a  good  gal- 
loping start.  The  important  thing  is  to  keep  such 
watch  and  ward  that  the  horse  gets  no  chance  to 
get  even  one  jump  before  he  is  pulled  up,  and  that 
means  ceaseless  vigilance.  If  you  have  had  acci- 
dents,—  and  if  you  have  ridden  or  driven  much,  you 
have  had  accidents, — you  will  recall  that  the  cause 
was  unexpected,  and  things  happened  just  at  that 
particular  fraction  of  a  second  when  you  were  off 
your  guard.  In  teaching  any  one  to  drive,  par- 
ticularly children,  this  point  cannot  be  too  much 
emphasized.  The  eyes,  so  to  speak,  should  be  in 
the  boat,  or  in  equine  parlance  on  the  horse,  the 
whole  livelong  time,  —  from  the  moment  you  take 
up  the  reins  till  some  one  has  the  horse's  head  at 
the  end  of  the  journey.  Lacking  this  fundamen- 
tal axiom  of  all  driving,  everything  else  goes  for 
nothino-. 


A  Chapter  of  Little  Things  313 

The  whip  should  be  used  smartly  and  for  a 
purpose,  or  not  at  all.  It  is  best  to  hit  your 
horse  forward  of  his  pad  or  saddle,  except  where 
in  tandem  or  four-in-hand  driving  the  leaders 
should  be  hit  on  the  hind  legs,  under,  not  above, 
the  trace.  Never,  in  any  kind  of  driving,  use  your 
whip  with  the  rein  in  the  same  hand  as  the  whip. 
To  hit  a  horse  with  the  whip,  and  to  jab  him  in 
the  mouth  at  the  same  time,  renders  both  signals 
incomprehensible. 

The  reins  should  never  be  flopped  about  on 
the  horse's  back  in  lieu  of  the  whip.  This  jabs 
the  mouth,  confuses  the  horse,  and  puts  him  not 
only  to  confusion,  but  out  of  your  direct  control. 
The  connection  between  hand  and  bit  should 
never  be  cut  off  while  the  horse  is  in  motion, 
any  more  than  you  should  unship  your  rudder 
while  sailing  a  boat.  Do  not  turn  corners  too 
fast  nor  too  soon.  When  the  hub  of  your  front 
wheel  is  opposite  the  corner  you  are  to  turn,  even 
if  you  be  too  close  on  that  side,  there  is  little 
danger  of  hitting  even  with  the  hind  wheel. 
Above  all  things,  look  where  you  are  going  and 
watch  your  horse  !  In  any  sport  where  the  pleas- 
ure and  safety  of  others  are  in  your  keeping,  to 
show  off  or  to  take  risks  is  unpardonable  and 
dangerous  folly. 

"  Form,"  of  which  we  hear  so  much  in  relation 
to   driving,    is    here    as   everywhere    else   either 


SH  Driving 

rational  or  ridiculous.  Form  is  rational  when  it 
is  the  proper  clothing  of  an  idea ;  form  is  ridicu- 
lous when  it  is  merely  an  idea  of  proper  clothing. 
When  you  dress  comfortably,  and  sit  securely,  and 
hold  the  reins  firmly  and  lightly,  you  drive  in 
good  form  because  you  are  obeying  the  well- 
thought-out  laws  of  the  sport.  When  you  merely 
copy  the  externals  without  knowing  why,  you  are 
ridiculous.  This  is  the  whole  secret  of  form. 
One  is  matter,  the  other  is  merely  manner.  One 
is  rational,  the  other  ridiculous. 


CHAPTER   XII 

DRIVING   ONE   HORSE 

Once  you  have  a  horse  and  know  something 
of  his  make-up  inside  and  out,  and  have  housed 
him  properly,  and  bought  his  harness  and  learned 
something  of  its  use,  the  next  thing  is  to  make 
the  connection,  first  between  the  horse  and  the 
vehicle,  and  then  between  yourself  and  the  horse. 

The  carriage  should  be  run  out  first,  the  pole 
or  shafts  put  in  place  and  dusted,  the  proper  whip 
and  robes  got  together.  It  may  be  well  for  the 
owner  to  realize  that  a  man  alone  should  have  at 
least  three-quarters  of  an  hour  to  turn  out  on  the 
box  of  a  brougham  or  Victoria,  proportionally 
less  time  for  a  runabout  or  other  light  carriage, 
on  which  he  is  to  appear  in  stable  clothes.  The 
horse  should  be  brought  out  of  or  turned  in  his 
stall  and  attached  to  the  pillar-reins,  and  his  feet, 
coat,  and  head  gone  over.  The  collar  should  then 
be  stretched  and  put  over  his  head,  being  careful 
not  to  rub  hard  against  the  eye-bones  in  so  doing, 
fasten  on  the  hames,  and  turn  the  collar  into 
place.  It  is  easier  to  fasten  hames  on  to  the 
collar  before  the  collar  is  turned.  Then  put  on 
315 


3 1 6  Driving 

the  bridle,  seeing  to  it  that  the  bit  is  in  its  proper 
place,  as  well  as  the  winkers,  and  that  both  sides 
of  the  bridle  are  of  the  same  length.  The  saddle 
should  be  placed  first  well  back  on  the  horse,  so 
that  the  crupper  may  be  put  under  the  tail  with- 
out undue  pulling  and  hauling.  Then  place  the 
saddle  where  it  belongs  on  the  horse's  back,  and 
tighten  up  the  girth.  Run  the  reins  through 
their  terrets  and  fasten  them  to  the  bit,  and 
lead  your  horse  out  and  back  him  into  the  shafts. 
Never  take  hold  of  the  bit  in  leading  him  out 
but  by  the  nose-band.  If  you  slip  or  stumble  or 
he  throws  his  head,  if  you  have  him  by  the  bit 
you  jab  him  in  the  mouth,  and  then  even  before 
he  is  in  the  vehicle  he  is  sensitive  and  restive. 
Put  your  horse  as  near  the  carriage  as  possible 
without  danger  of  hitting  when  in  motion.  The 
tug  girth,  which  holds  the  shafts,  should  be 
tight  enough  to  hold  the  shafts  in  place  in  a 
four-wheeled  carriage,  but  loose  enough  to  allow 
a  certain  amount  of  play  in  two-wheeled  carriages. 
Where,  as  in  a  gig  harness,  the  play  is  given  by 
the  tug  itself,  this  is  not  necessary. 

In  unharnessing,  take  off  the  bearing-rein,  un- 
fasten the  traces,  then  the  tug  girth  —  not  vice 
versa,  so  that  if  a  horse  starts  forward  there  will  be 
something  to  prevent  the  carriage  running  on  his 
heels.  Always  loosen  a  curb-chain  before  taking 
off  a  bridle,  —  this  applies  equally  to  the  horse  in 


Driving  One  Horse  317 

harness  or  under  saddle,  —  and  lastly  the  breech- 
ing. The  reins  should  be  unbuckled  from  the  bit, 
drawn  back  through  the  terrets,  and  hung  over  the 
arm  or  out  of  the  way.  Take  off  the  pad,  turn 
the  collar,  and  take  off  the  hames,  then  turn  the 
collar  back  and  leave  it  in  its  place  a  few  minutes 
to  prevent  galled  shoulders.  The  bit  and  curb- 
chain  should  be  thrown  into  the  bucket  of  lime 
water,  or  at  any  rate  cleaned  carefully  at  once. 
It  is  much  easier  to  prevent  rust  than  to  get 
it  off. 

In  taking  out  a  pair,  the  reins  should  be  un- 
buckled first  of  all  and  pulled  through  from  the 
front.  If  you  drive  into  the  stable,  do  it  your- 
self before  dismounting.  In  taking  off  the  traces, 
begin  with  the  inside  one,  then  the  outside  one, 
then  the  pole-chains  or  pole-pieces.  Take  off  the 
saddles,  turn  the  collars,  remove  the  hames,  leav- 
ing collars  on  as  before.  It  is  a  great  saving  of 
time,  and  lessens  confusion,  to  fix  the  habit  of 
both  harnessing  and  unharnessing  in  a  regular 
way,  until  it  becomes  mechanical ;  and  mistakes 
are  not  made,  and  accidents  do  not  happen,  be- 
cause the  habit  of  doing  things  properly  has 
become  fixed.  Have  your  buckle-rein  on  off- 
side horse.  First,  because  that  marks  the  rein, 
and,  secondly,  because  as  that  rein  is  the  one  not 
thrown  across  there  is  less  likelihood  of  hitting 
and  hurting  the  attendant  on  that  side. 


3 1 8  Driving 

Before  you  take  the  reins  in  your  hand  look 
over  the  trap,  harness,  and  horse,  and  see  that  all 
is  right.  The  stop  on  the  shafts  should  by  all 
means  be  behind  the  tugs ;  the  traces,  collar, 
breeching,  bridle,  girths,  bit,  bearing-rein,  should 
be  looked  over,  first,  to  see  if  you  may  drive  in 
safety,  and  then  to  confirm  you  in  what  you  have 
learned  about  these  things. 

Take  the  reins  in  the  left  hand,  the  near  rein 
over  the  second  finger,  the  off  rein  between  the 
third  and  fourth  finger.  No  matter  what  the 
vehicle  is,  take  the  whip  with  you  when  you  get 
into  it.  The  whip  in  the  socket  is  in  the  way, 
and  the  whip  should  be  almost  as  constantly  in  the 
hands  as  the  reins  anyway,  so  that  it  is  better  to 
begin  with  the  whip  where  it  belongs.  Then  place 
the  reins  in  the  right  hand  with  the  whip,  mount 
to  your  place,  take  your  seat  quickly,  change  the 
reins  back  into  the  left  hand,  see  that  they  are 
about  the  right  length  without  feeling  your  horse's 
mouth,  which  would  make  him  start  before  you 
are  ready,  and  you  are  ready  to  send  your  first 
telegram  to  your  horse.  Do  it  discreetly,  gently, 
and  if  you  are  not  where  your  voice  will  disturb 
other  horses,  add  a  word  of  some  kind,  prefer- 
ably a  signal  not  in  common  use  between  men 
and  horses.  A  horse  learns  quickly  to  recognize, 
and  does  not  forget,  his  owner's  voice.  That  voice 
encourages,  soothes,  or  commands  him.    But  where 


Driving  One  Horse  319 

you  are  driving  with  or  surrounded  by  others,  the 
use  of  your  voice  in  the  well-known  click  or  chir- 
rup would  disturb  all  the  horses  and  coachmen 
about  you.  It  is  easy  to  accustom  your  own 
horses  to  any  phrase :  "  Come  on  now,"  "  Look 
alive,"  or  even  "  What's  the  matter?"  which  con- 
veys no  message  to  other  horses  and  at  the  same 
time  rouses  your  own.  The  writer  has  an  inti- 
mate acquaintance  with  several  horses  who  will 
start  into  action  at  hearing  "  Come  on  now,"  in 
a  well-known  voice. 

Nothing  is  more  disagreeable  at  a  railway 
station,  in  a  hurly-burly  of  traps  and  horses, 
than  the  clicking  and  clucking  and  snapping 
of  whips,  which,  while  meant  for  one  or  two 
horses,  disturb  half  a  dozen.  Two-thirds  of  the 
coachmen  on  private  carriages  catch  sight  of 
their  masters,  flap  the  horses  with  the  reins,  swing 
the  whip,  and  chirrup;  and  yet  they  would  be  sur- 
prised to  be  told  that  they  do  not  know  the  rudi- 
ments of  driving.  Nothing  smacks  more  of  the 
farmer  than  a  man  who,  behind  you,  or  passing 
you,  or  standing  near  you  and  wishing  to  start, 
clicks  or  clucks  to  his  horse,  starting  your  horse 
up  at  the  same  time.  A  man  who  cannot  start 
one,  two,  or  four  horses  with  his  hands,  and 
without  a  hullabaloo  of  noise,  is  unworthy  to 
sit  behind  horses  at  all.  If  your  horses  are  new 
to  your  stable,   or  awkward  and  untrained,  feel 


320  Driving 

the  mouth  gently,  and  if  this  is  not  understood 
or  is  misunderstood,  use  the  whip  gently  and 
make  your  start  in  that  way.  The  perfection 
of  starting  is  to  have  the  horse  feel  his  bit  on 
his  bars  almost  exactly  at  the  moment  his  shoul- 
ders feel  the  collar  —  a  fraction  of  a  lightning 
stroke  after,  to  be  exact. 

When  you  are  ready  to  start  either  out  of  the 
stable  or  from  the  door,  have  the  man  stand  clear. 
No  leading  of  the  horse  forward,  no  pulling  at 
bit  or  nose-band ;  give  the  horse  a  chance  to 
learn  what  you  want  of  him  without  puzzling 
him  with  a  variety  of  signals. 

It  is  a  little  ahead  of  time  to  speak  of  it  here, 
but,  lest  we  forget,  it  may  be  mentioned  at  once. 
Never  allow  the  groom  or  grooms  to  stop  your 
horse  or  horses,  whether  one,  two,  or  four,  when 
you  drive  into  the  stable.  This  makes  horses 
restless,  makes  them  back,  slide,  or  kick,  and  in 
the  case  of  a  four  may  result  in  a  general  mix- 
up.  Stop  your  horses  gradually,  with  voice  and 
reins,  but  stop  them  yourself.  They  have  come 
in  from  the  drive  more  or  less  accustomed  to 
your  hands  and  ways,  according  as  you  are  more 
or  less  proficient,  and  a  rough  hand  on  bit  or  nose, 
and  an  apparition  in  front  of  them,  ought  to, 
and  generally  does,  upset  them.  Besides  all  this 
you  ought  to,  and  they  ought  to  know  how 
to  stop  properly,  and  without  fuss  or  flurry  ex- 


Driving  One  Horse  321 

actly  when  and  where  you  wish  them  to,  even  if 
it  be  on  the  cement  floor  of  your  stable  entrance. 

The  reins  should  be  held  with  the  near  rein 
between  the  thumb  and  first  finger,  the  off 
rein  between  the  third  and  fourth  fingers.  Hold 
your  hand  so  that  your  knuckles,  turned  toward 
your  horse,  and  the  buttons  on  your  waistcoat, 
will  make  two  parallel  lines  up  and  down  with 
the  hand  three  or  four  inches  from  the  body. 
The  reins  should  be  clasped,  or  held  by  the  two 
lower,  or  fourth  and  fifth  fingers;  the  second 
finger  should  point  straight  across  and  upward 
enough  to  keep  the  near  rein  over  the  knuckle 
of  that  finger  and  the  thumb  pointing  in  the 
same  direction,  but  not  so  much  upward.  The 
reins  are  held,  not  by  squeezing  them  on  their 
flat  surface,  but  by  pressure  on  their  edges.  The 
edges,  in  a  word,  being  held  between  the  two 
last  fingers  and  the  root  of  the  thumb.  This 
arrangement  makes  a  flexible  joint,  the  wrist,  for 
the  reins  and  for  the  bit  to  play  upon.  This 
suppleness  of  the  wrist,  just  enough  and  not  too 
much,  is  what  is  called  "  hands."  It  means,  that 
your  wrist  gives  just  enough  play  to  the  horse's 
mouth  to  enable  him  to  feel  your  influence,  with- 
out being  either  confused  or  hampered  by  it. 

As  this  is  the  key  to  perfection  in  all  driving, 
everybody  claims  to  possess  it ;  only  the  elect  few 
have  it. 


322  Driving 

Practically  everybody  can  learn  to  play  the 
piano  or  the  violin,  or  to  write  tolerable  verses ; 
only  a  very  few,  indeed,  ever  attain  to  supreme 
command  over  these  instruments,  or  over  the 
music  of  words.  Training  and  teaching  may 
accomplish  much  and  make  fair  or  even  excellent 
performers;  but  beyond  that  it  is  divine  grace, 
born  not  made,  given  not  attained.  The  same  is 
true  of  driving :  you  may  be  one  of  the  elect,  but 
if  you  are,  you  belong  to  a  society  as  small  as 
that  of  the  Knights  of  the  Garter,  and  you  need 
not  be  vain,  since  it  was  no  hard  work  of  yours, 
but  an  endowment.  It  is  a  combination  of  physi- 
cal and  mental  traits,  a  quickness  of  connection 
between  nerve  and  brain  and  muscle,  that  may 
be  cultivated  and  improved  in  all  men,  but  which 
reaches  perfection  only  in  the  few.  Corbett,  in 
"  An  Old  Coachman's  Chatter,"  says,  "  Even  for 
a  good  amateur  to  acquire  professional  style  re- 
quires two  years  averaging  eighty  miles  a  day, 
with  a  fair  amount  of  night  work." 

A  persistent  man  may  do  much.  He  may  learn 
to  write  excellent  verse,  with  no  hope  of  ever  being 
a  poet;  he  may  learn  to  jump  higher  than  the  av- 
erage, without  the  slightest  prospect  of  doing  six 
feet,  six  and  a  half  inches,  which  thus  far  has  only 
been  done  by  one  man  in  the  world ;  he  may  learn 
to  run,  or  swim,  or  speak,  but  the  heights  of  the 
unexcelled  are  not  for  him.    This  much  ought  to  be 


Driving  One  Horse  323 

said  about  driving  at  the  start.  You  may  read  books 
from  now  till  doomsday,  and  you  may  practise,  and 
you  will  undoubtedly  become  an  excellent  and 
trustworthy  coachman,  far  above  the  average,  — 
not  a  difficult  attainment,  by  the  way,  —  but  to 
have  this  magic  of  "  hands  "  is  not,  I  believe,  at- 
tainable except  to  those  endowed  physically  and 
mentally  with  peculiar  powers,  in  peculiar  com- 
bination. It  is  because  everybody  thinks  he 
knows  how  to  drive,  simply  because  he  can  steer 
quadrupeds  with  steel  in  their  mouths,  that  this 
point  is  emphasized.  No  one  need  neglect  this 
sport  on  the  ground  that  the  vision  and  the  attain- 
ment are  limited ;  they  are  not,  and  to  most  men 
even  confident  competence  is  denied,  not  to  speak 
of  this  virtuosity  of  hands. 

Now  that  you  are  in  your  seat  with  the  reins 
as  they  should  be,  between  the  thumb  and  second 
and  between  the  third  and  fourth  fingers  of  your 
left  hand,  wrist  properly  bent,  and  in  a  sufiiciently 
humble  and  docile  state  of  mind,  you  should  no- 
tice why  the  reins  are  separated  by  two  fingers 
instead  of  one,  and  why  the  near  rein  is  kept  so 
far  as  possible  over  the  knuckle  of  the  second 
finger.  Just  as  the  wrist  makes  play  backward 
and  forward,  so  this  separation  of  the  reins  enables 
you  to  make  play  sideways  or  across  the  horse's 
mouth.  By  turning  your  hand  toward  you,  so 
that  the  knuckles,  instead  of  facing  the  horse,  face 


324  Driving 

the  sky,  you  shorten  that  upper  rein,  the  near 
rein,  and  your  horse  goes  over  to  the  left,  or  near 
side.  By  turning  your  hand  just  the  other  way 
and  bringing  it  across  to  the  left  hip,  you  shorten 
the  off  rein  and  turn  your  horse  to  the  right. 
All  done  with  one  hand,  you  still  have  the  other 
for  your  whip,  to  render  any  assistance  needed. 
There  are  scores  of  times  when  to  steer  your 
horse,  and  still  to  have  the  right  hand  free,  means 
not  merely  convenience,  but  safety. 

It  is  a  peculiarity  of  driving  that  it  is  almost 
the  one  sport  in  which  the  sportsman  is  the 
custodian  of,  and  responsible  for,  other  people. 
A  man  rides,  shoots,  and  does  other  dangerous 
things  alone,  but  nine  times  out  of  ten  he  drives 
with  others  alongside  of  him.  It  is  doubly  neces- 
sary, therefore,  that  he  should  know  his  business 
thoroughly,  and,  if  he  is  to  make  a  practice  of 
driving  others,  that  he  should  spare  no  pains  to 
know  all  that  he  can. 

The  fact  that  the  left  hand  is  held  as  directed 
keeps  the  reins  secure,  and  keeps  them  secure 
with  the  least  possible  exertion.  As  this  position 
of  the  hand,  wrist,  and  fingers  is  a  little  awkward 
at  first  to  the  beginner,  most  driving  is  done  with 
the  wrist  not  held  across  the  body,  but  pointing 
toward  the  horse,  with  the  thumb  held  over  the 
reins  as  a  sort  of  clip  and  pointing  also  toward 
the  horse.     The  reins  held  in  this  fashion  are  of 


Driving  One  Horse  325 

necessity  insecure  and  forever  slipping  forward, 
and  there  is  no  leverage  of  wrist  for  the  horse's 
mouth,  but  a  straight  pull  from  an  outstretched 
arm. 

One  often  hears  the  comment  that  one  cannot 
as  easily  hold  a  horse  this  way  as  with  the  reins, 
say  in  both  hands.  That  is  exactly  the  secret  of 
it.  It  is  just  so  that  you  cannot  keep  a  dead  pull 
on  the  poor  brute's  mouth  that  this  position  is  the 
ideal  one.  You  don't  want  to  pull  your  horse, 
but  to  drive  him.  Most  driving,  by  the  way,  seems 
to  have  as  its  central  feature  how  to  stop  him, 
rather  than  how  to  make  him  go  pleasantly; 
how  to  get  the  quickest  and  sharpest  jerk  on  his 
mouth  in  case  of  trouble,  rather  than  how  to  exert 
the  least  possible  pressure  that  will  command 
obedience.  With  a  well-bitted  horse,  you  should 
be  able  to  make  figure  eights  by  moving  the  left 
hand  as  directed  without  touching  the  reins  with 
the  right  hand  at  all.  The  position  of  the  hired 
coachman  on  the  box  of  a  Victoria  or  brougham 
these  days  is  a  ludicrous  one  for  the  reason  that 
most  of  them,  and  evidently  their  masters,  know 
nothing  of  the  reason  for  that  position.  It  was 
intended  by  balancing  the  coachman  thus  to  pre- 
vent his  putting  great  weight  on  the  reins,  as  he 
might  do  if  his  feet  and  legs  stuck  out  in  front  of 
him  and  his  hands  were  held  at  arm's  length. 
It  is  well  and  proper  that  he  should  be  balanced 


326  Driving 

on  his  seat  with  his  back  hollowed  in,  his  elbows 
at  his  side,  his  hand  across  and  in  front  of  him ; 
but  tucking  his  legs  and  feet  back  and  way  under- 
neath him  defeats  the  whole  plan  by  forcing  him 
to  hold  on  by  the  reins,  which  is  just  what  it  was 
hoped  to  avoid.  His  feet  and  legs,  as  in  the  case 
of  the  gentleman  coachman,  should  be  at  such  an 
angle  in  front  of  him  that  he  has  a  perfectly  easy 
balance  and  something  to  brace  against  in  case 
he  needs  to  exert  extra  power.  On  a  lady's  light 
Victoria,  with  nothing  but  the  narrow  footboard 
in  front  of  him,  a  coachman  in  this  new-fangled 
position  is  not  only  a  figure  of  fun,  but  he  is  also 
in  grave  danger  of  accident.  This  monkey-on-a- 
stick  attitude  is  a  blundering  misinterpretation  of 
a  perfectly  sensible  rule. 

So  far  as  the  amateur  coachman  is  concerned, 
he  should  sit  straight,  with  his  back  so  hollowed 
that  he  can  balance  easily  on  his  hips,  not  on  the 
edge  of,  but  on  the  cushion,  with  his  feet  and  legs 
at  a  comfortable  angle,  and  without  that  look  of 
going  out  after  the  reins  one  so  often  sees  —  a 
care-worn,  bent-over  position,  as  though  the  reins 
were  sliding  away,  never  to  reappear. 

Start  out  moderately,  keep  your  horse  at  an 
even  pace,  and  come  in  toward  the  end  of  your 
journey  again  at  a  moderate  pace.  Ahorse  is 
not  saved  by  doing  ten  miles  in  two  hours  in- 
stead of  one.    On  the  contrary,  it  takes  less  out  of 


Driving  One  Horse  327 

a  horse  to  make  him  do  his  journey  at  a  smart 
gait  rather  than  to  dawdle.  You  may  have 
noticed  yourself  that  a  brisk  two  hours'  walk 
takes  far  less  out  of  you  than  the  standing 
around,  the  stopping  and  starting,  and  the  gen- 
eral dawdling  of  two  hours'  shopping.  Here 
again  the  size  of  the  horse's  stomach  should  help 
to  solve  the  problem  of  how  fast  and  how  far.  It 
is  better  that  he  should  do  his  task  at  a  brisk 
pace  and  get  back  to  his  rub  down,  his  meal,  and 
his  rest,  than  that  he  should  be  jogged  for  a  long 
time  at  a  stretch.  Even  when  it  is  necessary  to 
keep  him  going  and  to  keep  him  away  from  his 
stable  for  an  undue  number  of  hours,  which  must 
sometimes  happen,  he  should  be  given  a  short 
rest  and  a  small  meal  of  soft  food  ;  this  will  make 
all  the  difference  between  over  fatigue  that  may 
result  seriously,  and  fatigue  easily  cured  by  proper 
rest.  A  horse  worked  at  regular  hours,  and  regu- 
larly and  properly  fed,  is  three-quarters  of  the 
way  toward  being  and  keeping  in  good  condition. 
Just  as  he  should  be  started  quietly,  so  he 
should  be  stopped  quietly.  It  is  not  the  mark 
of  good  driving  to  bring  your  one  horse,  or  your 
team,  up  to  the  stopping-place  at  a  quick  pace, 
and  then  to  pull  up  with  a  jerk — the  horse's  head 
in  the  air,  his  mouth  open  because  he  has  been 
jabbed  by  the  bit,  the  shafts  pointing  up,  the 
breeching   tight,  and    the    horse   almost   on    his 


328  Driving 

haunches.  This  kind  of  stopping  takes  more 
out  of  a  horse  than  a  mile  of  hard  work.  Begin 
to  stop  some  time  before  you  stop.  Shorten  your 
reins,  decrease  your  pace,  and  whether  it  is  driv- 
ing in  the  trafhc  of  the  street  or  at  your  own 
door,  slow  up  gradually.  You  can  tell  with  cer- 
tainty whether  a  man  knows  his  business  by  the 
way  he  starts  and  stops.  If  you  have  stopped 
as  you  should,  the  horse  is  not  sitting  in  the 
breeching,  with  his  collar  sliding  toward  the  top 
of  his  head ;  but  horse  and  vehicle  are  stopped, 
and  yet  the  horse  and  the  vehicle  and  harness 
are  all  in  position  to  go  on  again  without  a  jerk. 
This  is  of  the  utmost  importance  in  driving  in 
the  city  streets,  where  you  may  find  yourself  in 
serious  trouble  if,  through  inattention,  you  have 
driven  well  into  trouble,  before  planning  to  stop. 
Your  horse's  nose,  or  your  pole,  has  poked  into 
another  horse  or  vehicle,  or  you  are  obliged  to 
pull  up  so  suddenly  that  you  throw  your  horse,  or 
horses  down. 

In  America,  where  we  turn  to  the  right,  pull 
well  over  to  your  own  side  and  slow  down  before 
you  get  to  the  street  corner  around  which  you 
wish  to  go,  whether  to  the  right  or  left.  Leave 
ample  room  for  another  vehicle  to  pass,  even 
though  you  should  meet  just  at  the  turn.  Many 
horses,  awkwardly  enough,  get  their  legs  crossed 
when  turning,  and  on  slippery  pavements,  where 


Driving  One  Horse  329 

the  pull  up  and  the  pull  round  come  at  the  same 
time,  a  horse  is  very  apt  to  stumble,  and  even  to 
fall.  Because  you  have  turned  many  corners  with- 
out accident  is  no  reason  for  not  taking  pains. 
Many  young  coachmen  escape  perils  through 
sheer  ignorance,  but  persistence  in  error  and  in- 
attention bring  their  punishment  sooner  or  later, 
and  the  horse  skins  his  knees,  or  slides  under  the 
shafts  in  a  crowd,  or  kicks  and  hammers  harness 
and  trap  to  bits.  It  is  too  late  then  to  remember 
to  keep  an  eye  out  for  what  is  going  on  ahead  of 
you,  to  turn  corners  carefully,  and  to  slacken  speed 
gradually,  and  not  all  at  once. 

It  is  a  safe  rule  in  turning  a  corner  to  turn 
only  when  the  hub  of  your  front  wheel  has 
reached  the  line  that  the  curb  would  make  if 
prolonged,  then  there  is  no  danger  of  running  on 
to  or  against  the  corner  itself.  Even  when  turn- 
ing a  corner  to  the  right,  and  you  are  close  to  the 
curb,  this  rule,  if  obeyed,  will  keep  both  front  and 
back  wheels  clear.  If  this  is  not  done,  the  back 
wheel,  and  sometimes  both,  go  rubbing  around 
the  curbstone,  which,  aside  from  the  slovenliness 
of  the  performance,  is  damaging  to  the  wheel, 
and  racking  to  every  bolt  in  the  carriage.  If  in 
the  country,  where  often  a  large  stone  marks  the 
angle  of  the  turn,  to  hit  this  stone  or  to  go  over 
it  is  often  to  go  over  altogether. 

The   safest   and   quickest  way  to  shorten  the 


33°  Driving 

reins,  when  it  must  be  done  in  a  pinch,  is  to  pull 
them  through  from  behind.  If  there  are  two 
reins,  grasp  them  between  the  thumb  and  second 
finger  of  the  right  hand,  open  the  fingers  of  the 
left  hand  enough  to  let  them  run  through,  shorten 
them  to  the  required  length,  and  take  your  grip 
on  them  again,  with  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand. 
Every  man  finds,  now  and  then,  either  through 
the  foolish  driving  of  some  one  else,  or  through 
unavoidable  accident,  that  he  must  shorten  his 
reins  quickly,  and  without  risk  of  dropping  one. 
Under  those  circumstances  the  best  way  is  to  pull 
them  through  from  behind,  though  such  exigencies 
occur  but  seldom  with  a  careful  driver.  Under 
ordinary  circumstances  the  best  and  gentlest  way 
is  to  place  the  right  hand  on  the  reins,  in  front  of 
the  left,  with  thumb  and  finger  over  near  rein  and 
last  three  fingers  over  off  rein,  and  slide  the  left 
up  the  reins  the  required  distance.  Here  again 
it  is  the  mark  of  the  careful  driver  that  he  never 
seems  to  be  obliged  to  do  things  in  a  hurry. 
When  it  is  necessary  to  stop,  he  has  already 
shortened  up  his  reins,  and  is  ready  to  stop. 
When  it  is  necessary  to  turn  a  corner,  he  has 
already  advised  his  horse  by  giving  him  the 
office,  and  the  corner  is  negotiated  with  scarcely 
the  movement  of  the  hands.  When  it  is  time  to 
start,  the  horse  seems  to  have  been  informed  via 
the  reins  and  bit,  and  off  he  goes  without  a  jerk. 


Driving  One  Horse  331 

In  passing  other  vehicles  from  behind,  pass  to 
their  left.  Do  not  pass  at  all  unless  you  are 
going  at  a  quicker  pace,  and  propose  to  maintain 
it.  To  turn  short  across  another  man's  horse, 
and  then  go  on  at  the  same  pace  he  is  going,  is 
the  veriest  and  vulgarest  rudeness.  The  only- 
excuse  for  passing  is  that  you  are  making  faster 
time  than  he  is,  and  that  you  propose  to  keep 
it  up. 

Drive  with  one  hand.  In  the  show  ring,  where 
horses  must  show  pace  in  a  small  ring,  use  the 
right  hand  on  the  off  rein.  It  gives  better  con- 
trol, and  keeps  the  horse  steadier.  Keep  the  right 
hand  cautiously  near,  that  you  may  use  it  to  shorten 
the  reins,  to  steady  the  horse,  or  to  add  force 
when  the  left  hand  is  not  sufficient.  Carry  your 
whip  pointing  upwards,  and  slightly  to  the  left, 
say  toward  the  left  ear  of  your  horse,  in  driving 
one.  Start  slowly,  drive  at  the  same  pace,  once 
you  are  started ;  it  saves  the  horse,  and  is  far  more 
agreeable  to  the  passengers.  Pull  up  gradually. 
Turn  corners  slowly,  and  do  not  start  to  turn 
too  soon.  Be  continuously  careful  to  keep  your 
horse's  mouth  fresh,  by  giving  and  taking  between 
your  hand  and  his  mouth,  with  just  enough  pres- 
sure to  keep  him  informed  that  you  are  behind 
him,  and  no  more.  If  you  hang  on  to  his  mouth, 
be  sure  that  he  will  end  by  pulling  your  arms  out. 
If  you  use  the  whip  on  him,  do  not  tap  him  con- 


332  Driving 

tinually,  or  flick  him,  here  and  there,  from  time  to 
time,  out  of  sheer  idleness  and  inconsequence ; 
but  if  you  use  it,  do  it  so  that  the  horse  knows  it 
is  punishment  and  not  play ;  otherwise  you  waste 
the  benefit  to  be  derived  from  the  whip,  by  accus- 
toming the  horse  to  think  that  in  your  use  of  the 
whip  you  are  merely  playing  with  him.  Above 
all,  keep  a  good  lookout  ahead,  and  if  you  have  a 
horse  that  is  worth  driving  at  all,  you  may  be 
sure  that  it  is  also  worth  your  while  to  keep  an 
eye  on  him  all  the  time. 


CHAPTER   XIII 

DRIVING   A   PAIR 

So  much  depends  upon  the  comfort  of  the  horse 
in  his  harness  that  it  is  well  worth  the  owner's 
time  and  attention  to  learn  how  the  harness 
should  be  put  on,  how  the  horses  should  be  put  to, 
and  then  to  see  that  both  are  done  properly. 

The  collar  goes  on  first,  and  where  horses  are 
worked  hard,  and  regularly,  as  in  a  road  coach  or 
on  a  driving  tour,  it  is  well  to  put  the  collars  on, 
and  leave  them  on  a  few  moments  before  the  rest 
of  the  harnessing  is  done.  The  collar  thus  gets 
warm  against  the  neck,  and  there  is  that  much 
less  danger  of  rubbing  and  chafing  the  skin,  and 
making  a  bad  start.  The  usual  custom  is  to  put 
the  collar  on  with  the  hames  attached.  It  is 
better  to  fasten  the  hames  about  the  collar  after 
the  collar  is  on  the  horse,  thus  avoiding  the 
tendency  to  squeeze  the  collar  on  over  his  head. 
After  the  saddle  is  on,  the  crupper  under  the  tail, 
and  the  saddle-girth  loosely  buckled  to  keep  the 
saddle  in  place,  then  is  the  time  to  tighten  up  the 
hames.  The  traces  are  crossed  over  the  back  of 
each  horse  with  the  outside  trace  on  top.  The  bridle 

333 


334  Driving 

is  then  put  on,  and  the  reins  drawn  through  the 
pad-terrets,and  the  outside  or  draught  rein  buckled 
to  the  bit,  the  inside  or  coupHng  rein  fastened  to 
the  nose-band  underneath  by  passing  the  billet 
through  the  loop,  but  without  buckling  it.  Then 
take  the  rein,  double  it,  pass  the  bight  of  it 
through  the  terret,  with  the  loop  over  the  bearing- 
rein  hook. 

The  horses  are' now  ready  to  be  led  out  by  the 
nose-band,  not  by  the  bit,  and  put  to.  Bring  the 
horses  up  from  behind  alongside  the  pole,  rather 
than  toward  the  pole,  when  they  must  be  turned, 
and  pushed  up  to  the  pole.  Once  there,  fasten 
them  to  the  pole,  and  buckle  the  pole-strap  at  the 
end  hole,  the  near  horse  first,  then  the  off  horse. 
Next  fasten  the  traces,  the  outside  one  always 
first.  This  seems  awkward,  and  like  doing  things 
upside  down.  The  reason  for  it,  however,  is  all- 
sufficient.  If  the  inside  trace  is  put  on  first,  the 
horse  may,  often  does,  in  fact,  edge  out  from  the 
pole  at  the  touch  of  something  on  the  pole  side 
of  him,  and  there  is  a  struggle  to  get  him  back 
so  that  the  outside  trace  may  be  put  on.  This 
may  upset  the  other  horse,  and  trouble  follows. 

Here,  and  at  all  other  times,  remember  that  in 
dealing  with  horses,  under  every  and  all  condi- 
tions, a  stitch  in  time  saves  at  least  eighteen. 
Therefore  put  the  outside  trace  on  first,  then  the 
inside  trace,  then  proceed  to  pole  up  your  horses, 


Driving  a  Pair  335 

that  is  to  say,  put  your  pole-pieces  through  the 
kidney-link  from  the  inside  out,  and  tighten  them 
up  to  what  you  consider  the  proper  length. 
This  adjustment  is  a  very  nice  one,  and  can  only 
be  done  accurately  by  one  who,  when  driving, 
notes  carefully  the  effect  upon  pole,  pole-pieces, 
and  collars,  of  a  hole  more  or  less.  The  horses 
should  not  carry  the  pole,  through  being  poled 
too  tight;  neither  should  the  pole  go  bobbing 
about,  through  being  poled  too  loose.  Over 
rough  roads,  horses  should  be  poled  up  rather 
loosely,  to  give  play  to  the  pole ;  otherwise,  every 
jar  will  swing  and  bump  the  whole  vehicle.  In 
park  driving,  or  driving  over  smooth  roads,  they 
may  be  poled  up  more  closely. 

The  more  compact  are  horses,  vehicle,  and 
coachman  acting  together  as  one,  the  more  easily 
and  smoothly  everything  goes ;  but  this  is  not  to 
be  interpreted  as  approval  of  poling  up  horses  so 
tight  that  they  are  carrying  the  pole,  and  are 
cramped  and  impeded.  Pole-pieces  of  leather,  or 
chains,  are  a  matter  of  custom.  No  vehicle  has 
chains  where  the  coachman  drives ;  while  a  mail- 
phaeton,  or  lady's  phaeton,  where  the  master  or 
mistress  drives,  usually  has  chains  rather  than 
leather.  An  authority  to  be  depended  upon 
always  in  such  matters,  writes :  "  Pole  chains 
should  be  used  only  on  a  carriage  driven  by  the 
master  or  mistress,  such  as  a  coach,  mail-phaeton. 


336  Driving 

or  lady's  phaeton ;  never  on  a  carriage  driven  by 
a  coachman,  such  as  a  landau,  coupe,  or  Victoria, 
when  straps  should  be  used.  This  is  a  custom 
based  upon  the  fact  that  the  working  originals 
of  coaches  and  mail-phaetons  had  chains;  an 
adherence  to  it  marks  the  difference  between 
well  turned  out  and  badly  turned  out  vehicles." 
Both  breastplates  and  pole-pieces  should  go,  the 
former  round  both  collar  and  hames,  and  the  lat- 
ter round  the  collar  and  through  the  kidney-link 
ring  and  not  through  the  ring  alone ;  otherwise 
the  small  strap  at  the  top  of  the  collar  holding 
the  hames  together  is  the  only  safeguard,  and 
should  this  break,  away  goes  your  pole,  and 
probably  your  horses.  But  this  precaution  is  only 
necessary  in  heavy  work.  The  breastplate  holds 
even  if  the  hame-strap  breaks,  and  to  put  the 
pole-straps  around  the  collar  chafes  the  horse's 
neck. 

After  the  horses  are  poled  up  and  their  traces 
fastened,  the  coupling-reins  are  fastened  to  the 
bits.  Certain  writers  on  the  subject  advise  buc- 
kling the  coupling-reins  first  of  all.  The  writer 
has  no  criticism  to  pass  upon  this,  except  that 
experience  shows  that  fastening  two  horses  to- 
gether by  the  head,  and  then  going  to  their  heels 
for  the  traces,  often  works  badly.  As  long  as 
they  are  fastened  together  by  their  collars  to  the 
pole  it  is  not  a  matter  of  much  moment  anyway. 


Driving  a  Pair  337 

It  is  a  matter  for  one's  own  judgment  and  experi- 
ence rather  than  of  fixed  law.  All  the  other 
matters  of  precedence  and  procedure  in  harness- 
ing have  a  rational  sanction  which  makes  them 
imperative. 

The  reins  are  buckled  together  on  the  off  side 
and,  as  in  the  case  of  each  single  rein,  the  bight 
of  them  passed  through  the  off  pad-terret  of  the 
off  horse  and  looped  over  the  bearing-rein  hook. 
Your  pair  is  now  ready  for  your  inspection ;  this 
done,  and  as  you  are  about  to  take  the  reins,  the 
bearing-reins  are  put  on  their  hooks.  In  the  case 
of  green  or  nervous  horses  it  is  well  to  start 
them  off  first,  fastening  the  bearing-reins  as  they 
move  off,  and  thus  avoid  jibbing,  backing,  and 
even  rearing  in  the  stable.  Take  the  reins  in  the 
right  hand  with  the  middle  finger  between  them, 
see  that  the  buckles  of  both  reins  are  the  same 
length  from  your  hand,  pull  both  reins  out  some 
ten  inches,  then  give  the  off  rein  a  few  inches 
more,  get  your  whip  in  your  hand,  mount  to  your 
seat,  sit  down,  put  your  reins  in  your  left  hand 
with  the  index  and  middle  finger  between  them, 
and  you  will  find  yourself  with  both  reins  of 
about  the  same  length  and  of  about  the  right 
length.  Another  measure  of  the  proper  length 
of  the  reins  before  mounting  is  to  hold  the  reins 
in  the  left  hand,  step  back  until  you  are  on  a  line 
with  the   horse's   hocks,  holding   the   left   hand 


33^  Driving 

close  to  the  body.  When  seated  the  reins  will  be 
of  the  right  length  (Plate  XXIX.). 

Always  ask  if  everything  is  right  before  you 
feel  the  mouths  of  the  horses.  The  groom 
may  be  just  putting  on  a  last  touch,  or  he  may 
be  looking  the  other  way,  as  you  give  the  signal 
to  start,  and  there  follows  a  lame  foot,  or  even 
a  knock-down ;  and  so  much  depends  upon  a 
fair   start  that  it  is  worth  some  pains  to  get  it. 

The  whip  should  be  held  at  the  place  where 
the  ferrule  goes  round  the  handle,  as  all  good 
whip-makers  make  their  whips  to  balance  at  that 
point  (Plate  XXIX.).  The  knees  and  feet  should  be 
together;  the  feet  not  poked  out  as  though  you 
were  standing  on  them,  nor  tucked  under  you 
as  though  you  were  ashamed  of  them.  You 
will  balance  better  if  you  sit  straight  with  your 
back  hollowed  in  at  the  small  of  it.  To  lengthen 
or  shorten  the  reins  put  the  right  hand  on  the 
reins  in  front  of  the  left  with  the  little  and  fourth 
finger  on  the  right  hand  or  off  rein,  leaving  the 
left  hand  or  near  rein  between  the  fourth  and 
middle  fingers,  and  the  thumb  and  index  finger 
over  the  same — the  near  rein  (Plate  XXIX.).  You 
may  shorten  the  reins  now,  by  just  so  much,  as 
you  place  the  right  hand  in  front  of  the  left,  by 
sliding  the  left  hand  up  to  the  right,  and  taking 
your  grip  again.  It  is  best  to  do  this  gradually, 
taking  in  a  little  of  the  reins  at  a  time,   rather 


Driving  a  Pair  339 

than  by  taking  ten  or  twelve  inches  at  a  time. 
Whether  it  be  the  left  or  the  right  hand  that  is 
in  front,  the  hand  in  front  should  for  the  time 
being  hold  the  reins.  Never,  under  any  circum- 
stances, get  the  thumb  under  the  near  rein  nor 
the  little  finger  under  the  off  rein,  a  very  com- 
mon and  faulty  practice.  The  reason  being  that 
in  such  a  situation  your  right  hand  is  hampered 
in  moving  quickly,  by  having  the  thumb  under 
the  rein,  your  left  hand  likewise  by  having  the 
little  finger  under  instead  of  on  top  of  the  rein. 
As  all  these  movements  should  be  made  mechani- 
cally, without  looking  at  the  reins,  the  fingers 
should  be  so  placed  and  kept  that  there  is  no 
mixing  up  in  the  process.  The  right  hand 
indeed  should  do  its  fingering  of  the  reins  as 
quickly  and  accurately  as  a  practised  pianoforte 
player  picks  out  and  strikes  his  notes. 

In  stopping,  place  the  right  hand  on  the  reins 
from  eight  to  ten  inches  in  front  of  the  left,  as 
described  above,  press  the  right  hand  in  toward 
the  body  while  raising  the  left  hand.  If  this  is 
not  enough,  hold  the  reins  in  the  right  hand,  pass 
the  left  in  front,  and  take  in  more  rein,  the  right 
coming  forward  again  to  the  front  place.  In  an 
emergency,  it  is  always  safest  to  pull  the  reins 
through  from  behind  with  the  right  hand  (Plate 
XXIX.).  To  the  inexperienced  this  is  quicker  and 
safer,  whether  with  two  reins  or  four.     In  driving 


340  Driving 

a  pair  of  "  roadsters,"  so  called,  they  are  put  to 
with  their  heads  far  apart,  and  bitted  with  plain 
snaffle-bits.  Such  a  pair  must  be  driven  with  two 
hands,  one  rein  in  each  hand,  in  order  to  keep  an 
even  pressure  upon  their  mouths. 

Before  you  have  gone  very  far  along  a  straight 
road  you  will  notice,  unless  you  are  driving  a 
thoroughly  made,  mannered,  and  properly  put 
together  pair,  that  one  horse  does  more  work 
than  the  other,  or  that  one  horse  seems  to  be  in 
front  of  the  other.  This  is  caused  by  the  forma- 
tion of  the  horses,  the  length  of  the  traces,  the 
coupling-reins.  Traces  stretch  with  wear,  and 
when  this  has  become  apparent,  the  shorter  traces 
should  be  used  on  the  inside ;  if  they  are  on  the 
outside,  it  is  easy  to  see  that  this  will  put  the  pull 
on  the  collar  where  it  should  not  be,  and  gall  the 
shoulders.  The  lazier  or  shorter  horse  should  be 
in  shorter  traces.  As  to  the  coupling-reins,  this  is, 
strange  to  say  and  to  see,  a  part  of  the  harness 
that  many  drivers  of  horses  never  examine,  and 
never  alter,  any  more  than  they  think  of  trying 
to  change  the  diameter  of  their  wheels.  As  a 
matter  of  fact,  the  coupling-reins  are  the  key  to 
the  problem  of  driving  a  pair  or  a  four  com- 
fortably. 

If  you  will  examine  a  pair  of  two-horse  reins, 
you  will  notice  that  they  are  just  like  the  two  reins 
for  one  horse  —  one  rein  goes  on  the  outside  of 


First  position  of  reins 


Proper  position  of  whip  and  reins 


Shortening  reins  from  behind  Shortening  reins  from  in  front 

PLATE   XXIX. —DRIVING   A   PAIR 


Driving  a  Pair  341 

the  bit  of  one  horse,  and  one  goes  on  the  outside 
of  the  bit  of  the  other  horse.  These  are  called  the 
draught-reins.  But  there  is  a  marked  difference, 
for  on  each  of  these  reins  is  buckled  another 
rein,  called  the  coupling-rein;  the  one  on  the  left 
rein  goes  over  and  is  buckled  on  the  inside  of  the 
bit  of  the  right-hand  horse,  and  the  coupling-rein 
of  the  right  rein  goes  over  and  is  buckled  on  the 
inside  of  the  bit  of  the  left-hand  or  near  horse. 
In  buckling  these  coupling-reins  to  the  bits,  if  one 
horse  is  more  up-headed  than  the  other,  let  his 
coupling-rein  be  on  top,  so  that  he  will  not  annoy 
the  other  horse  by  jerking  up  the  other's  coupling- 
rein.  The  adjustment  of  these  reins  should  be 
suited  to  the  conformation  and  disposition  of  the 
horses,  and  it  is  in  this  adjustment  that  the  expe- 
rienced whip  makes  himself  and  his  horses  com- 
fortable, by  making  them  go  together,  and  go 
level.  No  two  horses  suit  each  other  exactly  as 
to  length  of  body  or  neck,  or  the  way  of  carrying 
the  head,  and  yet  you  may  see  dozens  of  pairs  of 
reins  where  the  coupling-rein  buckles  have  ap- 
parently never  been  changed !  The  buckles  of 
the  coupling-reins  should  be  near  enough  to  the 
hand  in  pair  or  four  driving  — say  eighteen  inches 
—  to  enable  one  to  change  the  couplings  from  the 
driving-cushion.  In  most  harnesses  there  are 
two  or  three  holes  in  the  billet  that  buckles  to  the 
bit,  so  that  the  length  may  be  changed  also  at  the 


342  Driving 

bit.  There  are  arguments  for  and  against  this 
practice  of  having  holes  in  the  billet.  It  is  said 
that  this  makes  it  easy  to  change  a  coupling  from 
the  ground ;  on  the  other  hand,  an  ignorant  groom 
may  make  the  change  there  unknown  to  the 
coachman,  and  thus  cause  confusion.  Take  your 
choice ! 

The  object  of  these  two  inside,  or  coupling, 
reins  is  to  hold  the  horses  together,  at  the  head,  of 
course,  and  they  should  be  so  adjusted  that  an 
even  pressure  is  brought  to  bear  on  both  sides  of 
the  horses'  mouths,  so  that  they  will  go  straight, 
and  do  each  his  share  of  the  work.  If  horses 
were  all  alike,  it  would  be  easy  enough  to  buckle 
these  coupling-reins  in  the  same  hole  on  each 
draught-rein,  and  your  horses  would  be  level. 
But  suppose  we  have  two  horses,  one  of  which, 
the  near  horse,  carries  his  head  higher  than  the 
other  and  out  farther  than  the  other.  If  these  two 
are  to  go  level,  the  near  horse  must  have  his  reins 
longer  than  those  of  his  mate.  Up  and  down  the 
draught-reins  are  punched  some  fifteen  holes 
in  four-in-hand  harness,  fewer  in  pair-horse  har- 
ness, and  an  inch  apart,  and  the  coupling-reins  can 
be  buckled  longer  or  shorter  by  buckling  up  and 
down  these  reins.  In  the  case  we  are  describing, 
we  must  of  course  let  out  the  coupling-rein  of  the 
up-headed,  near  side  horse,  say  three  holes,  and 
(remember  that  the  near  side  coupling-rein  is  the 


Driving  a  Pair  343 

one  buckled  on  to  the  off  side  draught-rein  and 
vice  versa)  take  up  the  near  side  coupHng-rein 
the  same  number. 

It  must  be  remembered  in  this  operation,  how- 
ever, that  the  shortening  of  the  coupling- rein 
brings  the  horses'  heads  nearer  together,  and  if 
they  were  going  properly,  parallel  to  the  pole,  and 
at  the  right  distance  apart,  before  one  coupling- 
rein  was  shortened,  then,  if  this  relative  position 
to  one  another  is  to  be  maintained,  the  other 
coupling-rein  must  be  let  out  an  equal  number  of 
holes. 


"  When  the  horses  are  working  exactly  alike,  the  reins  are 
as  shown  by  the  heavy  lines  ;  A  and  B  are  the  two  sides  of  the 
off  horse's  bit,  and  C  and  D  the  two  sides  of  the  near  horse's 
bit.  The  two  outside  or  draught  reins  run  straight  to  the 
coachman's  hand,  viz.  AMa.nd  DN.  The  coupling-reins  are 
CJ/and  BN,  buckled  to  the  draught-reins  J/ and  N.  If  the 
off  horse  bends  his  neck  so  as  to  bring  his  head  nearer  to  his 
body,  both  the  reins  which  run  to  his  bit  will  be  too  slack, 
and  he  will  run  forward  and  do  more  than  his  share  of  the 
work,  while  the  near  horse  is  held  back.      To  prevent  this 


344  Driving 

the  ofif  horse's  coupling-rein  to  BN  is  shortened  by  running 
it  up  the  draught-rein  to  N\  the  last  hole,  until  it  comes  just 
tight  to  the  bit ;  but  this  obviously  leaves  the  off  draught-rein 
AM  2iS  slack  as  it  was  before,  so  that  the  coachman  has  to 
draw  his  hand  back  to  bring  it  to  bear  upon  the  bit  at  A'.  In 
so  doing  he  draws  back  the  coupling-rein  CM  and  pulls  the 
head  of  the  near  horse  to  the  inside.  To  prevent  this  the 
coupling-rein  CM  must  be  let  out  on  its  draught-rein  exactly 
as  much  as  the  other  coupling-rein  has  been  taken  up,  which 
is  equivalent  to  pulling  back  the  draught-rein,  whereupon  the 
coupling-reins  will  have  the  positions  shown  by  the  dotted 
lines  with  the  buckle  of  C  rein  in  the  first  hole,  and  all  the 
reins  will  act  evenly  upon  both  horses,  notwithstanding  that 
the  mouth  and  bit  of  the  off  horse  is  nearer  to  the  coachman's 
hand  than  that  of  the  near  horse."  —  Fairman  Rogers,  "A 
Manual  of  Coaching." 

The  most  common  fault  in  adjusting  coupling- 
reins,  next  to  that  of  having  one  horse  in  ad- 
vance of  the  other,  is  that  of  having  the  horses 
coupled  too  closely,  or  too  loosely,  together; 
in  the  first  case  the  horses  must  go  awkwardly, 
with  their  heads  too  close  together,  with  a  ten- 
dency to  make  them  stumble,  and  in  the  other, 
with  their  heads  yawing  apart,  and  not  under 
proper  control.  Some  horses  are  greatly  irritated 
by  being  made  to  go  on  one  side  of  the  bit  only, 
and  often  enough  a  pair  going  all  sorts  of  ways 
will  settle  down  and  go  well  enough  where  their 
coupling-reins  are  so  adjusted  that  they  can  go 
level,  with  an  equal  pressure  of  the  bit  on  both 
sides  of  the  mouth. 


Driving  a  Pair  345 

The  matter  of  bearing-reins  has  been  discussed 
already,  but  it  is  worth  repeating  over  and  over 
again,  especially  in  the  case  of  pair-horse  driving, 
that  bearing-reins  should  never  be  omitted.  The 
pole-end,  or  his  mate's  bridle,  offer  various  oppor- 
tunities to  a  nervous  horse  who  throws  his  head 
about  to  catch  his  bit  or  some  part  of  his  bridle, 
and  tear  it  off  or  break  it;  and  a  bitless  and 
bridleless  horse  is  an  equine  anarchist,  beyond 
human  power  of  judging  or  controlling.  Where 
you  have  whiffletrees  in  front  of  you,  it  is  easy  to 
see  which  horse  is  doing  too  much  or  too  little 
work ;  but  when  in  heavy  harness,  with  traces 
fixed  to  roller-bolts,  the  traces  and  reins  must  tell 
the  story.  The  object  in  this  form  of  driving  is, 
of  course,  to  make  both  horses  do  an  equal  amount 
of  work,  uphill  and  down,  and  to  keep  them  going 
at  an  even  pace. 

In  determining  which  horse  to  put  on  the  near 
side  and  which  on  the  off  side,  several  things 
should  be  taken  into  consideration.  First,  in  this 
country  we  turn  to  the  right,  and  as  most  roads 
are  made  with  a  crown  in  the  centre  rather  than 
absolutely  level,  the  off  horse  or  horse  on  the 
right-hand  side  has  a  little  more  work  to  do,  in 
that  he  must  do  most  of  the  pulling,  when  the 
carriage  turns  off  to  the  right,  and  must  then  be 
pulled  back  again.  Therefore  the  bigger  or 
stronger  horse  of  the  two  may  go  on  that  side. 


346  Driving 

Second,  if  one  of  the  horses  is  more  nervous  or 
more  inclined  to  shy  than  the  other,  he  is  better 
off  on  the  off  side,  where  he  is  less  in  contact  with 
passing  horses,  vehicles,  automobiles,  and  the  like. 
So  far  as  the  matter  of  punishment  with  the  whip 
is  concerned,  in  pair-horse  driving  it  is  as  easy  to 
get  at  one  as  the  other,  though  some  people  pre- 
fer to  have  the  less  amenable  animal  of  the  pair 
on  the  off  side  and  under  their  hand.  It  is  much 
better  for  the  horses,  if  other  things  are  equal,  to 
change  them  about,  so  that  they  go  one  day  on 
one  side  and  another  day  on  the  other.  Horses, 
particularly  in  the  city,  where  the  tendency  is  to 
pole  them  up  tightly,  —  too  tightly,  —  so  that  they 
may  be  easily  handled  in  the  crowded  streets,  are 
apt  to  get  into  bad  habits  if  driven  always  on  the 
same  side.  They  get  one-sided  mouths,  hit  them- 
selves, but  apparently  brighten  up,  as  though  re- 
freshed, when  changed  about. 

It  is  generally  accepted  as  an  axiom,  that  horses 
should  be  as  close  to  their  work  as  possible.  As 
a  matter  of  fact,  this  makes  little  difference  to  the 
draught  of  the  vehicle ;  but  it  does  undoubtedly 
make  a  very  great  difference  in  backing,  starting, 
turning,  and  the  general  management  of  the  horses 
by  the  coachman,  and  on  that  account  it  is  well 
to  have  your  horses  as  close  to  the  vehicle,  and 
to  your  hand,  as  possible. 

Before  going  into  details  as  to  the  handling  of 


Driving  a  Pair  347 

the  reins,  one  very  important  error  should  be 
noticed  at  the  start.  Driving  is  not  knowledge  of 
how  to  hold  the  reins,  how  to  give  the  "  offices  " 
to  make  "points,"  etc.,  but  real  driving  is  the 
knowledge  and  practical  experience  of  all  those 
things  which  come  before  you  get  up  on  to  your 
vehicle  at  all.  The  writer  was  seated  beside  the 
driver  of  an  omnibus  in  London  some  ten  years 
ago,  at  a  time  when  everything  pertaining  to  the 
handling  of  horses  in  harness  was  a  keen  interest. 
The  heavy  buss  with  its  load  of  passengers  was 
stopped  and  started  and  guided  through  the  heavy 
traffic  of  Piccadilly  without  fuss  or  trouble  and 
without  jar  to  the  passengers.  When  I  compli- 
mented the  Jehu  on  his  work,  he  replied,  "  Well, 
you  see,  sir,  there's  plenty  of  drivers  about,  but 
there's  not  many  of  us  coachmen  left !  "  That  is 
the  gist  of  the  matter.  A  coachman  is  one  who, 
through  knowledge,  and  experience,  and  natural 
ability,  keeps  his  horses,  passengers,  and  himself 
comfortable  and  safe  while  doing  the  best  attain- 
able work  with  least  effort  to  all  concerned.  The 
driver  is  a  mere  steerer  of  horses  by  artificial 
shortening  and  lengthening  of  reins  that  he  has 
been  taught. 

It  would  be  a  trifling  task  to  write  a  book 
on  driving  for  those  who  only  wish  to  become 
drivers ;  but  it  is  no  small  matter  even  to  hint 
at  the  variety  of  knowledge  necessary  to  one  who 


34S  Driving 

wishes  to  become  even  a  moderately  good  coach- 
man. Now  that  we  have  arrived  at  this  subject 
of  the  handhng  and  fingering  of  the  reins,  it  must 
not  be  overlooked  that  this  is  literally  the  super- 
ficial part  of  the  business,  and  if  it  is  built  upon  a 
foundation  of  complete  ignorance  of  the  horse,  his 
house,  his  harness,  his  history,  and  his  physical 
make-up,  it  will  always  remain  superficial  and 
unsatisfactory.  On  the  other  hand,  once  these 
fundamental  matters  have  been  studied  and 
understood,  the  handling  of  the  reins  becomes 
all-important  to  the  coachman.  First  of  all,  spare 
no  pains  to  get  your  reins  in  your  left  hand  at 
the  proper  length,  and  once  there  they  should  be 
kept  there.  All  the  nicety  of  driving  depends 
upon  this.  If  the  reins  must  be  lengthened  and 
shortened  every  few  minutes,  none  of  the  direc- 
tions to  follow  can  be  of  much  use.  Such  give 
and  take  as  there  must  be  between  hand  and  bits 
should  come  wholly  from  the  gentle  give  and 
take  of  the  wrist.  When  the  reins  are  to  be 
shortened  for  going  down  hill,  and  lengthened 
again  going  up,  the  two  methods  for  this 
operation  have  been  described  in  the  chapter 
on  driving  one  horse.  With  a  nicely  bitted 
pair,  the  turn  to  the  left  and  the  turn  to  the 
right  may  be  made  by  turning  the  hand  as 
directed  in  the  same  chapter.  Where  more 
power  is  required,  the  turn   to  the   left  may  be 


First  position  of  reins 


Double  point  to  left 


Point  to  the  right,  off-lead  rein 
under  forefinger 


Point  to  the  left,  near-lead  rein 
under  thumb 


PLATE   XXX.— DRIVING   A   PAIR 


Driving  a  Pair  349 

made  by  looping  or  making  "points"  to  left  or 
right  as  may  be  required.  The  point  to  the  left 
is  made  by  taking  the  upper  or  near  rein  with  the 
thumb  and  index  finger  or  with  the  little  and 
fourth  fingers  of  the  right  hand,  pulling  it  back  a 
few  inches,  according  to  the  angle  of  the  turn, 
and  placing  the  bight  of  the  rein  under  the 
thumb  (see  Plate  XXX.).  Close  the  thumb  down 
on  the  reins  and  hold  it  there  until  your  horses 
have  fully  responded,  then  lift  the  thumb  and  this 
near  rein  slips  back  into  place  of  itself.  Be  care- 
ful to  keep  your  point  under  the  thumb  until  the 
turn  is  made,  otherwise  —  and  a  common  fault  — 
the  slackening  of  this  rein  will  land  you  in  the 
middle  of  the  turn  with  the  horses  going  exactly 
the  other  way.  By  thus  looping  your  rein  the 
left  hand  is  kept  steadily  in  its  place,  and  the  right 
hand  is  entirely  free  to  be  used  in  case  the 
other  horse  is  too  quick  or  too  sluggish.  If  the 
off  horse  is  inclined  to  go  round  too  fast  and 
shove  his  mate  over,  the  right  hand  is  there  to 
put  on  his  rein  and  restrain  him.  If,  on  the  other 
hand,  he  is  too  sluggish,  and  does  not  obey 
quickly  enough,  your  right  hand  is  there  to 
touch  him  up  with  the  whip  and  make  him  do 
what  is  required  of  him.  In  turning  to  the  right, 
the  under  rein  or  off  rein  may  be  looped  in  the 
same  way,  but  this  time  under  the  index  finger, 
rather  than  the  thumb,  though  the  thumb  may 


350  Driving 

be  used,  and  the  turn  made  to  the  right  in  the 
same  fashion  and  with  the  same  methods  as 
before.  Although  the  making  of  points  and  op- 
position and  so  on  are  usually  for  four  and 
tandem  driving,  it  is  much  neater  and  quieter  to 
use  these  methods  on  a  much  smaller  scale  for 
your  pair.  It  is  quieter  and  less  conspicuous 
than  pulling  the  reins  and  gets  one  in,  and  keeps 
one  in,  the  valuable  habit  of  fingering  the  reins 
accurately,  quietly,  and  mechanically,  leaving  the 
eyes  and  attention  for  other  and  more  important 
matters. 

Whenever  a  loop  is  taken  or  any  other  indica- 
tion attempted  of  what  you  want  your  horses  to 
do,  avoid  confusion  by  giving  a  variety  of  signals 
at  one  and  the  same  time.  For  example,  in  tak- 
ing a  loop,  if  you  allow  your  left  hand  to  slide  for- 
ward to  receive  it  under  the  thumb  instead  of 
letting  the  right  hand  bring  it  back,  you  slacken 
your  reins  and  your  horses  start  forward  just  when 
they  should  be  well  in  hand.  If  a  horse  feels  this 
tightening  of  the  rein  from  the  point  you  are 
making  and  then  feels  the  pressure  lessen,  he  will 
whip  back  again  ;  hence  the  necessity  for  holding 
your  point  until  the  horses  have  responded  fully. 
It  is  much  better  to  hold  a  point  too  long  than  to 
let  it  go  before  its  work  is  done.  In  pulling  reins 
toward  you,  do  not  draw  the  rein  to  one  side, 
thus  drawing  the  hands  apart,  but  pull   directly 


Driving  a  Pair  351 

toward  the  body — straight  back,  in  short.  Never 
let  your  right  hand  get  so  far  away  from  the  left 
that  it  cannot  be  used  instantly  when  wanted.  If 
you  are  a  beginner,  get  a  steady  pair  and  keep  at 
this  fingering  of  the  reins;  the  starting,  with 
pressure  of  the  right  hand  in  front  of  the  left  just 
enough  to  feel  their  mouths ;  the  stopping,  with 
right  hand  properly  grasping  the  reins ;  the  points 
to  the  left  and  the  right,  and  the  shortening  of  the 
reins,  until  these  matters  are  done  quickly  and 
automatically  without  the  necessity  of  looking  at 
your  hands  at  all.  And  though  this  be  a  treatise 
on  driving,  let  us  be  frank  and  say  that  a  good 
teacher  is  better  than  any  book.  Sit  beside  a 
good  coachman  as  often  as  you  can  and  watch 
him  like  a  lynx.  Get  a  good  coachman  to  sit 
beside  you  and  tell  you  and  explain  to  you ;  then 
go  back  to  your  book  again,  and  you  will  get  much 
more  out  of  it  than  before.  A  brilliant  French- 
man has  said  that  he  studied  books  while  he 
was  waiting  to  study  men.  The  book-learning  is 
far  more  valuable  when  supplemented  by  practice. 
On  the  other  hand,  it  is  only  the  very  ignorant  in 
these  days  who  do  not  make  what  use  they  can 
of  other  men's  experience  and  practice,  by  study- 
ing up  in  books  any  subject  in  which  they  are 
interested. 

To  read  a  good   book  on  driving  helps  your 
teacher   even   more    than    it   helps  you,  in    that 


352  Driving 

you  have  at  least  some  inkling  of  the  elemen- 
tary principles  of  what  he  is  to  teach  you. 
Even  with  one  horse  these  manoeuvres  may  be 
gone  through  with,  and  every  turn,  and  start,  and 
stop,  made  with  the  same  nicety  and  care,  as 
though  one  were  driving  his  drag  at  a  meet  of  the 
coaching-club. 

Mr.  Underhill's  sumptuous  book  is  entitled 
"  Driving  for  Pleasure."  There  is  an  amusing 
chapter  to  be  written  on  Driving  for  Punishment, 
with  illustrations  from  life,  if  one  cared  to  write 
it.  The  distortions  of  face,  hands,  and  body, 
through  trying  to  do  simple  things  in  an  awkward 
and  roundabout  way;  the  mixing  up  of  whip, 
hands,  and  reins,  through  not  having  toiled  suf- 
ficiently over  the  elementary  stages  of  the  art  of 
driving ;  the  brake  on  or  off  when  it  should  not 
be,  and  a  complete  loss  of  head,  the  horses  any 
way,  and  their  owner  in  roseate  confusion,  are 
phases  of  the  driving  for  punishment  one  often 
sees.  And  be  it  said,  driving  is  a  punishment  in- 
deed, when  bad  bitting,  ill-fitting  harness,  horses 
badly  put  to,  and  awkward  handling  of  reins, 
whip,  and  brake,  are  of  one  and  the  same 
combination. 


CHAPTER  XIV 

DRIVING  FOUR 

About  the  year  1840,  with  the  advent  of  rail- 
ways in  England,  coaching,  for  a  time  at  least, 
practically  came  to  an  end.  Before  that  time,  all 
transportation  of  passengers,  mail,  and  small 
merchandise  was  by  coach.  The  mail-coaches 
were  under  government  control,  and  as  represent- 
ing the  Sovereign,  had  rights  and  privileges,  and 
were  entitled  to  respect.  Many  of  the  present- 
day  usages  are  reminders  of  that  time,  and  relics 
of  ancient  customs.  That  other  vehicles  should 
give  way  to  the  mail-coach,  that  the  constables 
should  salute  as  it  passed,  that  other  coachmen 
should  recognize  it  by  saluting,  can  be  readily  ap- 
preciated. In  England  to-day,  the  coaches  run- 
ning out  of  London  with  their  loads  of  passengers, 
bent  on  a  day's  pleasant  outing  merely,  are  treated 
much  in  the  same  way.  All  but  surly  drivers 
make  way  for  them,  the  police  salute,  many  of  the 
other  coachmen  salute,  and  the  forms  of  what 
were  once  realities  still  obtain. 

Both  there  and  here  many  people  forget,  that 
these  coaches  must  take  out  a  license,  and  are 
2  A  353 


354  Driving 

bound  by  the  laws  governing  other  vehicles 
employed  for  the  transportation  of  passengers. 
The  coach  put  on  each  season  by  the  Coaching- 
club  of  New  York,  and  which  has  run  latterly 
from  the  Holland  House  to  Ardsley  on  the  Hud- 
son and  return,  although  it  may  be  done  primarily 
for  sport,  is  none  the  less  governed  by  the  terms 
of  its  license.  Hence  it  is  that  a  good  sportsman, 
in  undertaking  such  a  duty,  goes  rain  or  shine, 
makes  a  point  of  being  on  time,  insists  upon 
promptness,  not  as  a  fad  of  his  own,  but  because 
these  are  the  implied  articles  of  agreement  be- 
tween him  and  the  city  when  he  takes  out  his 
license.  Like  all  other  good  sport,  there  is  an  ele- 
ment of  hard  work  and  tyranny  in  it.  The  coach- 
man must  at  all  times  obey  the  laws  of  the  sport. 

To  buy,  train,  and  drive  the  horses,  and  carry 
out  a  successful  schedule  for  six  weeks  or  so,  with 
the  innumerable  details  involved,  is  a  task  requir- 
ing knowledge,  experience,  tact,  and  patience. 
The  man  who  can  do  this  may  be  said  to  have 
passed  his  postgraduate  examination  as  a  first- 
class  coachman. 

There  are  not  many  men  who  can  do  that,  but 
there  is  plenty  of  sport  to  be  had  in  driving  four 
horses,  this  side  of  that  supreme  ability.  Men  who 
lack  the  time,  money,  knowledge,  and  experience 
to  put  a  coach  on  the  road  may  still,  with  benefit 
to  themselves,  and  to  the  inmates  of  their  stables, 


Driving  Four  355 

drive  four  horses.  Although  there  was  coaching 
in  a  sense  in  this  country,  from  Revolutionary 
times  and  before  (see  Chapter  III.),  the  first  regular 
English  coach  sent  to  this  country  to  be  used  for 
pleasure  driving  was  imported  in  i860  by  Mr. 
Lawrence  of  Boston.  The  first  public  coach  was 
put  on  the  road  in  1876  by  Colonel  Delancey 
Kane,  and  ran  from  the  Brunswick  Hotel,  New 
York,  to  Pelham. 

Monotony  probably  destroys  more  people  than 
any  one  form  of  dissipation.  Humanity  wearies 
of  the  round  of  duties  day  after  day,  and  attempts 
by  drink,  or  dissipation,  or  by  running  away  from 
duty,  to  break  in  upon  it  or  to  break  away  from 
it.  It  takes  the  very  highest  qualities  to  stick  it 
out,  whatever  may  be  the  duty.  Plato  maintained 
that  change  is  rest.  Many  men  work  all  the 
time ;  their  only  rest  is  change  of  work.  He  is  a 
diplomat  in  life  who  remembers  this  dangerous 
quality  of  monotony,  and  in  his  own  life,  and  the 
life  about  him,  seeks  to  diversify  it. 

This  principle  can  be  applied  to  the  subject  of 
driving  as  well,  if  not  better,  than  to  most  others. 
To  drive  one  horse,  over  one  road,  day  in  and  day 
out,  becomes  a  weariness  to  the  flesh,  instead  of  a 
refreshment.  If  you  have  only  one  horse,  you 
can  at  least  both  ride  him  and  drive  him.  If  you 
have  two,  you  can  drive  them  abreast  as  a  pair,  or 
one  in  front  of  the  other  as  a  tandem,  and  both 


356  Driving 

can  be  ridden.  As  soon  as  your  stable  enlarges 
to  four,  you  can  have  no  end  of  variety  if  care 
and  patience  are  exercised.  Strange  to  say,  too, 
the  horses  join  in  the  fun.  A  horse  likes  a  new 
road  and  enjoys  going  in  a  new  way.  It  will  take 
time  and  trouble  to  teach  your  horses  to  go  tan- 
dem, and  in  a  four;  but  once  they  are  taught,  they 
enjoy  it  quite  as  much  as  you  do.  Of  course  we 
are  writing  now  of  those  who  wish  to  get  practice 
and  pleasure  out  of  their  stables,  not  merely  for 
those  who  use  their  horses  for  purposes  of  trans- 
portation only.  Do  not  start  out  with  the  notion 
that  the  only  way  to  drive  a  tandem,  or  a  four,  is  to 
have  exactly  the  proper  vehicle,  the  right  harness 
to  the  shape  of  a  buckle,  and  horses  of  just  such 
and  such  a  character.  The  show  ring  is  one  thing ; 
driving  for  sport  and  pleasure  is  quite  another. 

Practically  any  man  who  will  spend  enough 
money  can  win  prizes  in  the  show  ring ;  and  it  is 
only  occasionally  nowadays,  when  so  much  money 
is  spent  for  show-ring  horses  and  equipages,  that  a 
man  of  moderate  means  can  hope  to  win  in  these 
tournaments.  He  may  by  good  judgment,  in 
buying  and  training,  bring  out  a  winner  now  and 
then;  but  he  has  little  chance  against  those  who  are 
willing  to  pay  any  price  for  a  ready-made  winner. 

It  is  a  good  thing  to  know  how  horses  and 
vehicle  should  be  turned  out,  even  down  to  minute 
details;  but  a  book,  a  coach-builder,  a   harness- 


Driving  Four  357 

maker  and  a  bank-account  never  yet  made  a 
sportsman,  at  this,  or  any  other  game.  As  has 
been  said  before  in  another  chapter,  "  form "  is 
only  rational  when  it  is  the  proper  clothing  of  an 
idea;  it  is  ridiculous  and  unworthy  when  it  is 
merely  an  idea  of  proper  clothing. 

Of  tandem  driving  we  have  written  in  another 
chapter.  If  you  cannot  have  a  four,  costing,  with 
coach,  horses,  and  harness,  ^15,000  or  more,  why 
not  have  just  as  much  sport,  and  far  more  valu- 
able experience,  by  a  more  economical  arrange- 
ment? Buy  your  horses  with  a  purpose,  to  begin 
with.  Let  the  saddle-horses  serve  as  leaders,  the 
blockier,  heavier  harness  horses  in  the  wheel.  Or 
if  you  run  to  smaller  sizes,  two  of  15.1  in  the  wheel 
and  your  polo  ponies  14.2  in  the  lead,  with  a 
pony  break  behind  them,  make  a  capital  four. 
If  a  second-hand  harness  is  not  procurable,  terrets 
on  your  wheelers'  saddles  and  bridles  make  any 
stout  double  harness  serviceable ;  and  an  extra  pair 
of  long  reins  and  long  traces  fit  out  your  leaders, 
and  there  you  are.  Any  man  who  can  afford  to 
keep  four  horses  can,  if  he  will  give  the  problem 
time  and  trouble,  have  the  practice  of  driving  four. 

Be  it  said  at  once  that  the  best  practice  is  that 
of  driving  different  teams  every  day,  and  that  can 
only  be  obtained  where  there  is  a  good  deal  of 
road  coaching,  and  you  are  of  an  ability  to  be 
permitted  to  drive.     Next  to  that,  probably,  comes 


358  Driving 

the  experience  and  knowledge  to  be  derived  from 
getting  together,  harnessing,  bitting,  and  getting 
to  go,  a  four  out  of  your  own  stable.  Most  books 
and  most  teachers  deal  with  the  subject  of  driving 
four  as  though  appearances  counted  ninety-seven 
per  cent,  and  your  own  pleasure  and  profit  three 
per  cent. 

We  are  dealing  with  four-in-hand  driving  here 
as  a  pastime,  as  an  opportunity  for  variety  in 
your  own  driving,  and  as  a  refreshing  change  in 
their  way  of  going  for  your  horses.  Remember 
always  that  it  is  not  hard  on,  but  good  for,  your 
horses  to  give  them  variety  of  work.  Horses 
that  are  well  housed,  carefully  fed  and  watered, 
comfortably  harnessed,  and  discreetly  driven  are 
much  better  for  change  of  scene  and  change  of 
work.  This  is  not  intended  to  mean  that  a  light, 
high-strung  lady's  saddle-horse  is  improved  by 
being  put  to  work  in  the  wheel  of  a  break;  or 
that,  of  any  horse,  too  much  work  or  the  kind  of 
work  to  which  he  is  palpably  unsuited  should  be 
required  of  him.  What  is  maintained  here  is 
that  very  few  owners  of  horses  get  all  the  fun 
out  of  them  that  there  is  to  be  had. 

These  questions  of  pole-chains  or  leather  pole- 
pieces,  this  or  that  shape  of  bit,  —  so  long  as  the 
bit  fits  the  inside  of  the  horse's  mouth,  —  housings 
or  no  housings,  stable-clothes  or  breeches  and 
boots,  are  all  matters  that  come  after,  not  before, 


Driving  Four  359 

driving.  The  study  of  appearances  comes  after 
the  knowledge  of  essentials,  not  before.  Appear- 
ances as  the  result  of  knowledge  take  care  of 
themselves ;  but  the  mere  study  of  appearances 
teaches  nothing.  When  you  have  learned  to 
harness  and  put  to  your  horses,  start,  stop,  turn 
them,  and  keep  them  going  evenly,  at  a  proper 
pace ;  and  when  your  thong  is  as  easily  handled 
as  a  walking-stick,  then  will  be  time  enough  to 
investigate  matters  of  buttons,  hat  brims,  curve  of 
bit-shanks,  whiphandles,  cut  of  greatcoats,  and 
methods  of  saluting  with  the  whip. 

A  certain  amount  of  strength  is  the  first 
requisite  in  driving  four  horses.  It  is  calculated 
that  the  weight  on  the  hand  of  the  four  reins, 
averages  from  six  to  ten  pounds  for  a  light,  well- 
bitted  team,  less  perhaps  for  a  perfect  team,  and 
running  up  as  high  as  twenty-five,  to  even  more, 
pounds  in  holding  a  team  going  down  hill.  The 
writer  remembers  the  painful  numbness  of  the  left 
forearm  when  he  first  drove  four,  years  ago.  It 
is  well  to  invigorate  the  arms,  and  to  begin 
a  very  little  at  a  time  at  this  exercise,  or  an 
overdose  at  a  first  lesson  may  put  the  forearm 
out  of  commission  for  some  days.  Pulleys, 
dumb-bells,  Indian  clubs,  or  carrying  a  loaded 
walking-stick  will  muscle  up  the  arm  and  put  it 
in  condition. 

The    use   of   the  four-in-hand   whip    is  so  all- 


360  Driving 

important  that  it  should  not  be  left  to  the  last, 
but  practised  persistently  from  the  start.  Many 
teams,  bitted  and  trained  by  professionals  and 
only  driven  in  the  park  by  their  owners,  re- 
quire almost  no  use  of  the  thong;  and  as  a  result 
many  drivers  of  four  horses  can  hardly  put  up 
a  thong,  let  alone  use  it  with  any  success. 

Place  the  point  of  the  thong  under  the  fingers, 
grasping  the  stick,  not  at  the  end,  but  at  the  point 
where  the  ferrule  encircles  it  (Plate  XXXI.). 
Swing  the  point  of  the  stick  from  left  to  right 
with  a  slight  downward  movement,  then  make  a 
quick  half  circle  from  left  to  right  and  upward,  and 
your  thong  will  curl  around  your  stick  three  or 
four  times  and  hold  there.  The  lower  part  of  the 
thong  will  curl  around  the  handle  the  opposite  way. 
Between  the  upper  and  lower  coil  will  hang  a  bight 
of  the  thong  (Plate  XXXI.).  Move  your  stick  over 
to  the  left  or  driving  hand,  pull  out  the  lower  coil 
with  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  that  hand,  and 
place  the  point  of  your  thong  again  under  your 
right  hand,  the  thong  now  going  around  the  stick 
in  the  same  direction  all  the  way  down  so  that 
it  is  easily  unwound  when  wanted  (Plate  XXXI.). 
The  point  of  the  thong  is  more  secure  in  your 
right  hand  if  it  is  wrapped  a  couple  of  times 
around  the  handle,  though  there  is  high  authority 
against  this  practice,  on  the  ground  that  it  is  not 
so  easy  to  unwind  your  thong  when  wanted.     If 


Driving  Four  361 

you  are  a  beginner,  you  will  find  it  safer  to  make 
the  couple  of  turns  around  the  handle.  Mr. 
Bronson,  who  was  one  of  the  very  best  of  our 
American  whips,  held,  and  with  justice,  that  the 
point  of  the  thong  should  not  be  wrapped  around 
the  stick,  maintaining  that  just  when  the  hands 
were  needed  it  required  two  hands  to  undo  it. 
The  whip  should  be  held  pointing  upward  and 
to  the  left.  When  the  thong  hangs  over  the 
middle  of  the  back  of  the  near  wheeler,  your  whip 
will  be  in  about  the  right  position. 

The  way  usually  recommended  for  putting  up 
the  thong  is  to  make  a  large  S  on  the  wall  and 
follow  this  with  the  point  of  the  whip,  beginning 
at  the  bottom  and  moving  across  from  left  to 
right.  To  do  this,  start  slowly  from  left  to  right, 
and  let  the  upper  curve  be  made  with  a  turn  of 
the  wrist  which  will  bring  the  fingers  uppermost 
at  the  finish. 

It  is  exasperatingly  easy,  and  exasperatingly 
difficult.  Once  you  get  the  knack,  it  is  like 
skating  and  swimming,  you  wonder  how  you  were 
ever  puzzled.  If  these  directions  are  not  clear, 
get  some  one  to  pound  it  into  you  by  persistent 
instruction ;  for,  of  all  awkward  things,  none  is 
more  so  than  the  confusion  arising  from  a  dan- 
gling thong,  that  cannot  be  made  to  go  up,  and 
stay  up,  where  it  belongs.  Nothing  but  constant 
practice  makes  one  comfortable  with  the  whip. 


362  Driving 

If  you  are  driving  in  the  country,  unwind  and 
put  up  your  thong  constantly ;  even  take  out 
your  four-in-hand  whip  with  one  or  two  horses, 
and  practise,  practise,  practise.  Some  day,  in  a 
crowded  street  or  in  the  park,  when  a  cut  of  the 
whip  is  imperatively  necessary  and  a  quick  return 
of  the  thong  to  its  place  as  necessary,  you  will  not 
regret  a  moment  of  the  time  spent  in  this  way. 
Do  not  trust  to  luck  in  this  matter.  What  is 
usually  called  "  luck  "  is,  after  all,  the  happy  way 
ability  and  opportunity  have  of  often  meeting. 
Keep  your  thong  pliable,  otherwise  it  will  not 
stay  in  its  place  and  be  difficult  to  put  up. 

In  using  your  whip,  make  as  little  fuss  and 
noise  as  possible;  each  horse  should  be  hit  so 
that  the  other  three  hear  nothing  and  know 
nothing.  Do  not  flick  a  horse,  but  hit  and  draw 
the  thong  at  the  same  time,  then  it  means  some- 
thing. In  putting  up  your  thong,  do  not  make 
a  flourish  with  the  arm.  It  is  just  as  easy  to  put 
the  thong  up  with  the  right  elbow  at  the  side. 

The  wheelers  should  be  hit  in  front  of  the 
pad,  down  the  shoulder ;  it  is  better  to  hit  the  off 
wheeler  on  the  off  shoulder  if  his  mate  is  restive. 

If  there  is  kicking,  the  best  punishment  is  a 
cut  over  the  ears.  In  hitting  the  off  leader, 
swing  the  point  of  your  stick  out  to  the  right; 
once  the  thong  is  unwound,  make  a  turn,  and 
bring  the  stick  forward  quickly,  when  the  thong 


Driving  Four  363 

will  travel  forward  under  the  stick.  Always  aim 
to  hit  a  leader  under  his  traces,  and  when  you 
hit  him  let  him  know  that  he  has  been  hit. 
Always  aim  farther  ahead  than  you  mean  to  hit. 
You  cannot  go  too  far,  and  you  may  be  short. 
To  catch  the  thong  again,  take  it  back,  away 
from  your  horses,  and  point  the  stick  over  your 
left  arm,  allowing  the  thong  to  fall  first,  or  point 
your  stick  up,  and  let  the  thong  slide  down  the 
inside  of  it  to  your  hand.  Pull  the  thong  through 
with  the  finger  and  thumb  of  the  left  hand  till 
the  point  is  within  a  few  inches  of  the  right  hand, 
then  put  up  the  thong  as  directed. 

To  hit  the  near  leader  is  a  little  more  difficult, 
and  a  good  reason,  by  the  way,  for  putting  the 
lazier  leader  on  the  off  side.  Untwist  your  thong 
as  before  on  the  right  side  of  you,  swing  the  thong 
over  all  your  horses  so  that  it  hangs  on  the  left 
side  of  the  coach,  then  with  a  turn  of  the  stick 
shoot  your  thong  as  before,  stopping  the  point  of 
the  stick  at  about  the  pad  of  the  near  wheeler,  when 
the  point  of  the  thong  will  hit  the  near  leader's 
hocks.  In  getting  your  thong  back  from  this 
position,  swing  it  from  left  to  right  over  all  your 
horses,  and  point  the  stick  again  over  the  left 
arm,  when  the  thong  will  fall  over  the  reins  near 
the  hand  or,  if  well  done,  into  the  hand.  Then 
proceed  as  before.  The  near  wheeler  may  be 
hit   on    the    quarters  also,  by  throwing  the  lash 


364  Driving 

between  the  heads  of  the  wheelers,  though  this 
is  condemned  by  many  as  a  bad  practice.  This 
needs  practice,  particularly  in  getting  your  thong 
back  to  your  hand. 

Never  attempt  to  use  the  whip  while  the  right 
hand  is  on  the  reins  or  holding  a  rein.  First, 
because  you  cannot  use  the  whip  with  any  effect, 
and  second,  because  you  are  sure  to  jab  one  of 
your  horses  in  the  mouth  by  a  jerk  on  the  rein 
you  happen  to  be  handling.  See  that  your  thong 
is  all  clear  before  attempting  to  put  it  up.  You 
will  find  that  it  has  a  disconcerting  way  of  catching 
on  the  rein  buckles,  the  handles  of  the  foot-board, 
or  even  on  the  lamps.  If  in  using  your  thong  it 
catches  in  any  part  of  the  harness,  treat  it  gently ; 
do  not  pull  at  it,  which  only  makes  it  hold  faster ; 
and  if  it  will  not  come  loose  by  these  measures, 
send  the  servant  down  to  loosen  it.  If  your 
thong  catches  in  boughs  of  trees  or  the  like,  do 
not  hang  on  to  the  stick,  but  let  the  whole  thing 
go  and  send  back  for  it. 

In  saluting,  drop  your  whip  into  your  left  hand 
and  take  off  your  hat  if  it  be  a  lady  you  would 
recognize.  Few  things  are  more  parochial  in 
these  matters  than  to  see  a  man  making  a  con- 
spicuous sword  salute  with  his  whip  to  a  lady 
who  is  either  in  another  vehicle  or  on  the  road. 
In  saluting  others,  a  movement  of  the  whip  from 
left  to  right  with  the  forearm  is  enough.     It  has 


Point  to  left  with  opposition,  off-wheel 
rein  over  forefinger 


Pulling  up  to  the  left,  near-wheel  rein 
around  thumb,  near-lead  rein  under 
forefinger 


Point  to  right  with  opposition,  near-wheel 
rein  around  root  of  thumb 


PLATE   XXXII 


Stopping 
DRIVING    FOUR 


Driving  Four  365 

the  merit  of  not  taking  the  right  hand  far  from 
the  reins,  and  is  less  conspicuous  than  the  use 
of  the  whip  as  a  sword,  by  bringing  the  handle 
up  to  your  chin. 

It  is  an  old-time  custom  among  the  drivers  of 
road-coaches  in  England  to  take  off  the  hat  to 
a  chimney-sweep.  Just  why  it  is  supposed  to 
bring  luck,  like  killing  spiders  in  the  morning 
and  letting  them  live  in  the  evening,  and  fifty 
other  fancies  of  a  like  kind,  the  writer  cannot 
explain.  In  approaching  trouble,  where  you  are 
likely  to  need  your  thong,  unwind  it  and  hold 
only  the  point  under  your  thumb.  A  cut  in  time 
may  save  a  whole  side  of  harness ! 

Four  horses  with  a  heavy  vehicle  behind  them  — 
a  drag  weighs  from  twenty-one  to  twenty-four  hun- 
dred pounds,  a  public  coach  from  twenty-four  hun- 
dred to  three  thousand  pounds  —  and  loaded  with 
passengers  occupies  a  good  deal  of  space,  gathers 
a  good  deal  of  momentum,  and  needs  a  good  deal 
of  skill  in  its  governor.  The  very  assumption 
of  the  task  of  driving  is  a  great  responsibility. 
No  man  should  undertake  it  lightly. 

To  know  the  whole  game,  and  to  do  it  su- 
premely well,  requires  many,  many  months  of 
constant  and  studious  practice.  The  easier  it 
looks,  the  more  capable  is  the  man  who  makes 
it  look  easy  to  you.  Do  not  for  a  moment  be 
deceived  into  thinking  that  it  is  really  easy.    The 


366  Driving 

consequences  of  thinking  so  may  contain,  not  only 
disasters  of  the  most  awkward  kind,  but  death  also. 

Begin  at  the  very  beginning,  with  the  harness- 
ing and  putting  to  of  your  horses.  Depend  only 
upon  a  good  and  trustworthy  builder  for  your 
vehicle.  If  you  buy  a  second-hand  one,  choose 
it  with  a  friend  who  knows  what  such  a  vehicle 
should  be,  and  then  have  it  gone  over  thoroughly 
by  your  carriage  builder. 

Of  the  harnessing  of  the  horses  we  have  already 
written.  It  needs  to  be  added,  that  in  harnessing 
four  all  the  details  of  fit  and  stoutness  of  leather 
and  proper  bitting  should  be  more  than  ever 
looked  after.  Before  your  horses  are  brought  out 
have  the  pole  in  its  place  and  the  lead-bars  hung 
on  the  pole-hook.  Have  a  look  yourself  to  see 
that  the  pole-pin  is  securely  in  its  place.  Bring 
out  your  wheelers,  hook  the  pole-chains  to  the 
kidney-link  ring,  giving  ample  room  to  back  them 
so  that  the  traces  may  be  put  over  the  roller- 
bolts, —  outside  trace  first,  then  the  inside  one, — 
then  tighten  the  pole-chains  by  passing  the  hook 
through  the  kidney-link  ring  from  the  inside  out 
so  that  it  will  come  out  away  from  the  pole.  The 
length  of  this  chain  must  depend  upon  the  good 
or  bad  roads  you  are  proposing  to  drive  over,  and 
upon  other  things  already  discussed  (Chapter  XII  I.). 
When  your  horses  are  poled  up,  they  are  drawn 
toward  the  pole,  and  you  will  notice  that  the  inside 


Driving  Four  367 

trace  is  therefore  shorter  than  the  outside  trace. 
This  difference  should  be  taken  up  by  enlarging 
the  inside  roller-bolt  by  wrapping  it,  never  by 
punching  holes  in  the  trace,  and  thus  weakening 
it.  Then  fasten  the  coupling-reins  to  their  bits, 
and  fasten  your  reins  over  your  off  wheeler's  pad- 
terret,  or  let  them  be  drawn  through  above  the 
trace  and  tug-buckle  from  the  front,  back. 

Then  bring  out  your  leaders  and  fasten  their 
traces  to  their  bars.  The  leaders  may  be  put  to 
wdth  their  traces  on  their  own  bars ;  with  the  traces 
crossed  on  the  inside,  each  horse  working  off  his 
mate's  bar ;  with  the  traces  crossed,  but  each  horse 
working  off  his  own  bar.  The  first  is  best  for  well- 
trained,  evenly  working  horses.  The  second  is 
advocated  by  those  who  consider  that  this  method 
makes  the  work  more  even,  and  keeps  the  lazy 
horse  up  to  his  work.  The  third  is  mainly  to  keep 
the  leaders  more  together.  The  bars  of  the  leaders 
may  be  fastened  together  with  a  strap  for  the  same 
reason.  Never  use  a  chain  for  this  purpose  as,  in 
case  of  a  leg  over  the  trace  or  any  similar  acci- 
dent, a  chain  cannot  be  cut  and  promptly  undone. 

This  lapping  of  the  traces  is  a  matter  each  man 
should  work  out  for  himself,  after  noticing  how 
his  particular  leaders  go  most  comfortably.  This 
lapping  of  the  traces  also  keeps  the  traces  away 
from  the  horses'  sides,  and  in  hot  or  muddy 
weather  this  is  a  consideration. 


368  Driving 

Buckle  your  coupling-reins  to  the  bits,  run  them 
through  their  terrets,  and,  together  with  the  wheel- 
reins,  push  them  through  from  in  front  above  the 
trace  and  tug-buckle  of  the  off  leader. 

Put  up  your  thong,  lay  the  whip  over  the 
wheelers'  backs,  and  as  a  precaution  push  the  end 
of  it  between  the  back-strap.  If  your  whip  is  in 
the  socket,  it  is  in  your  way  in  getting  up,  it  may 
be  broken  by  your  passengers,  or  it  may  be  played 
with  by  an  ignorant  passenger  and  dropped,  or  at 
any  rate,  the  thong  loosened.  If  the  whip  is 
placed  across  the  toe-board  no  one  can  mount  to 
the  box-seat  while  it  is  there.  If  you  are  driving 
alone  and  studying  your  team,  the  whip  is  better 
on  the  toe-board,  where  it  is  not  easily  displaced 
and  does  not  annoy  the  wheelers;  otherwise  the 
best  place  is  across  the  backs  of  the  wheelers.  A 
piece  of  steel  covered  with  leather  on  the  lead- 
reins  (Fownes  of  London  used  ivory)  just  in  front 
of  the  coupling-buckle  prevents  these  slipping 
through  the  lead-terrets,  as  may  easily  happen  if 
either  horse  plunges  or  hangs  back. 

If  no  bearing-reins  are  used,  the  throat-latches 
should  be  snug,  since  they  alone  hold  the  bridle 
on  the  horse's  head.  In  breaking  in  a  team, 
bearing-reins  properly  adjusted  do  no  harm  and 
are  a  safeguard.  If  necessary,  start  with  them 
very  loose  and  shorten  them  when  the  horse  is 
warmed    up,   and    his    neck   muscles   are   more 


Driving  Four  369 

pliable.  If  the  bearing-reins  are  fastened  up 
before  the  start,  there  will  be  backing,  rearing,  and 
jibbing,  all  of  which  may  be  obviated  by  tightening 
the  bearing-reins  after  the  start. 

If  you  are  to  drive  over  good  level  roads,  your 
wheelers  may  be  placed  as  near  the  coach  as  will 
enable  them  to  go  at  a  good  gait  without  hitting 
the  splinter-bar  or  wheels.  The  length  of  wheel- 
traces  should  be  about  ninety-seven  inches,  of  the 
lead-traces  about  ninety  inches.  With  smaller 
horses  the  traces  are,  of  course,  proportionately 
shorter.  A  long  drawn  out  team  is  hard  on  the 
arm  and  hand,  not  so  easily  manoeuvred,  and, 
being  farther  from  their  work  and  from  you,  not 
so  likely  to  be  easily  handled. 

On  Western  roads  in  this  country,  the  four 
horses  are  put  much  farther  from  the  coach  and 
from  one  another,  and  given  plenty  of  leeway  as 
to  traces  and  pole-chains.  Driving  over  their 
heavy,  rough  roads  necessitates  this.  If  one  of 
our  compactly  harnessed  teams  attempted  to  work 
over  their  roads,  the  coach,  passengers,  and 
horses'  shoulders  would  be  badly  racked.  Indeed, 
it  is  to  be  doubted  whether  closely  harnessed 
horses  would  not  pull  one  another  down.  The 
experienced  coachman  from  the  East  does  not 
sneer  at  the  long  drawn  out  teams  in  the  West; 
nor  does  the  Westerner  sneer  at  the  closely  coupled 
teams  of  the  East.     Each  is  adapted  to  do  its  own 


370  Driving 

work.  It  is  only  the  neophyte  who  sneers  here 
or  elsewhere,  and  a  stupid  neophyte  at  that ;  for  to 
sneer  at  ignorance  is  stupid,  and  to  sneer  at 
stupidity,  ignorant. 

Now  that  you  have  your  horses  harnessed  to 
your  vehicle,  have  another  look  round,  for  at  this 
business  a  quiet  start  is  more  than  half  the  battle, 
and  it  is  worth  while  to  see  to  it  that  you  may  get 
away  without  at  once  stopping,  to  arrange  some- 
thing about  the  harness  that  has  been  neglected. 

Now  step  back  to  the  off  wheeler's  quarter,  and 
with  the  right  hand  take  hold  of  the  leaders' 
reins  and  place  them  in  the  left  hand  where  they 
belong,  with  the  forefinger  between  them ;  then 
take  the  wheelers'  reins,  and  place  them  in  the 
left  hand  with  the  middle  fino^er  between  them. 
You  will  then  have  :  near  leader's  rein  over  fore- 
finger, off  leader's  rein  under  forefinger  and  on 
top  of  the  near  wheeler's  rein ;  the  near  wheeler's 
rein  over  the  middle  finger,  and  under  the  off 
leader's  rein,  and  the  off  wheeler's  rein  under  the 
middle  finger.  Then  with  your  right  hand  pull 
out  twelve  to  eighteen  inches  of  both  off  reins ; 
see  that  the  buckles  of  the  wheel-reins  and  the 
stitchin^s  of  the  lead-reins  are  at  an  even  distance 
from  the  left  hand,  so  that  when  you  are  seated 
on  the  box  the  reins  will  be  level.  It  saves  time, 
trouble,  and  embarrassment  to  be  able  to  do  this 
quickly  and  accurately.     If  you  are  beginning  or 


Driving  Four  371 

out  of  practice,  it  is  well  to  get  up  and  down  with 
the  reins  until  they  are  the  proper  length  in  your 
hand. 

Then  put  the  reins  in  the  right  hand  exactly 
as  they  were  in  the  left  (or  one  finger  lower 
down,  so  that  the  forefinger  is  free  to  hold  on 
in  getting  up ;  this  is  advised  by  some  coach- 
men, but  is  not  necessary),  throw  the  ends  of  the 
reins  over  your  right  arm,  take  your  whip  in  your 
right  hand,  and  you  are  ready  to  mount.  To  do 
this,  put  your  left  foot  on  the  hub  of  the  wheel, 
right  foot  on  the  roller-bolt,  left  foot  on  the  step, 
and  right  foot  on  the  foot-board,  using  your 
left  hand  to  hold  on  with  and  leaving  the  right 
hanging  down.  Sit  down  at  once,  for,  having 
climbed  so  high,  it  would  be  humiliating  to 
tumble  off  if  a  horse  started.  Then  put  the 
reins  back  in  the  left  hand,  where  you  should 
find  them  all  of  about  the  proper  length  (Plate 
XXXII.).  If  they  are  not,  get  them  level  without 
touching  the  mouths  of  the  horses.  In  taking 
the  reins  from  their  place  to  put  them  in  the 
hand,  it  is  usual  to  drop  the  ends  on  the  ground. 
If,  however,  you  are  on  a  muddy  street  or  wet 
pavement,  put  the  ends  of  the  reins  over  the  little 
finger  of  the  right  hand,  which  will  keep  them 
out  of  the  mud  and  wet  while  you  are  arranging 
them  in  your  hand  to  mount. 

Another  way  of  taking  up  the  reins  is,  instead 


372  Driving 

of  drawing  out  the  two  off  reins  before  mounting, 
to  allow  the  two  off  reins  to  run  through  the 
fingers  as  you  mount  to  the  box,  which  has,  to  be 
sure,  the  advantage  of  keeping  control  of  all  four 
horses  from  the  moment  you  take  up  the  reins. 
It  is  rare  that  a  man  drives  four  without  men  at 
his  horses'  heads  when  he  gets  up,  and  for  the 
beginner,  at  any  rate,  the  first-mentioned  method 
is  the  simpler  of  the  two. 

Start  quietly.  Feel  your  horses'  mouths 
gently  as  a  reminder  that  something  is  coming, 
give  the  word,  let  them  have  sufficient  rein,  let 
the  wheelers  into  their  collars  first,  and  go  off 
quietly  at  a  walk.  If  you  are  driving  a  green 
team,  or  a  mean  team,  or  a  team  you  are  making, 
always  start  from  the  stable  yourself.  Even  if 
your  coachman  is  a  bettef  coachman  than  you  are, 
it  is  best  to  get  away  with  them  yourself,  and  to 
keep  them  amenable  from  the  start.  Although  it 
is  advised  here  to  let  the  wheelers  start  the  coach, 
the  ideal  way  is  to  let  all  four  horses  feel  their 
traces  at  the  same  moment ;  but  it  is  only  under 
ideal  circumstances  and  with  an  ideal  team  that 
all  four  horses  will  dip  into  their  collars  at  the 
same  instant,  and  walk  off  with  the  coach,  with- 
out so  much  as  a  fiurry  or  a  shake  of  the  head  at 
starting.  Such  horses  are  too  good  to  be  true, 
and  need  very  little  driving. 

Let  the  rugs  or  quarter-blankets  be  taken  off 


Driving  Four  373 

quietly,  not  grabbed  off  as  a  sort  of  "  get-up " 
signal,  and  if  your  horses  are  at  all  inclined  to 
waver,  let  the  grooms  run  ahead  a  few  steps  so 
that  the  horses  can  see  them  and  be  tempted  to 
go  on  with  them,  and  then,  the  team  fairly  started, 
they  can  drop  back  and  take  their  places  on  the 
coach.  Let  them  have  their  heads  at  the  start 
and  get  them  in  hand  after  they  are  all  in  the 
traces.  By  checking  a  horse  suddenly  at  the 
start,  with  a  too  tight  rein,  or  jabbing  a  leader 
under  the  tail  with  the  pole,  or,  worst  of  all, 
forgetting  to  take  the  brake  off  and  jerking  the 
whole  team  back  on  their  haunches  at  the  start, 
you  may,  you  will  indeed,  so  irritate  your  horses 
that  it  will  take  your  gentlest  and  most  skilful 
behavior  to  get  them  right  and  going  pleasantly. 

The  writer  knows  one  mare  at  least  who  be- 
haves perfectly  if  everything  goes  smoothly  at  the 
start,  but  if  she  is  upset  at  the  start,  the  whole 
drive  is  spoilt  by  her  behavior ;  nor  is  she  ap- 
peased till  safely  back  in  the  stable.  So,  by  all 
means,  use  every  endeavor,  every  artifice  even,  to 
get  a  good  start. 

As  was  duly  emphasized  in  Chapter  XIII.,  by 
far  the  greater  part  of  the  comfort  and  skill  in 
driving  depends  upon  the  give  and  take  of  the 
left  hand  from  the  wrist,  or  with  a  slight  move- 
ment forward  or  backward  of  the  hand  itself. 
Turning  the  left  hand  up  or  down  with  a  move- 


374  Driving 

ment  to  the  right  or  left  will,  if  your  horses  are 
well  in  hand,  guide  them  to  the  right  or  left.  In 
starting,  you  are  usually  on  one  side  or  the  other 
of  the  road.  To  bring  your  horses  over,  two  small 
points  to  the  left  with  the  near  lead-rein  under  the 
thumb,  the  near  wheel-rein  under  the  forefinger; 
or  if  to  the  right,  the  off  lead-rein  under  the  fore- 
finger and  the  off  wheel-rein  under  the  middle  fin- 
ger will  give  the  direction,  and,  once  they  are  where 
you  want  them,  the  reins  slip  out,  and  you  have  had 
the  right  hand  free  to  be  used  if  necessary.  Or, 
turning  the  left  hand  down  with  the  knuckles  toward 
the  horses,  bringing  the  hand  at  the  same  time  back 
to  the  left  hip,  will  take  them  to  the  right ;  while 
turning  the  left  over,  the  knuckles  toward  you, 
and  the  hand  moved  toward  the  body,  will  turn 
them  to  the  left.  This  movement  of  the  left  hand 
up  or  down  shortens  or  lengthens  the  near  lead-rein. 
There  is  an  objection  to  moving  the  left  hand 
about  much,  and  turns  to  the  left  and  right  are 
best  made  by  "  points  "  or  "  loops."  Before  turn- 
ing anywhere,  always  have  your  leaders  well  in 
hand.  If  they  have  hold  of  the  pole-end,  the 
wheelers  are  helpless  to  turn  the  coach.  To  turn 
to  the  left,  take  the  near  lead-rein  with  the  three 
lower  fingers  of  the  right  hand  and  draw  it  back, 
catching  it  under  the  left  thumb,  holding  it  fast  till 
your  team  has  responded  (see  Plate  XXXII.).  To 
turn  to  the  right,  do  the  same  thing  with  your  off 


Driving  Four  375 

lead-rein,  holding  it  either  under  the  thumb  or 
under  the  forefinger  of  the  left  hand  (see  Plate 
XXXII.).  Under  the  forefinger  is  better,  since  the 
rein  is  then  in  its  proper  place  to  run  out,  just  as 
in  the  former  case  under  the  thumb  is  better  for  the 
same  reason.  Never  pull  a  rein  off  to  the  side,  but 
always  straight  back  toward  you,  so  that  the  hands 
may  never  get  too  far  away  from  one  another. 
Do  not  spoil  your  point  by  letting  the  left  hand  go 
forward  to  meet  it,  but  bring  the  point  back  with 
the  right  hand,  keeping  the  left  hand  in  its  place. 
As  soon  as  horses  go  much  together  as  four, 
they  get  to  know  the  signals  of  the  reins  and 
sometimes  respond  too  quickly.  This  is  espe- 
cially so  of  the  wheel  horses.  As  soon  as  they 
feel  the  lead-rein  moving  in  their  head  terret,  they 
begin  to  turn  toward  it.  In  going  round  corners 
this  results  in  the  wheelers  going  round  too 
quickly,  and  perhaps  running  the  coach  on  the 
curb  or  against  a  post  or  pillar.  An  easy  way  to 
avoid  this  is  by  making  an  "  opposition  point "  so 
called.  Before  giving  the  office  to  your  near 
leader,  and  making  the  point  with  your  near  lead- 
rein  to  turn  to  the  left,  take  up  the  off-wheel  rein 
and  hold  it  over  the  forefinger  of  the  left  hand 
(Plate  XXXII.),  then  make  your  point,  and  with 
one  hand  your  leader  is  going  round  to  the  left, 
your  wheelers  are  kept  away  from  the  corner,  and 
you  have  your  right  hand  to  use  on  the  reins,  or 
with  the  whip  to  urge  the  wheelers  round. 


376  Driving 

In  turning  to  the  right,  the  same  thing  may 
be  done  by  taking  the  near  wheeler's  rein  and 
passing  it  over  the  thumb  of  the  left  hand,  then 
point  to  the  right  (Plate  XXXII.),  and  again  you 
have  your  whole  team  in  one  hand  and  doing  your 
bidding.  In  turning  a  team  off  to  the  left,  in 
order  to  pass  another  vehicle,  or  in  any  case 
where  the  turn  is  a  slight  one  and  to  be  made 
quickly,  put  the  right  hand  on  the  two  near  reins 
with  the  middle  finger  between  them,  and  as  you 
draw  them  toward  you  let  the  left  hand  advance. 
Place  the  right  hand  on  the  two  off  reins  with 
the  fourth  finger  between  them,  and  repeat  the 
same  manoeuvre  to  go  to  the  right.  Put  the  right 
hand  well  in  advance  of  the  left  in  doing  this, 
and  pull  directly  toward  you,  otherwise  you  will 
pull  the  reins  out  of  the  left  hand  and  spoil  the 
whole  movement  by  contradictory  instructions  to 
the  horses'  mouths.  In  pulling  up  to  the  left,  you 
may  place  both  near-reins  well  over  the  thumb, 
and  then  use  the  right  hand  as  usual  in  stopping; 
this  will  bring  your  team  over,  and  stop  them  at 
the  same  time  (Plate  XXXII.). 

It  is  obvious  that  all  these  "  oppositions  "  may 
be  made  by  using  the  right  hand  on  the  reins. 
In  most  road  driving  this  is  done.  There  are 
from  time  to  time  turns  to  be  made  round  sharp 
corners,  into  gateways,  through  narrow  streets, 
coming  down  hill,  or  with  a  dip  down  hill    im- 


Driving  Four  377 

mediately  after  turning  a  corner,  when  the  right 
hand  is  imperatively  needed.  It  is  at  such  times 
that  to  know  how  to  make  these  "  points  "  and 
their  "  opposition  "  is  very  useful.  The  best  way, 
therefore,  is  in  times  of  peace  to  prepare  for  war 
by  using  these  "  points  "  and  "  oppositions  "  fre- 
quently where  they  can  be  made  easily  and  without 
looking  at  the  hands ;  then  when  you  really  need 
them  you  know  how  without  fumbling  and  flurry- 
ing to  do  what  is  necessary. 

When  you  wish  to  shorten  your  lead-reins, 
take  them  clean  out  of  the  left  hand,  bring  them 
back  the  required  length,  and  replace  them.  It 
is  better  and  safer,  however,  so  far  as  possible,  to 
push  these,  and  other  reins  when  possible,  back 
from  behind.  To  shorten  the  wheel-reins,  push 
them  back  one  at  a  time  —  an  awkward  way  —  or 
pull  them  both  through  from  behind.  The  near 
wheel-rein,  being  the  most  awkward  rein  to  get 
at,  should  be  shortened  by  pulling  it  from  behind. 
To  shorten  any  other  of  the  three  separately,  take 
it  in  the  lower  fingers  of  the  right  hand  and  push 
it  back  the  required  distance.  To  shorten  all  the 
reins,  put  the  right  hand  on  all  four  reins,  little 
and  fourth  fingers  over  both  off  reins,  middle  finger 
between,  and  forefinger  and  thumb  over  the  near 
reins,  and  push  them  back  a  little  at  a  time.  As 
has  been  said  before,  if  in  a  hurry  pull  all  four 
reins  back  from  behind. 


378  Driving 

As  the  two  reins  together,  the  off-lead  and 
near-wheel,  are  the  most  troublesome  to  the 
beginner,  it  is  well  to  remember  that  if  your 
leaders  are  straggling  to  the  left  and  your  wheel- 
ers to  the  right,  pushing  these  two  centre  reins 
back  a  little  will  put  things  straight.  For  the 
opposite  trouble,  pulling  them  forward  a  little 
will  solve  the  problem.  The  leaders  of  a  team 
are  there  to  help  over  heavy  roads  and  in  going  up 
hill ;  but  as  they  have  no  pole  to  support  them, 
their  position  is  the  more  tiring  one,  and  they 
should  be  cared  for  accordingly  and  not  allowed 
to  pull  all  the  time.  In  crossing  gutters  or  hollow 
places,  be  particularly  careful  to  have  your  leaders 
in  hand,  otherwise  if  they  are  straining  on  the  pole, 
the  lift  and  jerk  may  break  it.  This  is  not  an 
uncommon  accident,  and  a  very  awkward  one. 

Remember  that  because  you  are  driving  four 
horses  you  have  no  peculiar  rights  and  privileges 
over  other  American  citizens,  though  they  be 
driving  only  one  horse  or  a  donkey.  The  cour- 
tesy of  the  road  will  usually  give  the  heavy  load 
a  chance,  but  you  can  only  ask,  you  may  not 
demand  it.  On  a  public  coach,  making  time  and 
carrying  passengers  for  fare,  the  horn  is  both  a 
safeguard  and  a  proper  signal ;  but  the  tooting  of 
a  horn  on  all  occasions  in  park,  village,  and  ordi- 
nary road  driving  is  almost  an  impertinence. 
Cessante  ratione,  cessat  et  ipsa  lex.     If  you  must 


Driving  Four  379 

have  a  horn  for  protection,  drive  up  and  down 
your  own  back  road  until  that  necessity  is  passed. 

In  stopping,  get  ready  in  advance  and  slow 
down  gradually.  Get  your  leaders  back  a  litde, 
put  your  right  hand  on  the  reins  as  already  de- 
scribed, lift  the  left  hand,  push  the  right  toward 
you,  and  come  to  a  stop  with  the  horses  as  nearly 
as  possible  in  their  bits  and  collars  ready  to  start 
again  (Plate  XXXII.).  The  man  who  can  stop  and 
start  without  a  jerk  is  a  good  workman  already. 

Before  getting  down,  put  on  your  brake,  always 
quietly,  then  shift  the  reins  into  the  right  hand 
with  the  whip,  step  down,  put  the  reins  into  the 
tug-bearer  as  they  were  when  you  took  them  out, 
lay  your  whip  across  the  backs  of  the  horses,  and 
your  task  is  done. 

If  there  is  to  be  a  change  of  horses,  or  you  are 
in  your  own  stable  yard  at  the  end  of  the  journey, 
have  your  reins  unbuckled,  let  the  leaders'  reins 
be  pulled  through  your  hands  by  the  grooms,  then 
throw  down  the  wheel-reins,  one  on  either  side,  or, 
as  circumstances  of  space  demand,  retain  the  wheel- 
reins,  and  drive  your  coach  where  it  is  to  stand 
by  the  wheelers  alone,  after  the  leaders  are  out. 
Above  ail  things,  do  nothing  in  a  hurry;  remember 
that  you  are  captain  of  the  ship  and  should  not 
leave  it  until  everything  is  shipshape  and  in  order. 

Where  you  have  but  one  man  at  your  service, 
he  should  stand  at  the  heads  of    the   wheelers 


380  Driving 

where  he  can  hold  them  by  their  heads  and  the 
leaders  by  their  reins.  Never  attempt  to  hold 
or  to  stop  a  team  by  running  to  the  heads  of  the 
leaders.  They  cannot  stop  if  they  would,  with 
a  coach  and  the  two  wheelers  pushing  them  from 
behind.  Get  to  the  heads  of  the  wheelers  and 
stop  them,  and  thus,  if  it  is  not  too  late  to  do  it 
at  all,  stop  the  whole  four. 

Keeping  four  horses  up  to  their  work,  or  well 
in  hand,  does  not  mean  that  they  should  be  all, 
all  the  time,  tugging  at  their  traces.  They  should 
be  kept  up  to  their  bits  all  the  time,  otherwise 
you  have  no  control  over  them  and  no  way  of 
signifying  your  wishes  to  them.  If  you  have 
fenced,  you  know  how  absolutely  essential  it  is 
to  keep  in  constant  touch  with  your  opponent's 
sword.  You  feel  him  by  feeling  his  sword.  I 
have  seen  a  skilful  French  officer  fence  blind- 
folded with  an  inferior  opponent,  he  demanding 
only  that  he  should  be  allowed  to  feel  his  op- 
ponent's weapon  at  all  times,  except  when  he 
thrust,  or  parried.  He  could  apparently  divine 
what  was  coming  by  the  feel  of  his  opponent's 
rapier  on  his  own.  The  feel  of  the  bit  in  the 
horse's  mouth  is  as  important.  You  can  guess 
what  the  horse  intends  to  do,  and  the  horse 
knows  what  you  wish  him  to  do.  If  the  bit  is 
not  on  his  bars  with  a  gentle  pressure  all  the 
time  you  are  driving  him,  you  are  cut  off  from 


Driving  Four  381 

any  quick  connection  with  him.  This  is  what 
it  means  to  have  your  team  in  hand,  that  is,  to 
be  in  constant  communication  with  your  horses' 
mouths.  Most  beginners,  owing  to  the  weight 
of  reins  in  their  hands,  and  because  their  leaders 
are  so  far  away,  either  lug  on  the  reins,  mistaking 
this  for  firmness,  or  they  allow  the  reins  to  dan- 
gle. You  should  feel  each  horse's  mouth  lightly, 
but  all  the  time.  The  lugging  soon  makes  a 
puller ;  while  the  latter  carelessness  produces  what 
is  known  as  a  "  nigger-broke  "  horse,  or  one  that 
is  lazy  and  never  quickly  obedient  to  the  bit. 

If  you  are  getting  together  a  team  for  your- 
self and  by  yourself,  therefore,  it  is  far  better  to 
drive  each  horse  single  until  you  know  his  mouth, 
and  then  in  pairs  until  you  are  quite  familiar 
with  the  way  they  like  to  go  best  as  to  bits, 
coupling-reins,  and  the  like.  There  are  two 
classes  of  people  who  have  accidents :  the  begin- 
ners who  are  rash,  and  the  old  hands  who  are 
over-confident,  and  hence  careless.  When  your 
driving  has  gone  smoothly  for  some  time  you 
take  less  pains,  a  mistake  is  made,  and  trouble 
follows.  But  even  if  carelessness  does  not  result 
actually  in  accident,  remember  that  it  is  bad  for 
the  horses  not  to  be  kept  strictly  up  to  the  mark 
whenever  they  are  driven.  The  horses  become 
slovenly  in  their  work  all  too  quickly,  if  you  are 
careless  in  yours. 


382  The  Drag 


RULES  FOR  JUDGING  PARK  DRAGS  AND  ROAD- 
COACHES,  AS  ADOPTED  BY  THE  COACHING 
CLUB 

The  drag  should  have  a  perch  and  be  less  heavy  than  a 
road-coach  and  more  highly  finished,  with  crest  or  monogram 
on  the  door  panels  or  hind  boot,  or  foot-board. 

The  axles  may  be  either  mail  or  collinges  (not  imitation). 

The  hind  seat  should  be  supported  by  curved  iron  braces, 
and  be  of  a  proper  width  for  two  grooms,  without  lazy-back. 


The  lazy-backs  on  the  roof  seats  should  be  turned  down 
when  not  in  use. 

The  under  side  of  the  foot-board,  together  with  the  rises, 
should  be  of  the  same  color  as  the  under-carriage. 


The  body  of  the  drag  and  the  panel  of  the  hind  boot  should 
correspond  in  color. 

The  door  of  the  hind  boot  should  be  hinged  at  the  bottom, 
that  it  may  be  used  as  a  table  when  open. 


The  skid  and  safety-hook  (if  carried)  should  be  hung  on 
the  off  side. 


The  Coach  383 


RULES  FOR  JUDGING  PARK  DRAGS  AND  ROAD- 
COACHES,  AS  ADOPTED  BY  THE  COACHING 
CLUB 

The  road-coach  should  be  built  stronger  than  a  park 
drag,  especially  as  to  the  under-carriage  and  axles,  which 
latter  should  not  measure  less  than  two  inches  in  diameter. 

The  axles  may  be  either  mail  or  coUinges  (not  imitation). 

The  hind  seat  is  usually  supported  by  solid  wooden  risers, 
with  wooden  curtain,  but  the  supports  maybe  of  curved  iron, 
as  in  a  park  drag,  in  which  case  a  stationary  leather  curtain 
is  used.  Its  seat  should  be  wide  enough  for  at  least  two  be- 
side the  guard,  who  should  occupy  the  near  side  with  an  extra 
cushion.  He  should  have  a  strap  to  take  hold  of  when  stand- 
ing to  sound  the  horn. 

The  lazy-backs  of  the  box-seat,  hind  seat,  and  roof  seats 
should  be  stationary. 

The  under  side  of  the  foot-board,  together  with  the  risers  of 
the  box  and  rumble,  should  be  of  the  same  color  as  the  under- 
carriage. 

The  body  of  the  coach  and  the  panel  of  the  hind  boot 
should  also  correspond  in  color. 

The  door  on  the  hind  boot  to  be  hinged  on  the  off  side  to 
enable  the  guard  to  open  it  from  the  near  hind  step  when  the 
coach  is  in  motion. 

The  skid  and  safety-hook  must  be  hung  on  the  off  side  in 
countries  in  which  it  is  customary  to  drive  on  the  off  side  of 
the  roadway,  for  the  skid  should  be  on  the  outside  wheel 
or  the  coach  will  slide  towards  the  ditch. 


384  The  Drag 

It  is  customary  to  trim  the  outside  seats  in  either  pigskin 
or  cloth,  and  the  inside  of  the  drag  in  morocco  or  cloth. 


The  coachman's  driving  apron,  when  not  in  use,  should  be 
folded  on  the  driving  cushion,  outside  out.  Passengers'  aprons, 
if  carried,  to  be  folded  and  placed  on  the  front  inside  seat. 

A  watch  and  case  are  not  essential,  nor  is  the  pocket  in  the 
driving  cushion. 

There  should  be  no  luggage  rails,  or  straps  on  the  roof 
between  the  seats. 


Inside,  the  drag  should  have :  — 
Hat  straps  fastened  to  the  roof. 
Pockets  on  the  doors. 

Places  over  the  front  or  back  seats  where  the  lamps  may 
be  hung  when  not  in  use. 
An  extra  jointed  whip. 

The  umbrella  basket  when  carried  to  be  hung  on  the  near 
side. 


Lamps  off. — Lamps  inside  coach. 

Two  extra  lead  bars,  consisting  of  a  main  and  side  bar, 
fastened  to  the  back  of  the  hind  seat  with  straps.  Main  bar 
above. 

Lead  bars  put  on  with  screw-heads  of  furniture  up. 


The  Coach  385 

The  trimming  of  the  outside  seats  should  be  of  carpet  or 
any  other  suitable  material,  not  leather.  The  inside  of  the 
coach  is  usually  finished  in  hard  wood  or  leather. 

The  coachman's  driving  apron,  when  not  in  use,  should  be 
folded  on  the  driving  cushion,  outside  out. 


A  foot-board  watch  with  case  should  be  provided.  The 
driving  cushion  should  have  a  pocket  on  the  near  side. 

The  iron  rails  on  the  roof,  between  the  front  and  back 
seats,  should  have  a  lattice  or  network  of  leather  straps  to 
prevent  small  luggage,  coats,  rugs,  etc.,  placed  on  the  roof, 
from  falling  off. 

Inside,  the  coach  should  have :  — 

Hat  straps  fastened  to  the  roof. 

Leather  pockets  at  the  sides  or  on  the  doors. 

An  extra  jointed  whip. 


The  basket  shall  be  hung  on  the  near  side  and  in  front  of 
the  guard's  seat.  The  horn  should  be  placed  in  the  basket 
with  its  mouthpiece  up. 

Side  lamps  in  place  and  ready  for  use. 

Two  extra  lead  bars,  consisting  of  a  main  and  side  bar, 
fastened  to  the  back  of  the  hind  seat  with  straps.  Main  bar 
above. 

Lead  bars  put  on  with  screw-heads  of  furniture  up, 

20 


386  The  Drag 

The  following  articles  to  be  neatly  stowed  inside  the  front 
boot : — 

A  small  kit  of  tools. 

An  extra  lead  and  wheel  trace. 

A  rein  splicer  or  two  double  buckles  of  different  sizes. 
Extra  hame  straps. 

Loin-cloths  for  team  and  the  necessary  waterproof  aprons 
should  be  carried  in  a  convenient  and  accessible  part  of  the 
drag. 

It  is  usual  for  a  park  drag  to  be  fitted  with  luncheon 
boxes,  wine  racks,  etc.,  also  a  box  on  the  roof  called  an 
"  imperial."  This  latter  is  never  carried  except  when  going 
to  the  races  or  a  luncheon. 

Pole-chains  should  be  burnished  and  have  spring-hooks. 
The  chains  should  be  of  a  length  which  will  admit  of  snapping 
both  hooks  into  the  pole  headring.  If  too  short,  one  end 
should  be  hooked  in  the  pole  headring  and  the  other  in  a  link. 
If  too  long,  one  end  should  be  snapped  in  the  pole  headring, 
and  the  other  brought  through  said  ring  (from  the  outside  in) 
and  snapped  in  a  link. 

Cruppers  with  buckles  on  all  horses  preferred. 


Loin  straps  and  trace  bearers  are  permissible. 

Face  pieces  (drops). 

Martingale  around  the  collars  of  wheelers  and  not  through 
kidney-link  alone. 


The  Coach  387 

The  following  articles  to  be  neatly  stowed  in  a  convenient 
part  of  the  coach :  — 

A  wheel  jack.     Extra  hame  straps. 

A  chain  trace.     Extra  lead  trace. 

An  extra  bit.     A  bearing-rein. 

A  rein  splicer,  or  two  double  buckles  of  different  sizes.  A 
kit  of  tools,  comprising  a  wrench,  hammer,  cold  chisel,  coil 
of  wire,  punch,  hoof-pick,  and  knife. 

Two  extra  large  rings  for  kidney-links,  or  a  pair  of  pole 
pieces. 


The  guard  should  be  appropriately  dressed  and  should 
have  a  way-bill  pouch  with  a  watch  fitted  on  one  side  and  a 
place  provided  for  the  key  of  the  hind  boot. 

Pole-chains  should  be  burnished  or  black,  but  pole  head 
and  chains  must  be  alike.  Hooks  should  have  india-rubber 
rings,  not  spring-hooks. 

Chains  with  single  hooks  should  be  put  on  pole-head  from 
inside  out,  then  passed  through  the  kidney-link,  and  hooked 
into  one  of  the  links  of  the  chains. 


Cruppers  on  wheelers  but  not  necessarily  on  leaders,  unless 
bearing-reins  are  used.  Trace  bearers  on  the  leaders  from 
the  hames  to  the  tug  buckles  are  permissible. 

No  loin  straps. 

Face  pieces  (optional). 

Martingale  around  the  collar  and  not  through  kidney-link 

alone. 


388  The  Drag 

Martingales  on  all  horses. 

Mountings  of  coach  harness  and  the  buttons  on  servants' 
liveries  should  be  of  the  same  metal. 

Wheel  traces  with  metal  loop  ends,  not  chains. 

Wheelers'  inside  traces  shorter  than  outside  traces,  unless 
the  inside  roller  bolt  is  enlarged  to  give  the  same  result. 

Lead  traces  straight  or  lapped,  not  crossed. 

Eyes  on  ends  of  hames  through  which  the  kidney-links 
pass. 

Plain  kidney-links. 

No  kidney-link  rings  on  leaders. 

Solid  draught  eyes  on  hames. 

Clip  inside  of  trace  leather,  and  showing  rivet  heads  only. 

Full  bearing-reins  with  bit  and  bridoon. 
Buxton  bits  preferred. 

Single  point  strap  to  tug  buckle. 

Metal  or  ribbon  fronts  to  bridles.     If   ribbon,  the   color 
should  match  the  livery  waistcoats. 

The  crest  or  monogram  should  be  on   the  rosettes,  face 
pieces,  winkers,  pads  and  martingale  flaps. 
Ribbon  or  colored  rosettes  are  inappropriate. 


The  Coach  389 

No  martingales  on  leaders ;  kidney-link  rings  on  leaders. 

Mountings,  preferably  of  brass,  but  at  least  all  of  the  same 
metal  throughout. 

Wheel  traces  with  French  loop  or  chain  ends.     Chain  put 
on  roller  bolt  with  chain  out  and  ring  in. 

Wheelers'  inside  traces  shorter  than  outside  traces,  unless 
the  inside  roller  bolt  is  enlarged  to  give  the  same  result. 

Lead  traces  lapped,  crossed,  or  straight. 

Hook  ends  to  hames. 

Chain  and  short  kidney-links  or  all  chain. 

Ring  draught  eyes  on  hames. 

One  or  more  bearing-reins  are  optionaL 

Cruppers  with  or  without  buckles. 
Martingale  back  strap. 


Metal  or  leather  fronts  to  bridles.  If  leather,  the  color  to 
match  the  color  of  the  coach. 

A  crest  or  monogram  is  not  generally  used  in  road  work, 
but  instead  lead  bars  or  a  special  device  in  brass  is  put  on 
the  winkers  and  rosettes. 


390  The  Drag 

Hame  straps  put  on  with  points  inside  ;  i.e.  to  the  off  side 
on  the  near  horse  and  the  near  side  on  the  off  horse. 

Reins  of  single  brown  leather. 

Draught-reins  sewed  in  one  piece  with  end  buckles  only. 

Lead  traces  with  screw-heads  of  the  cock-eyes  up. 


All  parts   of   the   harness   should   be   double  and  neatly 
stitched. 

Collars  to  be  of  black  patent  leather,  shaped  to  the  neck. 


The  hames  bent  to  fit  the  collar  accurately. 

Harness  black.  —  All  straps  should  be  of  proper  length, 
but  not  too  short. 

When  the  owner  or  his  representative  drives,  the  stable 
shutters  should  be  down  ;  otherwise  up. 


The  Coacb  391 

Hame  straps  put  on  with  points  inside ;  i.e.  to  the  off  side 
on  the  near  horse  and  the  near  side  on  the  off  horse. 

Reins  of  single  brown  leather. 

Draught-reins  sewed  in  one  piece  with  end  buckles  only. 

Traces  with  screw-heads  of  the  cock-eyes  and  chain  ends 
up. 

All  straps  preferably  of  single  leather. 

Collars  may  be  of  patent,  plain  black,  or  brown  leather ; 
straight,  thick,  and  full  padded. 

The  hames  straight  to  fit  the  collar. 

Harness  black  or  brown. 


CHAPTER   XV 

THE   TAxNDEM 

One  horse  driven  in  front  of  the  other  gave  a 
University  wag  the  opportunity  to  nickname  two 
horses  so  driven  a  "  tandem,"  from  the  Latin  word 
meaning  "  at  length,"  as  applied  to  time.  This  joke 
has  crystallized  into  a  familiar  English  word,  and 
many  tandem  drivers  to-day  include  all  the  Latin 
in  their  vocabulary  in  this  form  of  exercise. 

The  fundamental  principles  of  tandem  driving 
are  much  the  same  as  four-in-hand  driving,  except 
that  the  horses  turn  more  quickly,  and  with  less 
pressure  on  the  reins,  especially  in  the  case  of  the 
leader.  The  reins,  too,  are  closer  together  in 
the  hand,  making  the  fingering  more  difficult,  and 
the  handling  of  a  spirited  leader  is  perhaps  as 
difficult  and  nice  a  task  as  any  form  of  driving 
affords. 

Although  the  chief  authority  for  this  chapter, 
T.  Suffern  Tailer,  Esq.,  late  the  president  of  the 
New  York  Tandem  Club,  decries  the  use  of  any- 
thing but  traces  for  the  leader,  —  traces  fastened  to 
the  traces  of  the  wheeler,  —  it  is  fair  to  the  reader 
to  describe  another  method  of  harnessing. 
392 


The  Tandem  393 

This  method  consists  of  having  two  swingle- 
bars,  one  2  feet  6  inches  in  length,  the  other  about  2 
feet  in  length.  The  first  has  a  hook  in  front  and 
a  chain  at  the  back,  about  i  foot  in  length.  This 
chain  is  hooked  to  a  ring  at  the  bottom  of  the 
wheeler's  hames,  and  at  the  end  are  two  short 
traces  fastening  to  the  wheeler's  traces  by  two 
rings,  or  loops,  under  the  trace-buckles.  The 
second  bar  is  attached  by  an  eyelet  to  the  hook 
of  the  first  bar;  to  this,  of  course,  are  attached  the 
leader's  traces  in  the  usual  manner. 

Advocates  of  this  way  of  harnessing  claim 
that  by  this  method  the  leader's  traces  may  be 
made  almost  as  short  as  those  of  the  wheeler, 
and  that  there  is  far  less  danger  —  none,  indeed 
—  of  a  leader  getting  his  legs  over  a  trace. 

In  tandem  harness  there  should  be  as  little 
harness  as  possible,  even  breeching  omitted, 
except  in  a  very  hilly  country.  One  of  the  advan- 
tages of  this  form  of  driving  sport  is  that,  even 
with  a  small  stable  and  few  horses,  one  may  drive 
tandem  without  any  great  extra  outlay.  The 
wheeler's  harness  may  be  an  ordinary  set  of  single 
harness,  with  double  terrets  in  the  pad,  and  terrets 
above  the  blinkers,  to  carry  the  leader's  reins. 
The  leader's  harness  may  be  the  same,  with  a  very 
light  pad,  since  the  pad  in  the  leader's  case  only 
carries  the  traces.  The  traces  of  the  leader  have 
spring-hooks  which  are  fastened  to  the  brass  rings, 


394  Driving 

or  loops,  under  the  wheeler's  trace-buckles.  On 
the  leader's  pad  are  two  leather  loops  to  carry  the 
traces,  and  over  the  leader's  loins,  a  bearing  strap, 
just  long  enough  to  keep  the  traces  level.  The 
reins  should  be  light,  strong,  and  of  the  same  size, 
and  suited  to  the  size  of  the  coachman's  hands. 
It  is  hardly  necessary  to  say  that  to  fasten  the 
leader's  traces  to  the  ends  of  the  shafts  is  suici- 
dally dangerous ;  but  as  it  is  sometimes  done  the 
warning  is  needed. 

The  writer's  own  experience  in  driving  tandem 
has  been  confined  mostly  to  a  pony  tandem,  a  form 
of  amusement  strongly  recommended  by  Lady 
Gorgiana  Curzon  in  the  Badminton  volume  on 
Driving. 

Two  ponies,  a  stocky,  short-legged  pony  14.2 
in  the  wheel,  and  a  breedier  specimen  of  the 
same  height  in  the  lead,  make  a  pair  that  bowl 
along  at  a  good  rate,  are  light  in  hand,  and 
give  younger  members  of  the  family  capital 
practice  in  the  handling  of  four  reins  in  one 
hand.  If  you  have  a  Phidippides  in  the  family, 
by  all  means  put  him  to  work  at  tandem  driving. 
It  is  good  for  his  courage,  and  may  be  good  for 
his  conceit  (Plate  XXXIII.). 

Every  one  who  has  driven  tandem  much, 
and  almost  every  one  who  has  not  driven  tan- 
dem at  all,  agree:  the  first  that  tandem  driving 
is  excellent  sport,  and  not  dangerous ;  the  latter 


PLATE   XXXIV.— TANDEM    DOG-CART 


PLATE   XXXV.  — HIGH    AND    DANGEROUS   COCKING-CART 


The  Tandem  395 

that  it  is  a  foolish  waste  of  equine  energy,  and 
very  dangerous. 

All  forms  of  driving  are  dangerous,  from  pilot- 
ing Dobbin  in  a  farm-wagon,  to  driving  a  drag  to 
a  race  meeting,  if  the  coachman  is  ignorant,  care- 
less, and  nervous.  Even  Dobbin  may  go  down 
on  his  knees,  or  shy,  and  run  away,  if  he  is  not 
looked  after.  But  tandem  driving  is  no  more 
dangerous  than  other  forms  of  driving,  if  harness, 
cart,  and  horses  are  suited  to  the  sport,  and  the 
coachman  is  forever  vigilant.  There  is  no  doubt 
but  that  most  horses  enjoy  going  this  way,  and 
the  change  is  good  for  them,  and  it  is  excellent 
practice ;  none  better,  indeed,  for  their  owner. 

In  putting  two  horses  together  in  this  fashion 
the  traces  of  the  leader  may  be  as  short  as  pos- 
sible, say  three  feet  from  the  nose  of  the  wheeler 
to  the  croup  of  the  leader,  when  the  traces  are 
taut.  The  leader,  if  a  breedy-looking  animal, 
with  good  neck  and  shoulders,  may  wear  to  ad- 
vantage a  breast  collar,  instead  of  a  neck  collar. 
He  may,  indeed,  be  with  propriety  as  lightly  har- 
nessed as  possible. 

The  origin  of  the  tandem  was  a  convenient 
way  of  taking  a  hunter  to  cover  by  putting  him 
in  the  lead  of  a  dog-cart,  with  his  saddle  and 
bridle  carried  along  in  the  cart.  Even  to  this 
day  this  pedigree  of  the  tandem  marks  out  the 
proper  proportions  and  proper  qualities  for  both 


396  Driving 

wheeler  and  leader.  The  leader  may  thus  be 
driven  appropriately  in  a  ring  snaffle,  although 
probably  the  best  bits  are  the  Liverpool  or  Elbow 
bits  with  the  not-to-be-forgotten  proviso  that  the 
wheeler's  bit  should  have  a  bar  across  the  bottom 
of  it  to  prevent  the  wheeler  catching  the  leader's 
rein  under  the  end  of  the  cheek-piece  of  his  bit 
—  a  trick  one  of  the  writer's  ponies  soon  learned, 
and  was  much  mystified  for  days  to  find  that  the 
trick  would  not  come  off,  after  a  bar  had  been 
added  to  the  bottom  of  her  bit.  If  the  wheeler 
indulges  in  much  shaking  about  of  his  head,  he 
should  have  both  a  light  bearing-rein  and  a  mar- 
tingale. The  leader  ought  to  be  the  type  of 
horse  which  needs  neither  of  these  fixtures. 

The  whip  may  be  lighter  than  the  coach-whip, 
and  5  feet  long  for  the  stick,  and  8  feet  6  inches  for 
the  lash,  if  you  are  driving  ponies ;  2  feet  longer 
in  the  lash  if  driving  full-sized  horses. 

Before  attempting  a  tandem  with  any  horses 
you  happen  to  have  in  the  stable,  it  is  well  to  do 
a  little  training  of  the  one  you  propose  to  use  as 
leader.  With  a  pair  of  long  reins  you  should 
drive  him  with  nothing  behind  him,  so  that  he 
may  become  accustomed  to  moving  along  with 
no  weight  on  his  collar.  Let  the  reins  touch  his 
quarters  so  that  he  may  become  accustomed  to 
the  loose  traces  in  which  he  will  go  later.  Some 
horses  take  to  this  way  of  going  like  ducks   to 


The  Tandem  397 

water,  and  make  no  objections  and  few  mistakes 
from  the  beginning ;  but  it  is  best,  in  any  case,  to 
do  a  little  training  before  they  are  put  together 
in  what  must  be  a  novel  way  to  them.  As  the 
pressure  should  be  less,  and  the  loops  taken 
smaller,  in  tandem  driving,  much  of  the  turning 
may  be  done  by  the  turn  of  the  wrist  and  the 
moving  of  the  hand  from  left  to  right,  as  described 
in  the  chapter  on  driving  one  horse.  In  turning, 
the  points  to  right  and  left  should  be  small,  and 
care  taken  to  keep  your  wheeler  from  rushing  his 
corners,  as  he  may  so  easily  do  with  a  two-wheeled 
trap  behind  him.  If  your  leader  is  going  off  to 
the  left  too  much  and  your  wheeler  to  the  right, 
push  your  two  centre  reins  back  a  little,  and  this 
will  straighten  them  out ;  or  if  the  contrary  is  the 
case,  and  your  leader  is  going  to  the  right  and 
your  wheeler  to  the  left,  pull  the  two  centre  reins 
out  a  bit.  The  two  centre  reins  are,  the  upper 
one,  your  off  lead-rein,  the  lower  one,  your  near 
wheel-rein. 

It  is  more  than  ever  necessary  that  the  left 
hand  should  be  kept  in  its  place,  and  the  reins 
held  firmly  in  their  place,  otherwise  your  team 
will  never  be  straight  for  long  at  a  time.  The 
left  hand  should  be  held  as  in  driving  four. 
When  the  right  hand  is  used  on  all  the  reins,  the 
little  and  third  fingers  go  over  the  two  off  side 
reins,  the  middle  finger  over  the  near  wheel-rein, 


398  Driving 

and  the  first  finger  over  the  near  lead-rein,  thus 
giving  the  right  hand  control  over  each  and  all  of 
the  reins.  The  two  off  side  reins  may  be  kept 
together,  for  in  tandem  driving  it  is  only  neces- 
sary to  make  "  points  "  when  turning  practically 
at  right  angles.  The  horses  should  follow  one 
another  without  making  a  break  between  your 
leader  and  wheeler  by  having  the  leader  at  right 
angles  to  the  wheeler  when  making  a  turn.  Too 
large  a  loop  taken  with  only  one  rein  is  very  apt 
to  bring  your  leader  around  too  fast  and  too 
far. 

Never  under  any  circumstances  have  your  lead 
traces  taut  when  making  a  turn,  as  you  may  thus 
pull  your  wheeler  off  his  feet,  and  in  any  case, 
when  the  lead  traces  are  taut,  it  is  your  leader, 
and  not  you,  who  is  in  control.  Though  driving 
tandem  is  similar  in  the  manipulation  of  the  reins 
to  driving  four,  it  is  on  a  miniature  scale.  Every- 
thing must  be  done  more  gently,  more  quietly, 
more  quickly,  and  all  loops  or  points  need  only 
be  of  the  smallest.  The  wheeler  should  start 
and  stop  the  cart,  and  once  they  are  going,  the 
wheeler  should  follow  directly  behind  the  leader. 
The  reins  in  a  tandem  come  into  the  hand 
much  closer  together  than  in  the  case  of  a  four, 
where  the  horses,  being  spread  out,  the  reins  are 
accordingly  apart.  This  makes  the  handling  of 
tandem  reins  quickly,  difficult.     When  wishing  to 


The  Tandem  399 

use  the  right  hand,  if  the  left  be  pushed  forward 
slightly  it  gives  the  right  hand  a  chance  to  place 
itself  correctly  on  the  reins,  as  the  reins  are 
thus  pushed  slightly  apart.  In  tandem  driving 
it  is  of  supreme  importance  to  be  ready  in  ad- 
vance. Whether  stopping,  starting,  turning,  in- 
creasing, or  slacking  your  pace,  your  right  hand 
should  not  be  fumbling  to  get  itself  on  the  right 
reins,  but  should  be  there,  and  ready,  before  it  is 
required.  A  quick,  nervous  leader  can  turn,  stop, 
start,  and  back  like  a  flash.  If  you  are  not  ready 
for  him  before  he  gets  going,  no  mortal  is  quick 
enough  to  catch  him  afterwards.  The  damage 
is  done,  and  your  horses  in  a  tangle  while  you  are 
still  groping  with  your  right  hand  for  the  proper 
reins.  In  passing  other  vehicles,  or  any  object 
that  you  think  may  cause  your  leader  to  shy, 
always  have  a  small  loop  of  that  side  rein  under 
your  thumb,  and  your  right  hand  ready  to  put  on 
the  brakes  on  whichever  rein  requires  it,  instantly, 
before  either  horse  can  make  much  of  a  detour.  A 
horse  met  at  once  with  a  rebuke  is  half  persuaded 
already  to  come  to  terms.  The  cart,  if  ponies 
are  driven,  should  not  be  too  light  nor  too  low. 
With  wheels  4  feet  9  or  10  inches  in  diameter, 
the  coachman's  seat  will  be  about  5  feet  4  from 
the  ground.  The  wider  the  cart,  up  to  6  feet 
wide  inside,  the  better,  both  for  the  comfort  of 
the  passengers,  and  because  a  broad  track  lessens 


4CX)  Driving 

the  danger  of  upsetting.     The  body  of  the  cart 
should  be  set  as  low  on  the  axles  as  possible. 

A  cart  with  bent  shafts  pivoted  on  the  front 
part  of  the  cart,  and  adjustable  behind,  with 
wheels  five  feet  high,  and  track  five  feet  wide, 
will  accommodate  anything,  from  14.2  to  16 
hands,  and  makes,  if  lightly  built,  a  good  all- 
round  two- wheel  cart  for  all  sorts  of  purposes. 
A  slant  of  from  three  to  four  inches  for  the  driv- 
ing cushion  makes  a  comfortable  angle  for  the 
seat.  If  necessary,  have  a  movable  foot-rest,  but 
on  no  account  a  rail  for  your  feet.  See,  on  this 
subject,  remarks  in  the  chapter  on  driving  one 
horse.  These  descriptions  and  requirements  do 
not  purport  to  guide  one  in  setting  up  a  tandem 
for  show  purposes.  This  branch  of  the  subject 
is  dealt  with  completely,  and  with  experienced 
competency,  by  Mr.  Tailer  in  the  next  chapter. 
But  tandem  driving  is  too  good  a  sport  to  be 
confined  to  the  show  ring.  Any  enterprising 
horse  owner  may  put  to  a  tandem  out  of  his 
own  stable  without  adding  much  to  the  expense 
of  his  stable,  while  adding  greatly  to  the  variety 
of  sport  to  be  got  out  of  his  establishment. 


CHAPTER   XVI 

DRIVING  TANDEM,   BY   T.    SUFFERN   TAILER,   ESQ. 

"Not  every  path  extends  the  same, 
But  various  are  the  roads  to  fame ; 
With  different  eye  the  same  pursuits  we  view, 
Nor  all  one  wish  with  equal  zeal  pursue." 

It  is  arranged,  no  doubt  wisely,  that  happiness, 
which  is  the  universal  aim  of  mankind,  may  be 
pursued  by  numerous  roads,  and  that  they  who 
seek  it  on  wheels  may  choose  from  a  variety  of 
conveyances. 

Some  press  forward  to  the  goal  astride  the 
bicycle,  or  in  the  automobile,  for  which  vehicles 
it  may  be  claimed  that  at  any  rate  they  don't  cost 
much  to  feed ;  others  drive  furiously  in  a  coffin- 
shaped  box  within  four  "  spider  "  wheels ;  and  yet 
others  prefer, — 

"  To  dash  along  with  four-in-hand,  while  others  drive  at  random, 
In  whiskey,  buggy,  gig  or  dog-cart,  curricle  or  tandem." 

According  the  "  right  of  way  "  to  this  proces- 
sion, I  at  length  claim  the  privilege  to  take  my 
pleasure  in  driving  a  tandem. 

One  of  the  first  requisites  of  this  is  nerve, — 
an  indispensable  requisite,  in  fact.     It  is  the  very 

2D  401 


402  Driving 

spice  of  danger  that  makes  this  form  of  driving 
exciting;  but  for  a  man  who  has  nerve,  and 
acquires  the  proper  amount  of  skill,  there  is  no 
more  danger  in  driving  a  tandem  than  any  other 
equipage  in  vogue.  Fewer  accidents  befall  ex- 
perienced tandem  drivers  than  those  who  drive 
any  local  style  of  turnout. 

For  example,  a  man  in  a  road  wagon  of  the 
conventional  style,  with  four  wheels  confining  him 
in  a  narrow  box,  when  his  horse  bolts  has  no 
means  whatsoever  of  saving  himself;  whereas,  in 
a  dog-cart,  although  when  the  wheeler  goes  down 
he  may  get  a  "father  and  mother  of  a  fall,"  he 
does  not  part  company  with  the  vehicle. 

It  seems  to  be  established  that  the  most  com- 
petent authority  on  a  subject  is  one  who  has 
much  theoretical,  and  little  practical,  knowledge 
of  it. 

For  a  tandem  set  up  on  theories  alone,  the 
horses  must  be  a  pair  perfectly  matched  in  figure, 
height,  color,  and  action ;  either,  therefore,  fit  to 
change  places  with,  and  to  do  the  work  of,  the 
other.  Experienced  tandem  drivers  whose  opin- 
ions are  entitled  to  consideration  dissent  decid- 
edly from  this  view.  They  maintain  that  if  the 
wheeler,  that  holds  the  entire  weight  on  descend- 
ing, and  performs  nearly  all  the  work,  on  level 
ground,  for  which  great  strength  and  straight 
action  are  necessary,  is  the  standard  of  the  pair, 


Driving  Tandem  403 

a  leader  patterned  on  this  type  will  be  too  stout 
and  too  coarse.  If  the  leader,  on  the  other  hand, 
in  quality,  figure,  and  action  is  of  the  perfect  type, 
he  will  be  too  light,  and  otherwise  unsuited  for 
the  wheeler's  place. 

For  tandem  carts  of  standard  weight,  the 
wheeler,  which  is  the  chief  factor  or  mainstay  of 
the  tandem,  should  be  15.3  hands  high,  with  a 
well-cut  head,  deep,  sloping  shoulders,  broad  chest, 
short,  straight  back,  wide  hips,  and  strong  quarters 
on  short,  strong  legs.  To  prevent  angles  in,  and 
to  afford  direct  draught  of  the  driving-reins,  the 
head  should  be  carried  straight  and  naturally, — 
neither  with  nose  poked  out  in  front,  nor  pointed 
high  like  a  "  star-gazer's,"  nor  yet  drawn  in  to  the 
chest,  —  and  he  should  be  a  fast  and  straight  goer, 
wasting  none  of  his  force  in  extravagant  action. 

"  A  roadster  good,  not  straddling  high, 
Nor  shuffling  low,  I  find  thee  ; 
But  stepping  straight  and  cheerily 
Thou  leav'st  the  miles  behind  thee." 

The  leader,  whose  duties  seem  to  be  orna- 
mental chiefly,  he  having  nothing  to  carry  but  his 
harness,  little  work  to  do  except  on  heavy  or  hilly 
roads,  and  nothing  to  hold  down  hill,  need  have 
none  of  the  qualities  mentioned  as  indispensable 
requisites  in  the  wheeler. 

With  a  wheeler,  as   before  described,  15.3  in 


404  Driving 

height,  I  should  choose  a  leader  15.2  or  15.2I; 
a  half  or  three-quarters  thoroughbred,  but  with 
plenty  of  substance  and  bone.  He  should  have 
high  style  and  high  action  all  round ;  rakish  and 
gamy  in  form,  spirit,  and  action;  the  head  lean 
and  thoroughbred  looking ;  long,  clean  neck,  with 
good  crest ;  head  well  up  and  nose  a  little  out ; 
ears  small,  sensitive,  and  pointing  to  the  front ; 
deep,  sloping  shoulders,  high  on  the  withers; 
short,  straight  back ;  strong,  muscular  loins ; 
straight  hips;  strong  in  the  hind  quarters,  with 
muscles  running  well  down.  To  this  should  be 
added  a  light  mouth,  well  bitted,  responding  with 
the  whole  body  to  the  lightest  touch  of  the  rein ; 
the  manners  and  grace  of  a  gentleman ;  good 
sense  and  coolness  in  tight  places,  choosing  often 
his  own  way  with  courage  and  confidence,  —  a 
rare  and  lovable  thing  in  God's  creation,  but  such 
there  be  or  may  be  made  (Plate  XXXVII.). 

Of  tandem  carts  there  are  various  patterns,  but 
with  the  New  York  Tandem  Club,  the  members 
of  which  have  been  regarded  as  the  best  expo- 
nents, in  this  country  at  least,  of  the  proper  way  of 
appointing  a  tandem,  as  well  as  of  driving  it,  the 
Whitechapel,  and  the  dog-cart  represented  in 
Henderson's  admirable  picture  entitled  "Going to 
Cover,"  are  the  two  designs  in  favor  at  the  pres- 
ent time. 

Hitherto  the  former  has  been  the  most  popular, 


PLATE   XXXVI.  — TANDEM    OF   MR.    McCANDLESS 


PLATE   XXXVIL— TANDEM    OF    MR.  T.    SUFFERN   TAILER 


Driving  Tandem  405 

doubtless  owing  to  its  being  the  pattern  adopted 
by  builders,  but  it  has  since  yielded  place  in  the 
estimation  of  tandem  drivers  to  the  dog-cart  de- 
scribed (Plate  XXXIV.);  though  both  are,  and  will 
continue  to  be,  regarded  as  the  highest  types  of 
their  respective  kinds. 

The  Whitechapel  cart  derives  its  name  from  a 
locality  in  the  East  End  of  London,  not  nearly 
as  aristocratic  as  Belgravia,  and  was  originally 
intended  for  some  practical  purpose,  such  as 
hawking  vegetables  or  milk,  for  example.  It  is 
rude  in  character,  and,  like  the  hansom  cab,  not 
susceptible  of  much  refinement,  and  its  primitive 
style  is  by  no  means  improved  by  rails,  lamps, 
and  fittings  of  shafts,  in  bright  metals. 

Well  horsed,  with  appropriate  harness,  aprons, 
and  a  smart  servant,  and  driven  by  an  accom- 
plished whip,  made  up  in  sympathy,  a  White- 
chapel tandem  is  a  most  audacious  "  varmint " 
turnout. 

The  shafts  of  a  Whitechapel  being  straight,  in 
keeping  with  its  sharp,  rakish  lines,  and  its 
wheels  being  of  proper  height,  a  certain  amount 
of  open  space  between  the  body  and  carriage  is 
unavoidable ;  but  that  objectionable  feature  may 
be  in  some  degree  obviated,  by  painting  the  latter 
in  dark  colors,  with  black  striping,  although  prim- 
rose and  vermilion  on  the  under-carriage  are 
colors  very  effective  and  pleasing. 


4o6  Driving 

A  dog-cart  of  the  design  in  the  famiHar  print 
referred  to,  as  its  name  and  the  blinds  in  its  panels 
imply,  was  invented  for  the  conveyance  of  dogs 
inside,  and  is  quite  different  in  character,  as  it  is 
also  superior  in  point  of  comfort,  to  a  White- 
chapel. 

A  slight  bend  in  the  shafts  near  their  points 
is  favorable  to  closer  relations  of  the  body  and 
carriage  parts  than  would  be  possible  with 
straight  shafts,  a  desirable  effect  in  carriage  build- 
ing termed  "  shutting  up  the  daylight." 

The  most  effective  colors  for  this  cart  are :  for 
the  panels,  which  are  carved  in  imitation  of  bas- 
ket, a  straw  or  cream,  and  for  the  shafts,  wheels, 
etc.,  brightest  vermilion  striped  with  black. 

Cushions  of  dark  colors  seem  most  appropriate 
for  a  cart  painted  as  described,  as  they  are  in 
agreeable  contrast;  but,  as  they  are  affected  by 
exposure  to  dust,  rain,  and  the  sun,  drab  Bedford 
cord  is  the  material  to  be  preferred. 

The  superior  comfort  of  this  dog-cart  is  attribu- 
table to  the  construction  of  its  body,  which  is 
practically  a  box,  open  only  at  its  ends  on  which, 
the  rails  being  bent  outwards,  the  greatest  seating 
capacity  is  secured,  and  to  the  facility  for  getting 
on  and  off,  which  is  of  importance  on  long  jour- 
neys, when  the  duties  of  the  groom,  who  has  been 
sent  forward  in  advance,  are  performed  by  the 
passenger  occupying  the  hind  seat.     The  bright 


Driving  Tandem  407 

vermilion  and  clean  straw  colors  of  this  cart  are 
especially  effective  in  competitions  on  the  tan- 
bark  by  gaslight,  where  dark  colors  show  to  less 
advantage. 

The  cocking-cart  (Plate  XXXV.)  is  another 
style,  which  from  its  very  smartness  and  dangerous 
height  seems  especially  adapted  to  tandem  driv- 
ing, and  is  best  described  as  the  front  boot  of  a 
coach  on  two  wheels.  A  local  tandem  driver  in- 
forms me  that  he  once  proposed  giving  his  Lon- 
don builder  an  order  for  a  cart  of  this  kind,  but 
though  the  builder  declared  his  readiness  to  un- 
dertake its  construction  on  the  lines  familiar  to 
him  through  his  ancestors  who  built  that  sort 
of  breakneck  vehicle,  the  customer  was  advised 
"not  to  trust  his  life  on  such  a  tower  upon 
wheels." 

The  cocking-cart  was  used  for  conveying  game 
fowls  to  the  cock-pit,  on  arriving  at  which  destina- 
tion they  were  thought  to  be,  from  the  shaking 
up  they  had  received  on  the  journey,  in  prime 
condition  and  temper  for  the  coming  battle. 

Except  to  be  used  exclusively  for  fancy  tandem 
work,  I  would  not  advise  the  purchase  of  a  cock- 
ing-cart, as,  for  driving  a  single  horse,  it  is  not  to 
be  compared  with  either  a  Whitechapel  or  a  dog- 
cart. 

There  are  still  other  patterns  of  carts,  some  of 
which  are  very  good,  but  I  have  described  those 


4o8  Driving 

I  think  best  suited  to  tandem  driving.  Which  of 
the  many  kinds  of  draughts  for  carts  is  most  prac- 
tical is  a  question  giving  rise  to  much  discussion. 
It  must  be  admitted  that,  whichever  is  used,  while 
it  may  be  placed  a  little  below  the  level  of  the 
hames-draughts,  it  should  never  be  fixed  above 
that  line. 

An  old  tandem  driver,  to  whose  judgment  I 
defer,  informs  me  that,  having  tried  all  sorts  of 
draughts,  he  prefers  that  from  hooks  fixed  to  the 
cross-bar,  which  he  used  many  years  without  a 
galled  shoulder,  but  which  would  be  unsuited  to 
carts  with  very  high  wheels  and  high,  straight 
shafts.  If  a  horse  in  a  well-fitting  collar  is  prop- 
erly put  to  a  cart  by  his  harness,  with  saddle 
firmly  fixed  in  its  place,  and  back-band  loose  to 
allow  the  shafts  to  play  in  their  tugs,  he  will  work 
from  fixed  draughts  without  being  injured.  Ring 
hames-draughts,  of  old  style,  which  are  most  prac- 
tical of  all,  will  contribute  more  to  a  horse's  com- 
fort than  all  the  new  fads  in  drawing-hooks  and 
bars. 

The  most  practical  tandem  harness,  and  the 
most  effective  on  all  horses,  with  all  carts,  and  in 
all  places,  was  suggested  by,  and  in  character  is 
similar  to,  the  four-horse  harness  of  mail  and  stage- 
coach days,  when  everything  useful  and  nothing 
superfluous,  was  the  rule.  Some  of  its  salient 
features  are   its  collars  with   angular  or  pointed 


Driving  Tandem  409 

throats,  for  preventing  choking  from  pressure  on 
the  windpipe;  ringed  hames-draughts  —  least 
rigid,  most  yielding  to  shoulders,  and  most  dur- 
able ever  designed,  and  like  every  two  metal  parts 
working  on  each  other  (as  leader's  spring  trace- 
hooks  and  tandem  eyes  of  wheeler's  trace-buckles), 
polished  to  avoid  mutilation  by  friction ;  leader's 
pad,  or  saddle,  shaped  to  suit  the  back,  however 
sharp;  strapping  (as  cruppers,  loin-strap,  etc.) 
unlined  and  unstitched,  in  keeping  with  the  broad, 
stout  traces  of  single  thickness,  of  which  the 
wheeler's,  furnished  with  chains  at  the  ends,  are 
adaptable  to  the  draughts,  however  long  or  short, 
of  all  carts  without  moving  the  points  of  traces  or 
disfiguring  them  with  three-cornered  holes  made 
by  a  jack-knife.  The  harness  above  described, 
while  specially  in  keeping  with  the  Whitechapel 
cart,  is  very  appropriate  for  the  more  showy, 
highly  painted  dog-cart;  as  the  more  costly  lined 
and  much-sewn  harness  is  not  out  of  place  in  both 
these  traps. 

The  chief  objection,  and  almost  the  sole  one,  to 
the  harness  of  my  choice,  is  its  reasonable  cost  — 
none  whatever  to  its  appearance  or  effect  can 
be  offered,  a  set  each  of  brown  and  black  leather 
costing,  together,  little  more  than  the  value  of  one 
set  of  the  other  kind  of  harness. 

The  tandem  of  Mr.  G.  F.  McCandless  (Plate 
XXXVI.),  an  honorary  member  of  the  New  York 


4IO  Driving 

Tandem  Club,  will  be  remembered  by  those  who 
saw  it  in  the  competitions  at  the  first  horse  show ; 
for  effective  association  of  colors  of  horses  and 
cart,  as  well  as  for  other  appointments,  it  stood  at 
that  time  unrivalled,  whether  seen  on  the  road,  in 
the  park,  or  on  the  tan-bark  of  Madison  Square 
Garden.  The  illustration  is  by  Gray-Parker. 
It  is  only  a  sketch,  and  in  it  there  are  defects 
which  did  not  exist  in  the  original.  For  example, 
Mr.  McCandless's  position  on  the  box  is  too  rigid 
and  straight ;  the  wheeler  is  too  far  away  from  his 
work.  Nevertheless,  the  drawing  is  very  smart. 
This  is  a  good  example  of  the  "  going-to-cover " 
cart  described  above.  Mr.  McCandless,  whose 
taste  in  such  matters  will  not  be  questioned,  has 
in  use  the  harness  recommended  in  this  article. 

Inquiries  are  sometimes  made  as  to  the  correct- 
ness of  using  either  the  leader's  loin-strap,  or 
wheeler's  kicking-strap  alone,  that  is,  either  with- 
out the  other.  Both  are  practical  appliances,  and 
either  or  both  may  be  dispensed  with,  though  the 
loin-strap  seems  to  be  necessary  for  sustaining  the 
very  considerable  length  of  the  lead  traces;  while 
the  kicking-strap,  except  for  finish,  is  necessary 
only  when  a  kicker  in  the  shafts  is  to  be  restrained. 
A  breeching  for  the  wheeler,  entirely  useless  on 
the  level,  is  indispensable  for  journeys  through  a 
hilly  country. 

Views  differ  as  to  the  length  of  lead  traces.     It 


Driving  Tandem  411 

is  admitted  that  to  place  a  draught-horse  as  near 
his  work  as  possible  is  preferable,  but  it  is  claimed 
that  the  rule  does  not  apply  to  a  tandem  leader, 
who  works  only  on  heavy  or  hilly  ground,  his 
office  being  chiefly  ornamental ;  indeed,  as  a  friend 
of  mine  used  to  say,  the  duty  of  the  leader  was  to 
deceive  the  wheeler,  who  would  cheerfully  do  all 
the  work  in  tandem,  when  he  seemed  to  under- 
stand that  he  was  being  pulled  along,  though  he 
was  dull  in  single  harness. 

A  longish  tandem  is  good  in  outline,  and  for 
horses  15.3  hands  I  prefer  lead  traces  10  feet 
to  10  feet  6  inches  in  length.  Short  traces,  re- 
quiring the  leader  at  all  times  to  be  in  his  col- 
lar to  keep  clear  of  the  wheeler,  are  especially 
adapted  to  the  use  of  drivers  whose  leaders  are 
always  at  work  up  hill,  down  hill,  and  on  level 
ground ;  while  longer  ones  are  the  sort  for  skilful 
performers  whose  lead  traces  are  gently  swinging 
when,  on  smooth  roads,  the  cart  seems  to  run  of 
itself. 

Within  a  few  years  there  has  been  invented  a 
contrivance  for  attaching  lead  traces  to  the 
wheeler's  harness  by  two  bars,  or  "  whiffletrees," 
of  different  lengths,  suspended  by  a  chain  from 
the  wheeler's  hames-chain.  For  the  use  of  ladies 
who  drive  tandem,  or  occasional  experimental 
drivers  of  the  other  sex,  such  safety  arrangement 
must  be  invaluable,  but  tandem  drivers  of  the  old 


412  Driving 

school  would  hardly  utilize  such  substitutes  for 
skill,  or,  to  use  an  English  slang  term,  they 
"  wouldn't  be  found  dead  with  em,"  lest  they  be 
denied  a  decent  burial. 

The  driving  seat,  which  is  called  "  the  box,"  is 
made  up  of  a  hollow  wooden  box,  with  top  sloping, 
from  the  required  height  at  the  back,  to  its  front 
edge  of,  say,  two  or  more  inches  in  thickness,  the 
four  sides  being  covered  with  the  same  material  as 
that  of  the  cushion,  which  is  scooped  or  hollowed 
on  its  upper  surface,  sloped  on  its  side  edges,  tufted 
throughout  its  breadth  and  depth  for  firmness,  and 
should  be  fitted  to  the  driver.  For  adapting  it  to 
the  use  of  all  drivers,  of  whatever  length  of  leg, 
there  is  a  cushion  of  no  fixed  dimensions ;  but  it 
is  found  that  one  comfortable  for  a  man  of,  say, 
5  feet  lo  inches,  and  average  weight,  with  a 
correct  seat  and  slightly  bent  knees  and  feet 
drawn  together,  will  suit  nearly  all,  the  shorter 
man  sitting  a  little  forward  and  the  taller  one  a 
little  back  upon  the  cushion.  A  box-cushion  so 
thick  in  its  front  edge  as  to  chafe  the  under  side 
of  the  legs  of  a  driver  with  a  good  seat  and  feet 
resting  naturally  against  the  sloping  foot-board, 
will  cause  much  discomfort. 

A  score  or  more  of  years  ago  in  England  was 
conceived  the  fad  of  plain,  unshaped  box-cushions 
for  coaches,  so  high  at  the  back  and  with  a  pitch 
so  steep  that  the  dragsmaii  could  not  sit  in  and 


Driving  Tandem  413 

could  only  lean  against  them,  nearly  this  entire 
weight  being  sustained  by  the  foot-board ;  an 
example  of  which  may  be  seen  in  Barrand's  pic- 
ture entitled,  "  The  London  Season,"  published 
in  1870.     This  absurd  fashion  was  short-lived. 

If  such  a  cushion  is  unsuited  to  a  coach,  it  is 
even  more  unfit  for  a  two-wheeled  cart,  because 
when  the  off-side  wheel  drops  suddenly  into  a 
hole,  or  strikes  the  ground  after  passing  over  a 
considerable  obstacle,  the  driver  from  his  leaning 
position,  his  legs  being  straight  and  rigid,  is  liable 
to  be  shot  out  of  his  seat  into  the  road,  or  de- 
posited on  the  wing  over  the  wheel,  from  which 
latter  place  a  friend  of  mine  informs  me  he  was 
often  so  fortunate,  when  using  the  objectionable 
sort  of  cushion  described,  as  to  be  able  to  scramble 
back  into  his  place  without  "  pulling  up." 

Sitting  in,  not  leaning  against,  a  shaped  cushion, 
with  body  erect  and  knees  slightly  bent,  and  yield- 
ing to  the  motion  of  the  cart,  the  danger  men- 
tioned will  be  materially  lessened, and  if  forewarned 
of  a  wheeler's  falling,  the  driver  may  save  himself 
from  being  landed  beyond  the  horse's  head,  even 
if  he  fails  to  retain  his  seat  in  the  cart. 

It  must  have  been  to  this  conforming  to  the 
movement  of  the  vehicle  on  the  importance  of 
which,  as  affecting  safety,  so  much  stress  is  laid, 
that  the  celebrated  Jack  Mytton  owed  his  preser- 
vation when,  running  his  gig-wheel  up  a  bank,  he 


414  Driving 

afforded  his  passenger  a  new  sensation  by  pitch- 
ing him  out  like  a  sack  of  meal,  and  when,  also, 
as  was  his  custom,  he  charged  a  gate  with  his 
tandem,  for  he  survived  those  and  other  similar 
exploits.  In  my  limited  experience  in  driving  tan- 
dems I  have  never  had  a  leader,  however  vicious, 
part  company  with  the  wheeler  and  bolt  with  his 
harness  dangling  about  him;  but  if  that  event  is 
yet  to  occur,  and  the  twenty-three  feet  of  lead-reins 
run  clear,  leaving  my  wheeler's  bridle  intact  and 
in  place,  I  shall  attribute  such  good  fortune  to 
unbuckled  hand-parts,  and  to  the  freedom  of 
action  of  the  swivels  in  my  wheel  throat-latch,  so 
very  practical,  and  so  much  to  be  preferred  to  the 
fixtures  attaching  to  the  rosettes  at  the  wheeler's 
ears. 

The  whip,  like  every  other  appointment  of  the 
tandem,  is  English,  and  is  a  very  different  affair 
from  the  flail-like  instrument  used  by  our  ances- 
tors. Of  a  tandem-whip,  the  stick  should  be  5 
feet  and  the  thong  12  feet  6  inches  long.  Some 
authorities  fix  the  length  of  the  thong  at  10  feet 
or  even  less,  to  which,  though  seemingly  imprac- 
ticable, certain  tandem  drivers  conform  involun- 
tarily by  cutting  off  with  their  wheel  a  yard  or  so 
of  point  and  leaving  it  in  the  road.  The  con- 
venient disposal  of  this  thong  of  such  consid- 
erable length  severely  tries  the  patience  and 
tests  the  skill  of  the  beginner. 


Driving  Tandem  415 

Holding  the  stick  in  the  right  hand  at  about 
the  upper  mounting  for  balance,  and  the  point  of 
the  thong  between  the  stick  and  the  fingers,  by  a 
dexterous  motion,  proceeding  entirely  from  the 
wrist,  pitch  the  thong  over  to  the  right  of,  and 
away  from,  the  stick,  which,  being  suddenly  stopped, 
the  thong  returns  upon  and  is  wound  round  it 
about  four  times,  producing  the  long,  depending, 
open  loop,  which  is  called  the  "  double  thong." 
The  coils  are  followed  down  the  stick  by  a  small 
loop,  and  yet  other  coils  of  the  point  of  the  thong, 
but  in  the  opposite  direction  to  the  first  ones. 
Taking  the  small  lower  loop  between  the  thumb 
and  forefinger  of  the  rein-hand  (which  should  in 
no  case  be  disturbed  or  diverted  from  its  purpose 
when  driving),  by  a  movement  of  the  stick  with 
the  right,  disengage  the  point  of  the  thong  and 
lay  it  along  the  stick  to  the  hand.  A  turn  or  two 
of  the  double  thong  round  the  stick  to  the  right, 
or  off  side,  will  effect  the  figure  8,  which  some 
authorities  condemn,  but  which  is  practical,  as  it 
holds  the  thong  on  the  stick  when  double  thong- 
ing a  wheeler,  or  when  driving  in  a  high  wind;  and 
many  old  coaching  prints  attest  its  correctness, 
although  it  has  often  been  suggested  that  the 
methods  of  the  men  working  a  coach  a  hundred 
miles  a  day,  when  coaching  was  a  trade  as  well 
as  an  art,  have  been  improved  upon  since  it  be- 
came a  pastime. 


4i6  Driving 

The  catching  of  two  double  thongs  at  the  same 
time,  with  as  many  whips  held  one  in  each  hand, 
is  an  altogether  useless  performance,  and  is 
suggestive  of  the  practice  of  legerdemain  rather 
than  coaching.  Men  who  drive,  or  who  have 
driven  their  own  teams,  would  hardly  devote  their 
time  to  such  a  purposeless  occupation. 

The  thongs  of  new  tandem  whips  are  always 
wiry,  and  it  is  difficult  to  make  them  hold  to  the 
stick.  The  scheme  recommended  for  making 
them  pliable  is  the  following :  loan  your  whip  to 
a  persevering  beginner  and  tell  him,  "  Shut  your- 
self up  in  your  room  and  learn  to  catch  your  whip 
there  and  in  private,"  as  advised  by  the  author  of 
"  Down  the  Road." 

If  he  really  is  ambitious,  and  has  the  necessary 
application,  and  particularly  if  he  persists  in 
following  his  own  methods,  by  the  time  he  has 
acquired  the  simple  little  trick  your  thong  will 
have  become  quite  supple ;  but  if  you  are 
likely  to  want  your  whip  within  a  reasonable 
time,  you  had  better  not  concede  to  him  the 
privilege  of  keeping  it  until  he  has  attained  to 
proficiency,  as  you  may  not  get  it  back  during 
his  natural  life. 

Beginners  are  much  given  to  concerning  them- 
selves about  the  cost  and  ornamentation  of 
their  whips  rather  than  the  proper  mode  of 
using  them.      A  whip  with  extravagant   mount- 


Driving  Tandem  417 

ings  in  unskilful  hands  renders  its  owner  ridic- 
ulous. The  most  important  quality  of  any 
whip  is  its  feeling  or  balance,  which  is  utterly 
sacrificed  to  the  silversmith  when  he  is  al- 
lowed to  affix  to  its  butt  a  foot  of  his  metal 
of  mediaeval  style.  It  is  better  to  buy  other 
examples  of  his  skill,  and  preserve  your  whip 
in  its  original  serviceable  form. 

The  yew  is  the  only  whip  of  which  I  find 
mention  in  old  coaching  days :  — 

"  For,  sure,  the  coachman  hands  are  few, 
That  wield  in  style  the  polished  yew," 

and  barring  the  fault  peculiar  to  it  of  warping,  the 
yew  is  a  capital  stick.  Holly  is  now  in  almost 
universal  use  for  whips  of  English  style,  and  of  all 
whips  and  sticks  is  undoubtedly  to  be  preferred. 
Some  thorns  are  also  used,  but  it  is  rare  to  find 
that  sort  of  stick  with  the  taper  and  feeling  or 
life  of  hollies,  they  being  mostly  of  nearly  uniform 
substance  from  butt-end  to  point. 

Since  the  publication  of  the  coaching  book, 
entitled  "  Down  the  Road,"  in  which  is  an  illus- 
tration of  the  dog-legged  four-horse  whip  presented 
to  the  author  by  the  professional  coachman,  Tom 
Hennessy,  no  dragsman's  or  tandem  driver's 
collection  of  whips  is  considered  complete  with- 
out at  least  one  whip  with  a  single  crook  in  the 
stick. 


4i8  Driving 

Driving  aprons  are  important  in  the  equipment 
of  a  tandem,  and  should  be  in  keeping  with  its 
character.  Bedford  cords,  box  cloths,  and  other 
materials  of  drab  color  are  most  durable,  and  for 
sporting  traps,  most  effective  in  appearance,  and 
their  care  involves  comparatively  little  expenditure 
of  time  and  labor. 

Aprons  of  plain  dark  colors  furnish  an  agreeable 
contrast  to  the  driver's  top-coat  and  the  servant's 
livery  greatcoat  when  those  garments  are  of  drab  ; 
but  the  work  of  keeping  them  clean  is  slavish,  and 
continual,  and  they  quickly  fade  and  lose  their 
freshness,  on  account  of  which  objections  to  them, 
drab  ones,  being  free  from  the  faults  named,  are 
preferred. 

A  turnout,  with  a  simple  apron  for  the  front 
seat,  and  none  for  the  shivering  groom  on  the 
hind  seat,  has  an  unfinished  look,  suggestive  of 
insufficient  means  or  want  of  thoughtfulness  for 
the  comfort  of  the  servant. 

Devotees  of  the  art  of  tandem  driving,  who 
have  not  enjoyed  the  treat  of  a  perusal  of  that 
charming  book  entitled  "  Frank  Fairleigh,"  by 
Mr.  Smedley,  may  be  entertained  by  the  author's 
description  of  the  turnout  of  the  Honorable 
George  Lawless,  as  follows:  — 

"  Perched  high  in  mid-air,  upon  some  mysterious 
species  of  dog-cart,  bearing  a  striking  resemblance 
to  the  box  to  a  mail-coach,  which  had  contrived. 


Driving  Tandem  419 

by  some  private  theory  of  development  of  its  own, 
to  dispense  with  its  body,  while  it  had  enlarged 
its  wheels  to  an  almost  incredible  circumference ; 
perched  on  top  of  this  remarkable  machine,  and 
enveloped  in  a  white  greatcoat  undermined  in 
every  direction  by  strange  and  unexpected  pockets, 
was  none  other  than  the  Hon.  George  Lawless. 

"  The  turnout  was  drawn  by  a  pair  of  thorough- 
breds, driven  tandem,  which  were  now,  their  iras- 
cible tempers  being  disturbed  by  delay,  relieving 
their  feelings  by  executing  a  kind  of  hornpipe 
upon  their  hind  legs." 

The  top-coat  recognized  as  the  standard  for 
driving  at  the  present  day  is  called  a  "driving- 
cape,"  doubtless  from  its  resemblance  in  the  mat- 
ter of  amplitude  of  skirts  to  a  sleeved  cape ;  and 
when  properly  constructed  as  to  its  lines,  balance, 
and  the  position  of  its  pockets  is  a  very  "  down- 
the-road  "  looking  garment  —  a  refinement  of  the 
"  Upper-Benjamin  "  of  stagecoach  days.  Made 
of  stout  cloth  of  drab  color,  not  white ;  furnished 
with  a  velvet  collar  which  hangs  off  from  the 
neck  to  allow  room  inside  it  for  a  coaching 
mufifler  with  a  bit  of  spot;  the  leather-lined 
pockets,  with  flaps  of  liberal  size,  placed  low  in 
the  skirts  for  convenience  of  access ;  the  outward 
seams  strapped  and  stoutly  sewn,  and  lined  with 
an  effective  plaid  of  woollen,  when  hung  at  proper 
balance  on  the  shoulders,  which  sustain  its  whole 


420  Driving 

weight,  and  whence,  in  a  downward  direction,  its 
circumference  increases  until,  at  the  bottom  of 
the  skirts,  which  reach  the  knees,  it  stands  out 
from  the  wearer  all  around  as  if  hooped  inside, 
it  is  very  comfortable  and  of  workmanlike  appear- 
ance whether  worn  or  laid  down  on  the  box- 
cushion  of  a  coach  or  tandem  cart. 

Having  described  the  properly  appointed  tan- 
dem, we  will  suppose  it  has  been  brought  round 
to  the  door  by  the  groom,  who,  having  got  down 
and  hung  the  reins  on  the  wheeler's  off-side  terret, 
or  looped  them  through  the  corner  of  the  dasher, 
takes  his  place  at  the  wheeler's  head,  where  he 
remains  until  his  master  picks  up  the  ribbons, 
when  he  goes  to  the  head  of  the  leader.  Insert- 
ing the  middle  finger  of  the  right  hand  between 
the  wheeler's  reins,  and  the  forefinger  between  the 
leader's,  always  keeping  the  near-side  rein  of  each 
on  top,  you  have  the  near  lead-rein  over  the  fore- 
finger, the  off  lead  and  near  wheel  reins  in  the 
order  mentioned  between  the  fore  and  middle 
fingers,  and  the  off  wheel-rein  between  the 
middle  and  second  fingers.  Having  assorted 
and  placed  the  reins  as  directed,  and  adjusted 
them  as  to  length,  still  holding  them  together 
with  the  whip  in  your  right  hand,  laying  hold 
of  the  seat  rail,  with  your  left  you  climb  into  the 
cart,  and  transferring  your  reins,  without  change 
of  their  relations,  to  the  corresponding  fingers  of 
the  left  hand,  you  drop  into  your  seat. 


Driving  Tandem  421 

Some  carts,  from  their  peculiar  construction 
and  arrangement  of  seat,  rail,  and  steps,  not 
being  adapted  to  the  pulling  yourself  up  by  the 
rail  with  the  left  hand  alone,  as  on  a  coach,  it 
may  be  necessary  to  take  hold  of  the  rail  or  the 
corner  of  the  dasher  with  the  right,  when  care 
should  be  taken  not  to  disturb  the  wheeler  with 
the  whip,  which,  with  the  reins,  you  have  in  that 
hand. 

Your  passenger  should  have  gotten  up  in  the 
box-seat  at  the  same  time  as,  or  after,  the  driver, 
but  not  before. 

Having  satisfied  yourself  that  everything  is 
shipshape,  gently  feeling  the  horses'  mouths  by 
their  reins,  —  those  of  the  leader,  who  should  not 
be  in  the  collar  at  the  start,  should  be  a  little  less 
slack  than  his  traces,  —  you  start  your  horses  by 
an  "  all  right,"  or  a  "  let  'em  go,"  or  a  double  click, 
or  by  some  other  signal,  but  in  no  event  using 
the  improper  "  pull  up "  in  vogue,  of  meaning 
directly  opposed  to  your  purpose. 

Having  seen  the  leader  started,  the  servant,  not 
moving  from  his  position,  salutes  his  master  as 
the  tandem  passes,  and  when  the  tail  of  the  cart 
reaches  him  he  climbs  up,  taking  his  place  in  the 
middle  of  the  hind  seat  and  sitting  quite  erect 
with  folded  arms,  instead  of  slouching  about  "  all 
over  the  shop."  A  servant  should  have  pride 
enough  to  do  his  part  in  maintaining  the  char- 


422  Driving 

acter  of  the  turnout  which  he  renders  ridiculous 
when  sprawling  in  his  seat  and  gaping  about  as 
though  waiting  to  recognize  passing  acquaint- 
ances. He  should  look  intently  into  space,  and 
affect  to  see  nothing.  A  tandem  is  dependent 
very  much  for  its  effect  upon  the  groom,  who 
should  be  "  all  alive,"  and  when  he  feels  the  pace 
slackening,  should  concern  himself  as  to  the  pur- 
pose, and,  getting  to  the  ground  quickly,  find  his 
way  to  the  leader's  head  by  the  time  the  team  is 
pulled  up. 

A  dapper,  trim-built  groom,  of  light  weight  and 
medium  height,  is  most  in  keeping  with  the 
character  of  a  tandem,  for  which  a  very  tall  or 
a  very  stout  servant  is  unsuited. 

When  no  passenger  occupies  it,  the  groom's 
place  is  in  the  box-seat  by  the  side  of  his  master, 
the  tailboard  of  the  cart  being  shut  up.  Lord 
Tomnoddy's  — 

"  Tiger  Tim, 
Was  clean  of  limb, 

His  boots  were  polished,  his  jacket  was  trim  ! 
With  a  very  smart  tie  in  his  smart  cravat. 
And  a  smart  cockade  on  the  top  of  his  hat ; 
Tallest  of  boys,  or  shortest  of  men, 
He  stood  in  his  stockings  just  four  feet  ten !  " 

The  equipage  of  the  Honorable  George  Lawless, 
whose  cart  and  top-coat  I  have  already  described, 
and  whose  taste  in  all  matters  appertaining  to  the 


Driving  Tandem  423 

appointment  of  a  tandem  was  unquestioned,  "  was 
completed  by  a  tiger  so  small,  that,  beyond  a 
vague  sensation  of  top-boots,  and  a  livery  hat, 
one's  senses  failed  to  realize  him." 

Rules  for  driving  that  have  been  made  by  the 
proper  authorities  should  be  carefully  observed. 
Occasion  may  arise  when  it  is  necessary  to  take 
liberties  with  prescribed  forms.  In  tandem  driv- 
ing, which  should  be  done  with  one  hand  as 
much  as  possible,  there  is  one  rule,  the  observ- 
ance of  which  is  essential  to  safety,  and  that  is 
never  to  lose  your  horses'  mouths  by  getting  your 
hands  so  close  up  to  your  chest  that  you  have  no 
space  to  spare  for  pulling  up.  You  may  see  some 
drivers  with  their  hands  nearly  up  to  their  chins 
and  looking  supremely  happy  in  their  ignorance 
of  the  risk  they  incur.  The  proper  position  of 
the  left  or  rein  hand  is  a  few  inches  forward  of 
the  body,  with  the  elbow  adown  the  side  and 
close  to  but  not  pressing  against  it.  Nothing  is 
more  awkward  than  the  elbows  at  an  angle  show- 
ing daylight  between  them  and  the  body. 

The  draught  on  the  reins  from  the  elbows  to 
the  horses'  mouths  should  be  as  nearly  as  possible 
on  a  straight  line. 

I  would  strongly  advise  beginners  to  avail 
themselves  of  the  instructions  of  any  recognized 
professional  dragsman  of  whatever  pretensions. 
If  you  find  one  incompetent  to  teach  you,  you 


424  Driving 

are  confirmed  in  your  own  skill,  which  is  worth 
all  you  have  paid  for  the  information.  It  would 
be  strange  if  any  man  who  had  practised  the 
calling  for  any  considerable  length  of  time  had 
not  picked  up  some  wrinkles  or  dodges  worth 
knowing  that  had  escaped  the  learner  hitherto. 
An  accomplished  instructor  having  been  found, 
pupils  should  take  a  full  course  of  lessons,  as,  how- 
ever apt  scholars,  they  will  hardly  have  absorbed 
in  a  limited  number  all  the  knowledge  acquired 
by  one  who  has  devoted  a  lifetime  to  the  pursuit. 
Nearly  all  beginners  are  too  anxious  to  exhibit 
their  self-reliance,  and  declare  too  early  their  in- 
dependence of  the  mentor. 

Acquire  the  correct  methods,  or  aim  to  do  so, 
of  doing  all  things  connected  with  tandem  driv- 
ing, and  be  satisfied  with  nothing  else ;  there  can 
be  no  compromise  with  what  is  called  "form," 
a  word,  it  may  be  remarked,  so  significant  as  to 
admit  of  no  qualifications  ;  a  thing  is  "  form  "  or 
is  not  "form,"  and  the  terms  "good"  and  "bad" 
prefixed  to  it  are  as  superfluous  as  if  applied  to 
perfection  (compare  p.  314).  And  when  adopting 
the  customs  peculiar  to  another  country,  one 
should  make  sure  he  can  reach  an  accepted 
standard  before  attempting  to  improve  upon  it 
or  surpass  it.  Ambitious  parties  who  always  aim 
to  exceed  recognized  standards,  essay  to  drive  a 
tandem  of  three  or  four  horses,  which  they  style 


Driving  Tandem  425 

"  trandom,"  and  "  random  "  —  a  straining  after  effect 
in  name  as  well  as  performance.  As  any  number 
of  single  horses,  not  less  than  two,  harnessed  in 
a  single  line,  are  properly  described  as  a  tandem, 
such  aspirants  for  fame,  having  a  name  provided 
for  their  turnout,  may  be  concerned  solely  lest 
they  find  themselves  with  too  many  horses  and 
too  few  hands  for  driving  them.  In  my  lexicons 
of  coaching  and  driving,  no  application  of  either 
"  trandom  "  or  "  random  "  is  found,  and,  unless  the 
parties  have  a  dictionary  of  their  own,  I  do  not 
believe  there  is  any  authority  for  such  use  of  the 
words.  A  tandem  of  two  horses,  of  which  the 
leader  turns  round  and  faces  the  cart,  may  be 
said  to  be  driven  at  random. 

I  wish,  in  closing,  to  express  my  obligation  and 
acknowledgment  to  Mr.  Burton  Mansfield,  the 
accepted  authority  in  this  country  for  many  years 
upon  tandems  and  tandem  driving,  for  the  valuable 
assistance  he  has  given  me  in  preparing  this 
article. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Draft  Book  of  Centennial  Carriages  displayed  in  Philadelphia. 
Report  on  Diseases  of  the  Horse,  1903.     Department  of  Agricul- 
ture, Washington,  D.C. 
How  to  Buy  and  Sell.     Howden. 
\j  Riders  of  Many  Lands.     Dodge. 
^    J  Practical  Horse  Shoeing.     Fleming. 

Diseases  and  Injuries  of  the  Horse.     Kirby. 
The  Horse  in  Motion.     Stillman. 
'  Bridle  Bits.     Battersby. 
Modern  Horsemanship.     E.  L.  Anderson. 
Horses,  Saddles,  and  Bridles.     Colonel  W.  H.  Carter. 
The  Practical  Horse  Keeper.     Fleming. 
Hints  on  Driving.     Captain  C.  Morley  Knight. 
The  Horse  in  the  Stable  and  in  the  Field.     J.  H.  Walsh  (Stone- 
henge).     15th  ed.  revised  by  Harold  Leeney. 
■   Points  of  the  Horse.     Captain  Hayes. 
'  Veterinary  Notes  for  Horse  Owners.     Captain  Hayes. 
The  Private  Stable.     James  A.  Garland. 

Breaking  and  Riding.     James  Fillis.     Translated  by  Captain  Hayes. 
Youatt  on  the  Horse.     Youatt. 
Complete  Modern  Farrier.     Brown. 
The  Art  of  Horsemanship.     Xenophon.     Translated  and  edited  by 

M.  H.  Morgan. 
The  Perfect  Horse.     W.  H.  H.  Murray. 
Horses  and  Harness.     E.  F.  Flower. 
Omnibuses  and  Cabs.     H.  C.  Moore. 
427 


428  Bibliography 

Horse  Sense.     J.  C  Cunyer. 
Philipson  on  Harness.     John  Philipson. 
'^^^4  Our  Noblest  Friend  the  Horse.     Francis  M.  Ware, 
^s)  Driving.     Francis  M.  Ware  and  Others. 
"^  A  Manual  of  Coaching.     Fairman  Rogers. 

American  Horses  and  Horse  Breeding.     Dimon. 
Nj  Driving  Lessons.     E.  Howlett. 

Experience  with  the  Trotters  and  Pacers.     E.  Geers. 
^  Driving  for  Pleasure.     Francis  T.  Underhill. 
Whips  and  Whip-making.     W.  G.  Ashford. 
"-^Driving.     Duke  of  Beaufort.     Badminton  Library. 
M  An  Old  Coachman's  Chatter.     Edward  Corbett. 
^^\jThe  Coach  Horn:   What  to  blow  and  how  to  blow  it.      An  Old 

Guard. 
^\j  Driving  as  I  Found  It.     Swales, 
s/^  Brighton  and  its  Coaches.     William  C.  A.  Blew. 
^  Stage  Coach  and  Tavern  Days.     Alice  Morse  Earle. 
:  Every  Horse  Owner's  Cyclopaedia.     J.  H.  Walsh  (Stonehenge). 
Lessons  in  Horse  Judging.     W.  Fearnley. 
The  Form  of  the  Horse.     J.  C.  L.  Carson. 
N  The  Horse.     W.  H.  Flower,  C.B. 
^'^'  The  Pocket,  and  the  Stud.     Charles  Brinley. 
Nj  Mayhew's  Horse  Management.     Revised  by  J.  L  Lupton. 
OvjSeats.     Saddles.     Major  Dwyer. 
^  Astley's  System  of  Horse  Education.     Philip  Astley. 
\jThe  Book  of  the  Horse.     S.  Sidney. 


INDEX 


Acidity  of  stomach,  cure  for,  248. 
Age  of  horses,  determining,  205. 
Aids,  application  of  the,  88-89. 
Air  in  stal)les,  211,  212-213,  218. 
Alcohol,  hardening  skin  with,  247. 
Ale,  use  of,  in  sickness,  241,  247. 
Alidor,  30. 

Alix,  trotting  record  of,  290. 
Aloes  as  a  purgative,  247. 
America,   the   home    of    the   horse, 
162-164. 

Horse  history  of,  162,  179-194. 

Importation  of  horses  to,  162, 
180-182,  191,  285. 

Number  of  work-animals  com- 
pared with  other  countries, 
163-164. 

Roads  in,  192-194. 
American     Saddle-horse     Breeders' 

Association,  i6. 
Anderson,  Richard  Clough,  80. 
Andrew  Jackson,  190. 
Antiseptics,  244,  249. 
Aperients   in    horses'  diet,  40,  234, 

240,  247. 
Apples  for  horses,  40,  234, 
Aprons,  driving,  418. 
Arabella,  horses  on  the,  181. 
Arabian.     See  Darley  and  Markham. 
Arabians,  degeneration  of,  4-5. 
Argentine  Republic,  horses  in,  163. 
Army  horsemen.     See  Cavalry. 


"  Art  of  Horsemanship,  The,"  Xeno- 

phon's,  64,  155,  203,  267. 
Ass,  brain  of,  161  n. 
Auctions,  purchasing  at,  34-35. 
Aure,  M.  d',  master  of  riding,  75. 
Australia,  statistics  of  horses,  163. 
Austria,  number  of  horses  in,  163. 

Wagon  rims  in,  194. 
Axles,  inspection  of,  278, 

Backing,  training  horses  in,  135-137, 

296. 
Backs   of    horses,    defective    points 

regarding,  204. 
Balking,  98-99. 
Ball  Brothers,  breeders,  52-53. 
Bandaging  of  horses,  42-43. 
Barbary,  horses   from,   in   America, 

182,  183. 
Barley,  as  food,  233,  240. 

Nutritive  value  of,  237. 
Baucher,    M.,    riding  authority,    75, 

109,  129,  155. 
Bay  Bolton,  285. 
Bayard,  Henri  Franconi's,  100. 
Beans  for  horses,  233-234,  237. 
Bearing-reins,  272-273,  305. 
In  driving  — 

Four,  368-369. 
Pair,  345. 
Tandem,  396. 
Bedding  in  stalls,  39-40. 


429 


430 


Index 


Belle  Hamlin,  284. 

Berthune,  8. 

Bits,  care  of,  218,  317. 

Duke  of  Newcastle  on,  268. 

Fit  of,  268-269. 

Horses  not  led  by,  in  harnessing, 
3 '6,  334- 

Leather,  for  young  colts,  293. 

Selection  of,  for  harness-horses, 
297. 

Snaffle,  in  training  colts,  294. 

Tandem-driving,  396. 

Varieties  of,  56,  268. 

Xenophon's  advice,  267-268. 
Bitting  exercises  for  colts,  25-28. 
Bones  of  ideal  horse,  200,  201. 
Bonnie  Scotland,  Miss  Lake's,  lOO. 
Book,  stable,  228-229. 
Books.     See  Works. 
Boston,  12. 
Boston  Blue,  189. 

Boston  Horse,  trotting  record  of,  290. 
Bourbon  King,  52,  53. 
Box-stalls,  39,  216,  217,  221. 
Brain,  statistics  of,  in  animals,  161  n. 
Brakes,  use  and  misuse  of,  306-308. 
Bran  as  food,  234,  237. 
Bran  mash,  receipt,  240. 
Breaking-in    of    colts,   20-29,    291- 

293- 
Fallacies  regarding,  298-299. 
Breastplate  (Dutch  collar),  265. 
Adjustment   of,  in  harnessing  a 
pair,  336. 
Breeching,  use  of,  274,  306. 

In  tandem-driving,  393,  410. 
Breeders,  Kentucky,  47-53. 
Breeding,  5,  8-13,  16,  285-289.     See 

Stock  farms. 
Bridle,  the,  1 21-124,  266.      , 
Double,  57-58,  114-117. 


Bridling  horse,  method  of,  58-59. 
Britain,  history  of  horse  in,  7,  182. 
Broken  knees,  treatment  of,  245. 
Bronson,  Mr.,  cited,  361. 
Brow-band,  the,  267,  272. 
Bruises,  treatment  of,  243-244,  246. 
"  Buck  eye,"  the,  1 97. 
Buffalo  Bill,  79-80. 
Bully  Rock,  191. 
Bussigny,  H.  L.  de,  72,  88. 
Byerly  Turk,  4,  191. 

Canada,  the  first  horse  in,  181. 

Pacers  from,  16, 
Canter,  the,  128.     See  Hand-gallop. 
Carriages,  care  of,  222,  223,  277-279. 

History  of,  191-192. 

Insignia  on,  280-282. 
Carrots  for  horses,  40,  234,  237,  240. 
Carter,  General,  67. 
Carts  for   tandem-driving,  399-400, 

404-408. 
Casting  the  horse,  22-23,  152-153. 
Castleman,  General  John  B.,  16. 

Breeding  establishment  of,  48-49. 

Horsemanship  of,  79. 
Castleman,  Major  David,  49. 
Cat,  brain  of,  161  n. 
Cavalr)',  British,  77. 

Fort  Riley  school,  81-84. 

French,  74-75. 

German,  73-74. 

Italian,  75. 

Oats  allowance  in,  233. 

Origins  of,  66. 

Oxen  used  for,  179, 

United  States,  80-84. 

Use  of  stirrups  by,  67. 
Cavesson,  lessons  on  the,  23-26,  loi, 

151- 
Cayuse  ponies,  9,  80. 


Index 


431 


Cecil  Palmer,  49. 

Chafing,  cure  of,  245. 

Chains   vs.  leather    in    pole-pieces, 

335-336,  358. 
Charles  Kent  mare,  the,  285. 
Charleston,  S.C.,  jockey-club  of,  188. 
Charlier  shoe,  the,  257. 
Check-reins,  272-273,  297. 
Cherokee  ponies,  so-called,  86. 
Chest  of  ideal  horse,  199. 
Children,  riding-lessons  for,  85-87. 
Chills,  treatment  of,  246. 
Chimney-sweeps,  salutes  to,  365. 
Cleaning  of  horses,  42,  43,  230. 
Clicking,  cause  and  remedy,  257. 
Clifton  Farm,  49. 
Clover,  use  of,  as  food,  234. 
Coaches,  rules  for  judging,  382-391. 
Coach  horns,  378-379. 
Coaching,  present-day,  353-381. 
Coaching  Club,  rules  of,  for  judging 

drags   and    road-coaches, 

382-391. 
Coachman,    cushion   for,   302,   326, 

400,412-413. 
Details  in  clothing  of,  300-302. 
Living-rooms  of,  216,  223-224, 
Seat  of,  302,  326. 
Signals  from,  to  horse,  318-319. 
Coachmen,    a    distinction    between 

drivers  and,  347. 
Cocking-cart,  the,  407. 
Cockspur,  16. 

Cody,  Colonel  W.  F.,  79-80. 
Colds,  symptoms  of,  and  treatment, 

241-242. 
Colic,  causes  of,  and  remedies,  242, 

248. 
Collars,  263,  265. 

In  tandem-driving,  408-409. 
Warming  of,  264,  2>32>- 


Collodion,  flexible,  as  remedy,  248. 
Colors  desirable  in  saddle-horses,  35. 
Colts,  training,  20-29,  291-299. 
Columbus,  horses  imported  by,  162, 

180. 
"Combined  horses,"  150. 
Conestoga  horse,  origin  of,  181. 
Confidence,  trotting  record  of,  290. 
Cooling  of  horses,  248. 
Copperbottom,  13-14. 
Corbett,  Edward,  quoted,  322. 
Corn  for  horses,  234. 
Corners,  turning,  313.328-329,375. 

397- 
Corns,  cause  of,  253,  255. 
Corradini,  training  of  horse  by,  45. 
Cortes,  horses  of,  180. 
Coupling-reins,  335,  340-344. 

Time  of  buckling,  336-337- 
Cracked  heels,  so-called,  243. 
Cresceus,  290. 
Cribbing,  one  sign  of,  206. 
Crop,  use  of,  56. 

Cross-gallop,  rectification  of,  131. 
Croup,  work  on,  with  saddle-horses, 

117-120,  123. 
Cruiser,  descendants  of,  12. 
Crupper,  the,  274,  305-306. 

Adjustment  of,  in  harnessing,  316. 
Cunning  of  horses,  98. 
Curb-bit,  the,  57. 

Lessons  with,  114-117, 

Use  of,  1 21-124. 
Curb-chains,  269,  317. 
Currycomb,  abolition  of,  advised,  42. 
Curzon,  Lady,  cited,  394. 
Cushion,  driver's,  302,  326. 

In  tandem-driving,  400, 412-413. 


Daphne,  13. 

Darley  Arabian,  4,  5, 


191. 


432 


Index 


Dealers,  behavior  to,  31-32,  178. 
Denmark  (founder),  15-16,  47, 
Denmark,  Gaines's,  16. 
Denmark  strain,  9,  15,  52. 
Descriptions  of  ideal  horse,  35-37, 

196-204. 
De  Soto,  horses  of,  180,  181. 
Dexter,  286,  290. 
Diarrhoea,  treatment  of,  242,  247. 
Dickens,  52. 
Dictator,  286. 
Diomed,  8,  16,  191. 
Diseases,  treatment  of  horses',  239- 

250. 
Disinfectants,  use  of,  in  stables,  223, 

229. 
Dismounting,  method  of,  61,  63. 
Docking  of  tails,  304-305. 
Dog,  brain  of,  161  n. 
Dog-carts,  for  tandem-driving,  404. 

Origin  of  name,  406. 
Dogskin,  driving  gloves  of,  301. 
Doors  of  stables,  215,  220. 
Dorothy,  General  Castleman's,  48. 
Double  bridle,  lessons  with,  57-58, 

114-117. 
"  Down  the  Road,"  416,  417. 
Drags,  rules  for  judging,  382-391. 
Drainage   of  stables,   39,   21 1,  215, 

217,  220. 
Dress,  coachman's,  300-302. 

In  tandem-driving,  419-420. 
Dressing  of  horses,  42-44. 
Drivers,  distinction  drawn  between 

coachmen  and,  347. 
Driving,  four-in-hand,  353-381, 

"Form"  in,  313-314.  424- 

One  horse,  318-332. 

Pair,  333-352. 

Position  of  hands  in,  309-3 1 3 ,  423. 

Tandem,  401-425. 


Driving  apron,  the,  418. 

Driving  cape,  the,  419-420. 

"  Driving  for  Pleasure,"  Underbill's, 

279,  352. 
Driving  for  punishment,  remarks  on, 

352. 
Duke,  General  Basil,  cited,  3. 
Dutchman,  trotting  record  of,  290. 

Ears  of  ideal  horse,  197. 
Eclipse  (1764),  7-8,  12. 
Education  of  horses.     See  Training. 
Edwin  Forrest,  trotting  record,  290. 
Egypt,  horses  of  ancient,  6. 
Elliott,  Lieutenant  Duncan,  83. 
Elsa,  50. 

Emily,  General  Castleman's,  48. 
England,  horsemen  of,  72-73,  75-77. 

Horses  of  early  and  mediaeval,  7, 
183-184. 

Roads  in,  183. 

Stage-coach  history  in,  191-192. 
English    Stud    Book     (or    "Match 

Book"),  the,  185. 
"  Equus  beds,"  179. 
Ethan  Allen,  190. 

Europe,  horsemanship  of  continen- 
tal, 72-75. 
Exercise  of  horses,  41,  230. 

Indoor,  44-45. 

Necessity  of,  urged,  148-149. 
Exercises,  mounted,  70-72. 

Suppling,  1 1 3- 1 1 7. 
Eye,  of  ideal  horse,  197. 

Defective  points,  204. 

Falkland  Island  horses,  172. 
Falls  from  or  with  horse,  144-145. 

Causes  of,  150,  154-155. 
Farms.     See  Stock  farms. 
Feeding  of  horses,  40-41,  225-238. 


Index 


433 


Feet,  advice  on  horses',  201. 

Care  of.     See  Shoeing. 

Cleaning,  43,  230,  253. 

Defects  in,  205. 

Effect  of  placing  of,  on  action, 
18-19. 

Evolution  of,  170-172. 

Formation  of,  252. 

Nails  in,  245. 
Fetlock  of  ideal  horse,  200-201. 
Fevers,  241. 
Fiord  ponies,  7,  10. 
Flanders,  horses  from,  in   America, 

181,  182. 
Flexion   of   jaw  by  suppling,    114- 

117. 
Floors  in  stables,  39,  216-217. 
Flora  Temple,  190,  290. 
"  Flying  Coach,"  the,  192. 
Fomentation,  defined,  247. 
Food  for  horses,  40-41,  225-238, 

Effect  of,  on  teeth,  206. 
Foot  founders,  245-246. 
Foot-rail,  dangers  of,  303,  400. 
Forest  Denmark,  52. 
Forging,  remedy  for,  257-258. 
"Form,"  discussion  of,  313-314. 

In  tandem-driving,  424. 
Fort  Riley,  cavalry  school  at,  81-84. 
Fossil  remains  of  horses,  5,  1 69-1 71. 
Founder,  remedy  for,  249. 
Four-in-hand  driving,  353-381. 
Fox,  285. 
France,  number  of  horses  in,  163. 

Riders  in,  74-75. 

Riding-masters  of,  75. 

Roads  in,  193. 

Wagon  devices  in,  194. 
Franconi,  Henri,  86-87,  'OO- 
"  Frank  Fairleigh,"  Smedley's,  refer- 
ences to,  418-419,  423. 
2F 


Freshness,  avoidance  of.     See  Exer- 
cise. 
Fritz,  William,  87. 
Full-gallop,  the,  128. 

Gaits,  the  three  essential,  in  saddle- 
horses,  17. 
Gallop,  the,  124-125. 

Full  (racing  pace),  128. 

Halt  in,  133-134. 

School  (pace),  128. 

Variations  of  form  of,  127-134. 

Wheel  in,  132-133. 
Gallop  changes,  128-132. 
Galls,  collar  and  saddle,  245. 
Garland,   James    A.,   "The    Private 

Stable  "  by,  279. 
Garrard,  Major  Castleman's,  49-50. 
Gay  Brothers,  breeders,  50-51. 
Geers,  Ed.,  284. 

Germany,   statistics    of    horses    in, 
163. 

Riders  in,  73-74. 

Wagon  tires  in,  194. 
Gipsey,  285. 
Globe,  284. 

Gloves,  driving,  301-302. 
Godolphin  Barb,  4, 
Gohanna,  12, 

"  Going  to  Cover,"  Henderson's,  404. 
Goldsmith  Maid,  189,  190,  290. 
Grass,  nutritive  value,  18,  237,  240. 
Great    Britain,    numbers    of    horses 
in,  163.     See  Britain  and 
England. 
Greece,  horses  of  ancient,  6-7. 
Greeks,  stirrups  unknown  to  ancient, 

65- 
Grinsone,  work  on  horsemanship  by, 

129,  155- 
Grooming  of  horses,  42,  43,  230. 


434 


Index 


Grooms,  office  of,  in  tandem-driving, 

421-422.     See  Stablemen. 

Ground-shyness     in     saddle-horses, 

Gueriniere,  M.,  75. 

Half-halt,  the,  107-108. 

Halt  in  gallop,  the,  133-134. 

Hambletonian,  285. 

Influence  of,  on  trotting  descend- 
ants, 286-287. 
Pedigree  of,  285. 

Hames,  the,  264. 

Hamlin,  C.  J.,  288. 

Hand-gallop    ("canter"),   the,   91, 
106,  127. 

Hands,  position  of,  in  driving,  309- 
3"»423- 

"Hands"  in  driving,  defined,  321- 

323- 
"  Hansom's  Patent  Safety  Cab,"  192. 
Harness,  259-283. 

Care  of,  218,  222,  276-277,  280. 

Four-in-hand,  282. 

Insignia  on,  280-282, 

Runabout,  282. 

Saddle-horses  should  not  be  used 
in,  150. 

Tandem,  393-394,  408-411. 
Harnessing,  four  horses,  366-367. 

One  horse,  315-316. 

Pair,  333-334- 

Tandem,  393,  395. 
Harness  room,  construction  of,  218, 

221. 
Hay,  as  food,  18,  40,  232-233,  237. 
Hay  tea,  receipt,  241. 
Head,   points   of  horse's,   196-198, 

202,  204. 
Heating  of  stables,  218,  223. 
Hedgeford  (imported),  15. 


Hennessy,  Tom,  417. 

High  jumpers,  characteristics  of,  11, 

Highland  Denmark,  50. 

Highland  Maid,  trotting  record,  290. 

Highways.     See  Roads. 

Hills,  driving  up  and  down,  308-309. 

Hobson,  General,  41, 

Hocks,  consideration  of,  202,  204. 

Holly  for  whips,  417. 

Hoofs,  advice  on,  201.     See  Feet. 

Horns,  coach,  378-379. 

Horse-racing.     See  Racing. 

Horses,  the  brain  in,  161  n. 

Care  of,  159,  164-168,  208-210. 

Defects  in,  204-205. 

Economic  value  of,  159-168. 

Evolution  of,  169-175. 

Feeding  of,  225-226,  232-238. 

First  representation  of,  65. 

Grooming,  42,  43,  230. 

Importation  of,  to  America,  162, 
180-182,  191,  285. 

Measurements  of,  200. 

Natural  history  of,  169-178. 

Points  of  perfection  in,  195-210. 

Prehistoric,  169-175. 

Proper  proportions  of,  203. 

Selection  of,  195-208. 

Shoeing,  251-258. 

Stomachs  of,  225-226. 

Value  of,  in  figures,  167. 
"  Horses,  Saddles,  and  Bridles,"  Car- 
ter's, 67. 
Horse  shows,  influence  of,  on  riding, 

73,  78. 
Howletts,  the,  310. 
Hungary,  horse  statistics  of,  163. 
Hunter,  the,  "an  accident,"  11. 
Hurdle-racing,  142-143. 
Hurdles  for   saddle-horse   jumping, 

138-140. 


Index 


435 


Iceland  ponies,  lo. 

In-and-in  breeding,  8. 

India,  horse  statistics  of,  163. 

Indians,  horsemanship  of,  80. 

"  In  hand,"  collection  of  horse,  106. 

Dehnition  of,  91-92. 
Insanity,  viciousness  is,  20-21. 
Interference,  shoes  in  cases  of,  257. 
Iodoform  as  an  antiseptic,  249. 
Ireland,  horses  in,  163. 
Irregular  teeth,  remedy  for,  243,  272. 
Italy,  riders  in,  75. 

Roads  in,  193. 

Statistics  of  horses  in,  163. 

James  I.,  Markham  Arabian  bought 

by,  184. 
Jamestown,  horses  landed  at,  181. 
Japan,  number  of  horses  in,  163. 
Jar  din  d' Acclimation,  horses  in,  169- 

170. 
Jay-Eye-See,  side  check  used  00,297. 

Trotting  record  of,  290. 
Jockey  seat,  the,  67-68. 
John  Bull,  191. 

Johnster,  Henri  Franconi's,  loo. 
Jumping,  height  suitable  for  practice 
in,  144. 

Lessons  in,  138-146. 

Raising  the  horse  in,  141-142. 
Justina,  284. 

Kane,  Delancey,  coach  run  by,  355. 
Keene,  Foxhall,  78. 
Kentucky,  Denmark's  career  in,  15- 
16,  47. 
Endurance  of  horses  of,  18. 
Riders  of,  78-79. 
Saddle-horses  from,  15, 
Saddle-horse  stock  farms  of,  47- 
53. 


Kicking,  crupper  a  partial  preventive 
of,  274,  305-306. 
On  the  jump,  143-144. 
Punishment    of,  in  driving  four, 
362. 
Kicking-strap,  274-275,  293,  410. 
Kimball  Jackson  check,  the,  297. 
Kindness,     misplaced,     in    treating 

horses,  149. 
Knee,  of  ideal  horse,  200. 
Broken, 245. 

La  Broue,  M.,  riding  authority,  75. 
Lady  Suffolk,  trotting  record,  290. 
Lake,  Miss  Emma,  100. 
Lameness,  cases  of,  246—247. 

From  bad  shoeing,  255. 
Laminitis,  245-246. 
La  Plata,  horses  found  by  Cabot  in, 

180. 
Laxatives  for  horses,  234,  240,  247. 
Leather,  for  harness,  262-263. 

Chains  vs.,  in  pole-pieces,  335- 

336,  358. 
Legs  of  ideal  horse,  200-201. 
"Leg  up,"  a,  61. 

Lexington,  Colonel  "Woodford's,  52. 
Lexington,  Ky.,   as  a    saddle-horse 

centre,  47-53. 
Lighting  of  stables,  39,  21 1,  215-216. 
Linseed,  use  of,  in  feeding,  234,  237. 
Linseed  oil,  use  of,  241,  247. 
Linseed  tea,  241. 
Lips  of  perfect  horse,  197. 
Living-rooms     of     coachman     and 

stablemen,  216,  223-224. 
Llama,  use  of,  in  early  Peru,  179. 
"London  Season,  The,"  Barrand's, 

413- 
Longe,  use  of  the,  23-27,  loi. 
Lope,  the,  128. 


436 


Index 


Lou  Dillon,  286,  287,  289, 
Check  not  used  on,  297. 
Pedigree  of,  291. 
Trotting  record  of,  290. 

McCandless,  G.  F.,  tandem  of,  409- 
410. 

Maize,  nutritive  value  of,  237. 

Mambrino,  285. 

Mambrino  Gift,  190. 

Mambrino  King,  288. 

Mansfield,  Burton,  tandem  authority, 
425. 

"  Manual    of  Coaching,"    Rogers's, 
279,  343-344- 

Mares,  feeding  of  (brood),  17-18. 
Selection  of,  for  breeding,  lo-ll, 
190. 

Markham  Arabian,  the,  7,  184. 

Martingale,  the,  272. 

In  tandem-driving,  396. 

Massachusetts,  first  horses  in,  181. 

Matilda,  General  Castleman's,  49. 

Maud  S.,  290. 

Messenger  (imported),  190-191. 
Pedigree  of,  285. 

"  Modern    Horsemanship,"    Ander- 
son's, 30,  129. 

Molasses,  black,  for  horses,  233,  234. 
Use  of,  as  food,  236-237. 

Montgomery  Chief,  52,  53. 

Morgan,  General  John,  41. 

Morgan  strain,  the,  13-14. 

Motto,  50. 

Mounting,  method  of,  60-61. 

Mustang,  the,  9,  10,  80. 

Mytton,  Jack,  reminiscences  of,  413. 

Nail  in  foot,  treatment,  245. 
Nail,  Colonel,  16. 
Nancy  Hanks,  290. 


Neck,    guiding    saddle-horse    with 
reins  against,  122-124. 
Set  of  head  on  the,  197-198. 
Newcastle,  Duke  of,  work  on  horse- 
manship by,  155,  268. 
Newsome,  James,  72. 
New  York,  horses  imported  to,  l8l. 
New  York  State,  highways  in,  193. 

Wagon  tires  in,  194. 
New  York  Tandem  Club,  carts  used 

by,  404. 
Nose-band,  the,  267. 

Leading  horses  by,  316,  334. 

Oatmeal  and  ale,  in  sickness,  241. 
Oats  as  food,  40,  233,  237,  240. 
"Old    Coachman's    Chatter,    An," 

Corbett's,  322. 
Ontario,  riding-horses  from,  15. 
Origins  of  the  horse,  4-7,  1 69-1 70, 

179-180. 
Orloff,  production  of  the,  9. 
Overdraw  checks.     See  Check-reins. 
Overreaching,  remedy  for,  257-258. 
Ox,  brain  of,  161  n. 
Oxen,  use  of,  as  cavalry,  179. 

Pair,  harnessing  a,  333-334- 

Importance  of  coupling-reins  in 
driving,  340-342. 

Length  of  reins  in  driving,  337. 

Lessons  in  driving,  351-352. 

Starting,  338-339. 

Stopping,  339. 

Unharnessing,  317. 
Palo  Alto,  190-191. 
Parthenon  frieze,  horses  in,  7,  64. 
Passing  other  vehicles  in  driving  — 

Four-in-hand,  376. 

One  horse,  331. 

Tandem,  399. 


Index 


437 


Pasterns,  200-201,  202,  204. 
Peas  as  food,  233,  237. 
Pelham,  trotting  record  of,  290. 
Percheron,  production  of  the,  9. 
Pig,  brain  of,  161  n. 
Pigskin  for  whips,  276, 
Pirouette,  performance  of,  123. 
Pirouette  wheel,  the,  132-133. 
Pisgah  stud,  50-51. 
Placing  of  feet,  effect  of,  on  action, 

18-19. 
Plan  of  stable,  219-222. 
Pluvinel,  Antoine  de,  75,  155. 
Pole,  adjustment   of,  in   harnessing 

pair,  334-335- 
Pole-chains,  appropriate  use  of,  335- 

336,  358. 
Poling  up,  four,  366. 

Pair,  334-335- 
Polo  ponies,  measurements  of,  199. 
Ponies,  cayuse,  9,  80. 

Cherokee,  86. 

Iceland,  10. 

Norwegian  Fiord,  7,  lo. 

Polo,  199,  207. 

Shetland,  10,  85,  86. 

Tandem,  394. 
Pony  tandem,  394. 
Potatoes,  boiled,  for  horses,  234. 
"  Private    Stable,  The,"   Garland's, 

279. 
Profile  of  ideal  horse,  196. 
Proportions  of  well-bred  horse,  203- 

204. 
Pulling,  treatment  of,  269-271. 
Pulse  in  health  and  disease,  239. 
Purchase  of  horses,  30-38,  176-178, 
Purgatives,  234,  240,  247. 

Quarters  of  stablemen,  223-224. 
Quincy,  Josiah,  cited,  186,  187. 


Raabe,  M.,  75. 

Racing,  evolution  of,  188-191. 
Rack,  the,  15,  17. 
Railey,  Charles,  as  rider,  79. 
"  Random  "  driving,  424-425. 
Rarey  system  of  casting,  22-23,  '52- 
Rarus,  290. 
Rearing,  99-101. 
Registry  of  saddle-horses,  16-17. 
Regulus,  285. 

Reins,    adjustment    of,    in    driving 
pair,  340-344- 
Lengthening,    in    driving    pair, 

338,348-351- 
Method  of  holding,  for  — 
Four-in-hand,  370-377. 
One  horse,  321-326. 
Pair,  337-338,  348-352. 
Tandem,  397-399,  420,  423. 
Reins,  question  of  buckling,  260-261. 
Shortening,  in  driving,  329-331, 

338,  348-351. 
Size  of,  266. 
Tail  over  the,  303-304. 
Ribs  of  ideal  horse,  199. 
Rice,  nutritive  value  of,  237. 
Riding  astride  for  women,  87. 
Riding-horses.     See  Saddle-horses. 
Roads,  consideration  of,  192-194. 
Rogers,  Fairman,  "  Manual  of  Coach- 
ing" by,  279. 
Quoted  on  adjustment  of  reins  in 
driving  pair,  343-344- 
"  Rolling  up"  a  horse,  loi. 
Rome,  riding-school  in,  75. 
Runaways,  causes  of,  311-312. 
Russia,  number  of  horses  in,  163. 
Rutherford,  Captain,  U.S.A.,  82. 

Saddle,  choice  of,  54-56. 
Saddle-galls,  cause  of,  55, 


438 


Index 


Saddle-horses  — 

Breeding  of,  3-19. 

Care  of,  38-46. 

Cost  of,  37-38. 

Ideal,  described,  35-37. 

Kentucky,  47-53- 

Purchase  of,  30-38. 

Sale  of,  46. 

Size  of,  152. 

Training,  23-29,  90-I08,  1 12  flf. 
Saddletree,  introduction  of,  by  Ro- 
mans, 65. 

Selection  of,  54,  55. 
Saddling  riding-horses,  60. 
St.  Julien,  trotting  record,  290. 
Sale  of  horses,  46. 
Sally  Miller,  trotting  record,  290. 
Salt  for  horses,  40-41,  236. 
Saltram,  8,  16,  191. 
Salutin-j,  four-in-hand,  353, 364-365. 
School  of  Application,   Fort  Riley, 

81-84. 
School-gallop,  the,  128. 
Scouring,  247. 

Scratches  ("  cracked  heels"),  243. 
Sculpture,  the  horse  in,  6-7,  64-66. 
Seat,  acquirement  of,  in  riding,  64, 
68-70. 

Coachman's,  302,  326. 

Jockey,  67-68. 

Military,  67. 

Tandem,  399,  412. 
Seclusion,  production  of  types  and 

families  by,  9-10. 
Shetland  ponies,  10,  85,  86. 
Shoe  boils,  244-245. 
Shoeing  of  horses,  45-46,  251-258. 

Change  of  gait  by,  288. 
Shoes,  weight  of,  254. 
Shoulders  of  ideal  horse,  198-199, 
202. 


Short,  Captain  W.  C,  U.S.A.,  82. 

Shutters  of  stables,  215. 

Shying,  97-98. 

Sickness,  remedies  for,  239-250. 

Signals,  driver's,  to  horse,  318-319. 

Silvana,  22. 

Sir  Archy,  8. 

Sir  Harry,  191. 

Size  of  saddle-horses,  152. 

Skull  of  horse,  175-176. 

Smedley,  "  Frank  Fairleigh"  by,  418. 

Snaffle-bit,  the,  56. 

Snaffle-bridle,  for  colts,  25. 

Use  of,  by  beginners,  90. 
Sollisel,  M.,  75. 
Spain,  union  of  horses  of  America 

with  those  of,  1 80-18 1. 
Splints,  remedy  for,  244, 
Sprains,  treatment  of,  244. 
Spread  Eagle,  191. 
Spur,  use  of  the,  89,  109-I11,  149. 
Stable,  the,  38-40,  211-224. 

Drainage  of,  39,  211,  215,  217, 
220. 

Management  of,  226-232. 

Plan  of,  219-222. 

Size  of,  212. 

Temperature  in,  39,  218,  223. 

Ventilation  of,  39,  211,  212-213. 
Stable  book,  the,  228-229. 
Stablemen,  quarters  for,  223-224. 

Proportion    of,    to    number    of 
horses,  225. 

Selection  of,  213-214. 
Stage-coach  history,  191-192. 
Stall-courage,  148. 
Stallions,  selection  of,  for  breeding, 

ic^ii,39. 
Stalls,  39,  215,  216. 
Standing,  training  horses  in,  296,  298. 
Starling,  285. 


Index 


439 


Starting,  in  driving  — 

Four-in-hand,  370,  372. 

One  horse,  318-320. 

Pair,  338. 

Tandem,  421. 
Stature  desirable  in  saddle-horses,  35. 
Stillman,  Dr.,  129. 
Stimulants  in  sickness,  241,  247. 
Stirling  Chief,  52. 
Stirrups,  55. 

Dismounting  with,  61. 

Dismounting  without,  63. 

Mounting  with,  60. 

Origins  of,  65. 

Seat  with,  66-67. 
Stock  farms,  Kentucky  saddle-horse, 

47-53- 
Stockwell,  12. 
Stomach  of  horse,  225-226. 

Treatment  for  acidity  of,  248. 
Stopping  in  driving  — 

Four-in-hand,  379-380. 

One  horse,  320-321,  327-328. 

Pair,  339-340. 
Strain  of  tendons,  246. 
Stumbling  in  saddle-horses,  18,  154. 
Sultana,  8. 

Sunfishers,  rearing  horses  called,  lOO. 
Sunol,  trotting  record,  290. 
Sunstroke,  treatment  of,  248. 
Suppling,  25-26,  1 1 2- 1 20, 

Defined,  104. 

Rearing  cured  by,  100,  152. 
Sureness  of  foot,  18. 
Syria  early  home  of  horse,  6. 

Tables  giving  — 

Doses   for   horses    according   to 

age,  250. 
Numbers  of  horses  in  principal 

countries  of  world,  163. 


Tables  \^con(inued'\  — 

Nutritive  value  of  certain  articles 
of  diet,  237. 

Trotting  records  since  1806,  290. 

Weights  and  measures,  238,  250. 
Taffolet  Barb,  285. 
Tail,  defects  regarding,  204. 

Docking  of,  304-305. 

Over  reins,  303-304. 

Well-bred  horse's,  202. 
Tailer,  T.  Suffern,  tandem  authority, 
392. 

Chapter  by,  401-425. 
Tandem,  carts  employed  when  driv- 
ing, 399-400,  404-408. 

Derivation  of  name,  392. 

Handling  reins  in,  398-399,  423. 

Harness,  393-394,  408-41 1. 

Horses,  394,  402-404. 

Lessons,  423-424. 

Origin  of  the,  395. 

Pony,  394. 

Seat,  400,  412-414. 

Whip,  396,  414-417- 
Tattersall,  Edmund,  30. 
Taubenheim,  Count,  72. 
Teeth,  horses',  173-175. 

Age  for  appearance  of  various, 
205-206. 

Effect  of  food  on,  206. 

Irregular,  272. 

Remedy  for,  243. 
Temperature,  horse's,  in  health  and 
disease,  240. 

Of  stables,  39,  218,  223. 
Tendons,  strain  of,  246. 
The  Abbot,  trotting  record,  290. 
Thong  of  whip,  management  of,  in 
driving  — 

Four-in-hand,  360-364. 

Tandem,  414-417. 


440 


Index 


Thoroughbred,  first,  in  America,  191. 
Thoroughbreds,    breeding    of,    7-8, 
9-10. 
As  riding-horses,  3-4. 
Production  of,  unexplained,  7. 
Throat-latch,  the,  267. 
Tires,  wide  vs.  narrow,  194. 
Toes  of  prehistoric  horse,  170-173. 
Tonics  for  horses,  247-248. 
Top-coatsfordriving(driving  capes), 

419-420. 
Trace,  the,  265-266. 
Traces,   fastening    outside,    first,  in 
putting  to  pair,  334. 
Lapping  of,  367. 
Methods  of  fastening,  in  putting 

to  four,  367. 
Tandem,  393,  395,  410-41 1. 
Training,  colts,  20-29,  291-299. 
Effect  of,  on  horses,  103-106. 
Road-horse,  291-296. 
Saddle-horse,  in  — 
Backing,  1 35-137- 
Gallop   and   gallop  changes, 

127-134. 
Hind-quarter        movements, 

117-119. 
Jumping,  138-146. 
Movements    on     two    paths, 

125-126,  132. 
Obeying  spur,  109-111. 
Tandem  leader,  396-397. 
To  stand,  296,  298. 
Trakhene  horses,  9,  14. 
"  Trandom  "  driving,  424-425. 
Tricks,  riding-horses',  97-98. 
Troopers.     See  Cavalry. 
Trot,  studies  in  riding  at  the,  95-97, 

107. 
Trotting,  evolution  of,  188-191. 
Records  of  American,  290. 


Trotting-horse,  the  American,  284- 

291. 
Trouble,  trotting  record  of,  290. 
"  Tucked  up,"  meaning  of,  200. 
Tug,  the,  265. 
Tug  girth,  the,  316. 
Turf,  285. 

Turk,  Duke  of  Newcastle's,  285. 
Turning  corners,  313,  328-329,  331, 

375.  397. 
Tusk,  tooth  called  the,  205-206. 
Two  paths,  movements  on,  125-126, 

132. 

Underhill,  Francis  T.,  "  Driving  for 

Pleasure,"  by,  279,  352. 
Unharnessing,  process  of,  316-317. 
United  States,  number  of  horses  in, 
163. 
Roads  in,  183,  192-193,  194. 
See  America. 

Vaca,  Cabeza   de,  horses  imported 

by,  181. 
Vaulting  into  saddle,  61-62. 
Venison,  I2. 
Ventilation  of  stables,  39,  211,  212- 

213. 
Vera  Cruz,  arrival  of  Cortes'  horses 

at,  180. 
Vices,  cure  of,  21-23,  'S'-^S^. 
Viciousness,  called  insanity,  20-21. 
Village  Farm,  Hamlins',  288. 
Vinegar-and-water  lotion,  247. 
Virginia,  horses  in  early,  181,  191. 

Wagons,  tires  and  axles  of,  193-194. 
Walk,  studies  in  riding  at  the,  91-95. 
Warming  of  collarS;  333. 
Water,  advice  for  riding  at,  143. 
Amount  of,  for  horses,  235. 


Index 


441 


Watering  of  horses  in  stables,  41, 

222,  235. 
Time  of,  235-236. 
Waxy,  12. 
Weights   and    measures,   tables   of, 

238,  250. 
Wheel  in  gallop,  production  of,  132- 

133- 
Whiffletrees  used  in  tandem,  411. 
Whip,  four-in-hand,  359-364. 
Holding  the,  338. 
Mountings  of,  416-417. 
Place   for,   before   starting    four 

horses,  368. 
Position  of,  when  applying  brake, 

307- 
Riding,  56. 

Saluting  with,  364-365. 
Tandem,  396,  414-417. 
Use  of,  in  driving,  149,  275-276, 
313.318,331-332. 
Whip  stocks,  417. 
Whip  thongs,  management  of,  360- 

364,  414-417- 
Whitechapel  carts,  404-405. 
White  Turk,  Place's,  285. 
Williams,  Lieutenant  George,  83. 
Windows  of  stables,  39,  213,  215. 


Windpipe  of  ideal  horse,  196. 
Winkers,  the,  266-267,  272,  297. 
Winthrop,    Governor,    allusions    to 

horses  by,  181,  182. 
Women,  riding  astride  by,  87. 

When  taking  obstacles,  145. 
Woodford,  Colonel  John  T.,  breed- 
ing farm  of,  5 1 -5  2. 
Works  mentioned,  on  — 

Carriages,  279. 

Coaching,  279,  344. 

Driving,  279,  322,  343-344.  352- 

Harness  (bits),  268. 

Physiology  of  horse,  171. 

Riding,  67,  127,  129,  155. 

Stables,  279. 

Tandem-driving,    394,   418-419, 
422-423. 
Worms,  treatment  for,  242-243. 
Wounds,  treatment  of,  243-244. 

Xenophon,  "  Art  of  Horsemanship  " 
by,  64,  155. 
Quoted,  203,  267-268. 

Yankee,  trotting  record  of,  290. 
Yew,  use  of,  in  whips,  417. 
"Youatt  on  the  Horse,"  171. 


WeDSter  FamHy  Library  of  Veterinary  Wle^ 

^SSs^hooi  of  Veterinary  MedKsne  A 

Tufts  Univ;ersity 

200  Westboro  Road 

MOftt)  GrafUxv  MA  01S36 


:^  <!i 


0^ 


rjSm^^ 


m 


¥*:^. 


'^4 


